Caring For Souls in A Neoliberal Age - Bruce Rogers-Vaughn

New Approaches to Religion and Power
CARING FOR SOULS

IN A NEOLIBERAL AGE
Bruce Rogers-Vaughn
Series Editor
Joerg Rieger
Vanderbilt University Divinity School
Heidelberg
Baden-Württemberg
Germany
Aims of the Series
While the relationship of religion and power is a perennial topic, it only
continues to grow in importance and scope in our increasingly globalized
and diverse world. Religion, on a global scale, has openly joined power
struggles, often in support of the powers that be. But at the same time,
religion has made major contributions to resistance movements. In this
context, current methods in the study of religion and theology have cre-
ated a deeper awareness of the issue of power: Critical theory, cultural
studies, postcolonial theory, subaltern studies, feminist theory, critical
race theory, and working class studies are contributing to a new quality
of study in the field. This series is a place for both studies of particular
problems in the relation of religion and power as well as for more general
interpretations of this relation. It undergirds the growing recognition that
religion can no longer be studied without the study of power.
More information about this series at

http://www.springer.com/series/14754
Bruce Rogers-Vaughn
Caring for Souls

in a Neoliberal Age
Bruce Rogers-Vaughn
Vanderbilt University
Nashville, Tennessee, USA

ISBN 978-1-137-55338-6 ISBN 978-1-137-55339-3 (eBook)
DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3
Library of Congress Control Number: 2016956960
© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s) 2016

This work is subject to copyright. All rights are solely and exclusively licensed by the
Publisher, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of
translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on
microfilms or in any other physical way, and transmission or information storage and retrieval,
electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar methodology now
known or hereafter developed.
The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this
publication does not imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are
exempt from the relevant protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use.
The publisher, the authors and the editors are safe to assume that the advice and information
in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of publication. Neither the pub-
lisher nor the authors or the editors give a warranty, express or implied, with respect to the
material contained herein or for any errors or omissions that may have been made.
Cover image © cryingjune / Getty Images
Printed on acid-free paper
This Palgrave Macmillan imprint is published by Springer Nature

The registered company is Nature America Inc. New York
The registered company address is: 1 New York Plaza, New York, NY 10004, U.S.A.
To my wife, Annette, with gratitude and love
And in loving memory for my son
Taylor Vaughn
1986–1995
And my mother
Doris Louise Vaughn
1933–2014
And forgive us our debts,
as we also have forgiven our debtors.
(Matthew 6:12)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
As most authors are aware, books do not appear without a great deal of
inspiration from and collaboration with others. I am particularly grateful
to three professional associations of psychotherapists for opportunities to
share my developing ideas concerning the social and political origins of
the sufferings to which we collectively bear witness. The Southeast Region
of the American Association of Pastoral Counselors and the Tennessee
Association of Pastoral Therapists both graciously allowed me to speak to
this issue during their annual conferences. I was also invited to offer a day-
long workshop on this subject during the spring of 2015, hosted by the
Nashville Psychotherapy Institute. The encouragement and lively dialogue
I enjoyed during these meetings have been critical in the effort to keep my
theorizing grounded in the distresses experienced by actual human beings
and in the challenges faced by those who must listen and respond to them.
Along similar lines, I wish to thank my clinical associates at the Pastoral
Center for Healing in Nashville, Tennessee—Tom Knowles-Bagwell, Rod
Kochtitzky, Annette Rogers-Vaughn, Gay Welch, and Elizabeth Zagatta-
Allison. It has been a pleasure to know them as both friends and col-
leagues, and their support and ongoing companionship have contributed
immeasurably to this project.
I have lived and worked not only in clinical settings, but in academic
ones as well. Here, I must especially recognize my colleagues in the
Society for Pastoral Theology (SPT). During June of 2014, I was honored
to deliver a “work in progress” address to the full body of the society.
Without the energetic feedback that followed, this book might not ever
have matured to see the light of day. Several members of SPT have been
ix
x ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
regular conversation partners or have played pivotal roles in stimulating

this work. These include Nancy J. Ramsay, Barbara J. McClure, Ryan
LaMothe, Philip Browning Helsel, and Denise Dombkowski Hopkins. In
parallel to my everyday associates in clinical work, I enjoy the company
of esteemed scholars at Vanderbilt Divinity School, where I have been
teaching for many years. My peers in the area of Religion, Psychology
and Culture—Bonnie Miller-McLemore, Evon Flesberg, Jaco Hamman,
Phillis Isabella Sheppard, and Volney P. Gay—have been a dependable
source of encouragement and wise counsel. I am immensely indebted also
to my students, especially those who enrolled in the course “Pastoral Care
and Global Capitalism.” These individuals were patient with me as I rolled
out partially formed ideas, and were keen to point out elements that were
either missing or not yet quite digestible. One of these students, Aaron
Palmer, helpfully tracked down several much-needed references early in the
project. Another former student, Morgan Watts, provided indispensable
assistance proofing the manuscript and preparing it for final submission.
My deep appreciation goes out to Joerg Rieger, the series editor for
the collection in which this volume appears, for inviting me to submit a
proposal and for his valuable advice and stimulating conversations along
the way. My thanks also to all the dedicated staff members at Palgrave
Macmillan for their help in bringing this task to completion, especially to
my editor, Phil Getz, and his assistant, Alexis Nelson, whose correspon-
dences were always timely and beneficial.
Many of the souls whose presence accompanied me through every page
of this book literally cannot be named. They are the many individuals
who sought me out for a psychotherapy relationship over the past three
decades. Working with them has enriched my life beyond measure and,
I believe, has made me wiser than I could have otherwise become. I can
only hope I have represented their struggles accurately and fairly.
Finally, I thank my family—Annette Rogers-Vaughn, Mackenzie
Vaughn, and the twins, Blake and Huntley Rogers-Vaughn. Unfortunately,
writing this book has often demanded too much sacrifice from them all.
The currently eight-year-old twins’ recurring inquiry—“Are you done
with the book yet?”—has been one of the primary motivations to actually
finish. Thanks largely to passing the days with these four precious souls, I
know at least as much about joy as I do suffering.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction: Preface to a Post-Capitalist Pastoral

Theology 1
2 Neoliberalism, Inequality, and the Erosion of Social

Well-being 35
3 Going Viral: The Neoliberal Infiltration of the Living

Human Web 67
4 Neoliberalism as a Paradigm for Human Affliction:

Third-Order Suffering as the New Normal 109
5 Muting and Mutating Suffering: Sexism, Racism,

and Class Struggle 131
6 Beyond Self-Management: Re-Membering Soul 167
7 Concluding Theological Postscripts 209
Index 243
xi
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. 1.1 Child poverty rate, Ft. Payne, Alabama (USA): 1989–2013.
Comparison by census tract. ACS 2009–2013 (five-year
estimates) data as compiled by Social Explorer, accessed
through Vanderbilt University Library 14
Fig. 1.2 Annual number of publications on neoliberalism,
1980–2014: Comparison between theological
studies and the social sciences. 24
Fig. 2.1 Increasing income inequality in the USA, 1917–2014.
Income is defined as market income (and excludes
government transfers). In 2014, top decile includes
all families with annual income above $121,400 57
Fig. 2.2 Income inequality and social well-being: The world’s
23 wealthiest countries 59
Fig. 3.1 Percentage preferring no religion by year, United States:
1972–2012. 74
xiii
CHAPTER 1
Introduction: Preface to a Post-Capitalist

Pastoral Theology
How could it happen that a Baptist minister who grew up in the United
States, in the Deep South no less, in a politically and religiously conser-
vative milieu, ever wanted to author a book criticizing capitalism? I am
aware of three sets of motives. First, from the mid-1980s to this day, I
have worked as a pastoral counselor and psychotherapist. Aside from some
adjunct teaching, this was my sole occupation from 1992 until 2010.
Throughout my professional career, I have conducted approximately
30,000 counseling sessions. Sustaining such intimate acquaintance with
people over time has permitted me to observe bewildering changes that
have been occurring between and within human beings in my part of the
world during these 30 years.
The average individual I encounter in the clinical situation today is not
the same as the person who sat with me 30 years ago. Sometimes the
changes are subtle. Often they are obvious. But they are pervasive and
apparently widespread. There has been a marked increase in self-blame
among those seeking my care, as well as an amorphous but potent dread
that they are somehow teetering on the edge of a precipice. This is con-
founded by the appearance of a few individuals who seem far more self-
assured and confident, even entitled or defiant, than I have previously
witnessed. Somewhat mysteriously, these highly self-reliant souls seem
more superficial and one-dimensional than their depressive or anxious
cohorts. Meanwhile, addictive behaviors have become more prevalent and
© The Author(s) 2016 1

B. Rogers-Vaughn, Caring for Souls in a Neoliberal Age,
DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_1
2 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
have quickly expanded into areas of life not usually associated with com-
pulsivity. Relationships, even familial or romantic ones, seem to be becom-
ing more ephemeral and contrived, almost businesslike. The people I now
see tend to manifest a far more diffuse or fragmented sense of self, are
frequently more overwhelmed, experience powerful forms of anxiety and
depression too vague to be named, display less self-awareness, have often
loosened or dropped affiliations with conventional human collectives, and
are increasingly haunted by shame rooted in a nebulous sense of personal
failure. I find myself more disquieted and even confused than I used to be
while sitting with people, even less “myself.” What has happened?
Puzzled by this, I began to investigate. I soon became aware that a
number of clinicians, particularly psychoanalysts, had been making obser-
vations similar to mine. In a prescient set of reflections, Bollas (1987)
had argued that a new sort of person was emerging that he called “nor-
motic personality” (pp. 135–156). Such an individual suffers a numbing
or erasure of subjectivity, experiencing herself as a commodity in a world
of commodities. Samuels (2003/2006) noted that something happened
during the period from 1980 to 1990 that began to alter his patients’
presentations. Consulting with his analytic colleagues, he concluded: “We
tended to put it down to the fact that, since the mid-1980s, the pace of
political change in the world appeared to have quickened” (pp. 12–13).
The analysts Layton, Hollander, and Gutwill (2006) pinned such changes
to powerful shifts within capitalism as it was practiced in the United States,
arguing that such alterations had produced a “traumatogenic environ-
ment” (pp. 1–5). Noticing that other clinicians’ observations, like my
own, were chiefly anecdotal, I looked around for additional sorts of evi-
dence. Sure enough, careful scientific surveys and empirical studies were
showing that depression, anxiety, and addiction were increasing, not only
in the United States but globally. Simultaneously, I noticed that a number
of sociologists and geographers were recognizing developments pointing
to the erosion of communities and human collectives.
I returned to my therapy patients.1 I listened ever more closely to their
self-blame. Were there clues? My suffering subjects complained persistently
about their situations or moods, but almost all (except the super-confident
outliers) concluded they themselves were somehow the problem. If they
had not made that fateful decision, or if they were more intelligent, or
more motivated, or more beautiful, or more talented, and so on, then
maybe they would not be in this mess. Many perceived their problems
as rooted in their identities. Maybe if they were not a woman, or a man,
INTRODUCTION: PREFACE TO A POST-CAPITALIST PASTORAL THEOLOGY 3
or gay, or black, or white, or adopted, or an immigrant, or Catholic, and

so on, things would be better for them. Many attributed their sufferings
to childhood traumas, or parental or family dysfunctions. But even those
who saw the roots of their psychic pain in their identities or in trauma
still believed only they could do anything about their problems. If they had
suffered so long and still were not making headway, they mused, perhaps
they were doing something wrong; or, even worse, something was wrong
with them. So in the end, they felt just as responsible as my other, osten-
sibly more fortunate clients. I was starting to understand why people were
drinking more, taking more drugs, “veg’ing out” playing video games,
retreating into their smartphones, social media, iPads, or otherwise losing
themselves in some other manic activity or distraction. I was beginning to
entertain it myself.
Then I began to notice how much blaming was occurring in our soci-
ety, particularly toward those who were not succeeding in “the land of
opportunity.” On cable and online news outlets, pundits could be heard
villainizing the less fortunate. Apparently if people were poor, or were
struggling in some way, it was their own damned fault. Even those in
the shrinking middle class were often portrayed as less than sufficiently
successful, as deficient in some fundamental way. Television programs
had become heavily populated by beautiful and well-off people, with the
apparent suggestion that these are the ones we should emulate. The ever-
popular “reality shows” had turned cut-throat competition into entertain-
ment, thus normalizing the belief that it is natural for the world to contain
a very few “winners” surrounded by multitudes of “losers.”
The same themes were showing up in national and local politics. Many
politicians, backed up by a number of theorists within the academy, inter-
preted growing inequality as either a temporary evil or the price of prog-
ress in a necessarily highly competitive market. It is inevitable, according
to such experts, that some unfortunate ones are simply unable to keep
up. Dominant economic ideologies increasingly paint the world in stark
“survival of the fittest” terms. I began to wonder, along with the analysts I
had been reading, if there might be a relationship between what I was see-
ing in the media, politics, and the economy, and what I was witnessing in
the therapeutic space. I also started to suspect that “private” suffering was
governed primarily by dynamics distal to the individual—in the broader
social, economic, and political environment. I found this idea overwhelm-
ing, perhaps due to my own relatively privileged perspective as a profes-
sional white male, and decided to set it aside for later investigation.
4 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
However, I was unsuccessful. I could not leave it alone. Through the

rearview mirror, I can see that my sensitivity to these matters has become
more acute due to my having grown up in a working-class family and
community. This has to qualify as another origin of my passion to write
this book. My father was, at various times, a member of the United
Automobile Workers and the International Union of Electricians. His
father and grandfather were both life-long coal miners in Appalachia, and
were active members of the United Mine Workers. My mother’s family
consisted chiefly of rural sustenance farmers, truck drivers, and factory
hands. To this day, I support the right of workers to collective bargaining
and union membership. If my father, by the time I was ten years of age,
had not eventually earned union wages, I would never have been able to
attend college.
The life circumstances of the working class are not just memories for
me. Neither of my parents, nor my sister, and none of my cousins, uncles,
aunts, grandparents, or great grandparents ever attended college. This was
rarely even an option. Most have done jobs requiring hard physical labor,
which has often meant that their bodies have worn out before they could
reach retirement. Some have become prematurely disabled or died from
work-related injuries. For over 30 years, my father worked on an assem-
bly line, bending sheet metal at a General Electric factory. Today he is
hearing impaired from sitting beside a hydraulic press for that period of
time. Many in my extended family still struggle to sustain themselves. One
cousin, now in his early 60s, has continued to work two jobs to make ends
meet. He recently learned that his new boss, a college-educated individual
less than half his age, moved him to another shift that will require him to
quit one of his jobs. He will likely no longer earn a living wage. Another
cousin, the one with whom I was most intimate during my childhood and
youth, died a few years ago from a pulmonary embolus. His death was
unnecessary. He had put off treatment for an infection in his leg, which
was secondary to a serious work injury, because he had inadequate insur-
ance and financial resources. Suffice it to say I have little patience for those
who claim that the “underemployed” and the poor are happy to live off
the government, or are lazy or unintelligent. My relatives, on the average,
work as many or more hours than I do, and under conditions over which
they have far less control. As such incidents suggest, recent changes within
capitalism have not been kind to my relatives and friends back in my small
hometown, or to most people in the remainder of the United States or the
world for that matter. These developments will be illustrated, documented
and untangled in this book.
So two motives for writing this book are already apparent. I am pushed
by my allegiance to working-class people who brought me into this world,
and I am pulled by curiosity as to what might explain the changes I have
seen, over the last three decades, in the people coming to me for care. The
third source concerns the character of my therapeutic practice as the care
of souls. The focus of my clinical work has been two-fold: to alleviate pain
and distress whenever possible, and, whether or not this is possible, to
assist people in hearing their suffering. What is it calling them to do and/
or to understand? Often in the course of pastoral conversations, I have
noted that physical pain, according to physicians and biological scientists,
has a function. It calls for us to attend to it, and to take action to address
a threat or problem. Psychological, relational, and spiritual suffering, as I
have frequently indicated to those receiving my consideration, has a simi-
lar function. At minimum these particular sufferings insist on finding a
voice. And often they call upon their subjects to initiate a course of action.
This action may be limited to their own material or psychological space,
but most often also extends to their relational, communal, or even social
or political spaces.
This method of attention has yielded practical wisdom, both for myself
and for those I have served. I (and we) have learned that, when unheeded,
pain produces and structures alienation, injustice, ignorance, division, and
isolation into our individual and collective lives. As I have regularly said
to those who seek my attention, much of our suffering comes from our
efforts to avoid or deny suffering. I (we) have also learned that, when
articulated and heard, pain may yield and structure connection, continu-
ity, integrity, justice, and direction into our individual and collective lives.
Taken together, this type of attention and the wisdom it engenders
constitute healing, the care of soul. In this context, soul refers neither to
a supernatural or natural essence, nor to some dimension of self separate
from the material. I understand soul, rather, as an aspect of the embodied
self, namely the activity of self-transcendence, where this refers not to an
act of individual rationality, but to that activity which holds individuals in
relation with self, others, creation, and the Eternal (whether or not this
ultimate value is recognized as God). While I will discuss soul in detail
later in this book, I must note here that soul, by its very nature, cannot
be confined within the individual. It is, rather, a fabric that embeds every
one of us within all that is. It is our existence within the “living human
web” (Miller-McLemore, 1996), and within creation. That said, souls do
not simply become ill or fail to thrive from within. They wither or become
disoriented when the fabric becomes torn or stained.
6 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
However, there is a growing discord between the care of souls and the
cultural and political environment that has emerged since the early 1980s.
This is now so acute that I believe the care of souls to be threatened. The
field of counseling and psychotherapy, as well as other practices of care,
has been colluding with these changes, and has itself been transformed by
the now dominant paradigm. The emphasis on “measurable outcomes”
and “empirically supported treatments” promoted by the “best practices”
culture of mental health disciplines—all indicators of a neoliberalized atti-
tude—insists on instilling adaptation to society (rather than resistance),
functioning in accord with the values of production and consumption
(rather than communion and wholeness in relation to others and the earth),
on symptom relief (rather than meaning-making), and accepting personal
responsibility (rather than interdependent reliance within the web of human
relationships). Meanwhile, the now dominant ideology of the psycho-
logical disciplines, at least in the United States, identifies the source of
personal distress as originating solely within the individual (rather than
primarily the social and political environment), and thus exacerbates the
self-blame that underlies much contemporary distress. Consequently, I
see the currently prevailing practices of psychotherapy as sophisticated
exercises in blaming the victim. Unfortunately, as we shall see, this gen-
eral approach to care is no longer limited to professional counseling and
related forms of care, but has infected the way we now understand care in
all its manifestations.
The concerns and anxieties rooted in these three areas feed my appetite
for this book. I will be contending that all these changes are driven by
the transformation and global expansion of capitalism that has advanced
steadily since the early 1980s. There is now growing evidence, produced
across an array of disciplines, that this development—now widely known
under the umbrella term “neoliberalism”—has been progressively and
systematically undermining social, interpersonal, and psychological well-
being. In accord with Antonio Gramsci’s (1929–1932/1992–2007)
notion of hegemony, I will contend that neoliberalism has become so encom-
passing and powerful that it is now the most significant factor in shaping
how, why, and to what degree human beings suffer.
At the same time, no hegemony achieves complete and absolute con-
trol. If this were the case, there would be no hope for a form of care that
could address the suffering it produces. My clinical experience leads me to
have confidence that human longing is difficult to entirely suppress, and
has a way of seeping up through the cracks of any system of domination.
The care of what has been called “soul”—that dimension of self that is sus-
tained in communion with self, others, creation, and the Eternal—attends
solicitously to this longing. Part of the structure of any hegemony is the
character and location of its cracks, such that it also governs, even in its
failures, practices of care. Any care that responds to the sufferings it gener-
ates, in other words, will necessarily seek out and respond to a hegemony’s
distinguishing fractures.
A corollary of the claim that neoliberalism is now globally hegemonic is
that pastoral care, as well as other forms of the care of souls, must undergo
revision in order to have some hope adequate for both healing and pro-
test. In this book, I will argue that the theories corresponding to this care,
including pastoral theology, are generally constrained within postmodern
cognitive models, as well as dwelling largely within the fabric of neoliberal
versions of identity politics. Any substantial innovation in the fields of
pastoral theology and the care of souls today, therefore, will require us to
reaffirm our commitment to a common ground that unifies us as diverse
people, and to the public good. It will also demand that we extend our
analyses and critiques of oppression due to difference (identity) to include
the problems of domination intrinsic to capitalism. Indeed, it will mean
that subjugations rooted in difference will now be understood, and appre-
ciated more profoundly, in light of capitalism’s current global hegemony.
The time has arrived, then, to work toward a post-capitalist pastoral theology,
by which I mean a pastoral theology that does not assume the normativity of
capitalism.
In the remainder of this chapter, I will lay a foundation for the work of
this book. In pastoral theology and other theories of care, it is customary
to begin with a case or clinical vignette in order to ground succeeding
reflections in human experience. I will follow this practice. However, I
will be attempting to show throughout this book that no clear line exists
between what we call public or social space, and what we usually refer to
as personal or psychological space. In fact, I will argue that social and cul-
tural dynamics, including the economic and political, are the most power-
ful forces shaping both interpersonal and psychological experience. The
“case” I offer in the next section, therefore, is a summary of the changes
occurring since 1980 within localities in the United States. Bits and pieces
of individual and interpersonal experience, as we will see, arise organically
within the discussion of this context. Following this, I provide a brief pre-
liminary description of neoliberal capitalism as the overarching paradigm
guiding these changes and experiences. I then inquire whether pastoral
8 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
theology, as the theory that frames pastoral care, has been in collusion
with the neoliberalization of society, and whether a post-capitalist pastoral
theology is possible. Finally, I will offer an overview of the book in order
to provide the reader with an orientation to the larger argument.
LIVING IN THE UNITED STATES AFTER THE SILENT

REVOLUTION, 1980–2015
In his most recent book Wages of Rebellion (2015), Chris Hedges reports
an interview he held with Avner Offer, an economic historian at Oxford
University. Offer contends that “a silent revolution” in economics
occurred during the 1970s, centered in the United States and the United
Kingdom (pp. 76–80). This instigated political and cultural revolutions
in both countries, also relatively quiet compared with typical revolutions,
beginning with the elections of Margaret Thatcher and Ronald Reagan
in 1979 and 1980. We continue to live in the deep shadows of this revo-
lution, and today reside in a renovated economic, political, and cultural
climate.
In the United States the transformations since 1980 have been chroni-
cled by a number of scholars, but perhaps none of them are better known
than the Harvard political scientist Robert Putnam. In Our Kids: The
American Dream in Crisis (2015), Putnam documents the growing eco-
nomic inequality in the United States and the effects on class, communi-
ties, families, and education. Putnam begins the book reviewing changes
in Port Clinton, Ohio—population 6500—his hometown. When he grad-
uated from high school in 1959, he observes: “Family or not, the towns-
people thought of all the graduates as ‘our kids’” (p. 3). During those days,
Putnam recalls, the residents of Port Clinton exhibited a neighborhood
mentality. People freely associated across class lines as they attended one
another’s weddings and birthday parties, worshipped in local churches, or
collaborated in civic organizations. Children from poorer working-class
families hung out with children of wealthy families. Upward mobility was
quite apparent, as the community encouraged and supported adolescents
from working-class families in their efforts to seek higher education. For
instance, one of his classmates, Don, was quite poor. Neither of his parents
completed high school, and his father worked two factory jobs to make
ends meet. They owned neither a car nor television. Interviewed later as
an adult, Don downplayed the class distinctions in Port Clinton: “I lived
on the east side of town…and money was on the west side of town. But
you met everyone as an equal through sports” (p. 4). Although his parents
knew nothing about college, Don reported that a minister in the town saw
potential in him and recommended him to the university, helped him get
financial aid, and guided him through the admissions process. Later, Don
completed seminary and became a minister himself.
Meanwhile, Frank, another classmate, was “from one of the few wealthy
families in Port Clinton” (p. 5). In fact, Frank’s parents were the wealthi-
est and best educated of the parents of the class of 1959. And yet Frank’s
parents were careful to minimize their wealth, putting relationships with
others in the community above their own self-interests. They encouraged
Frank to participate in activities with peers from less financially well-off
families, and not to allow his social standing to make others uncomfort-
able. His grandfather once admonished his uncle: “If we’re in Cleveland
or New York, you can order whatever you want, but when you’re with kids
in Port Clinton, you do what they can do” (p. 5). This is not reflective of
life in Port Clinton today. Putnam reflects:
As my classmates and I marched down the steps after graduation in 1959,

none of us had any inkling that change was coming …. But just beyond the
horizon an economic, social, and cultural whirlwind was gathering force
nationally that would radically transform the life chances of our children and
grandchildren. For many people, its effects would be gut-wrenching, for
Port Clinton turns out to be a poster child for the changes that have swept
across America in the last several decades. (pp. 19–20)
Putnam then surveys the devastation: a decline in manufacturing

employment from 55 % of jobs in 1965 to 25 % in 1995, a gradual decline
in real wages, a stagnant population, longer commutes in search of bet-
ter wages, a doubling of single-parent households, a quadrupling in the
divorce rate, and a steep rise in rates of juvenile delinquency. Port Clinton
has become a shadow of its former self:
Most of the downtown shops of my youth stand empty and derelict, driven
out of business partly by the Family Dollar and the Walmart on the outskirts
of town, and partly by the gradually shrinking paychecks of Port Clinton
consumers. (p. 20)
But that is only part of the story. The other is “the birth of the new upper
class” (p. 21) in Port Clinton. Its picturesque location on the shores of
Lake Erie began to attract wealthier professionals from nearby Cleveland
10 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
and Columbus, who settled in mansions and gated communities along

those shores. In the lavish Catawba Island area of town, “Luxury con-
dos ring golf courses and lagoons filled with opulent yachts” (p. 22).
Meanwhile, though the child poverty rate remained practically zero in the
Catawba section, child poverty throughout most of Port Clinton increased
from below 5 % in 1990 to over 35 % between 2008 and 2012. Putnam
observes that, driving east along East Harbor Road, the census tract to the
left has a child poverty rate of 1 %, while the tract on the right side of the
road has a rate of 51 % (p. 22).
On one side of the road lives Chelsea (pp. 24–26). Her mother, Wendy,
an educator in private practice, has a graduate degree. She comes from a
prominent family in Michigan. Her father, Dick, is a manager in “a major
national corporation,” and “travels a great deal for his business.” Chelsea’s
parents make sure one of them is at home every day when she gets home
from school. They throw her themed birthday parties every year, and
build an expensive 1950s-style diner in the basement where she can hang
out with her friends. Wendy is proud to be involved with Chelsea’s edu-
cation, and recalls an incident during the seventh grade when Chelsea
received a low grade due to an incomplete assignment. Wendy appealed
to the principal and ultimately the school board, who changed the grade
and transferred the teacher. Despite their financial comfort, Wendy does
not see their family as especially affluent: “Most parents around here are
Midwest parents who work for their money …. It’s not like Beverly Hills
or the Hamptons.” She makes sure her kids take part-time and summer
jobs, noting “You have to work if you want to get rich.” Wendy resents
proposals to provide funding for educating poorer kids: “If my kids are
going to be successful, I don’t think they should have to pay other peo-
ple who are sitting around doing nothing for their success.” As Putnam
clearly insinuates, Port Clinton has long since devolved from a community
where “our kids” live, to one divided between “my kids” and “their kids.”
On the other side of the road lives David (pp. 26–29). His father, a
high school dropout, tries first to make a living driving a truck, then must
settle for picking up temporary jobs. He ultimately ends up in prison.
After his parents separate when he is little, David’s mother moves out
and he no longer knows exactly where she lives. David is tossed back and
forth between staying with his paternal grandmother and his father, who
continues to be in and out of prison. After a string of women enter and
leave his dad’s life, he finally settles down with a woman when David is
around ten years of age. Though they never marry, David calls her his
stepmother. She is addicted to drugs and alcohol, and finally leaves his dad
for someone else. When this happens, says David, his dad “went off the
deep end” with drugs and women. The undependability of adults leaves
David with the sense that “nobody gave a shit” about him or his nine
half-siblings. He copes by isolating himself and smoking marijuana. After
circulating through several schools, he gets kicked out and ends up in
a “behavior school.” He eventually has a criminal record after breaking
into a series of stores with some other kids, then violating probation by
getting drunk and flunking a drug test. David nevertheless finishes high
school, but then gets stuck in a series of dead-end jobs due to his juvenile
record, which he cannot get expunged because he has no money to pay
the necessary legal fees. Despite everything, David tells the interviewer: “I
really want to get a higher education …. I need one. It’s hard to get a job
without one anymore.” But he cannot get there. No one in the town has
bothered to reach out and help. At the same time, he feels great respon-
sibility for his half-siblings, who also have no stable adults to look after
them. In fact, when Putnam first meets David in a public park in 2012, at
the age of 18, he is “affectionately watching over an eight-year-old half-
brother.” That same year David’s girlfriend becomes pregnant. Within
two years she leaves him, and they are sharing custody of their daughter.
David “lives paycheck to paycheck,” but enjoys being a dad. The narra-
tive closes with a Facebook update David posts in 2014, upset with his
girlfriend’s betrayal and frustrated with his hopeless job: “I always end up
at the losing end … I just want to feel whole again. I’ll never get ahead!
I’ve been trying so hard at everything in my life and still get no credit at
all. Done…I’m FUCKING DONE!” Putnam concludes that this story is
typical for present-day Port Clinton: “Compared to working-class kids in
1959, their counterparts today, like David, lead troubled, isolated, hope-
less lives” (p. 30).
On one side of the road are family dinners, fancy parties, “helicopter
parenting,” and an abundance of adult support. On the other side, people
are having trouble being families at all, and usually there is no one step-
ping up to help. Putnam, summarizing his research for his book, notes
that his hometown is only one example of a pattern that has spread across
the United States:
Port Clinton is just one small town among many, of course—but the rest of
this book will show that its trajectory during the past five decades, and the
divergent destinies of its children, are not unique. Port Clinton is not simply a
12 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Rust Belt story, for example, although it is that. Subsequent chapters will trace
similar patterns in communities all over the country, from Bend, Oregon, to
Atlanta, and from Orange County, California, to Philadelphia. (p. 30, empha-
sis in original)
So, this has happened throughout the United States? I decided to check
my own hometown—Fort Payne, Alabama—to compare with Putnam’s.
After all, Port Clinton is in “the North,” and Fort Payne in “the Deep
South.” Might they be very different? Like Port Clinton, Fort Payne was
far from perfect as I was growing up. Both towns were (and are) predomi-
nately white, and even after the schools integrated in the 1960s, Fort Payne
remained otherwise quite racially segregated. Patriarchy dominated, and
minorities were far from being treated fairly. Sexually, any individual other
than a cisgender heterosexual remained deeply in the closet. And yet, as
with Port Clinton, community life displayed fluidity across class boundar-
ies. As the child of a factory worker and “housewife,” I discovered several
of my closest friend’s parents were doctors, lawyers, or other professionals.
I will never forget the first visit to my best friend’s home, who was the son
of a well-paid engineer and a school teacher. I had never been a guest in a
house so spacious, and with features—such as a house-wide built-in inter-
com and a central vacuum system—that I had not even known existed.
Teachers and other adults in the community just assumed, because my
grades were good, that I was headed for college, despite the fact that no
one in my family had ever done such a thing. My school guidance coun-
selor encouraged me to apply to one of the better private colleges in the
state, and then helped me navigate the application process, something
about which my parents could know very little. Upon my graduation from
high school, in 1974, the community gathered with obvious pride, as they
did in Port Clinton in 1959, in “our kids.”
But the same sorts of changes that swept through Port Clinton would
not spare Fort Payne. Nestled between the hills of southern Appalachia,
the town was once hailed as the “Official Sock Capital of the World.”
At their production height, around 2001, Fort Payne’s 125 textile mills
manufactured one of every eight pairs of socks sold on the planet, and
close to half of those sold in the United States (Marshall, 2011; Martin,
2011). These mills employed about 8,000 people in a city of only 14,000
residents. One of every three jobs was related to making socks. However,
the free trade policies aggressively implemented by the United States from
the mid-1990s forward progressively eroded the success of the mills. The
cost of labor in Fort Payne, with a non-unionized workforce already cheap

by national standards, could not compete with labor costs at similar sock
mills in Central America, and especially in Datang, China (Lee, 2005). As
large international retailers, such as Walmart, pursued cheaper socks from
abroad, demand for the town’s main industry dried up almost overnight.
By 2011 less than ten hosiery plants remained, employing fewer than 600
workers (Carter, 2011). An office manager at one of the remaining mills
reported that residents were calling in every day, begging for jobs: “Every
day, you get at least 20 calls from people wanting to know if they can
come back to work.” Another individual noted that, even if one was lucky
enough to get called back, the jobs were not the same: “Used to be, you’d
do one thing and that’s what you did…Now, you do five jobs. That’s what
you do now. That’s the times” (Marshall, 2011).
Although different from Port Clinton in some respects, the conse-
quences in Fort Payne have been similar. Manufacturing jobs have declined
from 43 % in 1980 to 28 % in 2013. The divorce rate has more than
doubled during that same period. The unemployment rate has increased
from less than 4 % to over 11 %. The number of college graduates living
in the city has decreased from an already low 14.7 % to 10.7 %. The level
of childhood poverty (the percentage of those 18 years of age and below
living in households below the poverty level), within the five census tracts
comprising the heart of Fort Payne, increased from 3.97 % in 1989 to
28.63 % in the period from 2008 to 2013.2 As with Putnam’s hometown,
graphics of the child poverty rate, comparing the same census tracts from
1989 to 2013, vividly illustrates the increasing economic inequality in my
hometown (see Fig. 1.1. The darker the area appears, the higher the pov-
erty rate).
The child poverty rate in tract 9612, just north of downtown, has
hardly changed at about 8 %. Meanwhile, just across the street in tract
9613, the rate has increased from 4 % to almost 46 % during the same
period. The increasing class segregation visible here coupled with reduc-
tions in overall education levels, Putnam contends (2015, pp. 41–45),
are critical indicators of social mobility. Whereas conventional methods
measuring social mobility depend on “lagging indicators,” class segrega-
tion and education levels of parents are reliable indicators of future social
mobility. If Putnam is correct, then individuals in Port Clinton and Fort
Payne—indeed throughout the United States—are increasingly destined
to remain in the class into which they are born. In Putnam’s words,
14 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Fig. 1.1 Child poverty rate, Ft. Payne, Alabama (USA): 1989–2013.
Comparison by census tract. ACS 2009–2013 (five-year estimates) data as com-
piled by Social Explorer, accessed through Vanderbilt University Library
social mobility “seems poised to plunge in the years ahead, shattering the
American Dream” (p. 44).
Putnam concludes that what is apparent in Port Clinton (and Fort
Payne) is pervasive across the United States: “the ballooning economic
gap has been accompanied by growing de facto segregation of Americans
across class lines” (2015, p. 37). Putnam observes that three trends emerge
from this change. First, neighborhoods have become more separate: “More
and more families live either in uniformly affluent neighborhoods or in
uniformly poor neighborhoods,” resulting in “a kind of incipient class
apartheid” (pp. 38–39). Second, neighborhood segregation “has been
translated into de facto class-based school segregation” (p. 39). Finally,
people in such unequal circumstances “tend to marry others like them-
selves,” especially in terms of educational level and class. Consequently,
kin networks are ever more constricted along class lines (pp. 40–41). This
leads to some rather unexpected results. Class segregation among African
Americans, for example, has increased more than it has for whites. This
is not lost on Putnam, who notes that “while race-based segregation has
been slowly declining, class-based segregation has been increasing. In fact,
the trend toward class segregation has been true within each major racial
group” (pp. 38–39, emphasis in original).
My initiation of a pastoral care book with such collective “cases,” rather
than the customary vignettes confined largely to narrating the experi-
ences of individuals or perhaps families, may seem odd to many people.
What could this have to do with caring professions, and, in particular,
any caregiving effort that stands in the “care of souls” tradition? As we
will see in the following chapter, the socioeconomic shifts visible in the
small towns of Port Clinton and Fort Payne since 1980, and indeed across
the United States, have been accompanied by a massive deterioration of
social well-being. These decades, marked by a rapid increase in economic
inequality and class-based segregation, have seen a remarkable decline in
the quality of social relations, along with steep increases in the incidence
of depression, addiction (and “mental disorders” generally), violence and
incarceration; decreased life expectancy; waning educational performance;
and declining social mobility. Later, I will summarize how this extends to
the weakening of human collectives, interpersonal relationships, including
even the quality and exchange of human emotions, and the disintegration
of human subjectivity. Stated theologically, these conditions are weaken-
ing the human soul, that connective tissue linking us together as a human
community, as well as to creation and the Eternal. In other words, the
transformations occurring in society are related to the full spectrum of
human problems that have traditionally occupied the caregiving profes-
sions and human care as a whole, including the care of soul. Finally, by
using such collective cases, I am anticipating a central claim of this book—
that human relational and psychological sufferings are best understood as
rooted primarily in material, social, and even political conditions, rather
than simply in some underlying physiological process or in individual deci-
sions or behaviors.
If these claims hold water—and I implore the reader to withhold
judgment until considering the evidence and reflections presented in
the remainder of this book—two questions come immediately to mind.
First, is there some greater trend, process, or program that is fueling
the changes in Port Clinton, Fort Payne, the United States, and indeed
the world beyond, over these several decades? Second, if such a pro-
gram can be identified, are those concerned with human care, and espe-
cially the care of souls, aware of or tending to this all-encompassing
development?
16 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
AT THE HEART OF THE REVOLUTION: CAPITALISM

UNHINGED
In the opening reflections of this chapter I have, of course, betrayed my
hand. I do believe there is sufficient evidence for a larger pattern explain-
ing the developments I have just mentioned. Social scientists in the acad-
emy are famously cautious about making claims concerning causes of the
events they so carefully catalogue. This includes Putnam (2015). In Our
Kids, he identifies several important markers or symptoms, but demurs
when responding to the question as to why such changes are occurring
(pp. 72–77). Given the enormous complexities of human relationships
at all levels, I certainly respect such restraint. However, those who are
directly involved in the social, relational, psychological, or spiritual care
of human beings rarely have the luxury to wait for what might count as
empirical proof. When dealing with such intricacies, we usually must settle
for reasonable theories based on highly suggestive or strong correlations.
The urgency to adopt a governing theory becomes critical when, as we
are observing now, the impact on human suffering is broad, deep, and
accelerating. In this book, I will argue that the best candidate for such a
governing theory is that the doctrines and practices of neoliberal capital-
ism are grounding the transformations we are witnessing today. Although
I will discuss the history and development of neoliberalism in some detail
in the next chapter, perhaps I should summarize here what neoliberaliza-
tion entails.
Though the complexity and local diversity of neoliberalism make simple
definitions risky, it is important to attempt a description of its universal
characteristics as the reigning grand narrative. Jones (2012) has offered
perhaps the most succinct definition, describing neoliberalism as “the free
market ideology based on individual liberty and limited government that
connected human freedom to the actions of the rational, self-interested
actor in the competitive marketplace” (p. 2). We should carefully notice
here that freedom has been redefined on the market’s terms, and that soci-
ety has been replaced by isolated and competitive individuals. Moreover,
the actions of these individuals emerge from conscious choices based on
self-interest rather than the common good. Steger and Roy (2010) note
that the policy practices flowing from this ideology follow the now famil-
iar “D-L-P formula”—Deregulation, Liberalization, and Privatization
(p. 14). The deregulation of the economy means that governments
reduce or withdraw laws and rules requiring corporations to consider any
purposes other than the pursuit of profit. This includes the reduction or
removal of taxes on corporations and their wealthy owners, which by defi-
nition are levied for the public good rather than the benefit of corpora-
tions, and result in decreased profit. The consequent unbridled pursuit
of profit and decline in public revenue necessarily leads to reductions in
social services and welfare programs. Liberalization refers to the removal
of trade barriers, such as taxes on imports that attempt to keep the play-
ing field level for laborers. It also requires eliminating laws inhibiting the
exchange of international currencies, effectively turning currency markets
into a global casino for wealthy investors. Finally, privatization denotes
removing properties and services from public control (i.e. from govern-
ments) and turning them over to the “private sector” (to corporations and
their owners). To all this, Mann (2013) adds that what is unprecedented
in neoliberalism, compared to prior versions of capitalism, is the degree
of globalization and financialization (the trade of financial instruments
rather than goods and services), both of which are facilitated by the nearly
instantaneous movement of capital made possible by the internet and
other advanced communications technologies (pp. 143–148).
Even a superficial consideration of this summary of neoliberalization
makes it easier to imagine how the changes in Port Clinton and Fort
Payne, and other places across the country, have come to pass and are
ultimately tied together. Considered as a political and economic agenda,
the D-L-P formula, constructed specifically to increase profits for corpo-
rate elites, reduces both jobs and wages for average workers and results
in ever-increasing economic inequality. Meanwhile, the “rational choice
theory” embedded in Jones’s definition denies the importance, if not the
existence, of the common good. This sort of belief, observe Häring and
Douglas (2012), alleges “to show by means of scientific discourse that
the concepts of ‘the public’ and ‘public interest’ or ‘general welfare’ [are]
arbitrary and meaningless” (pp. 21–22). Thus the policies pursued by
the D-L-P strategy intentionally attack the public good, both politically
and economically. This is why David, interviewed by Putnam (2015), has
no access to resources to help him gain legal assistance, education, or
better employment. Finally, as Centeno and Cohen (2012) and others
have shown, the process of neoliberalization is not limited to politics and
economics. It is also a cultural project. It is a way of organizing human
society based on the principles of individualism and competition (Brown,
2015; Dardot & Laval, 2009/2013, pp. 255–299; Davies, 2014). This
subtly but steadily influences our attitudes and feelings toward ourselves,
18 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
including our understanding of what it means to be a “self,” as well as our

dispositions and feelings toward others. Combined with the erosion of
belief in the common good, this leaves us with a society in which each per-
son increasingly looks after their own interests, and leaves others to look
after theirs. Anyone not managing to compete is viewed with suspicion,
if not with disdain. In the worst of cases, care itself, toward anyone but
“one’s own,” becomes considered a weakness. This helps us understand
why an otherwise reasonable individual such as Wendy, when interviewed
by Putnam (2015), recoils at the thought of increasing public funding to
help poorer kids in Port Clinton. She concludes: “If my kids are going
to be successful, I don’t think they should have to pay other people who
are sitting around doing nothing for their success” (p. 25). This is how
inequality turns into class segregation. If we consider that this same atti-
tude can be directed toward oneself, it may also shed light on why those
who seek my counsel are now so filled with shame and self-blame. Perhaps
they suffer from segregation within the soul.
WE ARE ALL NEOLIBERALS NOW: PASTORAL THEOLOGY,

CARE, AND THE NATURALIZATION OF CAPITALISM
Given the sweeping and disturbing political, economic, and cultural effects
of neoliberalization, particular features of which I will discuss in succeed-
ing chapters, how have professionals dedicated to caring for human beings
responded? More to the current point, how have those who theorize such
care responded? The answer, at least in the United States and the wealth-
iest countries, is by and large “not very well.” The broader disciplines
of psychology and psychotherapy have not only generally ignored these
developments, but have largely served the interests of the new capitalism.
I will not offer a critique of psychology and psychotherapy along these
lines, for that has already been undertaken by the emergent field of criti-
cal psychology, especially as it is developing in the United Kingdom (e.g.
Ingleby, 1980; Parker, 2007, 2015a, 2015b; Smail, 2005). Rather, I will
focus here on my own field, pastoral care, and its theory, pastoral theology.
Pastoral care and pastoral theology offer an interesting case, it turns out,
for this discipline has historically been entrusted to articulate, preserve,
and continually reinterpret the care of souls. Its deep roots in a religious
tradition of care potentially enable it to gain some perspective on contem-
porary developments within capitalism.
And yet from the neoliberal transformation on, most of us, especially
those like me who have spent their careers primarily in clinical practice,
have regarded the sufferings of individuals as originating within them-
selves, as arising from their personal choices, feelings, individual biology,
private relationships, and their unique, idiosyncratic unconscious lives. We
have failed, as a rule, to explore the social, cultural, or political environ-
ment as a potentially greater determinant of such distresses. Rarely do we
consider the so-called “individual unconscious” as also being intrinsically
social and political. As for the academy, for at least two decades, pastoral
and practical theologians have been increasingly exploring the sources of
both individual and collective suffering within the cultural domain. We
have become particularly sensitized to the problems of racism, sexism,
heterosexism, and the politics of difference as sources of discrimination,
violence, oppression, and a host of spiritual, relational, and psychological
maladies. I suspect that for the majority of us, however, such differences
constitute the bedrock of what we consider the social and cultural ori-
gins of suffering. Rarely do we think of such problems as currently being
founded, sustained, and even transformed by dynamics endemic to devel-
opments within capitalism. Slavoj Žižek (2000) has admonished his pro-
gressive colleagues for their implicit “acceptance of capitalism as ‘the only
game in town,’” and “the renunciation of any real attempt to overcome
the existing capitalist liberal regime” (p. 95). Likewise, feminist political
theorist Wendy Brown (1995) has criticized academic theorists on the left
for their “Theoretical retreat from the problem of domination within capi-
talism” (p. 14). Pastoral theologians have participated in this retreat. Any
acknowledgment of the sufferings imposed by capitalism is often cursory,
lacking thorough analysis and critique. Consequently, both pastoral care
professionals and pastoral theologians are inhibited from fully compre-
hending the sources and the dynamics of the problems now occupying our
attention, as well as proposing more effective ways of addressing them.
It is likely that pastoral theologians and caregivers, along with other
theorists and practitioners over the course of the last three decades, have
avoided attending to capitalism as a source of suffering simply because we
have accepted it as normative. Thus the primary origins of such sufferings
have sunk out of awareness and become part of our collective unconscious.
Capitalism has become the air that we breathe, a dimension of our natu-
ral world. Extending her analysis, Brown (1995) has argued that activists
and academics on the left have become entrenched in, if not captured by,
American identity politics. This development, she contends, “would seem
20 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
to be achieved in part through a certain renaturalization of capitalism that

can be said to have marked progressive discourse since the 1970s” (p. 60,
emphasis in original). Moreover, she asserts that this renaturalization of
capitalism has shifted resentment originating in class-based oppression
(which becomes invisible when neoliberalism is normative) onto the emo-
tions and theorizing swirling around identities, such that “identity politics
may be partly configured by a peculiarly shaped and peculiarly disguised
form of class resentment, a resentment that is displaced onto discourses of
injustice other than class” (p. 60).
Brown’s analysis suggests the elision of class as a marker of suffering
and oppression. Indeed, the power interests of neoliberal capitalism are
quite comfortable with a discourse that emphasizes multiculturalism,
diversity, and tolerance. One could argue that such a discourse improves
corporate profits by extending the reach of markets. What these power-
ful interests cannot abide is any effort to shine a light on matters of class.
Brown (1995), following the argument just mentioned, raises this con-
cern: “Could we have stumbled upon one reason why class is invariably
named but rarely theorized or developed in the multiculturalist mantra,
‘race, class, gender, sexuality’?” (p. 61).
I am worried that pastoral care and theology are subject to this critique.
Are we, too, implicitly accepting the normativity of capitalism, despite
the now massive evidence of how it is initiating and escalating forms and
transformations of suffering? Have we not undergone our own subjection to
capitalism? Since its publication over ten years ago, I have regarded the
essays collected in the book Pastoral Care and Counseling: Redefining the
Paradigms (Ramsay, 2004) as something of a placeholder for progress in
our discipline. These sophisticated and valuable essays attempt to chart the
changes that occurred in the field since the publication of the Dictionary
of Pastoral Care and Counseling in 1990. They highlight modifications
in pastoral identity and method, as well as the ways in which dynamics of
power and privilege, particularly around issues of race, gender, sexual ori-
entation, and ethnic differences, have led to a paradigm shift in the field.
And yet I cannot find in the entire collection more than a trickle of refer-
ences to capitalism or the excesses of “free market” practices. One con-
tributor, Christie Cozad Neuger (2004), acknowledges: “Class continues
to be one of the most neglected perspectives in pastoral theology” (p. 76).
She predicts: “Critiques of capitalism and general economic practices, class
structures and distribution of wealth and resources” will become more
prominent in the future trajectory of the field (p. 82). We are still awaiting
the comprehensive realization of this expectation.
PRECURSORS FOR THE CRITIQUE OF CAPITALISM

WITHIN PASTORAL THEOLOGY
What I find most striking about the essays in Pastoral Care and Counseling:
Redefining the Paradigms, aside from the irony that many of the shifts in
the field discussed in the book may best be understood as aspects of a
burgeoning neoliberal hegemony, is that the authors are generally aware
of precedents in the field that call for an in-depth analysis of capitalism,
and yet remain for the most part silent on this subject. These same prec-
edents constrain me from assuming a grandiose claim to originality for
the project I have undertaken. I am certainly not the first to suggest that
theories of pastoral care have neglected a thorough examination of the
impact of capitalism. Indeed, pastoral theology has occasionally produced
its own voices “crying in the wilderness.” In The Relational Self: Ethics &
Therapy from a Black Church Perspective, Archie Smith, Jr. (1982) sounds
an alarm concerning the challenges presented by capitalism. Writing just
as neoliberalism was beginning its rise to political dominance, Smith
observes that conservative shifts in politics and religion then occurring in
the United States had “helped to strengthen an uncritical commitment to
the structural arrangements and social relations that underlie an expand-
ing and exploitative economic system, namely profit-centered capitalism”
(p. 167). A full 16 years passed before an entire book in our discipline
would be devoted to responding to capitalism. In No Room for Grace:
Pastoral Theology and Dehumanization in the Global Economy, Canadian
theologian Barbara Rumscheidt (1998) poses the crucial question for our
field today: “What does it mean to do pastoral theology in a world where
people have been reduced to ‘human resources’?” (p. x). Four years later,
we saw the release of James Poling’s Render Unto God (2002), in which
he compellingly situates domestic violence within the context of global
capitalism. An entire portion of his book (part three) is dedicated to docu-
menting resistances to capitalism in Nicaragua, as well as among African
Americans and women in the United States. In the second part, Poling
summarizes the theories and practices of capitalism, and calls for a theo-
logical critique from the standpoint of the Christian tradition. In a cogent
observation, Poling anticipates some of the analysis I attempt to undertake
in this book: “The culture of capitalism dramatically affects how people
understand themselves and one another” (p. 87).
A number of contributions in pastoral theology have not focused on
capitalism as such, and yet have addressed issues relevant to an analysis
and critique of capitalism. These include Pamela Couture’s explorations
22 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
of poverty (1991, 2007), Judith Orr’s consideration of pastoral care

with working-class people (1991, 1997, 2000), and Tom Beaudoin’s
Consuming Faith (2007). Barbara McClure (2010) decries the influ-
ence of individualism in pastoral care and counseling. Although she does
not focus on capitalism, we will see later on that neoliberal capitalism is
the most radically individualistic ideology we have yet encountered. The
efforts of pastoral theologians working in a postcolonial vein, such as
Emmanuel Lartey (2013), are also indispensable, given that neoliberaliza-
tion is essentially a neo-colonializing process. An accounting of valuable
cohorts for critiquing capitalism would be incomplete, as well, without
reference to womanist pastoral theologians, such as Phillis Sheppard
(2008, 2011), who have consistently focused on the intersection of class
concerns with gender and race. In a more general way, Charles Gerkin’s
work broadened the scope of pastoral theology to include details of the
social context of suffering. This is particularly apparent in his Widening
the Horizons: Pastoral Responses to a Fragmented Society (1986). A collec-
tion of essays in his honor (Couture & Hunter, 1995), Pastoral Care and
Social Conflict, illustrates the breadth of his influence. One of the essays,
titled “The Future of Pastoral Care and Counseling and the God of the
Market” (Couture & Hester, 1995), documents how this social turn can
be aimed in the direction of capitalism. From this wide-angle view, most
of the work by contemporary pastoral and practical theologians—which
leads the field in the direction of public theology—touches upon matters
related to capitalism, even when these efforts are not offered as assess-
ments of capitalism. Indeed, if today’s capitalism is truly hegemonic, as I
will be arguing, then almost nothing we can discuss lies outside its reach.
This means that the survey I undertake in this paragraph is necessarily
abbreviated. My colleagues will no doubt be thinking of other authors I
should have mentioned. Nonetheless, it remains true that none of these
efforts, to my knowledge, endeavor to go beyond the issues at hand to tie
them in a thoroughgoing way to capitalism, much less undertake a com-
prehensive critique of capitalism as a systematic production of suffering.
Only recently have works in pastoral theology mentioned neoliberalism
by name. Couture (2007) questions whether “neoliberal economics” and
“The Washington Consensus” are playing a role in the global increase
of child poverty, yet seems undecided as to whether this new economic
system is the cause or the solution to this problem, suggesting somehow
that it may be both (pp. 97, 105–113). Subsequently, a handful of pastoral
theologians have become categorically more critical. This is apparent in
several articles authored by Ryan LaMothe (2016a, 2016b) and myself

(Rogers-Vaughn, 2013a, 2013b, 2014, 2015). Recently two books have
appeared. The first book in this discipline to address neoliberalism directly
is by Philip Browning Helsel (2015). The initial chapter gets to the point
of his monograph: “Social Class and Mental Illness in a Neoliberal Era”
(pp. 19–52). Meanwhile, Cedric Johnson (2016) thoughtfully explores
the impact of neoliberalism on African Americans in his work titled Race,
Religion, and Resilience in the Neoliberal Age. My intention in the present
volume has a broader scope, which is to consider how neoliberalization is
both increasing and transforming suffering on a global scale, while simul-
taneously altering social, interpersonal, and psychological systems. In my
judgment, the immensity of this impact summons the entire discipline to
move toward a post-capitalist posture.
IS A POST-CAPITALIST PASTORAL THEOLOGY POSSIBLE?

All of the publications I have mentioned that openly focus upon capital-
ism, beginning with Smith’s (1982) The Relational Self until now, have
called for a thoroughgoing critique of capitalism within pastoral theology.
There is now a pressing need to revise this effort in light of the dramatic
and accelerating shifts that have been occurring within capitalism. I am
suggesting that what we now need is a post-capitalist pastoral theology.
What does this mean? Emmanuel Lartey (2002) proposes that pastoral
theology currently exists “in an era of ‘post-phenomena’.” The prefix
“post,” he asserts, does not merely indicate what follows or replaces the
term it qualifies. Rather than simply designating what comes after a par-
ticular order or system, “it is a way of speaking about the condition of
being in critical vein or in questioning mode concerning it” (p. 1, empha-
ses in original). This is precisely the spirit in which I am using this pre-
fix. Lartey contends that pastoral theology must respond in a time that
is “post-modern, post-colonial, post-Christian, post-human and perhaps
also ‘post-pastoral’” (p. 1). However, I am conducting this analysis from
the opposite direction. We are certainly not living in a “post-capitalist” era.
In fact, as Fredric Jameson (2003) famously notes, “it is easier to imagine
the end of the world than to imagine the end of capitalism” (p. 76). In
an age of global and hegemonic capitalism, I argue that pastoral theology
must become post-capitalist.
There is growing evidence, beyond the field of pastoral theology, that
the time is now ripe for such a change. Within theological education
24 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
generally, several scholars have begun to argue that advanced capitalism

now poses the most significant threat to the human spirit, to civiliza-
tion, and to the health of the planet. John Cobb (Cobb, 2010; Cobb
& Daly, 1994), Rosemary Radford Ruether (2005), and Susan Brooks
Thistlethwaite (2010), for example, have penned major treatises from
this perspective. A new generation of scholars has undertaken a reorienta-
tion of liberation theology, bringing this important critical tradition to
bear upon advanced capitalism as the current form of imperialism and
colonialism. These include Joerg Rieger (2009), Jung Mo Sung (2007,
2011), Néstor Míguez (Míguez, Rieger, & Sung, 2009), and Kwok Pui-
lan (Rieger & Pui-lan, 2012). Theological studies, however, have lagged
behind other disciplines in the investigation of capitalism’s effects. The
relative neglect of neoliberalism in theology and religious studies, com-
pared with the social sciences as a whole, is starkly visible in Fig. 1.2,
Fig. 1.2 Annual number of publications on neoliberalism, 1980–2014:

Comparison between theological studies and the social sciences. Sources: Web of
Science and ATLA religion databases, accessed through Vanderbilt University
Library
which displays the number of publications on neoliberalism in each cat-

egory, from 1980 to 20143:
For some time, social scientists have focused rather narrowly on discrete
aspects of capitalism, such as economic inequality, consumerism, and the
decline of collectives. During the last 20 years, however, there has been a
steady convergence of concerns, accompanied by a growing recognition of
neoliberal hegemony. Social epidemiologist Roberto De Vogli (2013), in
his recent book Progress or Collapse, describes these intersections:
It is no coincidence that crises such as climate change and the rapid deple-
tion of natural resources are occurring in combination with other symp-
toms of social breakdown: rising mental disorders, mindless consumerism,
materialistic conformism, status competition, civic disengagement, startling
economic inequalities, global financial instability and widespread political
inertia. While these crises are usually studied in isolation, they are all inter-
connected. To some specialists, this claim may sound far-fetched. But this is
only because they fail to connect the dots. Specialists have provided invalu-
able contributions to science, but they are often too attached to their micro-
scopical views of society. (pp. xi–xii)
De Vogli concludes that “the market greed doctrine,” which he identifies

as the neoliberal paradigm, is the connection between these dots.
The current level of public restlessness and receptivity may be even
more significant than academic trends as an indicator of the need for a
pastoral theological revision. For example, a PRRI/RNS Religion News
Survey (2011) shows that 44 % of US citizens believe that capitalism
conflicts with Christian values, whereas only 36 % believe they are com-
patible. More recently, a Harvard Public Opinion Project (2016) survey
reveals that more than half of young people in the United States oppose
capitalism in its current form. Meanwhile, the distinctly anti-capitalist
apostolic exhortation of Pope Francis (2013), Evangelii Gaudium, gar-
nered significant publicity, leading US radio personality Rush Limbaugh
to worry that the Vatican had been compromised by Marxist conspira-
tors. Nonetheless, the popularity of this pope has continued to soar, both
globally and within the United States. Finally, the presence of capitalism
on the public mind is apparent in the popularity of French economist
Thomas Piketty’s Capital in the Twenty-First Century (2014), which
reached number one on the New York Times best-seller list during May
of 2014.
26 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
There are even some indications that resistance is emerging in current

political developments. Most remarkable are recent events in the United
States and Britain, where neoliberal policies were first embraced and from
where they have spread around the globe. In 2015, Jeremy Corbyn, in a
staggering upset, was elected leader of the Labour Party in Britain. He
ran on an anti-austerity platform that opposed most of the neoliberal
strategies Margaret Thatcher had promoted during the 1980s and that
have held sway since then. The current presidential campaign cycle in the
United States has been marked by a similar surprise: the rising popularity
of Bernie Sanders, a self-proclaimed democratic socialist. Even though
it appears that he will lose the Democratic Party nomination to Hillary
Clinton, many analysts believe his relative success is the leading edge of a
shift in politics in the United States. Like Corbyn, his strongest support
has been among young people, who were born after the neoliberal revo-
lution and have suffered the most economic impact. There are also signs
of political stress in international financial institutions, which have been
instrumental in imposing neoliberal “structural adjustments” on develop-
ing countries. For example, three leading researchers at the International
Monetary Fund (IMF) have just released a report concluding that the
austerity policies and the liberalization of flows of capital that typify neo-
liberal strategies have contributed to global inequality and instability. The
researchers conclude: “In sum, the benefits of some policies that are an
important part of the neoliberal agenda appear to have been somewhat
overplayed” (Ostry, Loungani, & Furceri, 2016, p. 40). Considering the
source, this is a startling admission.
In summary, seismic shifts are underway that are likely to place increas-
ing pressure on a number of academic disciplines to undertake alterations
in orientation or even major adjustments to their preferred theories. This
includes pastoral theology. If pastoral theology is about learning from and
responding to human suffering, and if neoliberalism is now a hegemony that
is governing and transforming suffering globally, then a revision of our
discipline is in order. Moreover, if we have the necessary theoretical tools
to undertake this revision, and if hearts and minds are receptive, then the
time for this work is upon us. I am not suggesting, of course, that we
should focus on capitalism to the exclusion of the other important work
we have been doing. The specific concerns that have occupied us remain
critical, are constantly evolving, and demand our ongoing efforts. What I
am proposing is that it is a mistake to ignore how the dominant paradigm,
neoliberal capitalism, is grounding, sustaining, or transforming whatever
discrete form of suffering we are exploring and attempting to alleviate. It

is time, in other words, to “connect the dots.”
In this book, I will attempt a synopsis of the evidence that the dots
indeed connect, and in the process I will offer some thoughts about impli-
cations for change in the way we carry out pastoral care and theology.
I must confess that the task I have set for myself is difficult and likely
unattainable. A task like this calls for expertise in many disciplines, and
my knowledge in many of these specialties is superficial at best. I will
inevitably commit oversights. What I offer is bound to be both inadequate
and incomplete. This work is part of a larger endeavor that calls for a
community of inquirers, rather than sequestered individual thinkers. This
project will also require time. It may be that our students, or our stu-
dents’ students, will be the generation of scholars to see this to fruition.
Regardless, we are living at a time when the earth and all its inhabitants
are at risk. We do not have the luxury of scholarship as usual, staying in
our cubicles using narrow sets of theories on narrow sets of problems.
There are patterns that only become visible using a wide-angle lens, thus
this era demands a type of scholarship that is synthetical more than analyti-
cal. I am suggesting that we must now view suffering through the lens of
the dominant paradigm. In science a paradigm is, by definition, a general
theory of everything. Applied to culture, it is not only a theory, but an
interactive nexus of thoughts, beliefs, images, behaviors, impulses, feel-
ings, and desires that permeate every dimension of human organization,
including the individual psyche. Thus, in the words of De Vogli (2013),
“to understand how the world works, we need to know more and more
about more and more until we know something about everything” (p.
xii). What I offer here, therefore, are only preliminary and uncertain steps
in what will likely be a long journey.
THE STRUCTURE OF THE BOOK

In the following chapter, I will summarize the history and key features of
neoliberalism, with particular attention to its character as a cultural project
rather than simply an economic or political venture. In everyday life, the
consequent society manifests a “survival of the fittest” spirit, with sadistic
undertones. The imbrications between neoliberal culture and the condi-
tion commonly referred to as postmodernity mean that the postmodern
critical theories now prevailing in the academy are already entangled with
the ideology and circumventions of neoliberalism. This will require me
28 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
to pause to consider this problem, and to address the methodological

challenges it poses for my argument. The chapter concludes with evi-
dence that one of neoliberalism’s intrinsic attributes, economic inequality,
is associated with a broad spectrum of social, interpersonal, and individual
problems.
The third chapter goes beyond general support for a correlation
between neoliberalism and human suffering by exploring specific con-
sequences of contemporary capitalism for three entangled systems of
human life: the social, the interpersonal, and the psychological. I will
utilize William Connolly’s (2013) notion that neoliberal capitalism
“deflates” various self-organizing and entangled systems. I will propose
that with regard to human systems, it accomplishes this deflation by two
methods: marginalization (a reduction of the scope and power of these
systems) and corruption (altering these systems to conform them to its
own purposes). I will use particular examples to demonstrate how these
methods are accomplished in each system. Because I cite the marginaliza-
tion and corruption of religious collectives as an instance of the neolib-
eral deflation of social systems, I will pause along the way to discuss how
secularization theory may divert attention from the cultural impact of
neoliberalization.
I begin the fourth chapter with a broader perspective, summarizing
evidence that neoliberalism is increasing human suffering and death glob-
ally, even when compared to previous historical regimes. I then turn to
the notion of neoliberalism as a cultural paradigm that founds novel forms
of suffering while mutating already existing types of suffering. Following
the observations of Dufour (2003/2008), I will propose that neolib-
eralism introduces a new type of normative suffering corresponding to
characteristics unique to its cultural manifestations: deinstitutionalization,
desymbolization, and desubjectivation (what I call “the three D’s”). I will
designate this new normal as “third order suffering.”
Third-order suffering inevitably becomes entangled with the already
existing first- and second-order forms of suffering to such an extent that
these new versions constitute unprecedented developments. Focusing on
the subsequent alteration of second-order suffering, in the fifth chapter
I suggest that the contemporary transformations of sexism, racism, and
class struggle provide exemplary cases. Noting that neoliberalism adopts
its own version of intersectionality theory, I offer an interpretation of this
important theory as an inter-relationality of suffering that opposes the
type of multiculturalism and diversity advocated by the market.
In the sixth chapter, I draw upon my clinical experience with pastoral

psychotherapy to attempt a constructive turn. I open the chapter high-
lighting a feature of third-order suffering. This form of suffering is marked
by a double unconsciousness: a dual lack of awareness that does not simply
burden soul, but weakens or dis-members soul. Moreover, because soul
is social–material in character, a way forward appears through a rever-
sal of this double unconsciousness that simultaneously re-members soul.
In other words, the indelible bonds between self, others, and the social
and material world are restored to awareness and strengthened. I explore
recent theoretical developments in critical psychology and psychoanalysis
that yield insights into how this might occur. Utilizing these theories, I
portray the clinical situation as a place where individuality becomes a win-
dow into the dialectics of soul. Here it becomes apparent that suffering,
especially when returned to consciousness, is already a nascent resistance
to the hierarchies and dynamics of power that characterize the neoliberal
age. To illustrate this, I offer material from my clinical practice demon-
strating how the undercurrents of a neoliberal world appear even in peo-
ple’s dreams. Work around such dreams is but one small instance of how
the necessary increase of awareness and re-membering of soul may begin
to come about. That being said, I close the chapter noting that the inher-
ent limitations and fragility of psychotherapy prevent this form of care
from becoming a sufficient response to the sufferings of a neoliberal age.
I carry forward the insights from the sixth chapter into the final section
of the book, a series of three reflections I call “concluding theological post-
scripts.” Any adequate reply to the sufferings of our age will necessarily
involve the strengthening of human collectives, the nurture and increase
of soul, and the amplification of hope. These three efforts, all profound
activities of care, are inseparable and entangled. If we removed any one of
them, the other two would either evaporate or suffer co-optation into a
neoliberal strategy. As I will conclude there, soul inhabits a collective body,
a body that exhales hope. This hope, once exhaled, expands to enfold our
precious, entangled world, only to take it back in again. It aspires and
inspires. Caring for souls in a neoliberal age will settle for nothing less.
NOTES
1. There is no term available to refer to people who see me for psycho-
therapy that completely pleases me. “Patients” can have the unfor-
tunate connotation of passivity, and is strongly tied to the medical
30 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
model. However, “clients” is associated with consumerism, business

contracts, and the very economic models I critique in this book, and
thus disturbs me far more. The neologisms sometimes used as sub-
stitutes, such as “counselee” or “therapeut,” seem convoluted or
contrived. That said, the etymology of “patient” has ancient refer-
ents that, for me, remain meaningful. These are summarized by my
pastoral theological colleague Pamela Cooper-White: “The reason
for retaining this language of ‘patient’ is that it continues to carry
the multiple meanings of soul and psyche; of suffering, passion, the
pathos of the human condition (patient), and the meeting of this
suffering at a profound level with a movement toward healing
(therapeύo)” (2007, p. 10, emphasis in original). For this reason,
whenever I cannot avoid this sort of designation, I will, in this book,
use the term “patient” rather than “client” or other alternates.
2. The figures cited in this paragraph were derived from the database
available through Social Explorer (http://www.socialexplorer.
com/), using data from the US Census Bureau and the American
Community Survey (ACS).
3. Searches were limited to publications in English in which the terms
“neoliberalism” or “neo-liberalism” appeared in the title, abstract,
or keywords. Web of Science data include all covered publications
within the social sciences. The term “capitalism” was not used for
these searches because it is frequently used descriptively, whereas
“neoliberalism” usually denotes a posture of critique.
REFERENCES
Beaudoin, T. (2007). Consuming faith: Integrating who we are with what we buy.
Lanham, MD: Sheed & Ward.
Bollas, C. (1987). The shadow of the object: Psychoanalysis of the unthought known.
New York, NY: Columbia University Press.
Brown, W. (1995). States of injury: Power and freedom in late modernity. Princeton,
NJ: Princeton University Press.
Brown, W. (2015). Undoing the demos: Neoliberalism’s stealth revolution. Brooklyn,
NY: Zone Books.
Carter, K. (2011, February 2). Gildan to end remaining sock production in Fort
Payne. The Gadsden Times. Retrieved June 23, 2016, from http://www.
gadsdentimes.com/news/20110202/gildan-to-end-remaining-sock-
production-in-fort-payne
Centeno, M. A., & Cohen, J. N. (2012). The arc of neoliberalism. Annual Review
of Sociology, 38, 317–340.
Cobb Jr., J. B. (2010). Spiritual bankruptcy: A prophetic call to action. Nashville,
TN: Abingdon Press.
Cobb Jr., J. B., & Daly, H. E. (1994). For the common good: Redirecting the econ-
omy toward community, the environment, and a sustainable future. Boston, MA:
Beacon Press.
Connolly, W. E. (2013). The fragility of things: Self-organizing processes, neoliberal
fantasies, and democratic activism. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Cooper-White, P. (2007). Many voices: Pastoral psychotherapy in relational and
theological perspective. Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press.
Couture, P. (1991). Blessed are the poor? Women’s poverty, family policy, and practi-
cal theology. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press.
Couture, P. (2007). Child poverty: Love, justice, and social responsibility. St. Louis,
MO: Chalice Press.
Couture, P. D., & Hester, R. (1995). The future of pastoral care and counseling
and the God of the market. In P. D. Couture & R. J. Hunter (Eds.), Pastoral
care and social conflict: Essays in honor of Charles V. Gerkin (pp. 44–54).
Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press.
Couture, P. D., & Hunter, R. J. (Eds.). (1995). Pastoral care and social conflict:
Essays in honor of Charles V. Gerkin. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press.
Dardot, P., & Laval, C. (2009/2013). The new way of the world: On neo-liberal
society (Gregory Elliott, Trans.). London: Verso.
Davies, W. (2014). The limits of neoliberalism: Authority, sovereignty and the logic
of competition. London: SAGE Publications.
De Vogli, R. (2013). Progress or collapse: The crises of market greed. London:
Routledge.
DuFour, D.-R. (2003/2008). The art of shrinking heads: On the new servitude of
the liberated in the age of total capitalism (David Macey, Trans.). Cambridge:
Polity Press.
Gerkin, C. V. (1986). Widening the horizons: Pastoral responses to a fragmented
society. Philadelphia, PA: Westminster Press.
Gramsci, A. (1929–1932/1992–2007). Prison notebooks (Vols. 1–3). New York,
NY: Columbia University Press.
Häring, N., & Douglas, N. (2012). Economists and the powerful: Convenient theo-
ries, distorted facts, ample rewards. London: Anthem Press.
Harvard Public Opinion Project. (2016). Executive summary: Survey of young
Americans’ attitudes toward politics and public service (29th ed.). Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Institute of Politics Retrieved June 7, 2016, from
http://iop.harvard.edu/sites/default/files/content/160425_Harvard%20
IOP%20Spring%20Report_update.pdf.
32 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Hedges, C. (2015). Wages of rebellion: The moral imperative of revolt. New York:

Nation Books.
Helsel, P. B. (2015). Pastoral power beyond psychology’s marginalization: Resisting
the discourses of the psy-complex. New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Ingleby, D. (Ed.). (1980). Critical psychiatry: The politics of mental health.
New York, NY: Pantheon Books.
Jameson, F. (2003). Future city. New Left Review, 21(May/June), 65–79.
Johnson, C. C. (2016). Race, religion, and resilience in the neoliberal age. New
York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Jones, D. S. (2012). Masters of the universe: Hayek, Friedman, and the birth of
neoliberal politics. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
LaMothe, R. W. (2016a). The colonizing realities of neoliberal capitalism. Pastoral
Psychology, 65(1), 23–40.
LaMothe, R. W. (2016b). Neoliberal capitalism and the corruption of society: A
pastoral political analysis. Pastoral Psychology, 65(1), 5–21.
Lartey, E. Y. (2002). Embracing the collage: Pastoral theology in an era of ‘post-
phenomena’. The Journal of Pastoral Theology, 12(2), 1–10.
Lartey, E. Y. (2013). Postcolonializing God: An African practical theology. London:
SCM Press.
Layton, L., Hollander, N. C., & Gutwill, S. (2006). Introduction. In L. Layton,
N. C. Hollander, & S. Gutwill (Eds.), Psychoanalysis, class and politics:
Encounters in the clinical setting (pp. 1–10). London: Routledge.
Lee, D. (2005, April 10). The new foreign aid. Los Angeles Times. Retrieved June
23, 2016, from http://www.latimes.com/business/la-fi-socks10apr10-story.
html
Mann, G. (2013). Disassembly required: A field guide to actually existing capital-
ism. Edinburgh: AK Press.
Marshall, M. (2011, April 19). The decline of the former ‘sock capital of the
world’ is a story of lost jobs and empty mills. The Huntsville Times. Retrieved
June 23, 2016, from http://blog.al.com/huntsville-times-business/2011/04/
the_decline_of_the_hosiery_ind.html
Martin, T. W. (2011, February 22). Alabama sock town suffers as cotton soars. The
Wall Street Journal. Retrieved June 23, 2016, from http://www.wsj.com/
articles/SB10001424052748703803904576152712394690824
McClure, B. J. (2010). Moving beyond individualism in pastoral care and counsel-
ing: Reflections on theory, theology, and practice. Eugene, OR: Cascade Books.
Míguez, N., Rieger, J., & Sung, J. M. (2009). Beyond the spirit of empire: Theology
and politics in a new key. London: SCM Press.
Miller-McLemore, B. J. (1996). The living human web: Pastoral theology at the
turn of the century. In J. Stevenson-Moessner (Ed.), Through the eyes of women:
Insights for pastoral care (pp. 9–26). Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press.
Neuger, C. C. (2004). Power and difference in pastoral theology. In N. J. Ramsay
(Ed.), Pastoral care and counseling: Redefining the paradigms (pp. 65–85).
Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press.
Orr, J. L. (1991). Ministry with working-class women. Journal of Pastoral Care,
45(4), 343–353.
Orr, J. L. (1997). Hard work, hard lovin’, hard times, hardly worth it: Care of
working-class men. In C. C. Neuger & J. N. Poling (Eds.), The care of men
(pp. 70–91). Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press.
Orr, J. L. (2000). Socioeconomic class and the life span development of women.
In J. Stevenson-Moessner (Ed.), In her own time: Women and developmental
issues in pastoral care (pp. 45–64). Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press.
Ostry, J. D., Loungani, P., & Furceri, D. (2016). Neoliberalism: Oversold? Finance
& Development, 53(2), 38–41.
Parker, I. (2007). Revolution in psychology: Alienation to emancipation. London:
Pluto Press.
Parker, I. (2015a). Psychology after the crisis: Scientific paradigms and political
debate. London: Routledge.
Parker, I. (2015b). Psychology after psychoanalysis: Psychosocial studies and beyond.
London: Routledge.
Piketty, T. (2014). Capital in the twenty-first century. (Arthur Goldhammer,
Trans.). Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press.
Poling, J. N. (2002). Render unto God: Economic vulnerability, family violence,
and pastoral theology. Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock.
Pope, F. (2013). The joy of the gospel: Evangelii gaudium. Washington, DC: United
States Conference of Catholic Bishops.
Public Religion Research Institute, & Religion News Service. (2011). Survey:
Plurality of Americans believe capitalism at odds with Christian values. Retrieved
January 9, 2014, from http://publicreligion.org/research/2011/04/
plurality-of-americans-believe-capitalism-at-odds-with-christian-values/
Putnam, R. D. (2015). Our kids: The American dream in crisis. New York, NY:
Simon & Schuster.
Ramsay, N J. (Ed.). (2004). Pastoral care and counseling: Redefining the para-
digms. Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press.
Rieger, J. (2009). No rising tide: Theology, economics, and the future. Minneapolis,
MN: Fortress Press.
Rieger, J., & Pui-lan, K. (2012). Occupy religion: Theology of the multitude.
Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2013a). Best practices in pastoral counseling: Is theology nec-
essary? The Journal of Pastoral Theology, 23(1), 1–24.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2013b). Pastoral counseling in the neoliberal age: Hello best
practices, goodbye theology. Sacred Spaces, 5, 5-45. Retrieved July 31, 2014,
from http://www.aapc.org/media/127298/2_rogers_vaughn.pdf
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2014). Blessed are those who mourn: Depression as political
resistance. Pastoral Psychology, 63(4), 503–522.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2015). Powers and principalities: Initial reflections toward a
post-capitalist pastoral theology. Journal of Pastoral Theology, 25(2), 71–92.
34 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Ruether, R. R. (2005). Integrating ecofeminism, globalization, and world religions.

Rumscheidt, B. (1998). No room for grace: Pastoral theology and dehumanization
in the global economy. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing
Company.
Samuels, A. (2003/2006). Working directly with political, social and cultural
material in the therapy session. In L. Layton, N. C. Hollander, & S. Gutwill
(Eds.), Psychoanalysis, class and politics: Encounters in the clinical setting
(pp. 11–28). London: Routledge.
Sheppard, P. I. (2008). Mourning the loss of cultural selfobjects: Black embodi-
ment and religious experience after trauma. Practical Theology, 1(2), 233–257.
Sheppard, P. I. (2011). Self, culture, and others in womanist practical theology.
New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Smail, D. (2005). Power, interest and psychology: Elements of a social materialist
understanding of distress. Ross-on-Wye: PCCS Books.
Smith, A., Jr. (1982). The relational self: Ethics and therapy from a black church
perspective. Nashville, TN: Abingdon.
Steger, M. B., & Roy, R. K. (2010). Neoliberalism: A very short introduction.
New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Sung, J. M. (2007). Desire, market and religion. London: SCM Press.
Sung, J. M. (2011). The subject, capitalism, and religion: Horizons of hope in com-
plex societies. New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Thistlethwaite, S. B. (2010). Dreaming of Eden: American religion and politics in
a wired world. New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Žižek, S. (2000). Class struggle or postmodernism? Yes, please! InJudith Butler,
Ernesto Laclau, & Slavoj Žižek, Contingency, hegemony, universality:
Contemporary dialogues on the left (pp. 90–135). London: Verso.
CHAPTER 2
Neoliberalism, Inequality, and the Erosion

of Social Well-being
In this chapter, I will identify key features of neoliberalism that provide

a foundation for the work of subsequent chapters. In a fashion analo-
gous to the story of an individual human life, the history of neoliberal-
ism is a narrative of an uneven and somewhat unpredictable process that
nevertheless exhibits discernable enduring patterns as it progressively
occupies economic, political, and cultural spaces. Recognizing neoliber-
alization as a cultural process is particularly critical to understanding the
way it transforms the social, interpersonal, and psychological dimensions
of our lives. The neoliberal renovation of culture requires an appreciation
of how it is intertwined with the condition called postmodernity. This
presents some methodological challenges, as it calls into question some
of the conventions of postmodern critical theories—theories which are
nonetheless necessary for developing a comprehensive analysis and cri-
tique of neoliberalization. These challenges must be addressed if I am to
successfully navigate the argument of this book. Finally, I will highlight a
central characteristic of neoliberalism—increasing economic inequality—
as a powerful sign of its erosion of individual and social well-being. As a
general marker of the depth and breadth of human suffering produced by
neoliberalization, the global escalation of economic inequality calls for the
more detailed analyses conducted in subsequent chapters.

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_2
36 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
HISTORICIZING NEOLIBERALISM
In the previous chapter, I indicated something about the basic character of
neoliberalism by repeating the brief description of Daniel Stedman Jones
(2012) and the “D-L-P formula” outlined by Steger and Roy (2010). The
problem is that the actual complexity of neoliberalism resists simple defini-
tions or reduction to easy acronyms. Efforts at straightforward or minimal
definitions leave the impression that neoliberalism is a monolithic, static
strategy that is then imposed without differentiation across space and
time. During the 1990s, the designation “neoliberal” was widely used in
this fashion as a vague slogan of political protest, even within the academy.
Thus Boas and Gans-Morse (2009) introduce their critique with a curt
declaration: “Neoliberalism has rapidly become an academic catchphrase”
(p. 138). They proceed to document the loose and vacillating usage of the
term. Likewise, Jones (2012) objects that “the term neoliberalism is used
with lazy imprecision in both popular debate and academic scholarship”
(p. 10). A succinct definition may not even be possible, as Jamie Peck
(2010) flatly concludes: “Crisply unambiguous, essentialist definitions of
neoliberalism have proved to be incredibly elusive” (p. 8). There is cur-
rently an emerging consensus that the term does not refer to an entity
at all, but to a reflexive process. In this vein, geographer Simon Springer
(2010) argues that “neoliberalism,” which implies a static thing, should
be replaced by “neoliberalization,” a process word that “recognizes neo-
liberalism’s hybridized and mutated forms as it travels around our world”
(p. 1026). A better way to approach neoliberalization, therefore, is to tell
its story. By historicizing neoliberalism, we can get a sense not just of its
fluctuating content but also of its dynamics and its conflicted and con-
tested features. Indeed, this is the intention of the recent histories writ-
ten not just by Jones (2012) but also by Peck (2010), Dardot and Laval
(2009/2013), and Brown (2015), among others.
Jones (2012), in his comprehensive history Masters of the Universe, con-
tends that neoliberalism has progressed in three distinct phases. During the
first, from the 1920s until around 1950, the conceptual structure began
to form. The term “neoliberalism” was first introduced at the Colloque
Walter Lippmann meeting in Paris in 1938, as designating an alternative
not only to state-planned economies, its archrival, but also to the laissez-
faire character of classical liberal economics. Unlike liberal economies, in
which the state and markets occupied separate concerns, neoliberalism
envisioned governments taking an active role to guarantee the protection
NEOLIBERALISM, INEQUALITY, AND THE EROSION OF SOCIAL WELL-BEING 37
and free functioning of markets. The chief intellectual during this period
was the Austrian political scientist Friedrich von Hayek, author of the
influential Road to Serfdom (1944/2007). In 1947, Hayek gathered with
like-minded men (all European and North American) in Switzerland to
form the Mont Pelerin Society (MPS), which became the first institute for
developing and promoting these ideas. We should note that throughout
this time, indeed until the mid-1970s, neoliberal ideology was considered
radical or even dangerous by then mainstream economists (George, 2000).
Capitalistic societies were dominated during this time by the theory of
British economist John Maynard Keynes (1936/2008), who believed that
markets might implode under their own weight if not carefully regulated
by governments for the sake of the public good. We must also understand
that there was never a time when neoliberal thought was unitary, even in
the MPS. This is not a story of an original pure idea, hatched by a closed
circle of intellectuals, which was then applied uniformly and autocratically
to states worldwide. As Peck (2010) notes, “there is no neoliberal repli-
cating machine” (p. 6). The MPS included a hodge-podge of thinkers—
the German Ordoliberals, centered in Freiburg; American economists,
especially the “Chicago School” led by Milton Friedman; and Hayek and
his followers, among others (Peck, 2010, Chap. 2). Key debates hinged
on the type and extent of government involvement needed for the new
approach. The Ordoliberals believed it was a mistake to view markets as
entirely autonomous, arguing that states would still need to play a key
role in their management. The Americans held out for a spontaneous,
self-organizing market, with a minimal role for the state. In the middle
was Hayek, trying to hold it all together. Peck concludes: “Neoliberalism
was a transnational, reactionary, and messy hybrid right from the start.
Neoliberalism has many authors, many birthplaces” (p. 39). Nevertheless,
participants remained united by their determination “to remake laissez-
faire for twentieth-century conditions” (p. 39, emphasis in original).
The second phase Jones (2012) identifies extends from 1950 until the
political ascendency of neoliberalism during the Reagan and Thatcher
administrations around 1980. Neoliberalism was effectively promoted
during this period through cleverly embedded marketing strategies that
had first been cultivated by Bernays in the 1920s (Bernays, 1928/2005;
Tye, 1998). An important leader throughout this interval was Milton
Friedman, a founding member of the MPS and chair of the economics
department at the University of Chicago. Friedman (1951) initiated this
phase with the publication of his paper, “Neo-liberalism and Its Prospects.”
38 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
It was during this phase, notes Jones (2012), that the “moderate tone”
set by Hayek was eclipsed by a “more strident” attitude, which “coalesced
into a complete rejection of economic planning, social democracy, and
New Deal liberalism” (p. 8). This shift was abetted by the establishment,
in the 1950s and 1960s, of think tanks in the USA, such as the Institute
of Economic Affairs (IEA) and the American Enterprise Institute (AEI).
These organizations fostered a harsher version of neoliberal thinking. “For
example,” Jones asserts, “bodies like the IEA and the AEI argued that
social and economic inequality was necessary as a motor for social and eco-
nomic progress” (p. 9). It was primarily this Americanized mindset that
was then successfully spread through the establishment of international
think tanks, many of which published their own academic journals. This
institutionalization process continues to this day. Peck (2010) notes that
there are now over 275 free-market think tanks in 70 countries (p. 171).
Ironically, by the conclusion of this era, the term “neoliberalism” had
largely fallen out of use by its proponents (Jones, 2012, pp. 6–7). Jones
suggests that part of the reason was that the word did not resonate in an
American context. Indeed, today the term typically appears among aca-
demics and activists outside the USA. But Boas and Gans-Morse (2009)
identify a more compelling reason. In the mid-1970s, intellectuals in
Chile successfully tied the term to the draconian economic reforms of the
Pinochet dictatorship (pp. 139, 149–150). The word became, in short,
a public relations problem. Thus from this point forward, neoliberalism
turned into a negative term used primarily by its critics, in much the same
way that critics of psychoanalysis might today use the term “Freudian.”
One consequence, Boas and Gans-Morse contend, “is that virtually no one
self-identifies as a neoliberal” (p. 140, emphasis in original). Present-day
neoliberal proponents prefer to simply consider themselves advocates of
freedom, which is redefined as the unimpeded functioning of markets.
Jones (2012) asserts that the third phase of neoliberalism began in
1980 and continues to the present. During the 1990s, neoliberal poli-
cies were grouped under what became widely known as “the Washington
Consensus.” These policies became consolidated as the norm in Western
Europe and North America, while expanding globally chiefly through
the infamous “structural adjustments” of international financial institu-
tions such as the International Monetary Fund (IMF), the World Trade
Organization (WTO), and the World Bank. These are guided, in turn, by
international “free trade” agreements, such as the North American Free
Trade Agreement (NAFTA) (Jones, 2012, p. 8). Two other installments
of such agreements are currently being negotiated, largely in secret. One

is between officials in the USA and the European Union. Called the
Transatlantic Free Trade Agreement (TAFTA), it would, among other
things, hold member nation states liable for the financial losses of large
corporations due to government regulations, such as those intended to
protect the environment (Wallach, 2013). The other is the Trans-Pacific
Partnership (TPP). Both the actions of the international financial institu-
tions and the trade agreements enforce what Steger and Roy (2010) call
the “D-L-P formula,” thus suppressing the wages of workers and redis-
tributing capital to global elites. These developments make it possible for
us now to speak, in economic terms, of living in a “neoliberal world.”
The temporal dynamics of these expansionist policies warrant com-
ment. Implementation typically begins with “roll-back” processes that
dismantle collectives and institutions that have the potential to obstruct
neoliberalization. In Peck’s words,
Often prosecuted in the name of deregulation, devolution, and even democ-

ratization, this offensive is typically associated with attacks on labor unions,
planning agencies, entitlement systems, and public bureaucracies, by way
of the now familiar repertoire of funding cuts, organizational downsizing,
market testing, and privatization (2010, p. 22).
This is followed by a “roll-out” phase, typically in response to push-

back against deregulation, public austerity, and market failures. This is,
in effect, a reregulation that “differs substantially from the preceding
politics of retrenchment” (Peck, 2010, pp. 22–23). The purpose of this
active intervention is to conform social and political processes to the gov-
ernance of the market. Springer (2010) notes that this amounts to “an
invasive social agenda centered on urban order, surveillance, and policing”
(p. 1032). Peck argues that this may now be supplemented by a “rolling
with” phase in which the market order is normalized. Or, alternatively, it
may be described as a “roiling neoliberalism … a still-dominant but deeply
flawed ‘settlement,’ increasingly buffeted by crises” (2010, pp. 24–25,
emphasis in original). In this phase, now current in the USA and most
“developed” economies, neoliberalism repeatedly encounters its limits
and evidences that contradict its assumptions. Nevertheless, as Mirowski
(2013) has convincingly demonstrated regarding responses to the Great
Recession that began in 2008, neoliberalism has become a “theory of
everything” that finds a way to overcome and incorporate even its own
40 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
failures and contradictions. Peck (2010) calls this a “failing forward,” in

which “manifest inadequacies have—so far anyway—repeatedly animated
further rounds of neoliberal invention” (p. 6).
Meanwhile, the global economy has been “financialized,” meaning
that it increasingly depends less on the trade of material goods and ser-
vices, and more upon the movement of capital using financial instruments
engaged in the trading of securities, including esoteric instruments such
as credit default swaps (CDSs). Mann (2013) notes that finance capital
now accounts for 40 % of corporate profits in the USA, and this contin-
ues to increase (pp. 154–155). This is the system some are referring to as
“casino capitalism.” The consequence is that we are progressively haunted
by a virtual economy that appears disconnected from any real, embodied
human labor or consumption. Due to advanced information technologies,
all this occurs “in the increasingly short ‘instant,’ the unit of neoliberal
time” (Mann, p. 148). This leads to the “space-time compression” that
Harvey (1990) discusses as a key feature of neoliberal culture. Rushkoff
(2013) refers to the experienced effect as “digiphrenia,” the alienation
of our digital selves from our analog bodies (pp. 69–129). Theologians
might detect in such developments a contemporary revival of Gnosticism,
as the political, economic, and cultural dimensions of life become increas-
ingly removed from the material world.
Finally, a number of scholars have argued that global neoliberalization
might not have succeeded were it not aided by the imperial aspirations
of the USA. In the late 1990s, John Gray (1998), a former conservative
in Great Britain who influenced Margaret Thatcher, reversed course in
his book False Dawn. Here he warns: “Only in the United States is the
Enlightenment project of a global civilization still a living political faith….
In the post-communist era it animates the American project of a universal
free market” (p. 101). Subsequently, the role of American imperialism in
the dissemination of neoliberal thought and practice has been meticu-
lously documented by award-winning journalist Naomi Klein’s popular
book, The Shock Doctrine (2007). More recently, in their thorough review
The Making of Global Capitalism, Panitch and Gindin (2012) have argued
that the USA has become an “informal empire” that has succeeded in its
efforts to restructure other states in order to create a global habitat for
competitive markets. This was effectively symbolized, they observe, on
the cover of Time following the USA’s interventions to ameliorate the
1997–1998 Asian financial crisis, which was itself one of what has become
a series of global crises created by the excesses of neoliberalization. The
cover featured a photo of Federal Reserve director Alan Greenspan,

along with the US Treasury Department’s Robert Rubin and Lawrence
Summers, beneath a banner hailing them as “The Committee to Save the
World” (p. 18).
This has not resulted, however, in a world in which every state and
culture looks like a copy of the USA. Neoliberalization has a remarkable
capacity, as many expert observers have noted, to merge with particular
geographies and cultures, creating indigenous forms everywhere it goes.
Some of these have been summarized in a volume edited by Saad-Filho
and Johnston (2005). I have already referred to Springer’s (2010) obser-
vation that neoliberalization hybridizes and mutates as it spans the globe,
as well as Mirowski’s (2013) reflections on its capacity to absorb its own
failures and incongruities. This turns neoliberalization into an incredibly
adaptive ongoing process, as it quickly morphs to outmaneuver its crit-
ics and opponents. In his insightful analysis in Cool Capitalism (2009),
McGuigan explores particular instances in the cultural dimension where
neoliberalization incorporates disaffection, literally turning opposition
into novel paths to corporate profits. This point is also forcefully made by
French sociologist Luc Boltanski and management theorist Eve Chiapello
in their monumental book The New Spirit of Capitalism (1999/2007).
Capitalism, they argue, has evolved from its first spirit, epitomized in
Weber’s description of liberal capitalism, through a second phase called
“organized capitalism,” which dominated during the mid-to-late twenti-
eth century, to the “new spirit,” which emphasizes creativity, networking,
and the shift of labor from conventional employment to project work.
This new spirit, which emerged during the period from 1965 to 1995,
incorporates the zeitgeist of the global rebellions of the 1960s into its
agenda, emphasizing the autonomy and creativity of individual laborers
while simultaneously capturing their efforts in the service of the new capi-
talism. In the USA, according to Peck’s assessment (2010, Chap. 5), this
appears most clearly in the immense popularity of Richard Florida’s book
The Rise of the Creative Class (2002/2012), and the attendant “cool cit-
ies” movement, with the characteristic “hipsterization strategies” of cities
attempting to attract highly educated and technologically savvy younger
workers. The individual residents of the “cool cities,” in turn, bear the
features of the new spirit of capitalism. These new subjects oddly resemble
the postmodern self, described so well by psychoanalyst Stephen Mitchell
(1993). They manifest a psyche that is “multiple, discontinuous, and
fluid”—a point to which I will return in the next chapter.
42 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
We are left then with a new world order unlike any we have seen before.
It is, in brief, a global hegemony that does not look like a hegemony, one
that claims to be a liberator of humankind even as it shackles the human
soul. This order is aptly summarized by Wendy Brown (2015):
Thus the paradox of neoliberalism as a global phenomenon, ubiquitous and

omnipresent, yet disunified and nonidentical with itself. This dappled, stri-
ated, and flickering complexion is also the face of an order replete with
contradiction and disavowal, structuring markets it claims to liberate from
structure, intensely governing subjects it claims to free from government,
strengthening and retasking states it claims to abjure (pp. 48–49).
NEOLIBERALISM AS A CULTURAL PROJECT

The preceding overview of the history of neoliberalization focuses on
the political and economic dimensions of this process. However, as the
last two paragraphs already insinuate, this is not all there is to say about
neoliberalism. Sociologists Centeno and Cohen (2012) have argued that
neoliberalism is not just an economic and political project but also a cul-
tural project. Indeed, if this were not the case, my explorations in the
next chapter into the ways neoliberalism has transformed the social, inter-
personal, and psychological spheres would not be conceivable. For now,
I will simply comment on the manner in which neoliberalism is a cultural
project.
We must first understand that cultural transformation was part of the
neoliberal impulse from its very inception. As Davies (2014) observes: “A
defining trait of neoliberalism is that it abandons this liberal conceit of
separate economic, social and political spheres, evaluating all three accord-
ing to a single economic logic” (p. 20). Hayek, in The Road to Serfdom
(1944/2007), proclaims: “This is really the crux of the matter. Economic
control is not merely control of a sector of human life which can be
separated from the rest; it is the control of the means for all our ends”
(pp. 126–127). This was concisely formulated by Margaret Thatcher in
a famous 1981 interview published in London’s Sunday Times (Butt,
1981): “Economics are the method; the object is to change the heart and
soul.” Foucault (1979/2008), in a prescient analysis of neoliberalism in
his final set of lectures, saw this clearly: “So it is not a question of freeing
an empty space, but of taking the formal principles of a market economy
and referring and relating them to, of projecting them on to a general
art of government” (p. 131). Extending Foucault’s spirit to the present,

Wendy Brown (2015) encapsulates the ultimate successes of the market’s
governmentality:
Neoliberalization is generally more termitelike than lionlike … its mode of

reason boring in capillary fashion into the trunks and branches of work-
places, schools, public agencies, social and political discourse, and above
all, the subject. Even the termite metaphor is not quite apt: Foucault would
remind us that any ascendant political rationality is not only destructive, but
brings new subjects, conduct, relations, and worlds into being (pp. 35–36).
It is possible, once again, to historicize this development. Whereas Marxist

revisionists, such as Duménil and Lévy (2011) and Harvey (2005), trace
the emergence of neoliberal power to a capitalist “crisis of accumulation”
that led to “stagflation” in the 1970s, the culture of neoliberalism largely
evolved, in parallel and overlapping the economic crisis, from the sociopo-
litical upheavals that spanned the globe in 1968. This observation has been
put forward by several scholars, including Dufour (2003/2008, p. 157),
McGuigan (2009, pp. 20–30), Harvey (2005, pp. 41–42), Boltanski and
Chiapello (1999/2007, pp. 167–202), and Jones (2012, p. 15). These
broad social engagements, which corresponded in the USA with the civil
rights movement, the anti-war movement, and second-wave feminism,
emphasized individual freedoms and distrusted the state and other collec-
tive forms of authority. This was surely a crisis also for neoliberal interests,
with their dependence on social stability and “law and order.” However,
we may justifiably see this as an original instance of neoliberalism’s abil-
ity to overcome and incorporate opposition. As briefly mentioned in the
previous section, the response of neoliberalization was to co-opt the lib-
ertarian spirit of these protest movements, merging them into its own
project of radical individualism and anti-collectivism. The result was a new
way of organizing society. Thus Dardot and Laval (2009/2013), drawing
upon Foucault, assert: “Neo-liberalism does not only respond to a crisis
of accumulation: it responds to a crisis of governmentality” (p. 11). They
conclude: “at stake in neo-liberalism is nothing more, nor less, than the
form of our existence—the way in which we are led to conduct ourselves, to
relate to others and to ourselves” (p. 3, emphasis in original).
What is this neoliberal form of existence? Dardot and Laval (2009/2013),
Davies (2014) and Brown (2015) are in general agreement: neoliberal
societies are founded upon the principles of competition and inequality.
44 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Dardot and Laval contend that neoliberalism is not simply an economic

policy or ideology, but is a global rationality that organizes all of life “in
accordance with the universal principle of competition” (p. 4). Likewise,
Brown (2015) reiterates Foucault’s observation that neoliberalism is a
radical departure from previous versions of capitalism, in that “compe-
tition replaces exchange as the market’s root principle and basic good”
(p. 36). She continues: “This subtle shift from exchange to competition
as the essence of the market means that all market actors are rendered as
little capitals (rather than as owners, workers, and consumers) competing
with, rather than exchanging with each other” (p. 36).
In such a society, every individual becomes an entrepreneur, manag-
ing and marketing the self as a personal enterprise and investment. This
is evident in the world of social media such as Facebook and LinkedIn, as
well as dating websites, where one’s profile becomes a personal form of
self-marketing. It is even apparent in the academy:
The best university scholars are characterized as entrepreneurial and invest-

ment savvy, not simply by obtaining grants or fellowships, but by generating
new projects and publications from old research, calculating publication and
presentation venues, and circulating themselves and their work according to
what will enhance their value (Brown, 2015, pp. 36–37).
Moreover, because each person must depend on their own creativity and
effort alone, “we have no guarantee of security, protection, or even sur-
vival.” Each individual subject “is at persistent risk of failure, redundancy
and abandonment through no doing of its own, regardless of how savvy
and responsible it is” (Brown, 2015, p. 37). Social and corporate risks are
shifted onto vulnerable individuals, who are then left to their own fate.
Due to the dismantling of social-security programs by neoliberal policies,
“this jeopardy reaches down to minimum needs for food and shelter”
(p. 37). This helps explain why my psychotherapy patients today, com-
pared to those during the mid-1980s, experience themselves as living on
the edge of a precipice.
In a system in which competition replaces exchange, Brown asserts,
“inequality replaces equality” (p. 64). In the words of Davies (2014), “To
argue in favour of competition and competitiveness is necessarily to argue
in favour of inequality, given that competitive activity is defined partly by
the fact that it pursues an unequal outcome” (p. 37). Davies contends
that this eventually results in “multiple inequalities”: “The inequality
that occurs within the market sphere is separate from the inequality that
occurs within the cultural sphere, which is separate from the inequality
that occurs within the political sphere, and so on” (p. 35, emphasis in
original). We will see this in the following chapter, where it will become
apparent that inequality is recapitulated in the social, interpersonal, and
even psychological spheres.
Finally, founding society upon competition and inequality necessarily
enhances the level of violence within society. Society is reconceived as an
arena where the “survival of the fittest” is the order of the day. Brown
(2015) notes: “Competition yields winners and losers; capital succeeds
by destroying or cannibalizing other capitals” (p. 64). This is an order,
she argues, where the tenet of self-interest has finally been supplanted
by the law of self-sacrifice: “In short, homo oeconomicus today may no
longer have interest at its heart, indeed, may no longer have a heart at
all” (p. 84). Generally, scholars critical of neoliberalism have highlighted
the “Darwinian” character of neoliberal culture, with its emphasis on iso-
lated individualism and competition. Some, such as Susan Searls Giroux
(2010), have gone further, suggesting that neoliberal culture is Sadean,
referring to the work and demeanor of the French radical philosopher
Marquis de Sade (from whose infamy we have derived the word sadism).
She concludes:
The essential plot ingredients of Sade’s malevolent, imaginary universe are

uncannily recapitulated in the hard realities of a racially driven neoliberal-
ized society that I have already sketched above: ruthless, efficient instru-
mentalization; the severing of all social bonds; compulsory amoralism;
violence transvalued as pleasure, luxury, indulgence, spectacle; icy, emotion-
less judgement duly capable of producing endless corpses; erotic excess that
hardens into indifference and apathy; relentless social fragmentation and
violent isolation; the dissolution of thought; the exercise of force and domi-
nation that quickly betrays itself as masochistic self-destruction. A tale of
two sovereignties—the sadistic and the neoliberalized—both predicated on
absolute negation (p. 17).
Giroux laments: “one wonders if today Sade could elicit a blush from a
child” (p. 17). Giroux is not alone. The American Pulitzer Prize–win-
ning journalist Chris Hedges (2009) surveys the cultural climate in the
USA and declares: “Sadism dominates the culture. It runs like an electric
current through reality television and trash-talk programs, is at the core
46 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
of pornography, and fuels the compliant, corporate collective” (p. 92). If

neoliberal culture is even a fraction as malevolent as Giroux and Hedges
contend, alert pastoral theologians and others who care for souls will sit up
and take notice. What they are proposing is that the neoliberal paradigm is
generating immense suffering at every level of society, and responding to
suffering defines what we are about.
LOOKING AWAY (I): POSTMODERN THEORIES

AS DIVERSIONS
Discussing the cultural dimensions of neoliberalism brings me to the first

of two sections in this book I call “looking away.” These sections concern
complex issues that function either to obscure our vision or to avert our gaze
as we attempt to critically assess the processes of neoliberalization and their
effects. I must address these matters because, in my judgment, they make it
more difficult to identify what caring for souls demands of us in the current
age. This particular section focuses on the ways neoliberalism has co-opted
postmodern discourse so that the ideals of such discourse have become,
perhaps unwittingly, complicit in what Dardot and Laval (2009/2013) call
the neoliberal “global rationality” or “world-reason” (p. 3).
I must confess this is a section I had rather not write. It produces in me
a vertigo that arises whenever I am about to rush in where angels fear to
tread. This anxiety has two sources. First, I am no expert in postmodern
philosophies. I find the primary sources—the writings of French intellec-
tuals such as Derrida, Lyotard, Foucault, Deleuze, and others—difficult to
read, much less fully comprehend. So I am usually left to rely on colleagues
who understand their thought far better than I do. Second, these theories
have shaped the work of at least an entire generation of academics, espe-
cially in the humanities. This includes religious studies and theology. And
it includes my own work. Indeed, the spirit of Foucault (though not nec-
essarily his vocabulary) infuses the next chapter of this book, particularly
his explorations of governmentality. Thus criticizing these theories can feel
like a betrayal of one’s parents, and causes me to fear (perhaps neuroti-
cally so) the disapproval of my academic peers. I will begin by pointing to
historical markers of the emergence of this postmodern–neoliberal align-
ment, follow up by articulating a false binary that facilitated this collusion,
then inviting several theorists who have addressed this complicity to speak.
Finally, I will conclude by identifying an approach that may help us move
past this theoretical gridlock.
In the previous section, I recalled that an initial example of the neolib-

eral capacity to incorporate the opposition was its transformation of the
social protests that broke out internationally in 1968. Harvey (2005) notes
that these movements “had social justice as a primary political objective.”
However, they also “were strongly inflected with the desire for greater
personal freedoms” (p. 41). Harvey argues that there was an uneasy ten-
sion between these motives: “Pursuit of social justice presupposes social
solidarities and a willingness to submerge individual wants, needs, and
desires in the cause of some more general struggle” (p. 41). Neoliberal
rhetoric, he continues, was able to exploit this tension, and succeeded in
driving a wedge between the “libertarianism, identity politics,” and “mul-
ticulturalism” of these movements and “the social forces ranged in pursuit
of social justice” (p. 41). Harvey then concludes:
Neoliberalization required both politically and economically the construc-

tion of a neoliberal market-based populist culture of differentiated consum-
erism and individual libertarianism. As such it proved more than a little
compatible with that cultural impulse called ‘post-modernism’ which had
long been lurking in the wings but could now emerge full-blown as both a
cultural and an intellectual dominant. This was the challenge that corpora-
tions and class elites set out to finesse in the 1980s (p. 42).
Boltanski and Chiapello (1999/2007) contend that the “new spirit of

capitalism” grew out of these same movements, as the new leaders of cor-
porate management drew upon the leftist sentiments of their youth:
Thus, for example, the qualities that are guarantees of success in this new
spirit—autonomy, spontaneity, rhizomorphous capacity, multitasking, …
conviviality, openness to others and novelty, availability, creativity, visionary
intuition, sensitivity to differences, listening to lived experience and recep-
tiveness to a whole range of experiences, being attracted to informality and
the search for interpersonal contacts—these are taken directly from the rep-
ertoire of May 1968 (p. 97).
The similarities here to Deleuzean descriptions of rhizomatous becom-

ing are striking, a fact not lost on the authors (pp. 144–145, 454–455).
Dufour (2003/2008) likewise observes that when neoliberalism was first
emerging into cultural prominence, “Deleuze thought he could outflank
capitalism.” He then concludes: “What Deleuze failed to see was that, far
from making it possible to get beyond capitalism, his programme merely
48 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
predicted its future. It now looks as though the new capitalism has learned
its Deleuzean lesson well” (p. 11).
The characteristics of postmodernity are apparent in contemporary
media outlets and the politics of those who support neoliberal agendas.
Jodi Dean (2009) argues that the “academic left” won the culture wars
only to find its methods adopted by the political right:
The victory of the academic left in the culture wars should be understood
along similar lines: the prominence of politically active Christian funda-
mentalists, Fox News, and the orchestrations of Bush advisor Karl Rove all
demonstrate the triumph of postmodernism. These guys take social con-
struction—packaging, marketing, and representation—absolutely seriously.
They put it to work (p. 7).
Dennis Loo (2011) comments on this same scene: “Postmodernists are

not fans of George W. Bush, but they share his worldview regarding
empirical data and objective reality” (p. 4). In a world where “there is
nothing outside the text” (Derrida), politicians can create reality at will.
The same goes for an economy in which desire is created by marketing
and capital depends on financial investments rather than labor. Eagleton
(1996), observing the congruity between postmodern theory and finan-
cial markets, notes:
Its nervousness of such concepts as truth has alarmed the bishops and
charmed the business executives, just as its compulsion to place words like
“reality” in scare quotes unsettles the pious Bürger in the bosom of his fam-
ily but is music to his ears in his advertising agency. It has floated the signi-
fier in ways which cause the autocrats to reach for their banal certitudes, and
in doing so found itself mimicking a society founded on the fiction of credit
in which money spawns money as surely as signs breed signs. Neither finan-
ciers nor semioticians are greatly enamoured of material referents (p. 28,
emphasis in original).
Meanwhile, Lisa Duggan (2003) notes that progressive social move-

ments in the 1960s and 1970s combined multicultural and identity con-
cerns with emphases on class conflict and labor. Beginning with the rise
of neoliberal dominance in the 1980s, however, the progressive left was
increasingly divided into opposing factions by an “economics/culture
split” (pp. xvi–xx). On the “culture” side of this binary, Duggan observes:
“the identity politics camps are increasingly divorced from any critique
of global capitalism” (p. xx). The “identity politics” dimension of the left
currently dominates leftist political discourse and theory (Dean, 2009).
This camp typically rejects Marxist analysis, and its consideration of class
conflict, as “essentialist.” Intellectuals on this side of the divide are taken
with postmodern theories, which focus upon cultural and identity-spe-
cific forms of knowledge and discourse. Espousing slogans such as “the
personal is political,” which appear undeniably true, they nonetheless
tend to collapse the political into the personal. This evacuates the realm
of conventional politics, concerned as it is with the formation of com-
mon interests, public policy, and the public good (Dean, 2009). On the
“economics” side of the binary, Duggan continues, “critiques of global
capitalism and neoliberalism … attack and dismiss cultural and identity
politics at their peril” (p. xx). This divide between economics and culture
has become so apparent to scholars across disciplines that many are sug-
gesting a range of strategies to mend this rift in the left. In addition to
Duggan, these include Brown (1995), Connolly (1999), Dean (2009),
Fraser (1997), and Springer (2012). The point here is that postmodern
theories tend to fall down firmly on the “culture” side of this binary. One
consequence has been that social justice is now routinely identified with
cultural and identity issues, which means that justice is reduced almost
entirely to undoing discrimination. In the meantime, the concern for
economic justice and equality, with its attention to class, slips from view.
This happens to suit neoliberal powers just fine. I will return our atten-
tion to this false binary at the conclusion of this section.
Turning to others who perceive an alliance between postmodern theo-
ries and neoliberalism, we look first to those we might expect to take such
a stance—the Marxist revisionists. These include not only Harvey (1990,
2005), but Fredric Jameson (1991) and Terry Eagleton (1996). Jameson
(1991), for example, observes how postmodern critical theories have inad-
vertently supported neoliberal agendas. He effectively accuses these meth-
odologies of Gnosticism in their approach to theory building, in which “the
deeper logic of the postmodern … imperceptibly turns into its own theory
and the theory of itself” (p. xii). The title of his book—Postmodernism,
or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism—reveals his conclusion: that late
capitalism is the embodiment of postmodernity. Eagleton, for his part,
acknowledges that postmodern critical theories have succeeded in gaining a
hearing for marginalized voices and many of the world’s downtrodden. At
the same time, he argues, such theories have often committed “egregious
50 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
excesses” (p. 24). And so, what are these “excesses”? First, they tend to re-
create orthodox binaries. Eagleton (1996) contends:
For all its vaunted openness to the Other, postmodernism can be quite as
exclusive and censorious as the orthodoxies it opposes. One may, by and
large, speak of human culture but not human nature, gender but not class,
the body but not biology, jouissance but not justice, post-colonialism but
not the petty bourgeoisie. It is a thoroughly orthodox heterodoxy, which
like any imaginary form of identity needs its bogeymen and straw targets in
order to stay in business (p. 26).
Second, the excesses of postmodernism may include a cultural relativism.

In their more radical forms, such theories emphasize the incommensura-
bility of local cultures to the degree that they lose ethical import. In their
fear of affirming common humanity (much less the dreaded human “uni-
versals”), they can lose moral standing. Again I channel Eagleton (1996):
But in seeking to cut the ground from under its opponents’ feet, postmod-
ernism finds itself unavoidably pulling the rug out from under itself, leaving
itself with no more reason why we should resist fascism than the feebly prag-
matic plea that fascism is not the way we do things in Sussex or Sacramento
(p. 28).
Later Eagleton notes: “Culturalism is quite as much a form of reduction-

ism as biologism or economism, words at the sound of which all stout
postmodernists have been trained to make the vampire sign” (p. 74).
Finally, postmodern theory exhibits a complicity, however unintended,
with the peculiar character of neoliberal hegemony. Such theories tend
to emphasize “hybridity” and pluralism regarding culture. However, as
Eagleton (1996) observes: “Capitalism is the most pluralistic order his-
tory has ever known, restlessly transgressing boundaries and dismantling
oppositions, pitching together diverse life-forms and continually overflow-
ing the measure” (p. 133). The position of the Marxist revisionists may
best be summed up by geographer Hans van Zon (2013), who states:
“Postmodernism disarmed the left with respect to neoliberalism. Both ideolo-
gies helped to focus people on themselves (or sub-culture) rather than the
public good” (p. 112, emphasis added).
But lately such criticism has not been limited to Marxist revisionists.
It is also emerging in quarters that have been dominated by postmodern
critical theories, such as postcolonial theories and critical feminist theories.
Neil Lazarus (2011) excoriates his postcolonialist colleagues for their rigid
adherence to poststructuralist orthodoxy, a devotion he believes at times
causes them to overlook the claims upon common humanity made by
indigenous artists and writers in previously ignored or diaspora popula-
tions. Using specific examples, he demonstrates that, while interviewing
these artists or reviewing such literature, many postcolonial scholars sim-
ply miss the elements within such work that do not fit into the postmod-
ern sensibility (pp. 21–88).
Lazarus (2011) also notes that postcolonial theory developed in par-
allel with neoliberalism, in the late 1970s, and, like neoliberalism, came
to full flower in the 1990s. Furthermore, he asserts: “Especially after
the collapse of historical communism in 1989, it was disposed to pro-
nounce Marxism dead and buried also” (p. 9). For Homi Bhabha, Lazarus
observes: “‘Postcolonial criticism,’ as he understands and champions it, is
constitutively anti-Marxist … it disavows nationalism as such and refuses
an antagonistic or struggle-based model of politics in favour of one that
emphasises ‘cultural difference’” (p. 12). In other words, in terms of the
economics/culture split Duggan (2003) and others describe, the postco-
lonial critics Lazarus reviews are committed to the “culture” side of the
divide. Accordingly, they have largely declined to criticize capitalism. As
Lazarus avows: “Within postcolonial studies, it is notable that the core
concepts of ‘colonialism’ and even ‘imperialism’ are routinely severed
from the concept of ‘capitalism’” (p. 36). This includes attention to class.
In Lazarus’ words: “Although it is ubiquitously cited in passing … the
category of class is seldom afforded sustained or specific attention in main-
stream postcolonial criticism” (p. 36). Again, Lazarus is suggesting that a
postmodern lens has prevented many postcolonial theorists from criticiz-
ing neoliberal capitalism.
Among feminists, Nancy Fraser (1997, 2009, 2013a) is an exemplar of
those who are re-assessing the feminist movement in light of neoliberal
developments. Fraser campaigns against feminist theory’s exclusive reli-
ance on poststructuralist analysis, arguing this must be supplemented with
retrievable aspects of Marxist theories. Like Duggan, she perceives that
neoliberal ascendancy has produced a division between “the social left”
and “the cultural left,” a situation she terms “the ‘postsocialist’ condi-
tion” (1997, p. 3). She calls upon critical theorists to “rebut the claim
that we must make an either/or choice between the politics of redistribu-
tion and the politics of recognition” (1997, p. 4). To accomplish this, she
argues, feminist theorists must go beyond the refusal of all normative or
52 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
“totalizing” thinking based on a commitment to “postmodernism” or

“deconstruction” (p. 4). In a column written for The Guardian (2013b),
she employs this integrative style of thinking to show that contemporary
feminism has unfortunately become “entangled in a dangerous liaison
with neoliberal efforts to build a free-market society” (para. 2).
Some Foucault scholars are now advising a rapprochement between the
“economics” and “culture” sides of the current impasse. Wendy Brown’s
Undoing the Demos (2015) may be the best example. First, while drawing
on Foucault’s insights to demonstrate how neoliberalism governs society,
human relationships, and even the subject, Brown highlights deficiencies
in Foucault’s method vis-à-vis its ability to confront the excesses of neo-
liberalization. Exploring Foucault’s analysis of neoliberalism in his final
set of lectures, Brown remarks on “his odd neglect of capital as a form of
domination” (p. 73). She concludes:
Foucault averted his glance from capital itself as a historical and social force.
Appearing with striking infrequency in these lectures, when capital is men-
tioned, it is usually to heap scorn on the idea that it follows necessary logics
or entails a system of domination (p. 75).
Second, Brown observes that Foucault’s focus on governmentality

excludes attention to the political as such: “There is no political body, no
demos acting in concert … there are few social forces from below and no
shared powers of rule or shared struggles for freedom” (p. 73, emphasis in
original). Thus Foucault’s methodology contributes to the split Duggan
and Brown identify between cultural analysis (which is concerned solely
with governed and resisting subjects and identities) and political/eco-
nomic activity. Brown (2015) attributes this to Foucault’s “antagonism to
Marxism” (p. 74), and then points the way toward the required approach:
The point here is not to correct Foucault with Marx, but to bring forward
certain dimensions of Marx’s analysis of capitalism that would have to be
welded to Foucault’s appreciation of neoliberal reason to generate a rich
account of neoliberal dedemocratization (p. 77).
Such an integrated method is precisely what is now necessary if we are to

adequately understand neoliberalism’s production and transformation of
human suffering, as well as how the care of souls may respond to today’s
circumstances. Geographer Simon Springer (2012) articulates the method
quite well. Poststructuralism and Marxism, he argues, are complementary
rather than incommensurable. Springer notes that even Derrida, Foucault,

and Deleuze were not entirely anti-Marxist, but rather attempted a rein-
terpretation that in some ways parallels Marxist analysis (pp. 139–140), a
point that is expounded at length by Peters (2001). It would not be fair or
accurate, therefore, to say that these important thinkers are “neoliberals in
disguise,” or even that they imagined any complicity between their philos-
ophies and capitalism, much less neoliberalization. The problem, rather,
may have more to do with the ways their theories have been appropriated
by what Jodi Dean (2009) calls “the academic and typing left” (p. 4) and
by popular culture at large. The critical issue, Springer notes, is to use
discourse analysis to understand how neoliberal rationality shapes human
subjects and relationships, while also recognizing how neoliberalization
effects “material practices on the ground,” such as “state formation and
policy and program implementation that characterize the specificities
of ‘actually existing neoliberalism’ … or neoliberalization in practice”
(p. 141). In keeping with my use of Connolly’s (2013) theory in the next
chapter, I see cultural processes of subject (identity) formation and eco-
nomic/political processes of state and policy formation as self-regulating
systems that are nevertheless highly entangled. I must agree with Springer,
then, that “a considered understanding of how power similarly operates
in both a Gramscian sense of hegemony and a Foucauldian sense of gov-
ernmentality points toward a dialectical relationship” (p. 143). In the
next chapter, therefore, I will examine how neoliberalism forms social,
interpersonal, and psychological systems in ways that are congruent with
Foucault’s notion of governmentality (though without taking Foucault as
the point of departure), while in Chap. 4, I will explore how neoliberal-
ism as a hegemony, or sociopolitical paradigm, operates in a normative
fashion to form and transform human suffering. I do not consider these
approaches to be irreconcilable or necessarily in conflict.
By rejecting the aforementioned economics/culture dichotomy, I
believe my colleagues in pastoral theology and all those involved in the
care of souls can better avoid unwitting complicity with neoliberal hege-
mony. Stated positively, we could, for example, do a better job addressing
the uneven attention we have given to the dynamics of patriarchy com-
pared to those of class conflict. Few of us, I suspect, would tolerate pass-
ing references to “the evils of patriarchy” without conducting in-depth
and meticulous analyses of exactly how sexism pervades society, religious
and other institutions, personal relationships, and the individual psyche.
The same goes for racism and other forms of discrimination. And yet for
54 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
too long, we have settled for oblique allusions to class-based forms of

oppression without comparable attention to the intricate ways this sort of
suffering is perpetrated through all dimensions of society—institutional,
interpersonal, and psychological.
Finally, I must add that clarifications around methodology—such as
undertaken in this section—do not ultimately constitute the identities of
pastoral theologians or caregivers. We do not undertake our theory build-
ing or caregiving because we are postmodern thinkers or Marxist ideolo-
gists, regardless of how useful we may occasionally find such analytic tools.
As Crossley (2012) has observed, opposition to contemporary capitalism
no longer emanates solely from Marxism, but emerges from “a range of
ideological perspectives which are not necessarily Marxist, such as human
rights activism, direct action, anarchism … environmentalism, certain
feminist movements, animal rights activism, certain church and religious
movements and so on” (p. 25). For pastoral theologians and caregivers
who are Christian, the motivation and inspiration for our work arise from
a historical community and interpretive tradition that locates its origin
in the movement that gathered around Jesus. That neoliberal rationality
and practice are profoundly incongruent with the Jesus portrayed in the
Gospels should already be apparent. I will take this up in more detail later
in the book, especially in the postscripts.
NEOLIBERALISM AND ECONOMIC INEQUALITY

Economic inequality as an inescapable consequence of neoliberalization
has been emphasized primarily, though not exclusively, by Marxist revi-
sionists, such as Duménil and Lévy (2011) and Harvey (2005). Theorists
engaging neoliberalism from the standpoint of governmentality or dis-
course analysis are often critical of such a perspective. Dardot and Laval
(2009/2013), for instance, determine that Harvey “continues to adhere to
an explanatory schema that is decidedly unoriginal” (p. 8). It is important
to notice, however, that neither Dardot and Laval nor other Foucauldians,
such as Wendy Brown (2015), deny that economic inequality has been a
widespread result of neoliberal processes. They simply argue that attention
to the rationality and discourse of neoliberalism offers a better way to see
what is truly original about its way of constructing society. This is a good
place to understand the necessity of rejecting the either/or thinking of the
economics/culture divide discussed in the previous section. Neoliberalism
is both a form of hegemonic control that serves the interests of financial
elites and a form of governance that adapts to local circumstances and

shapes individual subjects and their personal relationships. We do not have
to choose. If we devalue the viewpoints of Marxist theorists, we will fail to
comprehend critical aspects of the neoliberal project, as well as envision-
ing possibilities for opposition. Making a similar point, Springer (2012)
concludes:
Thus neoliberalism as a concept allows poverty and inequality experienced

across multiple sites to find a point of similitude, whereas disarticulation
undermines efforts to build and sustain shared aims of resistance beyond the
micro-politics of the local (p. 136).
Stuart Hall (2011) states the matter succinctly: “Hegemony is a tricky

concept and provokes muddled thinking. No project achieves ‘hegemony’
as a completed project. It is a process, not a state of being” (p. 26). Still,
he reasons: “However, in ambition, depth, degree of break with the past,
variety of sites being colonised, impact on common sense and shift in
the social architecture, neoliberalism does constitute a hegemonic project”
(p. 27, emphasis in original).
In the remainder of this chapter, as well as Chap. 4, my analysis builds
mainly on this notion of neoliberalism as a hegemony or paradigm, whereas
in Chap. 3, I will depend primarily on the perspective of neoliberalism as
a form of governance and rationality.
I have already commented on the emergence of inequality as part of
the narrative of neoliberalization. There can be little doubt that economic
inequality was an integral presumption of the neoliberal project from its
inception. Concerning Hayek’s prototypical vision, Jones (2012) remarks:
It also implied a fundamental acceptance of substantive inequality—an

essential feature of neoliberal ideas throughout all three phases of its history.
An understanding of inequality as unavoidable, even desirable, gets at the
crux of the conflict between neoliberal ideals and those of the New Deal
liberals or social democrats—there was an acceptance of the rectitude of
different outcomes for different individuals for neoliberal theorists (p. 63).
At the level of theory, inequality is deemed an essential ground for moti-

vating individuals to work hard and inspiring them to act creatively and
ambitiously. Inequality, too, is essential to the notion of competition,
which presupposes the existence of winners and losers. Friedman (1970)
56 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
famously argued, at the beginning of the neoliberal revolution, that the

only social responsibility of corporations is to increase shareholder prof-
its. Inequality is the unavoidable result of such an ideology. Eventually,
increasing profits necessitates either increased unemployment or decreased
wages, or both. Others have maintained that neoliberalism began as a
deliberate reclamation of economic and political power by wealthy elites.
Duménil and Lévy (2011) assert, for example, that neoliberalism has been
a reassertion of upper-class dominance from the outset. Harvey (2005),
echoing this view, concludes: “Redistributive effects and increasing social
inequality have in fact been such a persistent feature of neoliberalization as
to be regarded as structural to the whole project” (p. 16).
The impact on public policy is well-known by now: decreased taxes for
large corporations and the wealthy, regressive taxes that shift the financial
burden to the middle and working class, regulations that restrict collective
bargaining for laborers, deconstruction of the social safety net, an overall
lessening of public goods and services, and so on. Using data provided by
the Internal Revenue Service, Piketty and Saez (2003) graphically record
the consequent increase of income inequality in the USA. Saez (2015)
recently updated this data through 2014 (Fig. 2.1), demonstrating that
inequality has continued to increase since the start of the Great Recession
in 2008.
The graph displays the percentage of total household annual income in
the USA that is captured by the top 10 % of wage-earning households. The
most noteworthy figure is represented by black triangles, which designates
income including capital gains (a prominent form of income for wealthier
families). Here we see that in 1929, on the eve of the Great Depression,
the top 10 % garnered almost 50 % of the total household income. With
the implementation of the New Deal, this rate fell precipitously, and hov-
ered near the 35 % level until the initiation of neoliberal policies in the
early 1980s. Since that point, inequality has soared back to levels even
higher than the 1920s, during “the first Gilded Age” (Fraser, 2015). This
has just been confirmed in a separate study by researchers at the Economic
Policy Institute (Sommeiller, Price, & Wazeter, 2016). Between 2009 and
2013, they record, the top 1 % of income-earning households in the USA
garnered 85.1 % of the total income growth (p. 1). Sadly, even these fig-
ures fail to tell the whole story, which is revealed when we consider the
distribution of total accumulated wealth in the USA during this “second
Gilded Age” (Fraser, 2015). Currently, the top 1 % of US households
controls 40 % of the total wealth, with the top 0.1 % accounting for most
Fig. 2.1 Increasing income inequality in the USA, 1917–2014. Income is

defined as market income (and excludes government transfers). In 2014, top
decile includes all families with annual income above $121,400
of the recent gains (Saez & Zucman, 2014). Meanwhile, the bottom 80 %
is getting by on a mere 7 %.1
The growing economic inequality in the USA has now been abundantly
documented, most recently by Gilbert (2015), who traces its effects on
“the American class structure.” Like many academics in the USA, how-
ever, Gilbert summarily attributes increasing inequality to an array of
issues reflecting “big changes in the economy,” without identifying neo-
liberalization, or even capitalism generally, as the culprit (pp. 264–265).
However, in their recent joint effort, The New Class Society: Goodbye
American Dream?, American sociologists Wysong, Perrucci, and Wright
(2014) do not hesitate to name neoliberalism as the overarching ratio-
nale for changes in “the new economy” (pp. 45–47). Similarly, political
scientists Hacker and Pierson (2010) argue that the role of technologi-
cal change in the workplace, financial globalization, and inequality of
education has been exaggerated. Instead, they document evidence that
the primary cause for increasing inequality is a takeover of US politics
58 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
orchestrated by powers committed to a radicalized “free market” capi-

talism. The details regarding this seizure of state power, with massive
inequality as the consequence, have also been documented by Gilens
(2012) and Gilens and Page (2014).
Comparable global usurpations of state power by free-market inter-
ests have been traced by many scholars, including Häring and Douglas
(2012) and William Davies (2014). Again, as Reid-Henry (2015) docu-
ments, inequality is not simply the inevitable outcome of globalization or
technological change. Rather, its origin is political. Economic inequality
appears across the globe, wherever neoliberal policies are implemented.
A 2011 report by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development (OECD), a consortium of several of the world’s most pros-
perous countries, noted that inequality was on the rise in most of the
nations it represents:
Income inequality followed different patterns across OECD countries and

there are signs that levels may be converging at a common and higher aver-
age. Inequality first began to rise in the late 1970s and early 1980s in some
Anglophone countries, notably in the United Kingdom and the United
States, followed by a more widespread increase from the late 1980s on. The
most recent trends show a widening gap between poor and rich in some of
the already high-inequality countries, such as Israel and the United States.
But countries such as Denmark, Germany and Sweden, which have tradi-
tionally had low inequality, are no longer spared from the rising inequality
trend: in fact, inequality grew more in these three countries than anywhere
else during the past decade (p. 6).
The timing of these developments—“from the late 1980s on”—indicates

their relationship to the globalization of neoliberalism. A subsequent
OECD study (2012) confirmed the continuation of these trends. Similarly,
the World Economic Forum (2011) predicted that inequality would prove
to be the most critical global problem for at least the next decade.2
INEQUALITY AND SOCIAL WELL-BEING

Inequality is not only a prominent feature of neoliberal societies; it is also a
key indicator of social health. In a masterful study demonstrating the con-
nection between economic equality and social well-being, British research-
ers Richard Wilkinson and Kate Pickett (2009) conducted a metastatistical
analysis of empirical studies from a span of several decades. Though the
average level of wealth within countries did not predict social well-being
(once basic material needs were met), Wilkinson and Pickett determined
that the extent of economic inequality was highly predictive of social
well-being. Focusing on the 23 richest economies, they examined the
relationship between inequality and nine measures of social well-being:
level of trust, mental illness (including addiction), mortality rates, obesity,
children’s educational performance, teenage births, homicides, rates of
incarceration, and social mobility (p. 19). Averaging these indicators, they
displayed the statistical correlation between poor social well-being and
inequality (Fig. 2.2)3.
The steep gradient of the line of statistical significance indicates a high
correlation between inequality and these nine measures. This illustrates
that the USA, though wealthier than other countries in terms of gross
domestic product (GDP), has—among other things—significantly shorter
average life spans, more mental illness and obesity, and higher rates of
Fig. 2.2 Income inequality and social well-being: The world’s 23 wealthiest
countries
60 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
incarceration than any of the other countries. Wilkinson and Pickett dis-
covered the correlation to hold true for all nine measures, even when
considered separately. The correlation for mental illness and drug use was
even higher than most other indicators (2009, pp. 63–72). Given the high
level of inequality in the USA, Wilkinson and Pickett looked more closely
at this country, and determined that inequality continued to predict social
well-being even when they analyzed each of the 50 states individually.
Again, states with higher inequality had lower scores on social well-being,
regardless of how wealthy the state might be.
However, Wilkinson and Pickett (2009) did not conclude that inequal-
ity is a direct cause of low levels of social well-being; they regarded it
as an indicator of decreased well-being. Inequality’s relationship to well-
being, in other words, is overdetermined. It represents an intricate web of
interwoven factors. For example: societies with a high degree of inequal-
ity also tend to be more hierarchical and stratified, leading to increased
shame for individuals who perceive themselves as less successful. These
findings are similar to those of widely renowned epidemiologist Michael
Marmot (2004), who argues that inequality denotes a complex interre-
lationship between status, income, and power. Working independently
from Wilkinson and Pickett, Marmot discovered that individuals living in
highly stratified societies have worse physical, psychological, and relational
health, as well as higher mortality rates. Two other findings deserve close
inspection. First, like Wilkinson and Pickett, Marmot found that it is not
just the poor who suffer more in unequal societies. Rather, individuals in
every class suffer more in more unequal societies. Second, Marmot care-
fully studied the effects of social standing within particular societies, and
concluded that where individuals live on the social gradient predicts their
level of health. In a given society, people who are in lower classes have
worse health than those in higher classes. This holds true not just when
comparing the rich with the poor. It is also the case, for example, when
comparing individuals in the middle class to those in the upper class.
In summary, the neoliberalization of a society leads to increased levels
of inequality, which in turn signals an increase in human suffering of all
types. I cannot help but think that the immense implications of this will
astonish pastoral theologians, pastoral caregivers, and all others involved
in the care of souls. In light of the preponderance of evidence that neo-
liberalism is increasing suffering on a global level, we must question how
pastoral care and theology—which take their cues from human suffering—
have paid so little heed to contemporary capitalism. The correspondence
between economic inequality and human suffering is just the beginning

of the story, however. Inequality, as I have argued, is merely a general
(if complex) marker indicating a relationship between neoliberalism and
the scope and intensity of human suffering. Investigating the specifics of
how today’s capitalism impacts suffering is a task that remains. We must
still, in other words, connect the dots. Further examination will suggest
that neoliberalism not only increases suffering but also is shaping how we
are suffering. This will occupy our attention in the following chapter and
beyond.
NOTES
1. A video illustrating US wealth distribution is available at http://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=QPKKQnijnsM&list=FLucdX5GEDe
5ykVaPeXI-HGQ. References for the data are provided at the con-
clusion of the video.
2. The global increase of economic inequality over the last five decades
has been visually summarized by a series of maps created by the
University of Texas Inequality Project (UTIP). The maps are avail-
able at http://utip.gov.utexas.edu/. Last accessed August 3, 2015.
3. Slides based on the research in The Spirit Level, including one similar
to the graphic used here, are open access and are available from The
Equality Trust: http://www.slideshare.net/equalitytrust. Last
accessed August 3, 2015.
REFERENCES
Bernays, E. (1928/2005). Propaganda. Brooklyn, NY: Ig Publishing.
Boas, T. C., & Gans-Morse, J. (2009). Neoliberalism: From new liberal philoso-
phy to anti-liberal slogan. Studies in Comparative International Development,
44(2), 137–161.
Boltanski, L, & Chiapello, E. (1999/2007). The new spirit of capitalism (Gregory
Elliott, Trans.). London: Verso.
NY: Zone Books.
Butt, R. (1981, May 1). Mrs. Thatcher: The first two years. The Sunday Times.
Retrieved August 6, 2015, from http://www.margaretthatcher.org/
document/104475
62 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Connolly, W. E. (1999). Assembling the left. Boundary, 2, 26(3), 47–54.
Crossley, J. G. (2012). Jesus in an age of neoliberalism: Quests, scholarship and ideol-
ogy. Sheffield: Equinox Publishing.
Dean, J. (2009). Democracy and other neoliberal fantasies: Communicative capital-
ism and left politics. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Polity Press.
Duggan, L. (2003). The twilight of equality? Neoliberalism, cultural politics, and
the attack on democracy. Boston, MA: Beacon Press.
Duménil, G., & Lévy, D. (2011). The crisis of neoliberalism. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press.
Eagleton, T. (1996). The illusions of postmodernism. Malden, MA: Blackwell
Publishing.
Florida, R. (2002/2012). The rise of the creative class: Revisited. New York, NY:
Basic Books.
Foucault, M. (1979/2008). In M. Senellart (Ed.), The birth of biopolitics: Lectures
at the College de France, 1978-1979 (Graham Burchell, Trans.). New York, NY:
Picador.
Fraser, N. (1997). Justice interruptus: Critical reflections on the “postsocialist” con-
dition. New York, NY: Routledge.
Fraser, N. (2009). Feminism, capitalism and the cunning of history. New Left
Review, 56(March/April), 97–117.
Fraser, N. (2013a). Fortunes of feminism: From state-managed capitalism to neolib-
eral crisis. London: Verso.
Fraser, N. (2013b, October 13). How feminism became capitalism’s handmaiden—
And how to reclaim it. The Guardian. Retrieved February 28, 2016, from
http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/oct/14/feminism-
capitalist-handmaiden-neoliberal
Fraser, S. (2015). The age of acquiescence: The life and death of American resistance
to organized wealth and power. New York, NY: Little, Brown and Company.
Friedman, M. (1951). Neo-liberalism and its prospects. Farmand, 17, 89–93
Retrieved May 17, 2015, from http://0055d26.netsolhost.com/friedman/
pdfs/other_commentary/Farmand.02.17.1951.pdf.
Friedman, M. (1970, September). The social responsibility of business is to

increase its profits. The New York Times Magazine. Retrieved January 11, 2014,
from http://www.stthomas.edu/cathstudies/cst/facdevelop/missiondriven-
cit/Friedman1stpage.pdf
George, S. (2000). A short history of neoliberalism: Twenty years of elite econom-
ics and emerging opportunities for structural change. In W. Bello, N. Bullard,
& K. Malhotra (Eds.), Global finance: New thinking on regulating speculative
capital markets (pp. 27–35). London: Zed Books.
Gilbert, D. (2015). The American class structure in an age of growing inequality
(9th ed.). Los Angeles, CA: SAGE Publications.
Gilens, M. (2012). Affluence & influence: Economic inequality and political power
in America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press and the Russell Sage
Foundation.
Gilens, M., & Page, B. I. (2014). Testing theories of American politics: Elites,
interest groups, and average citizens. Perspectives on Politics, 12(3), 564–581.
Giroux, S. S. (2010). Sade’s revenge: Racial neoliberalism and the sovereignty of
negation. Patterns of Prejudice, 44(1), 1–26.
Gray, J. (1998). False dawn: The delusions of global capitalism. New York, NY: The
New Press.
Hacker, J. S., & Pierson, P. (2010). Winner-take-all politics: How Washington
made the rich richer—And turned its back on the middle class. New York, NY:
Simon & Schuster.
Hall, S. (2011). The neoliberal revolution: Thatcher, Blair, Cameron—The long
march of neoliberalism continues. Soundings, 48, 9–27.
Häring, N., & Douglas, N. (2012). Economists and the powerful: Convenient theo-
ries, distorted facts, ample rewards. London: Anthem Press.
Harvey, D. (1990). The condition of postmodernity: An enquiry into the origins of
cultural change. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishing.
Harvey, D. (2005). A brief history of neoliberalism. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Hayek, F. A. (1944/2007). In B. Caldwell (Ed.), The road to serfdom: Text and
documents, the definitive edition. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Hedges, C. (2009). Empire of illusion: The end of literacy and the triumph of spec-
tacle. New York, NY: Nation Books.
Jameson, F. (1991). Postmodernism, or, the cultural logic of late capitalism.
Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Keynes, J. M. (1936/2008). The general theory of employment, interest and money.
La Vergne, TN: BN Publishing.
Klein, N. (2007). The shock doctrine: The rise of disaster capitalism. New York, NY:
Metropolitan Books.
64 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Lazarus, N. (2011). The postcolonial unconscious. Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press.
Loo, D. (2011). Globalization and the demolition of society. Glendale, CA:
Larkmead Press.
Mann, G. (2013). Disassembly required: A field guide to actually existing capital-
ism. Edinburgh: AK Press.
Marmot, M. (2004). The status syndrome: How social standing affects our health
and longevity. New York, NY: Times Books, Henry Holt and Company.
McGuigan, J. (2009). Cool capitalism. London: Pluto Press.
Mirowski, P. (2013). Never let a serious crisis go to waste: How neoliberalism sur-
vived the financial meltdown. London: Verso.
Mitchell, S. A. (1993). Hope and dread in psychoanalysis. New York, NY: Basic
Books.
Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development. (2011). Growing
income inequality in OECD countries: What drives it and how can policy tackle
it? Paris, France: OECD Publishing.
Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development. (2012). Divided we
stand: Why inequality keeps rising. Paris, France: OECD Publishing.
Panitch, L., & Gindin, S. (2012). The making of global capitalism: The political
economy of American empire. London: Verso.
Peck, J. (2010). Constructions of neoliberal reason. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Peters, M. A. (2001). Poststructuralism, Marxism, and neoliberalism: Between the-
ory and politics. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers.
Piketty, T., & Saez, E. (2003). Income inequality in the United States, 1913-
1998. Quarterly Journal of Economics, 118(1), 1–39.
Reid-Henry, S. (2015). The political origins of inequality: Why a more equal world
is better for us all. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Rushkoff, D. (2013). Present shock: When everything happens now. New York, NY:
Current.
Saad-Filho, A., & Johnston, D. (Eds.). (2005). Neoliberalism: A critical reader.
London: Pluto Press.
Saez, E. (2015, June). Income inequality in the United States: Tables and figures
updated to 2014 in Excel format. Retrieved August 8, 2015 from http://eml.
berkeley.edu/~saez/
Saez, E., & Zucman, G. (2014, October). Wealth inequality in the United States
since 1913: Evidence from capitalized income tax data. (Working Paper 20625,
National Bureau of Economic Research). Cambridge, MA: National Bureau of
Economic Research. Retrieved August 8, 2015, from http://gabriel-zucman.
eu/files/SaezZucman2014.pdf
Sommeiller, E., Price, M., & Wazeter, E. (2016). Income inequality in the U.S. by
state, metropolitan area, and county. Washington, DC: Economic Policy
Institute. Retrieved June 18, 2016, from http://www.epi.org/files/pdf/

107100.pdf
Springer, S. (2010). Neoliberalism and geography: Expansions, variegations, for-
mations. Geography Compass, 4(8), 1025–1038.
Springer, S. (2012). Neoliberalism as discourse: Between Foucauldian political
economy and Marxian poststructuralism. Critical Discourse Studies, 9(2),
133–147.
Steger, M. B., & Roy, R. K. (2010). Neoliberalism: A very short introduction.
New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Tye, L. (1998). The father of spin: Edward L. Bernays and the birth of public rela-
tions. New York, NY: Henry Holt and Company.
van Zon, H. (2013). The unholy alliance of neoliberalism and postmodernism.
Vlaams Marxistisch Tijdschrift, 47(2), 110–114.
Wallach, L. M. (2013, December). The corporation invasion: Government by big
business goes supranational. Le Monde Diplomatique [English edition].
Retrieved January 11, 2014, from http://mondediplo.com/2013/12/02tafta
Wilkinson, R., & Pickett, K. (2009). The spirit level: Why greater equality makes
societies stronger. New York, NY: Bloomsbury Press.
World Economic Forum. (2011, January). Global risks 2011 (6th ed.). Geneva:
Author.
Wysong, E., Perrucci, R., & Wright, D. (2014). The new class society: Goodbye
American dream? (4th ed.). Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers.
CHAPTER 3
Going Viral: The Neoliberal Infiltration

of the Living Human Web
Tracing the paths by which late capitalism penetrates and alters the various
domains of human experience, yielding corresponding types of suffering,
requires me to address another complex problem I had rather avoid, spe-
cifically, how to name these domains without thereby distorting the very
character of what I attempt to describe. To identify categories of human
experience and to call them “spheres,” “domains,” “levels,” and so on, and
then attempt to portray their relationships to each other, evokes images of
the overlapping circles of the common Venn diagram. Unfortunately, this
suggests independent structures, or organizations, of human life that may,
either through happenstance or through predictable interactions, inter-
mingle so as to produce shared consequences. Such a portrayal entirely
misses the point. Even to limit their number to three is a didactic conve-
nience rather than a description of firm boundaries natural to human life.
What I wish to describe, rather, are various environments of human exis-
tence within what pastoral theologian Bonnie Miller-McLemore (1996)
has called “the living human web.” Staying with the pedagogical useful-
ness of a tripartite depiction, I suggest that we exist within this complex
interactive web as: (a) relatively large collectives (institutions: e.g. govern-
ments, corporations, schools, religions, labor unions, cooperatives, and
organizations), (b) smaller groups of face-to-face relations (friendships,
intimate groups, marriages, families, lovers, etc.), and (c) individuals. I am
referring to these dimensions or ecologies of human relationships as the social,

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_3
68 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
the interpersonal, and the psychological. Although they are distinct types of
human systems, they are not exactly separate domains, but ways of living
that interpenetrate and are interdependent. One does not exist without
the others, and what happens in one dimension affects the others.
Although he does not limit his analysis to human ecologies, politi-
cal scientist William E. Connolly (2013) argues that the entire cosmos,
including human systems, is “composed of innumerable, interacting open
systems with differential capacities of self-organization set on different scales
of time, agency, creativity, viscosity, and speed” (p. 25, emphasis in original).
This helps us to avoid reductions that, for example, would perceive social
institutions as simply aggregates of individuals, or individuals simply as
social constructions. Moreover, not only might we now understand these
three ecologies of human experience as dimensions of a larger system (“the
living human web”), but also as systems within themselves. Thus soci-
ologists, political scientists, and geographers, among others, may describe
entire regional populations, ethnic subsets, and human institutions as dis-
playing their own patterns, dynamics, agency, or other characteristics that
distinguish them from other human systems. Likewise, interpersonal sys-
tems such as families (e.g. Bowen, 1978) manifest their own distinctive
features. Family therapists, for example, regard families as being more than
the sum of their parts: as homeostatic systems, even as having their own
agency, or “a mind of their own.” Finally, individuals do not appear as uni-
form, static monads. Psychoanalytic object relations theories, for instance,
understand the individual psyche as constituted by the “internalization” of
all the intersubjective experiences, from birth onward, that have affective
significance for that individual. In effect, the individual is a system of rela-
tionships in dynamic relation. The individual is a community, yet manifest-
ing her own agency. Recent object relations theorists have contended that
internalizations forming the psyche are not limited to private and familial
relationships, but include the entire social and political environment (e.g.
Peltz, 2006; Rustin, 1991).
The question for us now is: how does neoliberal governance infiltrate
and modify these various dimensions of human experience, producing,
among other effects, corresponding forms of suffering? Connolly (2013)
observes that neoliberalism, given its hegemonic scope, forces a binary
choice: “It thus inflates the self-organizing power of markets by implicitly
deflating the self-organizing powers and creative capacity of all other sys-
tems” (p. 31, emphasis in original). Given that all systems manifest “a
GOING VIRAL: THE NEOLIBERAL INFILTRATION OF THE LIVING HUMAN WEB 69
degree of entanglement,” in which “each impinges upon others, and

some may become partially infused into others” (p. 81), how does neolib-
eral ideology and practice impinge upon and transform human systems?
Connolly’s observations suggest that neoliberal rationality and methods
reduce the self-organizing, creative capacities of all human systems except
the market. I will assert that this reduction is accomplished by processes
of marginalization and corruption of these systems. Marginalization, in
these instances, refers to how neoliberalism restricts the size, power, or
scope of human systems within its hegemonic influence. It endeavors, in
other words, to eliminate or overpower its competition. Corruption refers
to how neoliberal rationality transforms human systems to conform to its
discourse, ideology, and agendas; or, in other terms, how it co-opts the
reduced human systems that remain. Furthermore, Connolly’s reflection
that systems are “entangled” applies particularly to human systems, imply-
ing that the infusions between them reinforce the forms of their margin-
alization and corruption.
It is essential to comprehend, before moving into particulars, the enormous
import for pastoral theology and the care of souls of the assertion that neolib-
eralism now dominates human systems. I have already noted Centeno and
Cohen’s (2012) observation that neoliberalism is not simply an economic
or political reality, but a culture. Raewyn Connell (2010), likewise, con-
firms that in neoliberal societies “a deep transformation of culture is at
work” (p. 27). Moreover, the neoliberal transformation of culture is not
a historical accident, but, as I noted in Chap. 2, was envisioned among its
founding philosophers. “For Hayek and Mises,” Jones (2012) observes,
“the economy could not be separated from other arenas of social and polit-
ical life. Economic freedom created the conditions for all other freedoms”
(p. 69). The eventual success of neoliberalism in its global transformation
of human culture has been widely documented, especially by the notable
sociologist Zygmunt Bauman (e.g. 2001, 2003, 2004a, 2004b). As pasto-
ral theologians, I believe we have not fully appreciated the triumph neolib-
eral capitalism has enjoyed in its constitution of culture. Thus, in keeping
with the economics/culture split discussed in Chap. 2, we have usually
explored the cultural origins of suffering as an area somewhat separated
from economics and politics, and thus from capitalism generally. Duggan
(2003) asserts, in a fashion consistent with this observation, “neoliberalism
is generally associated with economic and trade policy; the cultural poli-
tics of neoliberalism are considered and debated relatively rarely” (p. 11).
70 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
The broad participation of the theological disciplines in this economics/

culture divide has generally insulated neoliberal capitalism from pastoral
theological assessment and critique.
An aspect of the “DNA” of neoliberalism that is highly manifest in
transforming culture, and thus human systems—social, interpersonal, psy-
chological—is its insistence upon privatization. Duggan (2003) asserts
that privatization and personal responsibility are the “key terms” of neo-
liberal cultural governance: “These terms define the central intersections
between the culture of neoliberalism and its economic vision, in the U.S.
and abroad” (p. 12, emphasis in original). These terms echo the infamous
dictum of Margaret Thatcher, that there is “no such thing as society, only
individual men and women” (Harvey, 2005, p. 23). This logic betrays
its origin in what Elliott and Lemert call The New Individualism (2009).
While an emphasis on “rugged individualism” has characterized culture in
the United States from its beginnings, Elliott and Lemert note that neolib-
eralism has radicalized individualism in three significant ways (pp. 38–42).
First, individuals have become commodities in a market of labor and con-
sumption. They are reduced to “human resources” in an exchange market.
Second, the new individualism exists within “a new conservatism and reac-
tionary intellectual consciousness” dedicated to dismantling public space
(p. 39). Finally, Elliott and Lemert understand privatization as endemic to
the new individualism: “Privatization … concerns the spread of neo-liberal
economic doctrines into the tissue of our social practice itself. This process
expands market deregulation into personal and intimate life, producing in
turn isolating, deadening, calculating forms of life” (pp. 40–41, emphasis
added). Following the common description of pre-neoliberal capitalism
as “embedded capitalism,” I prefer to think of individualism prior to its
transformation by neoliberal governance as “embedded individualism,”
or individualism that retains elements of interpersonal commitment and
group loyalty. This new form is disembedded individualism, and retains
no such obligations. The social space fragmented by this brand of indi-
vidualism is what Zygmunt Bauman has called The Individualized Society
(2001).
This radical individualism is not the only ingredient of the neoliberal
DNA. Aside from its aversion to obligation or commitment within collec-
tives of any kind, the new individualism thrives in an environment where
everything is economized. Dardot and Laval (2009/2013) observe that the
economization of life was a critical dimension of Hayek’s original vision:
“This aspect of Hayek’s position is insufficiently stressed: the market order
is not an economy, but is composed of ‘economic relations’ … and these

economic relations are at the root of the social bond” (p. 125, emphasis in
original). This does not mean that all human relations are monetized, or
reduced to purely financial values. Rather, as Dardot and Laval explicate,
individuals are converted into entrepreneurs, agents who are dedicated to
self-management and who view social and interpersonal exchanges largely
in terms of assets and liabilities (pp. 101–119). Wendy Brown (2015)
summarizes:
To speak of the relentless and ubiquitous economization of all features of

life by neoliberalism is thus not to claim that neoliberalism literally mar-
ketizes all spheres …. Rather, the point is that neoliberal rationality dissem-
inates the model of the market to all domains and activities—even where
money is not at issue—and configures human beings exhaustively as market
actors, always, only, and everywhere as homo oeconomicus. (p. 31, emphases
in original)
Furthermore, the transformation of human subjects into entrepreneurs

requires them to order their lives “in accordance with the universal prin-
ciple of competition” (Dardot & Laval, 2009/2013, p. 4). Brown (2015),
following Foucault, emphasizes that neoliberal rationality, contrary to
prior forms of capitalism, replaces exchange with competition. This neces-
sarily means also that equality is replaced by inequality:
This is another of those seemingly trivial replacements that is a tectonic shift,

affecting a range of other principles and venues. Most importantly, equiva-
lence is both the premise and the norm of exchange, while inequality is the
premise and outcome of competition. Consequently …. inequality becomes
legitimate, even normative, in every sphere. (p. 64)
Thus Davies (2014) insists that under neoliberalism, inequality is not lim-
ited to the economy, but pervades every field of human activity: “This
means that there are multiple inequalities, with multiple, potentially
incommensurable measures” (p. 35, emphasis in original).
The challenge of this chapter, then, is to summarize how these trans-
formations are now manifest within social, interpersonal, and psychologi-
cal systems. The strategic features of neoliberal rationality—privatization,
entrepreneurship, competition, inequality—are not limited to economic
or political ventures. They are imposed upon culture, and dominate our
daily lives.
72 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
THE MARGINALIZATION AND CORRUPTION OF SOCIAL

SYSTEMS
I begin with the most encompassing of these systems—the social. Jones
(2012, pp. 73–84) traces how neoliberal ideology emerged out of a visceral
distrust of all forms of socialism. Braedley and Luxton (2010) note: “This
rejection of socialism in neoliberal thought surfaces as an almost com-
plete rejection of collectivism” (p. 9). The outcome, as Elliott and Lemert
(2009) observe, is that the new individualism has been “responsible for
destroying human communities and solidarity on a scale not previously
witnessed” (p. 39). Likewise, the notable philosopher Pierre Bourdieu
(1998) has described neoliberalism as “a programme of the methodical
destruction of collectives” (para. 4, emphasis in original). This fragmenta-
tion of social institutions began to be apparent as soon as neoliberalism
assumed political power during the Reagan and Thatcher administrations.
Both of these leaders almost immediately became known for their system-
atic dismantling of labor unions and collective bargaining for workers.
They also railed against “big government” as they sought to reduce the
public sector by reassigning many government functions to private cor-
porations. While the anti-union and anti-government views of free market
advocates are well known, most people are less aware that neoliberalism,
as it becomes the cultural norm, weakens all forms of human collectives
and institutions. This has been thoroughly documented by political sci-
entists Robert Lane (2000) and Robert Putnam (2000), who also cor-
relate the erosion of communities with depression and a general “loss of
happiness.”
As an aside, I should note that neoliberalization in practice produces
an uneven outcome on collectives. In Chap. 2, I cited Peck’s (2010) dif-
ferentiation between the “roll-back” and “roll-out” dimensions of neo-
liberalization. During the “roll-back” phase, neoliberalism diminishes the
reach and power of collectives that threaten resistance to its agendas. But
during the “roll-out” process, it actually enhances the power of collectives
that serve its purposes, particularly large corporations and the functions
of government that insure the requisite order, surveillance, and policing.
This highlights one of the many incongruities of neoliberal rationality.
Promoted in the name of trimming the size of government and increasing
corporate efficiency, it actually contributes to the construction of enor-
mous and unwieldy government and corporate bureaucracies, a phenom-
enon documented by David Graeber (2015) in his recent book The Utopia
of Rules. The upshot of these processes is that human collectives are placed
into competition with one another in the marketplace of power. Laws and
rules are established that increase the size and power of neoliberal-friendly
collectives, while reducing the reach and power of virtually all others. The
consequence is another instance of the “multiple inequalities” mentioned
by Davies (2014).
One exhibit of this broad dismantling of collectives is the continu-
ing decline of religious institutions in the United States, a steady erosion
that signifies the general marginalization of religious collectives under
neoliberal governance. For some time, with respect to Christian tradi-
tions, the decline of mainline Protestant churches was widely interpreted
solely as a function of something endemic to those congregations and
denominations. Recently, however, we are witnessing declines in evan-
gelical, charismatic, and other conservative religious groups (Bass, 2012).
This development transcends the erosion of Christian institutions, extend-
ing to religion in general. The General Social Survey (GSS), conducted
by the National Opinion Research Center (NORC), an independent
research institute at the University of Chicago, is widely considered to
be the most reliable source of information on social trends in the United
States.1 Sociologists from the University of California, Berkeley, and Duke
University have analyzed the GSS regarding religion, noting that the
number of people not identifying with institutional religion has increased
dramatically (Hout, Fischer, & Chaves, 2013). One of the researchers, in
an interview with The Huffington Post, observed that the number claim-
ing “no religion” held steady from the time it was first measured, in the
1930s, at around 5 %, increasing to only 8 % by 1990 (Bindley, 2013).
From that year the increase has been dramatic, hitting 20 % by 2012. A
graph from an updated study by Hout and Fischer (2014, Fig. 3.1) illus-
trates this phenomenal escalation in the GSS data:
In an earlier study, again using the GSS, two of these researchers (Hout
& Fischer, 2002) combed the data and concluded that the increase of
“nones” is not due to secularization, because there was little difference in
the religious beliefs of those who claimed no religion and those who were
religiously identified. Rather, they concluded, “The most distinctive fact
about the people with no religious preference is their lack of participation
in organized religion” (p. 174). Later, after in-depth research subsequent
to the 2012 GSS data, Hout and Fischer conclude: “There is still almost
no evidence of secularization” (2014, p. 424). Significantly, in both stud-
ies, they also discovered that the “nones” also show less attachment to
74 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
Fig. 3.1 Percentage preferring no religion by year, United States: 1972–2012.

Note: Data smoothed using locally estimated regression (loess); trend line shown
in black. Circles show raw data. Source: General Social Surveys, 1972–2012
social institutions other than religion, a finding that supports my thesis.

They observe, regarding those who claim no religion:
They belong to fewer nonreligious organizations and are significantly less

likely to vote than persons with a religious affiliation. People with no reli-
gious preference are not totally inactive—they are more likely to attend con-
certs, see movies, and spend an evening with friends at a bar than are people
with religious affiliations, but they are less likely to spend an evening with
relatives or neighbors. They also reported having fewer friends. … We have
shown that the people with no religious affiliation are unlikely to have a
compensating attachment to other social institutions but do participate in
cultural consumption. (2002, p. 176)
Given these findings, it is remarkable that these researchers do not locate

the decline of religious participation within a larger context of deinstitu-
tionalization in the United States during the period under study. Further,
the comment that nonreligious people in the USA “do participate in cul-
tural consumption” vaguely alludes to a possible connection with the neo-
liberal expansion occurring during this same period of time, yet this is also
not pursued in the study. Instead, Hout and Fischer conclude that the
dramatic increase of those claiming no religion is due to the desire of many
people to distance themselves from the prominent political activities of the
Religious Right. I have no argument with this conclusion, except to note
that it ignores the imbrications between neoliberal hegemony and neo-
conservative religion in the United States. Connolly (2008) has argued
persuasively that neoliberalism has aligned itself with a stream of spiritual-
ity within Christianity that emphasizes power, fear of others, individual-
ism, and revenge.
In a more recent study, Hout and Fischer (2014) determine that gen-
erational differences account for the rise of “nones” better than political
reactivity. Here they note that the political backlash against conservative
Christianity and generational differences are “both rooted in cultural
changes and conflicts in the 1960s.” People who grew up during the
1960s and after, they assert, “also mistrust authority and value autonomy
more than those who came of age earlier” (p. 424). In their conclusion,
they expand this finding beyond religion, observing that those coming of
age during the 1960s and beyond “put the individual in the center and
leave little margin for any authority—scientific, religious, judicial, politi-
cal—to dictate a worldview” (p. 444). This recalls the connection between
neoliberal ascendancy and the revolutions of the 1960s that I discussed
in Chap. 2. As Harvey (2005) contends, regarding these cultural revo-
lutions: “Any political movement that holds individual freedoms to be
sacrosanct is vulnerable to incorporation into the neoliberal fold” (p. 41).
My own conclusion is that Hout’s and Fischer’s findings are incisive, but
should be placed into the larger framework of the neoliberalization of
society for a full and complete interpretation.
Meanwhile, the Religious Right examined by Hout and Fischer (2002)
represents a segment of Christianity that has undergone alteration under
neoliberal hegemony. It is radicalized and drained of any remaining com-
passion toward those who are different, including and especially the poor,
and made to conform to what Elliott and Lemert (2009) call the new indi-
vidualism. It is surely no coincidence that the rise of the Religious Right in
the United States paralleled the rise of neoliberalism. Neoliberalism does
align with theological themes already present in this stream of Christian
ideology, a stream strongly influenced by its roots in American frontier
revivalism. As theologian Joerg Rieger (2009) observes, neoliberal ratio-
nality takes advantage of the “top-down images” of God in this stream
(pp. 79–82). It is nonetheless the case that such Christianity also suffers
76 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
what I have called a measure of corruption as it is co-opted by neoliber-

alization. At its extreme, this co-optation yields varieties of “Prosperity
Gospel” (Rieger, 2009, p. 79), and now publicly dominant forms of
Christianity that Connolly (2008) calls “the evangelical-capitalist reso-
nance machine” (pp. 39–67).
Moreover, a second stream of Christianity identified by Connolly
(2008, pp. 59–62, 119–146), one that he notes is agonistic, inclusive, and
tolerant of ambiguity, has been marginalized. Rieger (2009) implicitly
appeals to this stream when he notes:
These images of God at work from the top down are in stark contrast with
images of the Judeo-Christian God, who elects a people enslaved by an
ancient empire in Egypt … and who becomes human in Jesus Christ, whose
life’s work is in constant tension with the Roman Empire and it vassals, and
with the religious establishment that lends supports to these powers. (p. 80)
Hout and Fischer do not explicitly investigate this segment of Christianity,

except to note: “The increase in ‘no religion’ responses was confined to
political moderates and liberals” (2002, p. 165). It appears to me that
religious people within the agonistic stream of Christianity identified by
Connolly would likely be identified as moderates and liberals in the cur-
rent political climate of the United States. If so, then this is precisely
the area of Christian faith and practice, according to Hout and Fischer’s
data, that has suffered the most erosion. Notably, this is also the sort of
Christianity that engages in social justice activities that undermine neolib-
eral interests.
One aspect of the analysis offered by Hout and Fischer (2002) deserves
special attention, because it illustrates how neoliberalism both marginal-
izes and corrupts religion, Christian or otherwise. Hout and Fischer docu-
ment, contrary to the secularization hypothesis, that most people in the
United States who claim “no religion” remain believers. They refer to
these as “unchurched believers” (p. 165). A more familiar designation
for this group is the “spiritual but not religious.” Ammerman (2013) is
no doubt correct when she argues against any strict dichotomy between
“religious” and “spiritual,” noting “that there is actually a good deal of
overlap between spirituality and religion, at least in the American popula-
tion” (p. 259). Nonetheless, under the neoliberal paradigm, it appears
that religion is “out,” while spirituality is most definitely “in.” However,
as I have stated elsewhere (Rogers-Vaughn, 2013a):
The replacement of religion with spirituality is perhaps the most pervasive,

effective, and malignant strategy neoliberalism uses to marginalize theology
and neutralize its prophetic threat. I intend to be quite clear on this point:
In the context of global neoliberalism, spirituality is not part of the solution. It
is part of the problem. (p. 5, emphasis in original)
Carrette and King (2005) argue that the spirituality inherent in the “spiri-
tual but not religious” represents the commodification of religion that has
occurred under neoliberal capitalism. They summarize:
Let us imagine that “religion” in all its forms is a company that is facing a
takeover bid from a larger company known as Corporate Capitalism. In its
attempt to “downsize” its ailing competitor, Corporate Capitalism strips
the assets of “religion” by plundering its material and cultural resources,
which are then repackaged, rebranded and then sold in the marketplace of
ideas. This reselling exploits the historical respect and “aura of authenticity”
of the religious traditions …. while at the same time, separating itself from
any negative connotations associated with the religious in a modern secular
context (rebranding). This is precisely the burden of the concept of spiritu-
ality in such contexts, allowing a simultaneous nod towards and separation
from “the religious”. The corporate machine or the market does not seek to
validate or reinscribe the tradition but rather utilizes its cultural cachet for
its own purposes and profit. (pp. 15–16)
Not only does this marginalize religious institutions, it corrupts what

remains (“spirituality”) by leaving aside the search for shared truth, the
commitment to maintaining a common life, and concern for social justice
that has often characterized traditional religious communities. The result,
according to Webster (2012), is that “contemporary spirituality makes us
stupid, selfish and unhappy.”
The erosion of organized (institutional) religion, as I have said, is only
one instance of the crumbling of social systems. The relationship between
such social fragmentation and human suffering may not be immediately
apparent, especially when many progressive theorists have imagined the
escape from traditional institutions as liberating. Yet today many schol-
ars are asserting that it founds novel forms of human misery. Dufour
(2003/2008) has observed: “The great novelty of neoliberalism, as com-
pared with earlier systems of domination, is that the early systems worked
through institutional controls, reinforcements and repression, whereas the
new capitalism runs on deinstitutionalization. Foucault probably did not
78 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
see this coming” (p. 157). Consequently, Dufour insists, quoting Arendt:

“we have a tyranny without a tyrant” (p. 166). Essentially, Dufour con-
tends that this social fragmentation is grounding the disintegration of the
individual, which I will discuss later in this chapter.
LOOKING AWAY (II): SECULARIZATION THEORY

AS DIVERSION
My use of the erosion of religion as an exhibit of the dismantling of

human collectives brings up another example—again, as with postmodern
thought, especially in the academy—of a theory or set of theories that may
distract us from noticing the destructive effects of neoliberalization. To
some of my colleagues, it may appear that I am over-extending the reach
of neoliberalism to explain secularization. I actually have little interest in
explaining secularity. I mentioned secularization in the previous section
only because Hout and Fischer (2002, 2014) insisted that the rise of the
“nones” was not explained by secularization because their beliefs were
not significantly different from those who remained religiously affiliated.
In the strictest sense, I do not see neoliberalization and secularization as
competing theories simply because they are talking about different things.
In theories examining the neoliberalization of society, unlike seculariza-
tion theories, the big story is neither a general decline of religion nor
the diversification and reflexivity of personal religious expression, but the
erosion of human collectives. Here the decline of “institutional religion” is
regarded as just one dimension of this more encompassing destruction of
public life. However, I do see the secularization thesis and the analysis of
neoliberalism as genuinely alternative interpretations regarding the trans-
formations that are occurring in religion today. Indeed, they may occupy
different paradigms.
My intention in this section, then, is a bit more radical. I wish to inter-
rogate the very notion of secularity from a post-capitalist theological
perspective that peers through the lens of neoliberal rationality and prac-
tice. I begin with a quote. Buddhist philosopher David Loy (1997) has
asserted that “our present economic system” has become “our religion.”
He concludes:
The discipline of economics is less a science than the theology of that reli-
gion, and its god, the Market, has become a vicious circle of ever-increasing
production and consumption by pretending to offer a secular salvation. …
the Market is becoming the first truly world religion, binding all corners of
the globe more and more tightly into a worldview and set of values whose
religious role we overlook only because we insist on seeing them as “secu-
lar.” (p. 275)
A bit later Loy states that “market capitalism … has already become the
most successful religion of all time, winning more converts more quickly
than any previous belief system or value-system in human history” (p. 276).
I will unpack these statements in two directions. First, without suggesting
that this is the intent of secularization theorists, I will explore Loy’s insinu-
ation that the idea of the “secular” leads us to “overlook” the character
of today’s actually existing capitalism. This must include a deconstruc-
tion of secularization in which we ask, in the manner of Foucault, whose
interests the idea of secularity might serve. What motivations or powers
might it help to conceal and thus to immunize against criticism? Second,
I will consider the claim that advanced capitalism functions as a religion.
In agreement that it is a type of religion, I will argue that it is therefore
subject to theological assessment and critique, and that such critique is not
only an option, but an obligation.
At the outset, I should note that the term “secularization” is, if anything,
more hotly contested than neoliberalization. Many scholars may question
the meaning or scope of “neoliberalism,” but few now question that it
exists. The situation is otherwise with secularization. Renowned sociolo-
gist of religion Peter Berger was once known as a strong proponent of the
secularization hypothesis. However, in his introductory essay to a volume
he edited in 1999, The Desecularization of the World, Berger famously
reverses course. There he flatly states, “the assumption that we live in a
secularized world is false …. This means that a whole body of literature
by historians and social scientists loosely labeled ‘secularization theory’
is essentially mistaken” (1999, p. 2). The empirical evidence, he argues,
shows that religion is “resurgent” throughout the world. Since that time
many scholars have arrived at similar conclusions. In his most recent book
(2014), Berger reflects back on his 1999 essay and observes: “I was also
not alone in my change of mind. Almost everyone studying contemporary
religion has replicated it. There is a relatively small group of scholars who
continue to defend secularization theory” (p. x). Berger notes that there
are two exceptions to his “desecularization” thesis, one of which will pres-
ently be important to my interrogation. Rather than a secularization view,
Berger concludes that the major shift in religion is pluralization, especially
80 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
at the level of individual consciousness and practice. However, in my esti-

mation, Berger does not take sufficient account of the decline of religious
collectives that I explored in the previous section. Others have acknowl-
edged this decline, but also explore the increased interest and diversity
in personal religious expression that Berger describes. Bass (2012), while
documenting the attrition of religious institutions, goes so far as to cel-
ebrate what she sees as a widespread spiritual renewal. This is reflected
in the title of her book: Christianity After Religion: The End of Church
and the Birth of a New Spiritual Awakening. Ammerman (2013), while
not denying a broad erosion of religious collectives, helpfully explores the
intersection and overlap between those who consider themselves religious,
and the “spiritual but not religious.” Similar to Berger and Bass, she is
attentive to the increasing diversification and reflexivity of religion at the
individual level.
Secularization theory, however, is far from dead. The notion of secular-
ization rejected by Berger (1999), “is simple: Modernization necessarily
leads to a decline of religion, both in society and in the minds of individu-
als” (p. 2). However, in his massive tome A Secular Age, Charles Taylor
(2007) brilliantly salvages the idea of secularization even as he critiques the
idea of secularity Berger espouses. Taylor is not very interested in the type
of secularization Berger has rejected. James K.A. Smith (2014) summa-
rizes Taylor’s perspective: “Secularization theorists (and their opponents)
are barking up the wrong tree precisely because they fixate on expressions of
belief rather than conditions of belief” (p. 20, emphasis in original). Taylor
(2007) argues that we are all now living within what he calls “the imma-
nent frame” (pp. 539–593), a “social imaginary” (pp. 171–176) that no
longer depends upon any reference to transcendence: “this frame consti-
tutes a ‘natural’ order, to be contrasted to a ‘supernatural’ one, an ‘imma-
nent’ world, over against a possible ‘transcendent’ one” (p. 542). This
remains true even if one happens to believe in transcendence. Moreover,
this imaginary “is common to all of us in the modern West” (p. 543). In
this version of a “secular age,” two things are new. First, religious belief has
not so much diminished as it has become “contestable.” It is one option
among others. We are aware, in other words, that our religious faith and
practice is a personal choice among other possible choices. Second, “exclu-
sive humanism” becomes a possibility:
For the first time in history a purely self-sufficient humanism came to be a

widely available option. I mean by this a humanism accepting no final goals
beyond human flourishing, nor any allegiance to anything else beyond this
flourishing. Of no previous society was this true. (2007, p. 18)
I believe it is in reference to just such an imaginary that Eagleton (2014)

remarks, with a bit more levity than Taylor might extend:
Societies become secular not when they dispense with religion altogether,
but when they are no longer especially agitated by it …. As the wit remarked,
it is when religion starts to interfere with your everyday life that it is time to
give it up. In this, it has a certain affinity with alcohol. (p. 1)
Eagleton concludes that in this sort of world, religious faith “dwindles to a

kind of personal pastime, like breeding gerbils or collecting porcelain, with
less and less resonance in the public world” (p. 1).
I happen to be a fan of Taylor’s work. He offers an exquisite portrayal
of human experience within a certain cultural domain. My critique is not
so much that he is wrong, but that his interpretation of secularity is not
grounded well enough in materiality (in other words, in a political or eco-
nomic context). Berger (2014) applauds Taylor’s contribution, but con-
cludes: “However, the title of the book is misleading. The phrase ‘secular
age’ hardly describes the empirical state of affairs in most of the contem-
porary world” (p. 73). Commenting on Taylor’s rendition of the “imma-
nent frame,” Berger states:
Taylor is a philosopher, and the process he analyzes occurs primarily in the

realm of ideas …. This is a perfectly valid way of looking at this history, but
it is important to understand that the course of human events is not primar-
ily a history of ideas …. the plausibility of ideas is decisively influenced by
developments that have nothing to do with ideas but have an affinity with
much coarser political and economic interests. (p. 51, emphasis added)
Berger follows with an investigation of religious pluralism, but I will take

his comment in another direction. Giving both Marx and Foucault their
due, I invite the reader to consider whether the social imaginary Taylor
describes coincides with the culture shaped by neoliberalization, and then
to ask the question as to what powers or interests are served by such a nar-
rative of secularity.
Let us begin with the first question. There is not enough space in this
book for a full exposition of the intersections between Taylor’s narrative
and that of neoliberal rationality. But I wish to offer just enough here to
82 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
hopefully intrigue the reader. Some of my reflections here must, unfor-

tunately, assume the reader’s familiarity with Taylor’s work. Although
Taylor locates the roots of today’s immanent frame deep in history, he
argues that it clicks into place during what he calls “the age of authentic-
ity” (pp. 473–504). He dates the dawn of this age during the 1960s. This
is congruent with the observations of Harvey (2005), among others, that
neoliberalism is heir to the libertarian sentiments of that decade. So both
the theories of neoliberalization and Taylor’s narrative of secularity occur
within the same time frame. That could be considered coincidence were it
not for the similar content of these descriptions.
Taylor’s analysis of the “expressive individualism” of this age, which
he acknowledges is different from the individualism of earlier times, is
deeply congruent with the “disembedded individualism” of neoliberal cul-
ture that I described earlier in this chapter. Occasionally, Taylor overtly
associates this age with consumerism and a “kind of capitalist sub-culture”
(p. 478), but the references to capitalism are so uncommon that the term
fails to make the index of the book (although consumerism does appear).
Similarly, Taylor aligns the emergence of the secular age with three
modern social imaginaries, one of which he identifies as the economy
(pp. 176–185). He even cites two works by Adam Smith, and concludes
regarding his idea of the “invisible hand” of the market: “There is no col-
lective agent here, indeed, the account amounts to a denial of such. There
are agents, individuals acting on their own behalf, but the global upshot
happens behind their backs” (p. 181). Taylor calls the separation of indi-
vidual identity from collectives “the great disembedding” (pp. 146–158),
and argues that in “the age of authenticity,” individuals try to form an
identity outside “the sense of belonging to large scale collective agencies”
(p. 484). James K.A. Smith (2014) summarizes Taylor’s “great disem-
bedding” as a shift “in which society will come to be seen as a collection
of individuals” (p. 45). This brings to mind Margaret Thatcher’s famous
neoliberal dictum, that there is “no such thing as society, only individual
men and women” (Harvey, 2005, p. 23). Moreover, in the “live and let
live” world of this age, Taylor observes: “The sin which is not tolerated is
intolerance” (p. 484). This appears to concur with Wendy Brown’s argu-
ment (2006) that the elevation of tolerance has an underside, in that it
serves to consolidate the dominant class under contemporary capitalism.
Then there is Taylor’s description of the self as experienced within the
immanent frame, which he calls the “buffered” self. In this schema, Smith
(2014) notes: “Significance no longer inheres in things; rather, meaning

and significance are a property of minds who perceive meaning internally”
(p. 29). Taylor calls this self “buffered” because, according to Smith
(2014), it is “insulated and isolated in its interiority” (p. 30). This self is
engaged in “giving its own autonomous order to its life” (Taylor, 2007,
pp. 38–39). The buffered self is an isolated self: “Indeed, this understand-
ing lends itself to individuality, even atomism; sometimes we may wonder
if it can be made hospitable to a sense of community. The buffered self
is essentially the self which is aware of the possibility of disengagement”
(Taylor, pp. 41–42). Is this not reflective of neoliberalism’s emphasis on
“the actions of the rational, self-interested actor in the competitive mar-
ketplace?” (Jones, 2012, p. 2). As in neoliberalism, Taylor observes that
the age of authenticity elevates “bare choice as a prime value, irrespective
of what it is a choice between, or in what domain” (2007, p. 478). Is such
a self not, in the end, completely responsible for its own fate, as we see in
Dardot and Laval’s (2009/2013) depiction of the “neoliberal subject,”
described in the last section of this chapter? Furthermore, Taylor extends
the primacy of choice to religious expression. The fragmentation of reli-
gious life creates a “nova effect” (2007, pp. 299–304) in which there is a
seemingly infinite array of options from which the individual may choose.
So, we now not only have a “marketplace of ideas,” but a “marketplace
of religious belief and practice.” How is this not shaped by contemporary
capitalism?
Finally, I have already noted that within the immanent frame, Taylor
sees “no final goals beyond human flourishing” (2007, p. 18). Human
“flourishing” has become a virtual code word for the purpose of life
under neoliberal governance. It especially constitutes the meaning of life
within the “creative class” (Peck, 2010, pp. 192–224). Dardot and Laval
(2009/2013) describe the neoliberal subject as guided by this singular
goal: “The self’s new norm certainly consists in flourishing. To succeed,
you must know yourself and love yourself. Hence the stress on the magi-
cal expression ‘self-esteem,’ key to all success” (p. 274). Furthermore,
the social imaginary of the secular age, according to Taylor, downplays
human vulnerability (2007, pp. 36–37). Individuals are not perceived as
vulnerable to forces beyond themselves, as they were in ancient times.
This is also congruent with neoliberal rationality, which portrays indi-
viduals as perfectly capable of managing their own lives without external
assistance.
84 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
I am suggesting that the intersections between Taylor’s portrayal of the

secular age and neoliberal culture raise an important question. Is Taylor’s
revised narrative of secularization better understood as a dimension of
neoliberalization, particularly the impact of contemporary economic and
political forces on questions of meaning and value? I propose that today’s
actually existing capitalism is the material body within which Taylor’s
immanent frame lives, and without which it might not exist. If this is so, we
might wonder what difference it makes. The difference, if we allow secu-
lar discourse to remain idealistic, is that once again capitalism is shielded
from direct criticism. It does not have to answer for its consequences, as
Loy insinuates in the quote that opened this section. This brings up the
Foucauldian question. What powers or interests might the discourse of
secularization serve?
I mentioned earlier that Peter Berger (1999) sees two exceptions to his
desecularization thesis. One is Western Europe, a situation he regards as
unclear and up for debate. The other exception, Berger contends, is not
so ambiguous:
There exists an international subculture composed of people with Western-

type higher education, especially in the humanities and social sciences, that
is indeed secularized. This subculture is the principle “carrier” of progres-
sive, Enlightened beliefs and values. While its members are relatively thin
on the ground, they are very influential, as they control the institutions that
provide the “official” definitions of reality, notably the educational system,
the media of mass communication, and the higher reaches of the legal sys-
tem. They are remarkably similar all over the world today, as they have been
for a long time. (p. 10)
Berger then places this intelligentsia within the context of contemporary

religious movements: “In country after country, then, religious upsurges
have a strongly populist character. Over and beyond the purely religious
motives, these are movements of protest and resistance against a secular
elite” (p. 11, emphasis in original). I find Berger’s comments provocative,
for he is essentially arguing that secularization theories participate in class
conflict. And the parties they serve are the dominant classes, those who get
to “define reality.” This certainly accords with the social mobility I have
experienced. As I moved from the working class of my upbringing, under-
went the formation of higher education, and entered the professional and
academic world, I experienced the struggles with faith and dislocation
that Taylor so exquisitely describes. Thus I easily find myself in his work.
But, despite Taylor’s claim that “the immanent frame is common to all
of us in the modern West” (2007, p. 543), I do not believe it accurately
reflects the world occupied by most of my friends and relatives back in
Alabama. The “simple,” uncontested faith of my parents and family has
endured. This has meant that, as I “left” this world, we generally have
been unable to communicate on matters touching upon religious faith.
This remains true even though both my father and I are ordained minis-
ters. And it is a primary source of pain, not only for me, but for my family.
Following Berger’s assertion, I believe most of the earth’s inhabitants are
more like my family than myself. Consequently, those of us who have been
privileged to receive higher education tend to theorize in rather idealized
ways. We have, in effect, peered into the well of humanity and seen our
own faces. And, perhaps especially because we are not aware, our theories
often serve those in power. I suppose this should come as no surprise to
us, given that the tuitions and grants that fund our salaries and research
originate predominately in the elite classes.
Having said all this, I will conclude this section by asserting that the very
idea of secularity is illusory. For example, though this is chiefly apparent
through theological analysis, the religious character of capitalism has long
been evident to theorists other than theologians. As early as 1921, Walter
Benjamin, in a fragment titled “Capitalism as Religion” (1921/1996),
contended: “A religion may be discerned in capitalism—that is to say, cap-
italism serves essentially to allay the same anxieties, torments, and distur-
bances to which the so-called religions offered answers” (pp. 288–291).
Benjamin concluded that capitalism is “an essentially religious phenom-
enon” (p. 288). More recently, economist Robert H. Nelson (2001), in
his book Economics as Religion, begins with these words:
Economists think of themselves as scientists, but as I will be arguing in this

book, they are more like theologians. The closest predecessors for the cur-
rent members of the economics profession are not scientists such as Albert
Einstein or Isaac Newton; rather, we economists are more truly the heirs of
Thomas Aquinas and Martin Luther (p. xv).
Nelson proceeds to assert: “Beneath the surface of their formal economic

theorizing, economists are engaged in an act of delivering religious mes-
sages” (p. xx). He then spends the remainder of this lengthy text prying
into the details of particular economic theories to substantiate his claim.
86 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
I must note that, in the process, it becomes clear that Nelson is not using
the terms “theology” or “religion” rhetorically. He means them literally.
In fact, he contends that a new field of study is needed, one he calls “eco-
nomic theology” (p. xvii).
This straightforward use of the term “theology” also appears in phi-
losopher Philip Goodchild’s book Theology of Money (2009). Goodchild
describes contemporary capitalism as a system in which both human
life and religion are economized. Money is the heart of this system. But
money is neither a physical object nor does it have intrinsic value. Rather,
it is “a promise of value” (pp. 115–116), an abstraction exchanged on the
basis of a wager on its future value. As such, its nature is essentially escha-
tological. Goodchild makes us doubt whether Taylor is correct when he
states that the immanent frame is an imaginary vacated by transcendence.
“Money,” he observes, “exercises a spectral power that exceeds all merely
human powers.” He continues, “the value of money is transcendent. It is a
promise, taken on faith” (p. 12). But this does not mean that money is an
ideality that floats above the earth. It is, instead, mired deeply in the mate-
rial world. Wendy Brown (2015) has argued that “the neoliberal subject is
granted no guarantee of life (on the contrary, in markets, some must die
for others to live), and is so tethered to economic ends as to be potentially
sacrificible to them” (p. 111). Goodchild would agree. He asserts that,
not only is capitalism a religion, but it is a religion that demands human
sacrifice. For example,
When one comes to consider who ultimately staked their flesh and blood
to ensure the profitability of the ventures undertaken by the eighteenth-
century English merchants who profited most from the new credit econ-
omy, one quickly comes to sailors, Irish navvies, and African slaves (2009,
p. 235).
Things are no different today. Goodchild proclaims: “The credit economy

is a network of contracted servitude.” He concludes:
Whenever one spends money, one spends a portion of the substance, wealth,
and life of those who have undertaken loans. Yet the value of money is
also backed by profitability, including the drudge of labor in sweatshops
and factories, the exclusion from the formal economy of those who are not
employed profitably, the consumption of natural resources, and the erosion
of ecosystems and societies. The value of money is still paid for in flesh and
blood. (p. 236)
Such a system, then, is maintained “at the expense of existing structures of

social dependence, provision, and care” (p. 222). It has to be sobering to
vocational theologians, particularly pastoral theologians, that a capitalist
system such as we now have opposes the value of care. This requires that
pastoral theology must today also be an economic theology. Finally, after
perusing his analysis, it is not surprising to find that Goodchild rejects
any division between religion and the secular (p. 203). Life is religious
through and through. Such a distinction is not only false but hazardous,
for it hides the current system from criticism.
Although theology has tended to avoid the subject of capitalism in
recent years, there have certainly been theologians who have spoken up.
Joerg Rieger (2009), in No Rising Tide, observes: “The problem is not
secularization—as is often assumed—but a kind of hidden religiosity that
promotes the worship of the gods of the free market” (p. 68). In a 1999
article in The Atlantic, theologian Harvey Cox (in the business section,
no less!) reports that, when he started reading The Wall Street Journal and
the business sections of Time and Newsweek, he found himself in familiar
territory. These texts, he observes,
bear a striking resemblance to Genesis, the Epistle to the Romans, and Saint
Augustine’s City of God. Behind descriptions of market reforms, monetary
policy, and convolutions of the Dow, I gradually made out the pieces of a
grand narrative about the inner meaning of human history, why things had
gone wrong, and how to put them right. Theologians call these myths of
origin, legends of the fall, and doctrines of sin and redemption. (para. 2)
Cox then traces out contemporary views on the omnipotence, omni-

science, and omnipresence of this “Market God,” even expounding on
a “market doctrine” he calls “reverse transubstantiation,” in which “the
human body has become the latest sacred vessel to be converted into a
commodity” (para. 10). Such revelations do little to enhance our confi-
dence in the category of secularity.
Catholic theologian Nicholas Lash (1996), in The Beginning and the
End of ‘Religion’, refuses both the categories “religion” and “secularity,”
arguing they are intertwined and mutually dependent ideas. The term
“religion,” he notes, was first coined in seventeenth-century England
and came to represent a segment of life thought to be separate from
other parts, such as art, science, politics, and economics. Lash argues
that what we have called “religions” are best thought of as “schools,”
88 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
and that they draw the whole of human existence, indeed all that exists,
into their purview. He contends: “Christianity and Vedantic Hinduism,
Judaism and Buddhism and Islam are schools … whose pedagogy has
the twofold purpose—however differently conceived and executed in
the different traditions—of weaning us from our idolatry and purifying
our desire” (p. 21). Later Lash asserts: “The secularity of our culture
is an illusion, and a dangerous one at that” (p. 110). Why dangerous?
Lash responds that human beings are “spontaneously idolatrous,” mean-
ing that we inevitably “set our hearts” on some mundane thing. Lash
warns: “And none of us is so self-transparent as to know quite where, in
fact, our hearts are set” (p. 21). Removing the ancient disciplines we call
“religions” from “the realm of truth,” Lash concludes, “leaves our pro-
pensity for idolatry unchecked and unconstrained, with devastating con-
sequences” (p. 110). A similar point is made by Edward Farley (1990),
who locates the origin of human evil in idolatry. Once we identify some
mundane person, place, thing, or state of being with the “eternal hori-
zon,” he claims, we are then prepared to sacrifice anything—self, others,
creation—to protect whatever we have made sacred. It does not matter,
in this view, whether the idol is identified as “religious” or “secular.”
Finally, as one more example among what could be many, this happens
to accord with the theology of Paul Tillich (1957). As theologian Francis
Ching-Wah Yip (2010) has observed, Tillich’s description of faith as “ulti-
mate concern” amounts to a rejection of the secular/religious divide. Yip
surveys Tillich’s work from the time he was writing in Germany through
his “existentialist” years in the United States, showing his consistent
criticism of capitalism and his belief that it constituted a modern form
of religion. Technically, Tillich regarded capitalism as a “quasi-religion.”
The only thing absent from a “quasi-religion” that exists in what is usu-
ally identified as religion, according to Tillich, is that the former lacks
an internal criticism to check its idolatrous tendencies and its suscepti-
bility to what Tillich called the “demonic.” And this, Tillich concluded,
makes capitalism especially dangerous, despite all the benefits it may have
brought with it.
So, why this long discursus on secularization and secularity? Aside from
the reasons already mentioned, I will simply list three other implications
of this section for pastoral care and pastoral theology. First, the religion/
secularity dichotomy greatly diminishes the potential for pastoral care to
exist as a political activity to reduce suffering. Pastoral care must not be
limited to the care of individuals, but must include the care of collectives.
Moreover, this care cannot be confined only to congregations or other

“religious” bodies, but must be extended to other collectives that har-
bor the capacity to resist oppressive power hierarchies. This is an urgent
problem because, as I am claiming in this book, neoliberal hegemony is
increasing and transforming suffering globally and will require collective
action in order to be contained.
Second, much of what I have said is congruent with current efforts in
pastoral and practical theology to act and speak as a “public theology.” I
take this to mean that pastoral theology not only speaks to the public, but
that it interprets what is occurring in the world from a theological perspec-
tive, not limited to areas that may be designated as specifically “religious”
or “spiritual.” However, if this section is combined with the previous one,
we must attend to the fact that, under neoliberal governance, “the pub-
lic” is itself suffering erosion. We appear to want to “go public” just as
the public to which we appeal as a frame for conversation and debate is
quickly disappearing. Under the impact of neoliberalization, the area of
human life designated as “public” has been diminished, corrupted, and
called into question. Whether we speak of public policy, public goods,
public interest, or simply the “common good,” we are assuming a shared
space exists for the voices of individuals and groups to be heard concern-
ing policies and actions that directly impact the quality of their lives.
Indeed, this constitutes the very meaning of the word “politics.” But as
the process of neoliberalization reaches every corner of the globe, we can
no longer comfortably assume that the words “public” or “democracy”
or “politics” denote something that exists in reality. This is a prominent
conversation within the post-capitalist literature. Recent contributions on
this theme include Jodi Dean’s Democracy and Other Neoliberal Fantasies
(2009) and Wendy Brown’s Undoing the Demos (2015). This conversa-
tion builds upon Nancy Fraser’s seminal essay “Transnationalizing the
Public Sphere,” first published in 2007. Fraser openly questions whether
anything remains of the Habermasian description of the “public sphere,”
now that the authority of nation states has been eclipsed by the power of
international markets and corporations. This may put pastoral and practi-
cal theologians in the uncomfortable position of having to help create and
sustain the very public sphere to which they appeal. Otherwise the desire
to be a “public theology” may prove futile, if not delusional.
Third, this section suggests that theology matters. If contemporary capi-
talism rests on theological assumptions, as some have claimed, then the-
ology has not only the ability but an obligation to assess it. Goodchild
90 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
(2009) writes: “To refuse theology is to practice a cruel and unreflective

theology. The fundamental problem is this: what is worth the sacrifice of
flesh and blood, of time, attention, and devotion?” (p. 239). Elsewhere,
he implores:
To what will one devote one’s life? What authority will one call on for
one’s decisions to bear credit? These are inescapable theological questions.
Moreover, the dichotomy between the religious and the secular does not
merely prevent secular thought from engaging with the most significant
problems, for insofar as theology accepts this division of labor and concerns
itself with the realms of belief, meaning, individual faith, and ecclesial tradi-
tion, it concedes much effective social authority to purely secular relations
mediated by money. (p. 203)
Given this urgency, we must ask why theology has largely been so reticent
in recent years to comment on the hegemonic power of neoliberalism. Yip
(2010) observes: “Although capitalism in its early inception can be said
to have emerged from Christian soil, as Max Weber has suggested, it was
not welcomed by Christian thinkers” (p. 13). Karen Vaughn (1992), an
economist, notes that it is “difficult to think of a major Christian theolo-
gian who wrote from 1920 through 1960 who regarded capitalism with
favor” (p. 1). In light of this, my call for a post-capitalist pastoral theology
appears neither original nor radical.
THE MARGINALIZATION AND CORRUPTION

OF INTERPERSONAL SYSTEMS
I turn now to the impact of neoliberal governance on interpersonal

systems, exploring first how it has marginalized intimate relationships.
Zygmunt Bauman (2003) asserts that relationships in a world dominated
by free market radicalism have become “liquid”—fragmented, discontinu-
ous, opportunistic, tenuous, and lacking stability. He observes: “Homo
oeconomicus and homo consumens are men and women without social bonds.
They are the ideal residents of the market economy and the types that
make the GNP watchers happy” (p. 69, emphasis in original). A com-
prehensive discussion would include how this appears as the erosion of
face-to-face communities, friendships, romantic attachments, and work-
ing relationships. For the sake of brevity, however, I will use marriage as
a marker for these alterations. Marriage has the advantage, moreover, of
being a social institution while individual marriages are interpersonal rela-

tionships, thus illustrating the inseparability of these systems.
So, is neoliberalism marginalizing marriage? This would perhaps be
a counterintuitive claim, given that in the United States, the conserva-
tive politics most visibly allied with neoliberal policies identifies itself
as a defender of “family values.” Yet, this is exactly what the evidence
shows. Jennifer Silva (2013), a sociologist, commenting on variances in
divorce rates, observes that economic inequality is now reflected in marital
inequality:
While these statistics may be read as a commentary on the declining value

of marriage and family, a closer look reveals that they are more accurately a
story of inequality—not only of the economic benefits of marri[age] such as
pooled material resources, but also of symbolic and emotional goods such
as lasting ties, trust, and love itself. (p. 58)
Silva adds, “since the 1970s, marital dissolution rates have fallen dramati-
cally among highly educated men and women but remained steady among
those with lower education” (p. 58). Furthermore, in a phenomenon
social scientists call “assortative mating,” economic inequality reduces the
probability of marriage across class divides, thus adding further to inequal-
ity. This leads Andrea Garcia-Vargas, a commentator on this data, to con-
clude: “The rich marry rich and get richer. The poor marry poor and get
poorer” (as cited by Pizzigati, 2014, para. 5–6). Thus we may legitimately
see this as another example of the multiple inequalities produced culturally
by neoliberalization (Davies, 2014, p. 35).
The larger story is revealed not by divorce rates, but changes in rates
of marriage. If neoliberal culture is marginalizing marriage, we should see
a significant change in the rate of marriage beginning between 1970 and
1980, or soon afterwards. This is indeed evident in the data. Recently the
National Center for Family & Marriage Research (NCFMR),2 located at
Bowling Green State University, tabulated and compiled data on the mar-
riage rate in the United States from 1890 through 2011 (Cruz, 2012).
The study notes that the US marriage rate has declined almost 60 % since
1970. Other studies have linked this decline directly to the increase in
economic inequality. Sociologists Corse and Silva (2013), using interview
and survey data involving 300 people, documented the impact of inequal-
ity on the marriage rate. They note: “For people with insecure work and
therefore few resources, little stability, and no sense of a foreseeable future,
92 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
concerns for one’s own survival threaten the ability to imagine being able
to provide materially and emotionally for others” (p. 22). Similar find-
ings appeared in a detailed and definitive examination of declining mar-
riage rates in ten US cities (Gould & Paserman, 2003). Another US study,
titled The Hamilton Project, demonstrated that the entire decline in the
marriage rate since 1970 has occurred in the middle- and lower-income
brackets. During this period, marriage rates actually increased for wage
earners in the top 5 % (Greenstone & Looney, 2012).
This increasing inequality in family life has been reviewed most recently
by Carbone and Cahn (2014) in their book Marriage Markets: How
Inequality is Remaking the American Family. They observe: “economic
inequality is remaking the American family along class lines” (p. 1). More
pointedly, they argue that in the United States, marriage increasingly par-
ticipates in class conflict: “The increase in marital stability at the top is
related to the disappearance of marriage at the bottom” (p. 49). So we
now have a small marital elite at the top, separated from a larger popula-
tion who are struggling to be married at all.
Although I have focused on changes to marriage in the United
States, I should note that marriage rates have been falling across the
globe throughout this same period. The Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development (2014), an economic organization com-
prising over 30 countries, has presented data demonstrating that marital
rates have fallen precipitously in almost all of its member nations between
1970 and 2009. This suggests that the transformations of marriage sum-
marized in the preceding paragraphs have been following the advances of
neoliberalization. I believe it is safe to conclude that neoliberal policies
introduced since the 1970s and 1980s have indeed marginalized mar-
riage, which has followed upon the inequalities neoliberalism has pro-
duced in the economic sector.
Has the culture of late capitalism also corrupted marriages? Has it, in
other words, altered the actual dynamics of marriage, as a preceding quote
by Silva indicates? The idea of corruption assumes, naturally, a prior state
that is to be more highly valued. In older, classical traditions, and cer-
tainly in Christian theologies, the most valued human relationships were
based upon love, which was understood as intending the well-being of
the other rather than purely self-interest. This sort of love was recognized
as a gift. This view is apparent in what Robert Johann (1966) has called
“disinterested love.” “When love is interested,” observed Johann, “when
the attraction is based on a motive of profit or need, it has no difficulty in
finding words to justify itself.” Disinterested love, however, cannot explain

itself: “Why do I love you? Because you are—you. That is the best it can
do. It is indefensible” (p. 19, emphasis in original). Eva Illouz (2007), cit-
ing the work of sociologist Jorge Arditi, makes a similar point:
Arditi suggests that to love means to apprehend the other directly and
entirely. It means that no social or cultural object lies between the lover and
the beloved, that is, that no element of the intellect plays any part in the
experience of loving. These are well-known romantic ideas but I don’t think
they should be dismissed just because they are romantic. (p. 111)
Such a love was once widely understood as the glue of good-enough

marriages, and intimate relationships generally. The culture of late capi-
talism, as I have noted, is suspicious of any value not based on rational
self-interest. The privatization invoked by the new individualism entails
a notion of marriage as a contract engaged for mutual self-benefit. Silva
(2013), in field interviews with 100 individuals in their 20s and early 30s,
observed a core ambivalence in their desires for marriage:
They long for enduring relationships, based not solely on personal happiness
but also on transcendent roles and obligations that ensure stability over time
…. On the other hand, respondents speak of a desire to form therapeutic or
“pure” relationships that nurture their deepest selves, meet their personal
needs, and, most important, do not weigh them down with emotional or
financial obligations. (p. 59)
Silva concludes: “Caught between two impossible ideals of love, many find
themselves unable to forge romantic relationships that are both satisfying
and lasting.” Recoiling, these individuals numb themselves “by embracing
cultural ideals of self-reliance, individualism, and personal responsibility.”
As a result, “they become acquiescing neoliberal subjects” (p. 149, emphasis
added).
Perhaps the keenest analyst to date of the status of romantic attach-
ments under neoliberal governance is the sociologist Eva Illouz (2007).
Central to her analysis is the notion of emotional capitalism:
Emotional capitalism is a culture in which emotional and economic dis-

courses and practices mutually shape each other, thus producing what I
view as a broad, sweeping movement in which affect is made an essential
aspect of economic behavior and in which emotional life—especially that of
94 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
the middle classes—follows the logic of economic relations and exchange.

Inevitably, the themes of “rationalization” and “commodification” (of emo-
tions) are recurrent topics running throughout all three lectures. (p. 5)
Consequently, “market-based cultural repertoires shape and inform inter-

personal and emotional relationships” (p. 5). These repertoires, she argues,
alter the very meaning of emotions, yielding what she calls an “emotional
ontology” (p. 36). This “gives rise to the idea of ‘pure emotion,’ the idea
that emotions are definite discrete entities and that they are somehow
locked and trapped inside the self,” and that they “can be detached from
the subject for control and clarification” (p. 33, 36). Notice the subtle
shift that has occurred here. Emotions are no longer experiences that we
undergo, or even that may overwhelm us. Instead, they become subject to
control, and rational control at that. This makes it possible for the indi-
vidual subject to be intentionally responsible for her emotions, a feature
that is now almost universal in psychological discourses.
Moreover, as discrete entities, emotions can and should be packaged
in a linguistic exchange of information. This is the new significance of
“communication” within intimate relationships defined by emotional
capitalism. As such, “emotions have become entities to be evaluated,
inspected, discussed, bargained, quantified, and commodified” (Illouz,
2007, p. 109). The communication that thus characterizes these relation-
ships is conscious, reasoned, unambiguous, and controlled, which is what
leads Illouz to refer to them as “cold intimacies.” Such an understanding
of emotions, Illouz contends, is not truly congruent with intimate rela-
tionships. “Emotions,” she asserts, “are by their very nature situational
and indexical; they point to the ways in which the self is positioned within
a particular interaction” (p. 38). I take this to mean that she understands
emotions to be co-created by persons in relation, rather than residing inside,
and thus belonging to the individual as her property. They are primarily
unconscious, ambiguous, and even paradoxical, and thus best grasped by
intuitive encounter rather than linguistic exchange. In the communica-
tion of emotional capitalism, the best one can do is “validate,” “recog-
nize,” or “mirror” the other’s emotions. Thus emotions “do not require
any higher justification than the fact that they are felt by the subject.
To ‘recognize’ another means precisely not to argue with or contest the
ground for one’s feelings” (pp. 35–36). This sort of recognition manifests
an artificiality that fails to achieve a genuine meeting. It is an exchange of
bits of objectified information rather than an encounter between whole

persons. What is missing is the deep mystery and ambiguity of authentic
encounters. Such encounters are not welcomed in the hyper-rational and
controlled world of neoliberalism. Illouz concludes with a nod to Butler:
“I am not sure this is conducive to recognition for, as Judith Butler puts
it, ‘recognition begins with the insight that one is lost in the other, appro-
priated in and by an alterity that is and is not oneself’” (p. 39).
The capitalistic character of this “cold intimacy” is also disclosed in its
preoccupation with the language of “rights,” “needs,” and “wants.” It is
subject to the familiar cost/benefit analysis:
This new model of intimacy smuggled the middle-class liberal and utilitar-
ian language of rights and bargaining into the bedroom and the kitchen and
introduced public forms and norms of discourse where reciprocity, sacrifice,
and gift giving had hitherto prevailed. (Illouz, 2008, p. 130)
Neoliberal intimacy has little tolerance for the forms of suffering and
sacrifice, much less dependency, that disinterested love inevitably entails:
“Romantic suffering is no longer the sign of selfless devotion or of an
elevated soul; such love—based on self-sacrifice, fusion, and longing for
absoluteness—is viewed as the symptom of an emotional dysfunction”
(Illouz, 2010, p. 24). Illouz observes that many poor and working-class
individuals manage to retain some notion of romantic love. This leaves us
with an ironic twist of contemporary marital and interpersonal inequality.
Poor and working-class people envision romantic love but do not have
the resources to sustain marriage, while middle-class individuals have the
resources for marriage but are losing their grasp on the idea of romantic
love (Illouz, 2008, pp. 197–237; see also Illouz, 1997, pp. 220, 247–287).
Illouz’s articulation of emotional capitalism offers a tragic example of
how the neoliberalization of culture transforms human relationships. As I
mentioned in the introduction to this chapter, neoliberal governmentality
economizes human interactions even when the value at stake is not mon-
etary. In effect, the individual subject becomes an entrepreneur of inter-
personal relationships, managing them according to a logic of profit and
loss. As many of the dating and social networking websites now illustrate
so abundantly, the interpersonal world has become a highly competitive
market. There will be winners, and there most certainly will be losers as
well. This brings intense and even novel forms of suffering upon individu-
als, an issue that now demands our attention.
96 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
THE MARGINALIZATION AND CORRUPTION

OF PSYCHOLOGICAL SYSTEMS
It has been almost impossible to discuss neoliberal alterations of social

institutions and interpersonal relationships without some reference to psy-
chological effects, especially on what has traditionally been referred to as
the self. Silva (2013) puts it succinctly: “The rise of neoliberalism in the
economic sphere has prompted a radical re-envisioning of social relation-
ships at the deepest level of the self” (p. 14). The “re-envisioning of social
relationships” I have just explored—the alterations of social institutions
and interpersonal relationships according to the governance of neoliberal
capitalism—also alters the self “at the deepest level.” This is because such
institutions and relationships give rise to and shape the self. The ques-
tion now, as before, is how do these alterations both marginalize and
corrupt the self? I suggest that the marginalization of the self appears as
a reduction, whereas the corruption of the self involves a reinvention that
conceives the notion of the “authentic self” according to the therapeutic
ethos of “emotional capitalism” (Illouz, 2007, 2008).
The reduction of self that occurs under neoliberal governance follows
from and accompanies the reductions of institutions and interpersonal
relationships. Referring to the erosion of self-sustaining institutions and
relationships, Bauman (2004a) observes:
All this is worrying, indeed frightening news. The blows strike right into
the heart of the human mode of being-in-the-world. After all, the hard
core of identity—the answer to the question “Who am I?” and even more
importantly the continuing credibility of whatever answer might have been
given to that question—cannot be formed unless in reference to the bonds
connecting the self to other people and the assumption that such bonds are
reliable and stable over time. We need relationships, and we need relation-
ships in which we count for something, relationships to which we can refer
to define ourselves. (p. 68)
Bauman concludes that, without such sustenance, the “postmodern” self

of late capitalism has become fragmented, dispersed, fragile, and discon-
tinuous, or, in his preferred term, “liquid.” Individuals are left to construct
a self by their own efforts, using whatever shards are left lying around. Yet,
he admits, residents of the global market culture may not find a grounded,
“cohesive” self to be very appealing:
Fitting bits and pieces together into a consistent and cohesive totality called
“identity” does not seem to be the main worry of our contemporaries ….
Perhaps this is not their worry at all. A cohesive, firmly riveted and solidly
constructed identity would be a burden, a constraint, a limitation on the
freedom to choose. It would portend an incapacity to unlock the door when
the next opportunity knocks. To cut a long story short, it would be a recipe
for inflexibility. (2004a, p. 53, emphases in original)
As a matter of fact, as I have noted elsewhere (Rogers-Vaughn, 2012),

many now regard an incohesive self, or “multiple, discontinuous, fluid
self,” as something to be celebrated as liberating. Furthermore, the dif-
ficulties involved in equating the cohesive self with a substance that hovers
above history and social context, or understood within the project of the
Enlightenment as a bounded, masterful agency residing inside the indi-
vidual’s skin—a view now rightly understood as exemplifying European
domination—has led a skeptical strand of poststructuralism to discard the
notion of self altogether. Rose (1998), for example, insists:
Indeed the very idea, the very possibility of a theory of a discrete and envel-
oped body inhabited and animated by its own soul—the subject, the self, the
individual, the person—is part of what is to be explained, the very horizon
of thought that one can hope to see beyond. (p. 172, emphases in original)
One problem of reducing, much less discarding, the self is that we are left
without the ability to mount an opposition to domination. Many theorists
now regard this as an intentional agenda of neoliberal governance. Such
a reduced self, argues Dufour (2003/2008), is unable to resist the will
of the market. Couldry (2010) concludes that the poststructuralist dis-
missal of the self makes such a theory complicit with neoliberal hegemony.
Boltanski and Chiapello (1999/2007), expert analysts of “the new spirit
of capitalism,” find this erosion of self to be disconcerting: “But if it is no
longer acceptable to believe in the possibility of a more ‘authentic’ life
at a remove from capitalism … then what is there to halt the process of
commodification?” (p. 466). This recognition leads a number of current
liberation theologians, reorienting their critique to focus upon contem-
porary capitalism, to bring a renewed attention to the self or “subject.”
Sung (2011), for example, summarizing recent developments in liberation
thought, states: “liberation is no longer considered solely or principally
about the construction of a new society, but it is also about the concept of
the subject” (p. 51).
98 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
We may see the celebration of a fragmented self as yet another way

neoliberalization has co-opted postmodern theories, and thus reproduces
another rather orthodox binary. Psychoanalyst Lynne Layton (2004) sum-
marizes my own experiences in psychotherapeutic relationships: “Here, I
want to discuss and critique celebrations of fragmentation. In postmodern
work that lauds indeterminacy, fragmentation is essentialized, universal-
ized, and celebrated in a way that seems not to acknowledge what it feels
like to experience it” (p. 124). The notion of an enduring self-structure,
or core self, does not have to conform to the vision of the masterful,
bounded self of the Enlightenment, a vision that may actually have more
in common with the rational-choice, self-interested subject of neoliberal-
ism than with the reflexive subjectivities of embedded individuals. Layton
concludes:
An error of postmodern theories is their assumption that the experience of

a core self precludes the possibility that one experience this self as evolving
and changing in its interactions with the world and with others. A core self
is constructed and not necessarily stagnant; nor is it necessarily narcissistic.
(p. 136)
A structured self assumes a sense of history, belonging, and the ability to

narrate one’s experience. None of these require rigidity, stasis, or isolated
singularity. And, as I have indicated, this is the only sort of self that is
capable of a form of desire that can resist the ever-evolving ways that neo-
liberalization marginalizes the self.
The corruption of the neoliberalized self occurs as it attempts to resolve
the dilemma posed by Bauman a few paragraphs back. How does one
manage to remain flexible in adapting to the conditions of a world where
institutions and relationships that sustain the self have waned, while also
creating a coherent personal narrative that enables one to cope with these
very conditions? The answer lies in Illouz’s concept of “emotional capital-
ism,” or what Silva calls the “mood economy.” After interviewing young
people born after the neoliberal transformation, often referred to a “mil-
lennials,” Silva (2013) observes that, for these individuals, “legitimacy and
self-worth are purchased not with traditional currencies such as work or
marriage or class solidarity but instead through the ability to organize
their emotions into a narrative of self-transformation” (p. 18). The result
is a “therapeutic self” nurtured by the ever-present institutions of psycho-
therapy and self-help:
Inwardly directed and preoccupied with its own psychic and emotional
growth, the therapeutic self has become a crucial cultural resource for
ascribing meaning and order to one’s life amid the flux and uncertainty of a
flexible economy and a post-traditional social world. (p. 19)
The defining feature of the therapeutic self is a narrative of personal suffer-

ing. Illouz (2007) describes this “suffering self” as “an identity organized
and defined by its psychic lacks and deficiencies, which is incorporated
back into the market through incessant injunctions to self-change and
self-realization” (p. 109). The narratives of such a self highlight the over-
coming of personal trauma, dysfunctional families and relationships, addic-
tions, depression, and so on, which are discussed through the discourse
of disease and pathology. Other people appear in these narratives, more
or less, as either obstacles to or facilitators of “recovery.” Such narratives
have become so normative, and supported by the therapy and self-help
industries as well as the larger structures of contemporary capitalism, that
I am in agreement with Illouz’s skepticism regarding the claims by Philip
Rieff, Robert Bellah, Christopher Lash, Philip Cushman, Eli Zaretsky, and
others, “to the effect that the therapeutic ethos deinstitutionalizes the
self” (p. 61). What these theorists likely mean is that this self is separated
from traditional institutions. The structures of neoliberalism, however—
in accordance with its “roll-out” processes—are highly institutionalized,
and these structures help to maintain the therapeutic self, leading Illouz
(2007) to conclude: “rarely has a cultural form been so institutionalized”
(p. 61).
Does this mean that all attempts to empathize with personal suffering,
or that all efforts to care for others that go under the designation “ther-
apy,” are misguided and complicit with neoliberal agendas? I think not.
But any adequate response depends on additional specificity about what
has been “corrupted” whenever the self is transmuted into the “thera-
peutic self.” On the surface, how could any caring person be opposed to
supporting another’s sense of self, advocating authenticity, or empathizing
with personal suffering? And yet, in the move from “embedded individu-
alism” to “disembedded individualism” I described in the introduction to
this chapter, the meanings of all three of these terms—self, authenticity, suf-
fering—have been radically altered. The “self” now refers to an entity that
can be communicated in rational terms, clothed with one or more of the
many manufactured identities produced by the market, and is isolated from
social and interpersonal obligations that are experienced as limitations on
100 B. ROGERS-VAUGHN
personal freedom. It is responsible for its own achievements and failures,

which can be neither attributed to the support of others nor blamed on
the intrusion of others. Here the notion of self is collapsed into iden-
tity, and identity, as Dardot and Laval (2009/2013) assert, “has become
a consumable product” (p. 293). “Authenticity” now means being true
to one’s feelings, which are things unto themselves, are believed to arise
solely from some deep interior well that is divorced from connections with
others, cannot be questioned as to validity or accuracy, and must be com-
municated in a rational, linguistic, and unambiguous fashion.
The way suffering has been transmuted deserves particular scrutiny,
especially by pastoral theologians, whose discipline is defined by the focus
on “what hurts” as both revelatory and deserving of care. Under neoliberal
governance, suffering, like the economy, has been privatized and deregu-
lated. The privatization of suffering means that it is now “one’s own”
pain. It arises from one’s own individual history and personal life story.
The individual “owns” her suffering just as the capitalist owns his prop-
erty, a condition Wendy Brown has called “wounded attachments” (1995,
pp. 52–76). It is not believed to be shared with others, or thought to be
one’s participation in the suffering of a larger group or of humanity gener-
ally. It is a suffering that is de-historicized in any collective sense, deprived
of a past and lacking hope for a future in which it may be redeemed. This is
a suffering that completely defines the self. The deregulation of suffering
requires the sufferer to manage their own pain and to be responsible for
getting whatever assistance they may need. Prior to neoliberalism, suffer-
ers might have looked to their communities or religious congregations for
help in “regulating” their suffering. In better or “good enough” commu-
nities, this regulation would not come in the form of rigid control, but as
a normalizing of their suffering or, alternatively, a radicalizing of suffering
as a striving toward justice. The redemptive community thus offered suf-
ferers an interpretation of their suffering in light of the community’s tradi-
tion, a ritualizing of their pain, and other active supports.
I am tempted also to suggest that within neoliberal cultures, the only
forms of suffering recognized as worthy of attention are dysregulated and
generally disembodied. This becomes apparent when one asks about what
forms of suffering simply do not come into view. The sufferings of the
“therapeutic self” tend to be limited to “psychic pain,” forms of distress
that can be addressed by psychological techniques and management, or, in
other words, those that can be “fixed” or at least “treated” so as to restore
one’s ability to compete in the market. I have discussed such “technolo-
gies of care” elsewhere (Rogers-Vaughn, 2013a, 2013b).
This leaves out a vast array of sufferings that have to do with embodi-
ment or social injustice. What about suffering that arises from the intrac-
table limitations of the material self, such as irreversible physical injury,
permanent disability, incurable disease, and death? And what about grief,
that universal suffering that attends death? Are we to regard it as some-
thing to be cured or treated as well? How about suffering that originates
in social oppression and injustice, such as racism, sexism, or heterosexism,
which ostensibly require political as well as therapeutic responses? What
about suffering that attends war and violence, or even natural disasters?
Are we to assume such sufferings are simply to be eliminated or tamed
by the psychological techniques intended to manage trauma? Finally,
what about the sufferings of untold millions of human beings subjected
to inhumane working conditions, or crushed by grinding poverty, many
of whom are malnourished or even dying of hunger? This is also a grim
reminder of how the lens of the “suffering self” tends to ignore issues of
class struggle. The sufferings of the poor or working-class individual are
placed beside those of the wealthy person as if they are the same entity and
require identical responses.
Ultimately, the privatized and deregulated sufferings of the therapeu-
tic self must be placed into the context of neoliberal society—a culture
based on competition in which every individual is an entrepreneur who
must manage and promote his or her self as an enterprise (Dardot &
Laval, 2009/2013, pp. 260–275). This corrupted self, a self in which
soul is reduced, is what Dardot and Laval refer to as “the ‘entrepreneur-
ial subject’ or ‘neo-liberal subject,’ or, more simply, the neo-subject”
(pp. 259–260, emphasis in original). Such an individual is constantly
exhorted to “be oneself” and to “flourish.” In the words of Dardot and
Laval:
The self’s new norm certainly consists in flourishing. To succeed, you must
know yourself and love yourself. Hence the stress on the magical expression
“self-esteem,” key to all success. But these paradoxical statements about the
injunction to be oneself and love oneself as one is are inscribed in a discourse
that sets legitimate desire in order. Management is an iron discourse in a
velvet vocabulary. (p. 274, emphasis added)
But there is a catch. A reduced and corrupted self is deprived of what

is required to genuinely be a self. This results in a situation Dufour
(2003/2008) calls hysterology:
To employ hysterology is basically to postulate something that does not yet

exist in order to derive authority for engaging in action. This is the situa-
tion in which the democratic subject finds herself, placed as she is under the
constraint “Be yourself”. She postulates something that does not yet exist
(herself) in order to trigger the action through which she must produce
herself as a subject. Now, given that this support is bound to be shaky,
not to say non-existent, the act either fails by getting always deferred, or is
accomplished but puts the subject in the situation of seeing herself perform
an act she cannot believe in. The subject then feels herself to be an imposter.
(pp. 70–71)
The “neo-subject” is, in other words, set up for failure. Her life is char-
acterized by constant risk (Beck, 1986/1992; Brown, 2015, pp. 37–38;
Dardot & Laval, 2009/2013, pp. 275–278). Furthermore, the privatiza-
tion of suffering entails that this precarious self is solely responsible for
his failures. Citing Ulrich Beck’s work, Dardot and Laval (2009/2013)
conclude:
We are witnessing a radical individualization that leads to all forms of social

crisis being perceived as individual crises and all inequalities being made the
responsibility of individuals. The established machinery transforms external
causes into personal responsibilities and “problems of the system are less-
ened politically and transformed into personal failure.” (p. 277)
The individual’s resignation to this privatization of risk and suffering is

enforced, in turn, not only by a colonization of the mind but by the pro-
liferation of debt. As thoroughly demonstrated by Lazzarato (2012), the
global submission to a de-territorialized “Great Creditor” assures that we
are transformed into debtors who cannot afford to resist (see also Žižek,
2015, pp. 48–57).
Dufour (2003/2008) and Ehrenberg (1998/2010), among others,
observe that this emphasis on individual responsibility results in wide-
spread depression as the characteristic form of personal suffering in the
present age. Elsewhere (Rogers-Vaughn, 2014) I have summarized the
evidence for a global increase in the incidence of depression during the
period of neoliberal expansion. Indeed, Ann Cvetkovich (2012) argues
that depression is how neoliberalism feels: “Depression … is thus a way
to describe neoliberalism and globalization … in affective terms” (p. 11).
Ehrenberg ties this directly to the internalization of risk and responsibil-
ity: “Depression presents itself as an illness of responsibility in which the
dominant feeling is that of failure. The depressed individual is unable to
measure up; he is tired of having to become himself” (p. 4, emphasis in

original). It is perhaps telling that “major depression” did not exist as
a free-standing psychiatric diagnosis until neoliberalism rose to political
prominence, in 1980 (Rogers-Vaughn, 2014). The privatization of suffer-
ing thus underlies the current global pandemic of depression, and explains
observations about the changes in my clients I shared at the beginning of
this book.
Depression is today accompanied by a global increase of addiction.
Ehrenberg (1998/2010) asserts: “Depression and addiction are the two
sides of the sovereign individual.” He concludes, in the same place: “As
addictive explosion reflects depressive implosion, so the drug-taker’s
search for sensation reflects the depressed person’s lack of feelings”
(p. 232). I would simply add that addiction may, in many cases, function
to anesthetize suffering, not only through the use of substances, but in the
form of “process addictions”—compulsive eating, spending, sexual activ-
ity, video-gaming, work, exercise, and so on. Furthermore, as Cushman
(1995) notes, addictive disorders are stimulated in a market-based society
that emphasizes consumption and subjective intensity as the answer to
feelings of powerlessness (pp. 276, 342–343). “Marketing,” Dardot and
Laval (2009/2013) contend, “is an incessant, ubiquitous incitement-to-
enjoy” (p. 287, emphasis in original). Finally, Alexander (2008) points to
evidence that addiction arises as an attempt to adapt to circumstances of
“psychosocial dislocation,” and that neoliberalization has contributed to
the global dismantling of communities and solidarities that ground “psy-
chosocial integration” (Part 1), and thus has funded “the globalization of
addiction.”
This last observation brings us full circle, back to the discussion of
the erosion of social processes that began this chapter, as well as to the
main concern of this book—the care of souls. I have suggested that soul
designates the activity or capacity that holds individuals in relation with
self, others, the world, and the Transcendent. It is, moreover, the form of
communion that makes it possible to even exist as an individual subject.
As Dardot and Laval (2009/2013) inquire: “How are subjects who owe
no one anything to be held together?” (p. 291). Thus Alexander (2008)
acknowledges that “soul,” despite its theological baggage, “has a way
of doggedly creeping back into the conversation.” He then quotes Karl
Polanyi: “The discovery of the individual soul is the discovery of commu-
nity … Each is implied by the other” (p. 58). The lesson of this chapter, in
agreement with Wendy Brown (2015), is that “soulfulness” is one of the
values that neoliberalism “threaten[s] to extinguish” (p. 111). Given the
evidence that neoliberalization undermines soul, how can those of us who

are charged with the care of souls, whether from religious commitment or
not, afford to avert our gaze?
NOTES
1. The website for the GSS is available at http://www3.norc.org/
GSS+Website/ (last accessed January 25, 2014).
2. http://www.bgsu.edu/arts-and-sciences/ncfmr.html. I should
note here that these studies are limited to heterosexual, or male–
female, marriages. There is not yet enough longitudinal data on
same-sex marriage to determine if the same patterns would appear.
REFERENCES
Alexander, B. K. (2008). The globalization of addiction: A study in poverty of the
spirit. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Ammerman, N. T. (2013). Spiritual but not religious? Beyond binary choices in
the study of religion. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 52(2), 258–278.
Bass, D. B. (2012). Christianity after religion: The end of church and the birth of a
new spiritual awakening. New York, NY: HarperOne.
Bauman, Z. (2001). The individualized society. Cambridge: Polity.
Bauman, Z. (2003). Liquid love: On the frailty of human bonds. Cambridge: Polity
Press.
Bauman, Z. (2004a). Identity: Conversations with Benedetto Vecchi. Cambridge:
Polity Press.
Bauman, Z. (2004b). Wasted lives: Modernity and its outcasts. Cambridge: Polity
Press.
Beck, U. (1986/1992). Risk society: Towards a new modernity. London: Sage
Publications.
Benjamin, W. (1921/1996). Capitalism as religion. In M. Bullock & M. W.
Jennings (Eds.), Walter Benjamin: Selected writings, volume 1, 1913-1926
(pp. 288–291). Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Berger, P. L. (1999). The desecularization of the world: A global overview. In P. L.
Berger (Ed.), The desecularization of the world: Resurgent religion and world
politics (pp. 1–18). Washington, DC: Ethics and Public Policy Center; and
Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company.
Berger, P. L. (2014). The many altars of modernity: Toward a paradigm for religion
in a pluralist age. Boston, MA: Walter de Gruyter.
Bindley, K. (2013, March 13). Religion among Americans hits low point, as more
people say they have no religious affiliation: Report. The Huffington Post.
Retrieved August 10, 2015, from http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2013/

03/13/religion-america-decline-low-no-affiliation-report_n_2867626.html
Bourdieu, P. (1998, December 8). The essence of neoliberalism. Le Monde diplo-
matique [English edition]. Retrieved August 16, 2015, from http://monde-
diplo.com/1998/12/08bourdieu/
Bowen, M. (1978). Family therapy in clinical practice. New York, NY: Jason
Aronson.
Braedley, S., & Luxton, M. (2010). Competing philosophies: Neoliberalism and
challenges of everyday life. In S. Braedley & M. Luxton (Eds.), Neoliberalism
and everyday life (pp. 3–21). Montreal, QC: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Brown, W. (2006). Regulating aversion: Tolerance in the age of identity and empire.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
NY: Zone Books.
Carbone, J., & Cahn, N. (2014). Marriage markets: How inequality is remaking
the American family. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Carrette, J., & King, R. (2005). Selling spirituality: The silent takeover of religion.
New York, NY: Routledge.
Connell, R. (2010). Understanding neoliberalism. In S. Braedley & M. Luxton
(Eds.), Neoliberalism and everyday life (pp. 22–36). Montreal, QC: McGill-
Queen’s University Press.
Connolly, W. E. (2008). Capitalism and Christianity, American style. Durham,
NC: Duke University Press.
Corse, S., & Silva, J. M. (2013, August 9). Intimate inequalities: Love and work in
a post-industrial landscape. Paper presented at the American Sociological
Association, New York, NY. Retrieved August 17, 2015, from https://conven-
tion2.allacademic.com/one/asa/asa/
Couldry, N. (2010). Why voice matters: Culture and politics after neoliberalism.
London: Sage Publications.
Cox, H. (1999, March). The market as God: Living in the new dispensation. The
Atlantic, 283(3). Retrieved September 6, 2015, from http://www.theatlantic.
com/magazine/archive/1999/03/the-market-asgod/306397/
Cruz, J. (2012). Marriage: More than a century of change. National Center for
Family & Marriage Research. Retrieved August 17, 2015, from http://www.
bgsu.edu/content/dam/BGSU/college-of-arts-and-sciences/NCFMR/
documents/FP/FP-13-13.pdf
Cushman, P. (1995). Constructing the self, constructing America: A cultural history
of psychotherapy. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
Cvetkovich, A. (2012). Depression: A public feeling. Durham, NC: Duke University
Press.
Polity Press.
Eagleton, T. (2014). Culture and the death of God. New Haven, CT: Yale University
Press.
Ehrenberg, A. (1998/2010). The weariness of the self: Diagnosing the history of
depression in the contemporary age (Enrico Caouette, Jacob Homel, David
Homel, & Don Winkler, Trans.). Montreal, QC: McGill-Queens University
Press.
Elliott, A., & Lemert, C. (2009). The new individualism: The emotional costs of
globalization (Rev. ed.). London: Routledge.
Farley, E. (1990). Good and evil: Interpreting a human condition. Minneapolis,
MN: Fortress Press.
Fraser, N. (2007). Transnationalizing the public sphere: On the legitimacy and
efficacy of public opinion in a post-Westphalian world. Theory, Culture &
Society, 24(4), 7–30.
Goodchild, P. (2009). Theology of money. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Gould, E. D., & Paserman, M. D. (2003). Waiting for Mr. Right: Rising inequality
and declining marriage rates. Journal of Urban Economics, 53(2), 257–281.
Graeber, D. (2015). The utopia of rules: On technology, stupidity, and the secret joys
of bureaucracy. Brooklyn, NY: Melville House Publishing.
Greenstone, M., & Looney, A. (2012, February 3). The marriage gap: The impact
of economic and technological change on marriage rates. The Hamilton Project.
Retrieved August 17, 2015, from http://www.brookings.edu/blogs/jobs/
posts/2012/02/03-jobs-greenstone-looney
Harvey, D. (2005). A brief history of neoliberalism. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Hout, M., & Fischer, C. S. (2002). Why more Americans have no religious prefer-
ence: Politics and generations. American Sociological Review, 67(2), 165–190.
Hout, M., & Fischer, C. S. (2014). Explaining why more Americans have no reli-
gious preference: Political backlash and generational succession, 1987-2012.
Sociological Science, 1, 423–447.
Hout, M., Fischer, C. S., & Chaves, M. A. (2013, March). More Americans have
no religious preference: Key findings from the 2012 General Social Survey,
Institute for the Study of Societal Issues, University of California, Berkeley,
CA. Retrieved August 10, 2015 from http://sociology.berkeley.edu/sites/
default/files/faculty/fischer/Hout%20et%20al_No%20Relig%20Pref%20
2012_Release%20Mar%202013.pdf
Illouz, E. (1997). Consuming the romantic utopia: Love and the cultural contradic-
tions of capitalism. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
Illouz, E. (2007). Cold intimacies: The making of emotional capitalism. Cambridge:
Polity Press.
Illouz, E. (2008). Saving the modern soul: Therapy, emotions, and the culture of self-
help. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
Illouz, E. (2010). Love and its discontents: Irony, reason, romance. The Hedgehog
Review, 12(1), 18–32.
Johann, R. O. (1966). The meaning of love: An essay towards a metaphysics of inter-
subjectivity. Glen Rock, NJ: Paulist Press.
Lane, R. E. (2000). The loss of happiness in market democracies. New Haven, CT:
Yale University Press.
Lash, N. (1996). The beginning and the end of ‘religion’. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Layton, L. (2004). Who’s that girl? Who’s that boy? Clinical practice meets postmod-
ern gender theory. Hillsdale, NJ: The Analytic Press.
Lazzarato, M. (2012). The making of indebted man (Joshua D. Jordan, Trans.).
Los Angeles, CA: Semiotext(e).
Loy, D. R. (1997). The religion of the market. Journal of the American Academy
of Religion, 65(2), 275–290.
Miller-McLemore, B. J. (1996). The living human web: Pastoral theology at the
turn of the century. In J. Stevenson-Moessner (Ed.), Through the eyes of women:
Insights for pastoral care (pp. 9–26). Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press.
Nelson, R. H. (2001). Economics as religion: From Samuelson to Chicago and
beyond. University Park, PA: The Pennsylvania State University Press.
Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development. (2014). SF3.1:
Marriage and divorce rates. Paris, France: OECD Publishing. Retrieved August
18, 2015, from http://www.oecd.org/els/family/SF3_1_Marriage_and_
divorce_rate_Jan2014.pdf
Peck, J. (2010). Constructions of neoliberal reason. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Peltz, R. (2006). The manic society. In L. Layton, N. C. Hollander, & S. Gutwill
Pizzigati, S. (2014, February 15). America’s miserable economy may be ruining
your love life: New research shows our growing economic divide is destroying
romance in America. Salon. Retrieved August 17, 2015, from http://www.
salon.com/2014/02/16/americas_miserable_economy_may_be_ruining_
your_love_life_partner/
Putnam, R. D. (2000). Bowling alone: The collapse and revival of American com-
munity. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster.
MN: Fortress Press.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2012). The social trifecta of human misery and problematical
constructions of the self: Implications for formation and supervision. Reflective
Practice: Formation and Supervision in Ministry, 32, 206–223.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2013a). Best practices in pastoral counseling: Is theology nec-
essary? The Journal of Pastoral Theology, 23(1), 1–24.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2013b). Pastoral counseling in the neoliberal age: Hello best
practices, goodbye theology. Sacred Spaces, 5, 5-45. Retrieved July 31, 2014,
from http://www.aapc.org/media/127298/2_rogers_vaughn.pdf
Rose, N. (1998). Inventing our selves: Psychology, power, and personhood. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Rustin, M. (1991). The good society and the inner world: Psychoanalysis, politics and
culture. London: Verso.
Silva, J. M. (2013). Coming up short: Working-class adulthood in an age of uncer-
tainty. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Smith, J. K. A. (2014). How (not) to be secular: Reading Charles Taylor. Grand
Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company.
Taylor, C. (2007). A secular age. Cambridge, MA: The Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press.
Tillich, P. (1957). Dynamics of faith. New York, NY: Harper & Row.
Vaughn, K. I. (1992). Theologians and economic philosophy: The case of Paul
Tillich and Protestant socialism. History of Political Economy, 24(1), 1–29.
Webster, D. (2012). Dispirited: How contemporary spirituality makes us stupid, self-
ish and unhappy. Winchester: Zero Books.
Yip, F. C.-W. (2010). Capitalism as religion? A study of Paul Tillich’s interpretation
of modernity. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Theological Studies.
Žižek, S. (2015). Trouble in paradise: From the end of history to the end of capital-
ism. Brooklyn, NY: Melville House Publishing.
CHAPTER 4
Neoliberalism as a Paradigm for Human

Affliction: Third-Order Suffering as the New
Normal
Dedicated readers, who have made it this far, may have concluded that
enough has been said about the relationship between neoliberal capital-
ism and human suffering. After all, in the preceding chapter, I traced how
neoliberalization alters the fabric of every society it touches from top to
bottom, from the dismantling of social institutions that create mean-
ing and belonging to the hollowing out of intimate relationships to the
fragmentation of the individual self. I even briefly alluded to how, at the
level of individual experience, today’s actually existing capitalism modifies
suffering through its characteristic processes of privatization and deregu-
lation. It may now come as some surprise that I consider that analysis
as operating through a relatively narrow lens, focusing as it does on the
alteration of institutions and on the micropolitics of everyday life. What
remains to be explored is how contemporary capitalism exacerbates the
sufferings of entire populations of people; how it alters our general atti-
tudes toward suffering and appraisals of its significance; how it shapes the
ways we attend to, ignore, or legitimate suffering; and especially how it is
creating a new order of suffering that is transforming already existing types
of suffering such that their present forms are more difficult to recognize
and address.

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_4
A MORE EFFICIENT REGIME FOR THE GLOBAL

PRODUCTION OF SUFFERING AND DEATH
I should begin by acknowledging that the benefits of historical capital-
ism, even prior to the neoliberal revolution, have come at the cost of
unimaginable human suffering. With regard to the history of the United
States, great fortunes were amassed during the nineteenth century, dur-
ing a time when “cotton was king,” which catapulted this country into
the political and economic prominence it enjoys to this day. This history
has been meticulously documented by Edward Baptist in The Half Has
Never Been Told: Slavery and the Making of American Capitalism (2014)
and placed into global perspective by Sven Beckert in Empire of Cotton: A
New History of Global Capitalism (2014). In 1802, Baptist observes, cot-
ton represented just 14 % of exports from the United States, but by 1820
accounted for 42 % (p. 83). He later concludes: “By the 1840s, the United
States had grown into both an empire and a world economic power—the
second greatest industrial economy, in fact, in the world—all built on the
back of cotton” (p. 413). And cotton, in turn, was built upon the backs
of slaves: “Stories about industrialization emphasize white immigrants and
clever inventors, but they leave out cotton fields and slave labor” (Baptist,
p. xviii). This rapid capitalist expansion would have been impossible with-
out a highly lucrative, efficient, and professional slave industry, which
required the trading of black bodies as literal commodities on an open
market. By 1860, the almost 4 million slaves owned by US citizens were
worth over 3 billion dollars—nearly 20 % of the total wealth held by all
US citizens (Baptist, Table 7.1, p. 246). Thus at the very foundation of
industrial capitalism, not just in the United States, but globally, was what
Beckert (2014) calls “war capitalism.” He describes war capitalism as a
system that began to emerge globally during the sixteenth century, which
operated as a way of “organizing production, trade, and consumption.”
He concludes: “Slavery, the expropriation of indigenous peoples, imperial
expansion, armed trade, and the assertion of sovereignty over people and
land by entrepreneurs were at its core” (p. xv). Later he notes:
War capitalism had an unprecedented transformative potential. At the root

of the emergence of the modern world of sustained economic growth, it
created unfathomable suffering, but also a consequential transformation of
the organization of economic space: A multipolar world increasingly became
unipolar. (p. 38, emphasis added)
NEOLIBERALISM AS A PARADIGM FOR HUMAN AFFLICTION: THIRD-ORDER... 111
It may sound incredible, with this breadth and depth of suffering as a

historical backdrop, to claim that the neoliberal phase of capitalism rep-
resents both an extension and radical transformation of war capitalism.
And yet this appears, unfortunately, to be the case. A good portion of
our disbelief may be due to the success neoliberal interests have had in
marketing their ideology and practices as the spread of freedom and equal
opportunity. We are prompted to believe that the era of barbarism and
colonialism and its accompanying brutal institutions—such as slavery—
are behind us. A prevailing optimistic spirit leads some to proclaim that
we have arrived at “the end of history” (Fukuyama, 1992/2006). What
has happened throughout the world since 1980, however, belies the cel-
ebratory rhetoric of “free market” enthusiasts. Parallel to a phenomenal
increase in accumulated wealth and market innovations, human suffering
has increased exponentially.
Summarizing the devastating effects of the new global economy,
Saskia Sassen (2014) argues that the shift from conventional capitalism
to neoliberalism is comparable to the shift from premodern societies to
modern capitalism: “We can characterize the relationship of advanced
to traditional capitalism in our current period as one marked by extrac-
tion and destruction, not unlike the relationship of traditional capital-
ism to precapitalist economies” (p. 10). The shift to the current global
economy is marked, she asserts, by two developments. The first is the
segregation of the world “into extreme zones for key economic opera-
tions” (p. 9). Manufacturing, clerical services, and other sorts of labor are
outsourced to low-cost areas. Meanwhile, the network of “global cities,”
or metropoles, is enriched. The world is once again multipolar, but the
many poles are culturally and economically homogenized. Second is the
radical financialization of the global economy. While finance is not new,
Sassen observes: “What is new and characteristic of our current era is
the capacity of finance to develop enormously complex instruments that
allow it to securitize the broadest-ever, historically speaking, range of
entities and processes.” The outcome is a sweeping restructuring of the
global economy: “While traditional banking is about selling money that
the bank has, finance is about selling something it does not have” (p. 9).
The ideal example of such a complex instrument, she concludes, is the
derivative. By 2005, she notes, the global value of outstanding derivatives
was about $630 trillion, which “was fourteen times [the] global gross
domestic product (GDP)” (p. 9).
To put what Sassen is saying more directly, finance is about the buy-
ing and selling of debt. The selling of what the bank “does not have” is
unpaid debt. The bundling and selling of debt is therefore speculation
upon a future asset. Lazzarato (2012) claims: “neoliberalism has, since
its emergence, been founded on a logic of debt” (p. 25). “In neoliber-
alism,” he notes, “what we reductively call ‘finance’ is indicative of the
increasing force of the creditor-debtor relationship” (p. 23). He con-
cludes: “Politically, the debt economy seems to be a more appropriate term
than finance or financialized economy, not to mention financial capital-
ism” (p. 24, emphasis in original). While from the perspective of those
who own debt this appears simply as credit or financial investment, in the
experience of those who hold debt this has become a dominant form of
exploitation. Robert Reich (2010), a former US Secretary of Labor, com-
ments that personal debt in the United States “rose from 55 percent of
household income in the 1960s to an unsustainable 138 percent by 2007”
(p. 23). While this rate fell somewhat following the recession that began
in 2008, in part due to foreclosures and defaults, the Federal Reserve
reports that household debt is again steadily increasing.1 Meanwhile, data
on household debt from other countries demonstrate that this is a global
problem.2 Lazzarato contends that the global debt economy is producing
a new type of human subject, which he calls “indebted man.”
As both Lazzarato (2012, 2015) and Sassen (2014) observe, the debt
economy reconfigures class struggle. In Sassen’s words: “People as con-
sumers and workers play a diminished role in the profits of a range of eco-
nomic sectors” (p. 10). Compared to earlier versions of capitalism, which
were systems of incorporation or inclusion—though such inclusion often
meant exploitation and even slavery—Sassen maintains that contemporary
capitalism is a global system of expulsion. In the current global economy,
millions of human beings are needed for neither production nor consump-
tion. These unfortunate souls have become a permanent underclass. The
existence of an ever-expanding population of migrants, refugees, prisoners,
asylum seekers, the perpetually unemployed, and other outcasts become
what Bauman (2004) calls “the waste products of globalization” (p. 66).
We may justifiably think of them as excretions of the global debt economy.
Elsewhere Bauman (1997) describes this mass of human beings:
Not needed as producers, useless as consumers—they are people which the

‘economy’, with its logic of needs-arousing and needs-gratifying, could very
well do without. Their being around and claiming the right to survival is a
nuisance for the rest of us; their presence could no more be justified in terms
of competitiveness, efficiency or any other criteria legitimized by the ruling
economic reason. (p. 157)
The very existence of the expelled is a threat to the “natural order” of

the neoliberal economy. Thus, as a dimension of the “roll-out” phases of
neoliberalization, the contemporary security state manages this population
through policing and confinement—either literally or by economic segrega-
tion into “low rent” districts—as well as by direct or indirect extermination.
Bauman (1997) asserts that these tactics are made more effective
“through exorcizing the horror of death” (p. 159). Neoliberalization thus
numbs us to its own brutality, even as it is becoming an increasingly effi-
cient regime of death and destruction. He notes that this is achieved by
dual strategies that appear contradictory but are actually complementary.
First is “the strategy of hiding the death of those close to oneself from
sight and chasing it away from the memory” (p. 159). Expressions of
ordinary grief and mourning are considered inappropriate for public dis-
play and are increasingly becoming pathologized (Rogers-Vaughn, 2014).
Media coverage of flag-draped caskets of soldiers slain during the Vietnam
War is gone in the days of the “War on Terror.” Not only are once famil-
iar death and grief rendered invisible, so is the violence that accompanies
the neoliberal preoccupation with “security.” In her book Economies of
Abandonment, anthropologist Elizabeth Povinelli (2011) observes:
What Foucault did not discuss was that neoliberalism transformed an older
liberal governance of life and death …. Any form of life that could not pro-
duce values according to market logic would not merely be allowed to die,
but, in situations in which the security of the market … seemed at stake,
ferreted out and strangled. This way of killing is not commensurate with
an older sovereign power Foucault so viscerally described in the opening of
Discipline and Punish. There are not public spectacles of drawn and quar-
tered bodies—or lynched bodies. Secret agreements are made to remove the
body to be tortured far away from public sight and scrutiny. (p. 22)
What we have here is nothing less than the privatization of death and
violence. This allows neoliberal social orders, through what William
Davies (2015) calls “the happiness industry,” to foster the illusion that life
within their protection is one in which “human flourishing” and positive
emotions predominate. But simultaneously, it also enables them to con-
ceal and deny their own production of terror and death.
The second strategy for masking the horror of death is a peculiar type
of mass anesthesia. Bauman (1997) continues:
Death close to home is concealed, while death as a universal human predica-

ment, the death of anonymous and ‘generalized’ others, is put blatantly on
display, made into a never ending street spectacle that, no more a sacred or
carnival event, is but one among many of life’s paraphernalia. So banalized
death is made too familiar to be noted and much too familiar to arouse high
emotions …. Its horror is exorcised through its omnipresence, made absent
through the excess of visibility, made negligible through being ubiquitous,
silenced through deafening noise. (p. 159)
In the United States this soul-killing detachment is facilitated by a media-

produced phenomenon Bageant (2007) calls the “American hologram.”
Within this virtual space working-class people, he observes:
are bathed, hour after hour, in the televised imagery of the new corporate
state, in which eagles scream gloriously above the wreckage of the World
Trade Center, in which the enemy is smitten on foreign shores, in which
thrilling cavalcades of heavily armed motorcycle police and marching SWAT
teams appear larger than life. Ignorant and sated people are not chilled by
such sights on their television screens. Far from it. (p. 256)
Thanks to the efficient “happiness industry” mediated through this holo-

gram, Bageant deems these people “approximately happy.” He concludes:
“When happiness is based completely on the thinnest observable material
conditions of life—a new truck in the driveway, an iPod in your pocket,
the availability of round-the-clock entertainment—it’s easy to be happy”
(p. 264).
Meanwhile, with populations suitably inoculated to their own grief and
to the deaths of strangers, neoliberal processes continue their extension
and restructuring of war capitalism in the service of capital accumulation.
Achille Mbembe (2003) calls the emerging product “necropolitics,” a
word that points to the power of death under this form of governance.
This new form of colonialism does not typically attempt the annexation of
entire countries or geographies. Occupation is limited to zones of extrac-
tion, as well as to enclaves of resistance for the sake of control and polic-
ing. Wars under this form of capitalism do not aim for “the conquest,
acquisition, and takeover of a territory,” but appear as nomad-like “hit-
and-run affairs” (p. 30). Mbembe quotes Zygmunt Bauman to describe

the way military forces appear in such scenarios:
They rest their superiority over the settled population on the speed of their
own movement; their own ability to descend from nowhere without notice
and vanish again without warning, their ability to travel light and not to
bother with the kind of belongings which confine the mobility and maneu-
vering potential of the sedentary people. (as cited by Mbembe, p. 31)
Finally, the right to kill is curiously disconnected from, yet usually in

the service of, state sovereignty. Mbembe observes that violence is often
carried out not by standing armies but by mercenary organizations that
are backed by sovereign states (most often, today, the United States).
Mbembe, borrowing a term from Deleuze and Guattari, calls these “war
machines.” These constitute the postmodern (neoliberal) form of war:
“Polymorphous and diffuse organizations, war machines are characterized
by their capacity for metamorphosis. Their relation to space is mobile”
(p. 32). He concludes:
A war machine combines a plurality of functions. It has the features of a

political organization and a mercantile company. It operates through cap-
ture and depredations and can even coin its own money. In order to fuel
the extraction and export of natural resources located in the territory they
control, war machines forge direct connections with transnational networks.
(pp. 32–33)
In other words, war machines serve the interests of global markets.

Meanwhile, the violence perpetrated by these groups appears on
corporate-owned news coverage (if it appears at all) as a distant skirmish
between rival insurgents that is unrelated to viewers’ own governments
or the prices of their favorite products on the shelves at Wal-Mart or on
offer at Amazon or the Apple Store. Those who must live in these zones
of extraction, however, are condemned to existence in “death-worlds, new
and unique forms of social existence in which vast populations are sub-
jected to conditions of life conferring upon them the status of living dead”
(p. 40, emphases in original). What passes for life in these areas of the
world is, in effect, the new face of slavery. But, unlike the slavery of the
earlier industrial capitalism, this slavery is—even in this age of technology
and the internet—virtually invisible.
It is clear, moreover, that this violence is systemic. This was, of course,

true even under traditional forms of capitalism. Žižek (2008) asserts:
“Therein resides the fundamental systemic violence of capitalism, much
more uncanny than any direct pre-capitalist socio-ideological violence: this
violence is no longer attributable to concrete individuals and their ‘evil’
intentions, but is purely ‘objective,’ systemic, anonymous” (pp. 12–13).
Žižek then goes on to argue that this violence has become far more
abstract under the contemporary version of capitalism, with its reliance
on financialization and extreme debt production. In its present neoliberal
form, capitalism imposes violence even when military force is not utilized.
The global evidence is now abundant. For example, in the mid-1990s, the
United States and the European Union, catering to the demands of inter-
national agricultural businesses, insisted that the WTO, the IMF, and the
World Bank adopt policies that allowed North American and European
governments to continue providing heavy subsidies to their own farmers,
while requiring governments in other parts of the world to reduce farm
subsidies. These policies were implemented. The result? In just one coun-
try—India—about 216,500 farmers committed suicide between 1997 and
2009 (Leech, 2012, pp. 55–56). Why? Leech (2012) summarizes: “The
common denominator is that all of the farmers who have committed sui-
cide were deep in debt. In fact, the number of Indian peasant households
in debt doubled between 1991 and 2001 from 26 per cent to 48.6 per
cent” (p. 56).
Similar events have occurred globally. In 1994, the NAFTA was
passed by its partner countries—the United States, Canada, and Mexico.
Technically, the agreement allowed all three countries to subsidize agricul-
ture. However, because Mexico was bound by the international limitations
on farm subsidies mentioned in the preceding paragraph, in addition to
the same limitations imposed by loans it received directly from the United
States, it could not do so. Consequently, US corporations flooded Mexico
with food that sold for less than that of Mexican farmers. Between 1997
and 2005, Leech (2012) documents, “Mexican producers of corn, wheat,
rice, cotton and soybeans have lost more than $1 billion a year in earnings
under NAFTA” (p. 46). Many peasant farmers became internal refugees,
fleeing the countryside looking for work in the cities. Meanwhile, “under
NAFTA’s favourable investment conditions, U.S. and Canadian mining
companies have displaced thousands of peasants and gained control over
more than a million hectares of land in the state of Chiapas.” The refu-
gee crisis caused a glut of labor in the cities, which then held wages to an
average of the equivalent of $1.74 per hour. Ironically, by 2003, many of

those jobs had moved to other countries, especially China, “where the
interests of capital were being better served through labour costs that
were even lower than in Mexico” (p. 47). Conditions were even worse in
some South American countries. In Colombia, which Leech calls “Latin
America’s neoliberal poster child,” similar policies yielded 4 million inter-
nal refugees (p. 48).
Corporate-owned media respond to the global refugee crisis by using
both methods for “exorcizing the horror of death” that Bauman out-
lines—either invisibilizing it or rendering it banal. But no refugee cri-
sis is less visible than that in the world’s wealthiest country, the United
States, where refugees tend to be referred to simply as “the homeless” or
the “very poor.” In the United States neoliberal policies have also drasti-
cally increased this problem, most recently documented by Kathryn Edin
and Luke Shaefer (2015). They note that, after several years of attacks
beginning with Ronald Reagan’s first presidential campaign, welfare as it
had been known for 60 years ended with President Clinton’s signing of
the “welfare reform” bill in 1996. The new law replaced Aid to Families
with Dependent Children (AFDC) with Temporary Assistance for Needy
Families (TANF). It imposed time limits on aid, as well as stringent work
requirements, whereas AFDC based aid solely upon documented need.
This produced a dramatic reduction in public welfare. In 1994, welfare
served 14.2 million people. By the fall of 2014, only 3.8 million were
served. Edin and Shaefer observe: “Just 27 percent of poor families with
children participate. There are more avid postage stamp collectors in the
United States than welfare recipients” (p. 7). Welfare is so far off the pub-
lic mind, they note, that even many who meet the criteria for TANF do
not bother to apply, mistakenly believing that welfare no longer exists in
any form. Welfare, the authors flatly conclude, is practically dead. This
contributes to levels of poverty not seen in the United States since the
Great Depression. To measure this, Shaefer did not use the official poverty
line in the United States, which equals $16.50 per person per day. He did
not even use the official line for “deep poverty”—the equivalent of $8.30
per person per day. Instead, he used the World Bank’s metric for global
poverty—$2 per person per day. This is a level of poverty “so deep that
most Americans don’t believe it exists in this country” (p. xiii). At this
level, survival is grueling work. Edin conducted extensive field work and
discovered people scavenging in garbage for recyclables to convert to cash
(which nets only about $60 per month at best), selling their blood plasma,
and (though outright prostitution was unusual) trading sex for necessities.
As of 2011, 1.5 million households in the United States, including about
3 million children, were surviving on $2 per person per day—more than
double the number before Clinton signed the “welfare reform” act in
1996 (p. xvii).
Despite the mounting global refugee crisis and increasing poverty,
neoliberal rationality has no trouble explaining such suffering. One now
familiar method is the discourse of scarcity, especially applied to popula-
tions outside the United States. Due to population growth, some argue,
there is just not enough to go around. Thus people can only be expected
to compete for whatever resources they can get. This discourse is eas-
ily debunked and has been repeatedly rebuffed in the research literature
on world poverty. The actual reason today happens to be the increase in
global inequality that has accompanied neoliberal expansion. For example,
Leech (2012), citing data supplied by the United Nations Development
Program, states:
Europeans spent $11 billion a year on ice cream, $2 billion more than the
amount required to provide safe drinking water and adequate sanitation for
everyone in the [global] South. And the $17 billion that Americans and
Europeans spend annually on pet food would easily have provided basic
health care for everyone in the [global] South. (p. 82)
Leech concludes: “Such a degree of global inequality is not simply an

unintended consequence of capitalism; it is an essential component of the
global capitalist system.” There is profit to be made supplying ice cream
and pet food to Americans and Europeans, and none to be made offering
water, sanitation, and health care to the Global South (p. 82).
Another explanation that dominates neoliberal discourse, especially
directed toward domestic populations, is that poverty and other social
problems are due to the bad decisions of individuals. Thus social prob-
lems are attributed to individual morality. The poor are simply lazy, unam-
bitious, unfit, irrational, malingerers, or criminals. As Hamann (2009)
notes: “The neoliberal approach to dealing with growing poverty, unem-
ployment, and homelessness is not simply to ignore it, but to impose puni-
tive judgments through the moralizing effects of its political rationality”
(p. 45). Thus, as Wacquant shows in Punishing the Poor (2009), the prison
system has been re-purposed to control social insecurity rather than simply
criminal insecurity. This illuminates why, in the United States, the prison
population has skyrocketed over the past three decades, at the same time
that crime rates have remained steady and even declined in recent years.
Meanwhile, what is left of welfare and other public services is made con-
tingent on good behavior and a modicum of employment, serving as yet
another effective method of social control. As Soss, Fording, and Schram
demonstrate in Disciplining the Poor (2011), this not only manages social
insecurity but also serves the interests of capital:
Welfare programs for the unemployed have been redesigned to mimic the
pressures and incentives of low-wage labor markets and to bolster these
pressures with state authority…. The adults who participate in welfare pro-
grams today are not positioned outside the market; they are actively pressed
into accepting the worst jobs at the worst wages. (p. 7)
In other words, the poor are actively conscripted to do essential jobs

no one else will do on terms no one else would accept. The origins of
such problems are neither scarcity nor personal morality. As Reid-Henry
(2015) has recently documented, the origins are ultimately political and
will require political solutions.
To summarize, neoliberalization is a more efficient regime for the
global production of suffering and death, in both its rationality and its
practices. The increase in suffering that has occurred in the transition
from conventional capitalism to neoliberal capitalism is comparable to
what transpired in the move from precapitalist societies to capitalism in
earlier times. Moreover, the marginalizations and corruptions detailed in
Chap. 3—of social, interpersonal, and psychological systems—reappear in
the marginalization and corruption of suffering itself. Wherever suffering
threatens to offer a foundation for human solidarity, it is invisibilized and
suppressed. At the same time, the sufferings that are placed on display are
made to serve the interests of today’s actually existing capitalism.
There is, therefore, both a continuity with past forms of suffering and
the production of new forms of suffering. It is critical that we grasp these
continuities and transformations in order to both understand and resist a
global form of governance that many researchers and scholars now iden-
tify as nothing less than genocidal. Samir Amin (2011) concludes, regard-
ing today’s capitalism: “the logic of the system is no longer able to ensure
the simple survival of humanity. Capitalism is becoming barbaric and leads
directly to genocide” (p. 106). This is not merely rhetoric. Hamann (2009)
notes that the World Food Summit, in 1996, pledged to cut world hun-
ger in half within 20 years. But in just over half that time, the number of
hungry people in the world had increased by 18 million, “with an average
of six million children dying of hunger each year” (p. 45). Leech (2012)
refers to contemporary capitalism as “a structural genocide.” Buttressing
his argument with documented case studies from Mexico, South America,
India, and Sub-Saharan Africa, he calculates that the practices of today’s
capitalism accounts for at least 10 million additional deaths per year glob-
ally (pp. 149–150). Given the preceding figures from world hunger alone,
this figure is likely conservative. This level of death and suffering equals
or exceeds the most infamous genocides in recorded history. Moreover,
if today’s version of capitalism is the primary culprit in the degradation
of the environment, as Naomi Klein claims in This Changes Everything:
Capitalism vs. The Climate (2014), then neoliberalism could become the
only hegemony responsible for the possible extinction of humanity and
life on the planet as we know it. The stakes have never been this high.
Now, if we pull back from these more extreme manifestations of suffer-
ing, as terrifyingly real as they may be, still other regions of suffering open
up for investigation. These include one I have already mentioned—the
reconfiguration of class struggle by a global debt economy—as well as
transformations of already existing social injustices such as sexism and rac-
ism. In the remainder of this chapter, I will first pursue the general impli-
cations of paradigm theory for suffering under neoliberal governance. I
will explore the emergence of a new order of suffering that has become
normalized under the neoliberal paradigm, as well as identify how this
new order may be altering already existing forms of suffering. Then, in
the next chapter, I will review, as examples, the transformations of sexism,
racism, and class conflict as they become entangled with this new order of
suffering.
NEOLIBERALISM AS A PARADIGM FOR SUFFERING

In his now famous book The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Thomas
Kuhn (1962/2012) developed a theory for how change occurs in science.
The notion of paradigm change has become popularized and permeates
culture, leading many scholars to complain about its overuse and possible
misapplications when employed as a general theory of social change. I do
not intend to enter these debates here. Rather, I will use a couple of ideas
embedded in Kuhn’s theory as pedagogical devices to interrogate neolib-
eralization with regard to suffering. Kuhn asserted that paradigm change
in science yields theories or insights that are genuinely novel. He also

demonstrated that, when such a transition occurs, prior data or theories
persist in the new system, but are understood from a new perspective, or
are rearranged and mean something different within the new paradigm. I
use these notions to raise two questions. First, have new forms of suffering
appeared with the advent of neoliberalization? Second, how has neoliber-
alization transformed already existing types of suffering?
The new forms of domination that appear in neoliberal capitalism have,
I believe, been identified by Dany-Robert Dufour in his book The Art
of Shrinking Heads (2003/2008). He refers to these forms of domina-
tion by the rather unwieldy terms deinstitutionalization, desymboliza-
tion, and desubjectivation. I will refer to these collectively as “the three
Ds.” In Dufour’s thought, these processes are somewhat distinct, yet are
entangled and reinforce one another. They have appeared, he argues, with
neoliberalism, or what he calls “total capitalism.” He contends that former
types of domination worked through institutions, which Foucault called
“disciplinary societies.” Referring to the upheavals of the 1960s, Dufour
maintains that something novel began to occur:
The highly committed militant actions of the day did not take into account
that the institutions they were targeting were the very apparatuses that the
most aggressive fraction of capitalism wished to destroy. It no longer wanted
to assert itself by placing disciplinary controls on life; it wanted a completely
new form of domination, and the events of the 1960s … hastened its intro-
duction. (p. 157)
Dufour ties this destruction of institutions to desubjectivation or the

reduction and fragmentation of the human subject. Without transcenden-
tal values provided by cultural institutions, the individual has no way to
be grounded or even to think critically. There is little left but the market.
He concludes of total capitalism: “It is destroying institutions … in such a
way as to produce individuals who are supple, insecure, mobile and open
to all the market’s modes and variations” (p. 157). Dufour clearly suggests
here that genuine individuality depends upon embeddedness in cultural
institutions. In my view, this does not imply social determinism. Rather,
individuals exist as individuals, as I have stated before, in their capacity
to improvise upon what is given by the sociocultural surround. What is
also apparent here is the entanglement between institutions and subjectiv-
ity. The erosion of institutions must also include a reduction in subjectiv-
ity. Finally, Dufour argues that these are novel developments in human
history, and that they necessarily imply novel forms of suffering that are
consequent upon the new forms of domination. Prior to neoliberalism,
domination was exercised by means of the disciplinary powers of institu-
tions. Today domination occurs through the suppression of these institu-
tions. Prior to neoliberalism, domination required replacing a particular
type of subject with a new form of subject. Today it occurs through the
fragmentation and dispersal of the subject altogether.
These themes are by now familiar to the reader, for I have discussed them
in the preceding chapter as the erosion of social systems (collectives) and
psychological systems (the self or subject) that occurs due to the neoliber-
alization of culture. The remaining novel form of suffering Dufour identi-
fies is the effect of desymbolization. Before moving to what he intends by
this term, however, I must pause to clarify and develop Dufour’s claims.
I believe what I have to say here is consistent with Dufour’s theory rather
than simply an overturning of it. However, Dufour often articulates his
position on these novel forms of suffering in a way that appears overex-
tended. For example, it is surely the case that the imperial conquests that
have occurred during human history inevitably included the dismantling
and/or co-optation of indigenous institutions. These same sociocultural
displacements also produced psychological disturbances similar to what
Dufour describes as the fragmented and dispersed subject, as the works
of theorists such as Frantz Fanon (1952/1967, 1963/2004) have shown.
Indeed, Alexander (2008) refers to this phenomenon as “psychosocial dis-
location,” and uses historical case studies to portray how this appears when
indigenous societies are disrupted. Moreover, clinicians and relief workers
are familiar with the psychological states Dufour describes, as they arise in
virtually all instances of severe trauma. Traumatized individuals experience
fragmentation and feel “unreal,” even disembodied. They also, in antici-
pation of our consideration of desymbolization, are rendered mute. They
are unable to articulate, narrate, or “make sense of” what is happening to
them. Given all this, how can Dufour possibly claim the sorts of sufferings
he describes have not existed before in history?
The answer has to do with Kuhn’s description of paradigms. A para-
digm describes what has become “normal,” routine or status quo. The
experiences Dufour describes have existed before, but only (to use Kuhn’s
term) as “anomalies.” That is, they have occurred as crises, transitional
conditions between states of relative stability. What Dufour is suggesting,
I believe, is that under neoliberal capitalism, these conditions have become

paradigmatic, or normal. Alexander (2008) points toward this difference:
Whereas individual people can become dislocated by misfortunes in any

society, including tribal, feudal, and socialist ones, and whereas the downfall
of any society produces mass dislocation, only free-market society produces
mass dislocation as part of its normal functioning even during periods of pros-
perity. Along with dazzling benefits in innovation and productivity, globali-
sation of free-market society has produced an unprecedented, worldwide
collapse of psychosocial integration. (p. 60, emphasis added)
Alexander concludes: “To the degree that Western civilization approxi-

mates a free-market society, dislocation is not the pathological state of a
few but the general condition” (p. 61). The challenge, then, is to imagine
the new order of suffering corresponding to this “general condition.”
This theme has been repeated and elaborated by a number of theo-
rists across disciplines. Eric Cazdyn (2012), for example, engages critical
theory, philosophy, and psychoanalysis to describe what he calls “the new
chronic.” He observes: “crisis is not what happens when capitalism goes
wrong, but when it goes right …. The point is that crisis is built right into
the system of capitalism—not only when it busts, but when it booms”
(p. 2). Cazdyn proceeds to place “the new chronic,” along with its asso-
ciated phenomena—“the global abyss” and “the living dead”—into the
context of late capitalism. Inspired by his own ongoing struggle with leu-
kemia, Cazdyn uses his experience as an analogy for what he perceives as
the new normal in a neoliberal world:
We have entered something like a new chronic mode, a mode of time that
cares little for terminality or acuteness. Every level of society is stabilized on
an antiretroviral cocktail. Every person is safe, like a diabetic on insulin. A
solid remission, yes, but always with the droning threat of relapse—of col-
lapse, if not catastrophe. (p. 13)
Likewise, as I noted in the introduction, several psychoanalysts have

asserted that similar conditions they see in their patients are attributable to
the “traumatogenic environment” imposed under contemporary capital-
ism (Layton, Hollander, & Gutwill, 2006, pp. 1–5). Žižek (2011) openly
wonders what we are to take the word “trauma” to mean in a neoliberal
order, where it now refers to the ordinary state of affairs rather than the
exception. A similar point is made by Catherine Malabou (2012) in her

discussion of “destructive plasticity.” In my estimation, all of these theo-
ries are deeply resonant with my explication of the erosions of social, inter-
personal, and psychological systems outlined in Chap. 3. And all support
Dufour’s thesis that the forms of suffering generated by deinstitutional-
ization, desubjectivation, and desymbolization are novel in the sense that
they constitute a new normal, thus a new paradigm for suffering.
Which brings us now to desymbolization. What does Dufour mean
by this? Dufour (2003/2008) summarizes: “Desymbolization refers to
a process designed to rid symbolic exchanges of that which is in excess
of them and which at the same time institutes them: their foundations”
(p. 160). Analogous to the erosions of collectives, interpersonal relation-
ships and psychological spaces I discussed in the last chapter, this process
hollows out communication such that words and images become fleeting
signifiers rather than symbols. Communication is rendered trite, ironic,
and pedestrian. It lacks a “transcendent sphere of principles and ideals”
ordinarily provided by culture, which is “a repository of moral principles,
aesthetic canons, models of truth, and so on” (p. 160). Thus robbed of
their depth, language and images no longer embody values that have the
ability to resist those of the market. There are no longer, claims Dufour,
“soteriological narratives,” either of religions, nation states, or those for
the liberation of workers, that retain enough credibility and cohesion to
oppose the market (pp. 44–51). Neoliberalism has eroded the foundations
of such narratives.
A similar claim has been made, in theology, by Edward Farley (1996).
In Deep Symbols, Farley concerns himself with “the global turmoil of late
capitalism,” which he implicitly equates with postmodernity (p. 1). Farley,
like Dufour, appeals to the novelty he sees in the erosion of deep symbols:
What appears to be new in postmodern societies is not a displacement of

old symbols for new ones but a weakening if not elimination of all words
of power. All deep symbols now appear to be imperiled by postmodern dis-
courses, societal traits, and sociologies of knowledge. (pp. 13–14)
In this new order, observes Farley, “all language takes place in quotation
marks” (p.14). He continues:
But with the loss of the words of power, quaintness applies to all such terms:
thus “tradition,” “duty,” “conscience,” “truth,” “salvation,” “sin,” “God.”
These too need the quotation marks that indicate we are aware that they
do not quite work anymore and are not quite to be taken seriously. (p. 15)
He concludes, “I suspect the term ‘theology’ is about to join that list of

quaint terms we no longer use” (p. 14).
Finally, Couldry (2010) provides a bridge between this erosion of deep
symbols and the general ability to narrate our everyday lives. Couldry
asserts that neoliberalism undermines this ability, which he calls “voice.”
In his estimation, neoliberalism is a “voice-denying rationality” (p. 10).
Voice, he contends, is socially grounded. Like both Dufour and Farley,
Couldry argues that voice depends upon functioning communities and
traditions. “Voice,” he argues, “is not the practice of individuals in isola-
tion” (p. 7). Furthermore, voice is materially grounded. As such, voice is
implicated in material inequality:
If, through an unequal distribution of narrative resources, the materials

from which some people must build an account of themselves are not theirs
to adapt or control, then this represents a deep denial of voice, a deep form
of oppression. This is the oppression W. B. Dubois described as ‘double
consciousness’, a ‘sense of always looking at oneself through the eyes of
others.’ (p. 9, emphasis in original)
Thus, although everyone in neoliberalized societies may suffer a reduction

of voice, this will be exacerbated by the extreme material inequality in
these societies. Moreover, loss of voice will be unequally distributed, with
those with fewer material resources being the more severely affected. The
inability to narrate one’s life, then, participates in the oppressions occur-
ring at the intersections between class, race, gender, sexuality, and other
loci of social injustice. This will become more apparent in the following
chapter.
THIRD-ORDER SUFFERING
In everyday life under the neoliberal paradigm, the somewhat distinct
forms of suffering produced by deinstitutionalization, desubjectivation,
and desymbolization—the three Ds—are deeply entangled. Collectively
they yield what I identify as a new order of suffering, a category correspond-
ing to what Cazdyn (2012) calls “the new chronic.” I wish to be explicit
about what this means for the care of souls. Under previous historical
paradigms, there were two orders of suffering. The first comprised forms
of suffering that are simply given in the human condition—death, grief,
separation, illness, disability, natural calamities, conflict, physical pain, and
so on. In previous ages, people dealing with first-order suffering generally
did so from within collectives that accompanied them in their distress,
with a more-or-less durable and cohesive sense of self, and with cultural
narratives and liturgies that helped “make sense” of what they were endur-
ing. Second-order suffering is distress produced by human evil, whether
individual or collective, direct or indirect. Examples include malicious acts
of individuals (murder, violence, theft, fraud, deception, etc.) as well as
collective actions—war, group violence, enslavement, oppressive working
conditions, and injustices focused upon identities (racism, sexism, hetero-
sexism, ethnic- or religion-based discrimination, etc.). This also comprises
oppression emanating from Foucault’s “disciplinary societies.” Here, sig-
nificantly, the source of suffering is readily identifiable, even if, in the case
of disciplinary control, it is rather impersonal—as in “the state,” “the cor-
poration,” or “the church.” And there is a palpable potential, if not the
actuality, of forming collectives for resistance. There are, as well, narrative
resources at hand for articulating such resistance. I am proposing, in this
book, that heretofore the theories and practices of pastoral care, as well
as other forms of soul care, have been directed toward these two orders
of suffering. We have not yet, in my estimation, developed theories and
practices adequate for addressing “the new chronic.”
True to the character of paradigm change, third order suffering—the
new normal for human distress appearing under neoliberalism—is not easy
to articulate, perhaps impossible to articulate, in the terms of first- and sec-
ond-order suffering. Without strong, vibrant collectives to support them,
individuals are more-or-less left to their own devices to deal with distress.
We might describe them as in a state of spiritual homelessness. These
unfortunate souls are abandoned, left to interpret their sufferings as signs
of personal failure. They are not guilty. They are ashamed. They do not
have adequate narrative resources at hand to understand, to “make sense
of,” their sufferings. They are left simply with market-generated narratives
of “personal recovery” (Illouz, 2008; Silva, 2013), which, like insulin for
the diabetic, are perpetually fragile in the face of what they are up against.
Such narratives are window-dressing, a veneer of order imposed over what
once would have been a durable sense of self. The terms used to describe
first- and second-order suffering now fail them, largely because the sources
of their sufferings are no longer easily identified. Their oppressors, for
example, no longer have faces, even the impersonal “faces” of the state,
the corporation, or the church. Yet to say the oppressor is some abstract
“evil” seems not to capture the thing.3 Their options are either to look
within, blaming their sufferings on themselves, or to stare into the fog.
Most people today take the first option. The primary symptomologies
for this option, as I noted in Chap. 3, are either profound but diffuse
depressions or polymorphous and fluid addictions (fitting adaptations to a
commodity-driven world), as both Ehrenberg (1998/2010) and Dufour
(2003/2008) have asserted. An apparent symptom for the second option
is a violent striking out into the fog, literally in a blind rage. Dufour argues
that this is the only conceivable explanation for the random mass shoot-
ings that have appeared since the advent of neoliberalism. This sort of
violence, he observes, is new (2003/2008, pp. 79–80, 167). It may also
be a dimension of some organized acts of terror. We are told, for example,
that typical recruits to Islamic State in Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) are dis-
affected young people from Western countries whose motives seem not to
be clearly either religious or political.
Unlike Kuhn’s scientific revolutions, however, paradigm changes in
culture do not require leaving preceding paradigms behind. In the case of
suffering, third order suffering does not simply replace first or second order
suffering. Rather, it arises alongside them. The three orders coexist and inter-
penetrate. They too are entangled. People arriving at my psychotherapy
office do not come clearly labeled as one, two, or three. They present
as messy mash-ups of the three orders. Because we have no language
adequate for third-order suffering, however, they almost always articu-
late their “presenting problem” in first- or second-order language: “my
mother died,” “my spouse left me,” “we are having marriage troubles,”
“I’m having panic attacks,” “my boss is harassing me because I’m black.”
They may say “I’m depressed” or “I have an addiction,” but they usually
understand these referents in objective, market-friendly terms, as having
either simply moral or organic causes. Because first- and second-order suf-
fering have not disappeared, the theories and practices we have developed
to address them will persist and continue to have relevance.
That being said, the neoliberalization of culture means that third-order
suffering is increasingly pervasive. More importantly, it is transforming
both the appearance and the lived experience of first and second order suffer-
ing. In the language of Chap. 3, it is both marginalizing and corrupting
these forms of suffering. Marginalization, as I have indicated, appears as
insidious sorts of denial. Corruption points to the ways already existing
forms of suffering are transformed under the new paradigm. Unmoored

subjects, deprived of adequate collective support, with only a fragile and
amorphous sense of self, and without a sufficient way to narrate their dis-
tress, will experience death, grief, separation, loneliness, depression, anxi-
ety, and so on, in a profoundly different way. Furthermore, under the new
chronic, these will no longer be experienced as transitory crises or trauma,
but as an ongoing way of being. Similarly, acts of violence and oppres-
sion—including sexism, racism, and other types of social injustice—will
assume new, mutated forms. It is my judgment that the primary challenge
for pastoral care, psychotherapy, social activism, and other approaches to
caring for souls today is not the effort to fix discrete personal problems or
even to redress specific injustices. It is, rather, to aid people, individually
and collectively, in finding their footing—to articulate the deep meanings
that ground their lives and to strengthen healthy collectives and social
movements that hold some residue of transcendental values. These con-
stitute the fundamental resources for addressing whatever ongoing crises
people may be enduring under the new chronic.
From the standpoint of theory formation, as I noted in the introduc-
tion, this entails a reorientation of pastoral theology and other theories
concerned with caring for souls. Theories regarding care for first- and
second-order suffering, such as the particular subtypes mentioned in
the preceding paragraph, will be reconceived to address the transmuta-
tions occurring due to their entanglements with third-order suffering.
Of course, I have insufficient time and space to accomplish all this here.
I will, however, offer three instances to demonstrate how this might be
approached. Because they have such a prominent place in processes of
neoliberalization, in the following chapter, I will discuss the transforma-
tions of sexism, racism, and class struggle under neoliberal governance.
NOTES
1. The Federal Reserve reported, in April of 2015, that household
debt had been increasing for seven consecutive quarters by the end
of 2014: http://www.federalreserve.gov/econresdata/notes/feds-
notes/2015/deleveraging-and-recent-trends-in-household-
debt-20150406.html (Accessed on 06 December 2015).
2. OECD (2015), Household debt (indicator). doi: 10.1787/
f03b6469-en (Accessed on 06 December 2015).
3. The theologian Paul Tillich has suggested a better term for the
anonymous power of capitalism is “the demonic.” See Yip, Francis
Ching-Wah, (2010), Capitalism as Religion? A Study of Paul Tillich’s
Interpretation of Modernity, Cambridge, MA: Harvard Theological
Studies (pp. 31–53).
REFERENCES
Alexander, B. K. (2008). The globalization of addiction: A study in poverty of the
spirit. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Amin, S. (2011). Ending the crisis of capitalism or ending capitalism? (Victoria
Bawtree, Trans.). Cape Town, ZA: Pambazuka Press.
Bageant, J. (2007). Deer hunting with Jesus: Dispatches from America’s class war.
New York, NY: Crown Publishers.
Baptist, E. E. (2014). The half has never been told: Slavery and the making of
American capitalism. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Bauman, Z. (1997). Postmodernity and its discontents. Cambridge: Polity Press.
Bauman, Z. (2004). Wasted lives: Modernity and its outcasts. Cambridge: Polity
Press.
Beckert, S. (2014). Empire of cotton: A new history of global capitalism. New York,
NY: Alfred A. Knopf.
Cazdyn, E. (2012). The already dead: The new time of politics, culture, and illness.
Couldry, N. (2010). Why voice matters: Culture and politics after neoliberalism.
London: Sage Publications.
Davies, W. (2015). The happiness industry: How the government and big business
sold us well-being. London: Verso.
Polity Press.
Edin, K. J., & Shaefer, H. L. (2015). $2.00 a day: Living on almost nothing in
America. New York, NY: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt.
Ehrenberg, A. (1998/2010). The weariness of the self: Diagnosing the history of
depression in the contemporary age (Enrico Caouette, Jacob Homel, David
Homel, & Don Winkler, Trans.). Montreal, QC: McGill-Queens University
Press.
Fanon, F. (1952/1967). Black skin white masks: The experiences of a black man in
a white world (Charles L. Markmann, Trans.). New York, NY: Grove Press.
Fanon, F. (1963/2004). The wretched of the earth (Richard Philcox, Trans.).
New York, NY: Grove Press.
Farley, E. (1996). Deep symbols: Their postmodern effacement and reclamation.
Valley Forge, PA: Trinity Press International.
Fukuyama, F. (1992/2006). The end of history and the last man. New York, NY:
Free Press.
Hamann, T. H. (2009). Neoliberalism, governmentality, and ethics. Foucault
Studies, 6, 37–59.
Illouz, E. (2008). Saving the modern soul: Therapy, emotions, and the culture of self-
help. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
Klein, N. (2014). This changes everything: Capitalism vs. the climate. New York,
NY: Simon & Schuster.
Kuhn, T. S. (1962/2012). The structure of scientific revolutions (4th ed.). Chicago,
IL: University of Chicago Press.
Lazzarato, M. (2015). Governing by debt (Joshua D. Jordan, Trans.). South
Pasadena, CA: Semiotext(e).
Leech, G. (2012). Capitalism: A structural genocide. London: Zed Books.
Malabou, C. (2012). Ontology of the accident: An essay on destructive plasticity
(Carolyn Shread, Trans.). Cambridge: Polity Press.
Mbembe, A. (2003). Necropolitics. (Libby Meintjes, Trans.). Public Culture,
15(1), 11–40.
Povinelli, E. A. (2011). Economies of abandonment: Social belonging and endur-
ance in late liberalism. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Reich, R. B. (2010). Aftershock: The next economy and America’s future. New York,
NY: Alfred A. Knopf.
Reid-Henry, S. (2015). The political origins of inequality: Why a more equal world
is better for us all. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Sassen, S. (2014). Expulsions: Brutality and complexity in the global economy.
Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press.
Soss, J., Fording, R. C., & Schram, S. F. (2011). Disciplining the poor: Neoliberal
paternalism and the persistent power of race. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago
Press.
Wacquant, L. (2009). Punishing the poor: The neoliberal government of social inse-
curity. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Yip, F. C.-W. (2010). Capitalism as religion? A study of Paul Tillich’s interpretation
of modernity. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Theological Studies.
Žižek, S. (2008). Violence: Six sideways reflections. New York, NY: Picador.
Žižek, S. (2011). Living in the end times. London: Verso.
CHAPTER 5
Muting and Mutating Suffering: Sexism,

Racism, and Class Struggle
A common theme among critics of neoliberalism is the assertion that

neoliberalism is an intrinsically sexist and racist project, and yet that it bur-
ies this fact beneath prolific claims to being a meritocracy that proclaims
“equal opportunity” while publicly embracing “diversity” and “multicul-
turalism.” It is surely telling that even among the most right-wing ideo-
logues currently on the political scene in the USA, no one openly confesses
to being a racist or sexist. On the contrary, these words are used as epithets
to hurl at opponents on the left and the right alike. The USA has even
elected its first black President. Does this mean we have embarked upon
a “post-racial” and “post-patriarchal” age? Far from it. Welcome to the
world’s first non-sexist patriarchy and its first non-racist white supremacy!
In the introduction to her book The Twilight of Equality?, Lisa Duggan
(2003) asserts that, from its inception,
neoliberalism has assembled its projects and interests from the field of issues
saturated with race, with gender, with sex, with religion, with ethnicity, and
nationality …. In order to facilitate the flow of money up the economic
hierarchy, neoliberal politicians have constructed complex and shifting alli-
ances, issue by issue and location by location—always in contexts shaped
by the meanings and effects of race, gender, sexuality, and other markers of
difference. (p. xvi)
Likewise, Henry Giroux (2005) concludes:

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_5
Under the aggressive politics and culture of neoliberalism, society is

increasingly mobilized for the production of violence against the poor,
immigrants, dissenters, and others marginalized because of their age, gen-
der, race, ethnicity, and color. (p. 12)
At the same time, neoliberal forms of rationality actively promote equality,

diversity, inclusion, and multiculturalism. Michaels (2006) observes: “A
society free not only of racism but of sexism and of heterosexism is a neo-
liberal utopia where all the irrelevant grounds for inequality (your iden-
tity) have been eliminated and whatever inequalities are left are therefore
legitimated” (p. 75). Similarly, Reed (2009) insists that such reasoning is
critical for the advancement of neoliberalization. According to this logic,
the “removal of ‘artificial’ impediments to its functioning like race and
gender will make it even more efficient and just” (para. 21).
How can all of these assertions be true? What we have here is another
of the incongruities of contemporary capitalism. To understand what is
going on here let us consider, in turn, how neoliberalism appears as a
patriarchal system that mutes and mutates sexism, and also as a white
supremacist system that accomplishes the same with racism. Following
these deliberations, I will examine how neoliberalization is also muting
and mutating class conflict. In the language of the preceding chapter, what
is at stake is an examination of how third-order suffering is altering these
dimensions of injustice. Finally, I will close this chapter with some implica-
tions for interpreting intersectionality theory.
GENDER-BLIND PATRIARCHY
Does neoliberal capitalism, as actually practiced, constitute a patriarchal
system? A number of feminist critical theorists (Braedley & Luxton, 2010;
Connell, 2005; Duggan, 2003; Fraser, 2013a) are asserting that neoliber-
alism represents a global imposition of dominant masculinity. These schol-
ars argue that the gender dynamic within contemporary capitalism has
remained hidden. Connell (2010) concludes:
There is an embedded masculinity politics in the neoliberal project. With

a few exceptions, neoliberal leadership is composed of men. Its treasured
figure, “the entrepreneur,” is culturally coded masculine. Its assault on the
welfare state redistributes income from women to men and imposes more
unpaid work on women as carers for the young, the old, and the sick. Its
MUTING AND MUTATING SUFFERING: SEXISM, RACISM, AND CLASS STRUGGLE 133
attack on “political correctness” and its rollback of affirmative action spe-

cifically undermine the gains of feminism. In such ways, neoliberalism from
the 1980s on offered middle-class men an indirect but effective solution
to the delegitimation of patriarchy and the threat of real gender equality.
(pp. 33–34)
Connell points to the heart of the matter, which concerns the place of
women in the system of production within advanced capitalism, as well
as their lack of power in the system. There is no lack of evidence for her
statement. Sarah Jaffe (2013) documents that, in the USA, “women make
up just under half of the national workforce, but about 60 percent of the
minimum-wage workforce and 73 percent of tipped workers” (para. 2).
Moreover, in the long-term “recovery” following the recession that began
in 2008, women recovered only 12 % of jobs lost, while men regained 63
%. Jaffe concludes: “Women may be overrepresented in the growing sec-
tors of the economy, but those sectors pay poverty wages” (para. 6).
Perhaps the most telling evidence concerns women’s lack of power in
this system. In his definitive work on “political powerlessness” in the USA,
Stephanopoulos (2015) uses the huge dataset assembled by Gilens for his
book Affluence and Influence (2012) and adds extensive empirical studies
of his own to answer the question of who does and does not have influ-
ence over political decisions. Stephanopoulos confirms that the difference
between male and female power was the largest of any two groups he
compared. He concludes: “Despite their large population share and the
range of laws protecting them from discrimination, women continue to be
alarmingly powerless relative to men” (p. 1598).
Finally, as Braedley and Luxton (2010) note, this is not peculiar to
the USA. The advent of neoliberalism, they document, “has resulted in
a global decline in women’s positions and material well-being” (p. 13).
In addition, this does not appear to be simply a by-product of neoliberal
ideology and practice. Rather, it is intrinsic to the system: “Indeed, neolib-
eralism was developed in part to counter the equality demands of feminist,
anti-racist, and anti-imperialist activists, as well as the socialist demands to
end class exploitation” (p. 12). In the words of geographer Phil Hubbard
(2004), neoliberal policies
are not just about the re-centralisation and accumulation of corporate

capital, but are also about the re-inscription of patriarchal relations in the
urban landscape. Indeed, I want to argue that the neoliberal city serves the
interests of both capital and the phallus, with neoliberal policy reliant on the
cultivation of a political economy that is, at one and the same time, a sexual
economy. (p. 666)
In short, neoliberalism is an intentional re-institution of patriarchy. But, I

hasten to add, this is not a type of patriarchy we have seen before.
The novelty of this patriarchal system appears when we ask how it can
claim to promote equality. The answer requires an understanding of how it
mutes and mutates sexism. When I say that neoliberalism “mutes” sexism,
I am referring to how it preemptively silences voices that would otherwise
claim they are being oppressed because of their gender. It accomplishes
this by removing substantive meaning from the word “equality,” reducing
it to “equal opportunity.” In other words, it redefines equality in terms of
the market. This ties equality to the isolated, competitive individualism I
discussed in Chap. 3, along with its emphasis on the entrepreneurial self.
This necessarily marginalizes claims of gender inequality, largely because
women no longer have a collective voice as women. Instead, women are
rendered, along with everyone else, as isolated individuals competing on
equal terms with other individuals. Sexism, we might say, has thus been
privatized. This occurs in multiple ways. Duggan (2003) notes: “The spe-
cific neoliberal spin on this cultural project was the removal of explic-
itly racist, misogynist language and images, and the substitution of the
language and values of privatization and personal responsibility” (p. 16,
emphases in original). In one sense, then, privatization entails a flat denial
of any systemic, structural sexism. This does not mean, however, that neo-
liberal powers deny sexism exists at all. Rather, sexism is now attributed
only to the actions and attitudes of individual misogynists, who are then
maligned or censured. The answer to sexism, then, is no longer social jus-
tice, but subjecting wayward individuals to rehab or mandatory “diversity
training.” At any rate, governments, corporations, and other institutions
are absolved of any responsibility other than the management of these
wayward sexists. As the preceding quote by Connell indicates, sexism is
also deregulated. As part of the “roll back” phase of neoliberalism dis-
cussed in Chap. 2, affirmative action is eroded and, since structural sexism
is said not to exist, attention to “political correctness” is ridiculed.
Meanwhile, during the “roll out” phase, sexism is covertly (i.e. shorn
of sexist language or misogynistic behavior) re-regulated. This is accom-
plished under the rationality of personal responsibility. Duggan (2003)
notes that an apt example is the “welfare reform” act I mentioned in
the previous chapter, passed by the US Congress in 1996 and signed

by President Clinton. Tellingly, the title of this act was “The Personal
Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act” (PRWORA).
As I noted before, one effect of this legislation was to move people off
welfare rolls and into a poverty-wage labor market. These were dispro-
portionally women. A less obvious effect was how the PRWORA encour-
aged the “role of marriage as a coercive tool of the privatization of social
costs.” To make up for the dismantling of the social safety net, women
were induced to rely on their wage-earning spouses and stay home to
care for dependent children and aging adults. Women were also urged to
undertake volunteer work in the community, much of which amounted to
“unpaid labor underpinning the privatized social safety net” (p. 17). All
this conjures up the writings of the socialist feminists of the 1970s, who
analyzed the role of the nuclear family for both production and repro-
duction in capitalist societies. This is exhibited by a collection of essays
published under the title Capitalist Patriarchy and the Case for Socialist
Feminism (Eisenstein, 1979). In her editorial introduction, Eisenstein
forcefully concludes: “If the other side of production is consumption, the
other side of capitalism is patriarchy” (p. 29).
In a way analogous to processes I have already discussed, concerns
about sexism are not only marginalized, but corrupted. This has to do
with the way feminism has been co-opted by neoliberalization. The broad
acceptance of “equal opportunity” in the place of substantive equality is
just one feature of this corruption. Sarah Jaffe (2013, 2014), criticizing
what she calls “neoliberal feminism” or “trickle-down feminism,” com-
plains that as the plight of working women has worsened, “I watched fem-
inist writers seem to give a collective shrug” (2013, para. 5). Mourning
her sense that feminism has largely been reduced to exhorting women to
“lean in” and to a focus on “breaking through the glass ceiling,” Jaffe
(2014) concludes: “Neoliberal feminism is a feminism that ignores class
as a determining issue in women’s lives” (p. 7). Similarly, feminist critical
theorist Nancy Fraser (2013a) has traced streams of second-wave femi-
nism that unwittingly entered into collusion with the rise of neoliberalism.
In a column written for The Guardian, Fraser (2013b) records the result:
“The state-managed capitalism of the postwar era has given way to a new
form of capitalism—‘disorganized,’ globalising, neoliberal. Second-wave
feminism emerged as a critique of the first but has become the hand-
maiden of the second” (para. 3). Fraser calls for a new turn in feminism
that returns to “large scale social theory” and a critique of contemporary
capitalism (2013a, pp. 227–241). This is also a feature of Lisa Duggan’s

work (2003), which I have been citing. And of course this focus has never
left the thought of black feminist theorists such as bell hooks and Angela
Davis, to whom I will return when I discuss intersectionality.
If the muting of sexism is achieved by the marginalization of radical
feminism, its mutation is completed by this co-optation of feminism. The
result is a domination by the gender-blind patriarchy of today’s actu-
ally existing capitalism. The foregoing discussion points to the current
entanglement between second-order and third-order suffering. Both the
erosion of collectives (deinstitutionalization) and loss of a public lan-
guage to even speak of structural sexism (desymbolization) are implicit
in this exploration. If we add these to an accelerating lack of self-cohesion
(desubjectivation), it becomes apparent how the suffering of women and
those impacted by their distress has been transformed under this new para-
digm. Women, especially younger women born since the neoliberal revo-
lution, are increasingly unable to articulate the sources of their distress.
Consequently, they are typically accepting the neoliberal insistence that
their travails have nothing to do with being women and everything to do
with their own personal failures. Silva (2013), in her groundbreaking field
interviews with working-class millennials, concludes with a statement that
is inflected by all of the “three Ds”:
In the end, by rejecting solidarity with others, insisting that they are individ-
uals who can define their own identities and futures, and hardening them-
selves against social institutions and the government, working-class men and
women willingly embrace neoliberalism as the commonsense solution to
the problems of bewilderment and betrayal that plague their coming of age
journeys. (p. 84)
Throughout her book, none of the young women she interviews insinuate
that their struggles might have anything to do with being a woman, or
that they are in any way living in “a man’s world,” or that they could or
should unite with other women to fight inequality. Furthermore, the men
and women alike embrace ideals of virile masculinity. One of Silva’s inter-
viewees asks, “What are you going to do as my man?”—a question that
summarizes the representative attitude of heterosexual women toward
potential partners (p. 63. emphasis in original). While the men delay com-
mitment because they cannot fulfill traditional male obligations of earning
power, the women do not see this as a problem of economic inequality.
Rather, they see it as “pure selfishness,” and insist on waiting for a man
who can compete and provide. Consequently, they delay marriage or do
not marry at all. This is an excellent example of what Kelly Oliver (2004),
following Fanon, calls “the colonization of psychic space.”
ANTIRACIST WHITE SUPREMACY

Baran and Sweezy (1966) observe that neither Marx nor Engels fully antici-
pated the transmutation of capitalism as it would appear under “monopoly
capitalism.” Writing during the height of the Civil Rights Movement in
the USA, they begin a chapter on “race relations” as follows:
The race problem in the United States was not created by monopoly capital-
ism. It was inherited from the slave system of the Old South. However, the
nature of the problem has undergone a transformation during the monop-
oly capitalist period; and in a world in which the colored races are shaking
off the bonds of oppression, it is apparent to everyone that the future of the
United States will be deeply, and perhaps decisively, influenced by the fur-
ther development of relations between the races inside the country. (p. 249)
The transformation to which the authors refer is the urbanization of black

populations under monopoly capitalism, and their broad subjection to a
“subproletariat” status. As the preceding statement suggests, they also
firmly believed that the global rebellion by colonized people, coupled with
the Civil Rights Movement in the USA, pointed to a better future for “the
colored races,” both at home and abroad. But if Marx and Engels had not
foreseen the development of monopoly capitalism, neither did Baran and
Sweezy anticipate the alterations to “race relations” that would soon occur
under what Barry Lynn (2010) and others would call “the new monopoly
capitalism.”
Just as neoliberalization has responded to the real threats of substantive
equality that emerged in the 1960s by reinscribing patriarchy, it has simul-
taneously reinstituted white supremacy. In parallel with theorists of gender,
a number of critical race theorists have borne witness to this development.
David Theo Goldberg (2009) concludes: “Neoliberalism … can be read as
a response to this concern about the impending impotence of whiteness”
(p. 337). Dana-Ain Davis (2007) argues that neoliberalism is a system in
which “the reproduction of white privilege is generated in the absence
of blatant racism” (p. 354). She asserts: “White status is the unmarked
success of neoliberalism” (p. 356). Henry Giroux (2008) maintains that,

under neoliberal rationality and practice, a “new racism” has emerged.
Unlike the old racism, this form is hidden, denied, and thus more difficult
to oppose (pp. 60–83). Geographers Roberts and Mahtani (2010), more-
over, show that this holds true in their own country (Canada), and that
neoliberalization does not simply produce racist consequences, but is an
intrinsically racial process.
Again, as was the case with sexism, empirical evidence is not difficult to
find. Indeed, so much evidence exists that recounting it would be over-
whelming. I will mention a few examples. A study by the Pew Research
Center, released in December, 2014, demonstrates that wealth inequality
has increased along racial lines.1 In 1983, at the beginning of the neolib-
eral revolution, white households in the USA held eight times the wealth
of black households. By 2013, this had increased to 13 times. The average
white household in 2013 had a net worth of $141,900. For black house-
holds, it was $11,000. As mentioned previously, incarceration under the
neoliberal state is used to enforce social security rather than simply crimi-
nal security. This means the number of people imprisoned in the USA has
skyrocketed, from a total of about 320,000 in 1978 to about 1.5 million
in 2013. This increase has been divided along racial lines. In 2013, the
incarceration rate for black males was six times greater than white males,
whereas black females were twice as likely to be imprisoned than white
females. Most astounding is that, as of December 31, 2013, almost 3 %
of all black males in the country were in prison.2 This has famously led
Michelle Alexander (2012) to refer to mass incarceration in the USA as
“the new Jim Crow.”
In addition, Stephanopoulos’s authoritative research (2015) on “politi-
cal powerlessness” in the USA shows that blacks are “relatively powerless
at both the federal and state levels.” He concludes: “Sadly, decades after
the struggles of the civil rights era, blacks continue to require heightened
judicial protection” (p. 1598). Finally, Goldberg (2009) demonstrates
that neoliberalization is a racializing process globally, not only in the USA
but also in Western and Northern Europe, South Africa, Latin America,
and in Israel and Palestine.
As with sexism, this is racism that, true to neoliberal formation, has
been both privatized and deregulated. Any type of systemic or structural
racism is vigorously denied. Privatized racism is reduced to the behaviors
of individual “bad apples.” As Goldberg (2009) states: “The individualiza-
tion of wrongdoing, its localization as personal and so private preference
expression, erases institutional racisms precisely as conceptual possibil-

ity” (pp. 362–363). Importantly, this does not entail state neutrality with
regard to racism. Ironically, the state is now in the position to protect at
least some racist actions: “Rather, the state is restructured to support the
privatizing of race and the protection of racially driven exclusions in the
private sphere where they are off-limits to state intervention” (p. 337).
The result? “Race is rendered accordingly before, beneath, or beyond the
law” (p. 363). This provides a striking example of the entanglement of
second-order racism with third-order (deinstitutionalized) racism. In this
discourse, the state is no longer the chief instrument of direct racist activi-
ties. Instead, acts of racism are relegated to the private sphere, including
non-governmental collectives, where they are now frequently given room
to run amuck.
The privatization of race leads directly to its deregulation. In Goldberg’s
(2009) words: “Racisms denuded of their conceptual referents in the final
analysis are racisms deregulated” (p. 344). Racial deregulation in the USA
is apparent in the broad erosion of affirmative action and in the Supreme
Court’s 2013 evisceration of the Voting Rights Act (Shelby County vs.
Holder). It is also at work in the aforementioned dismantling of the social
welfare system, which has disproportionately impacted blacks and other
minorities. Meanwhile, while race has been deregulated through the “roll
back” processes of neoliberalization discussed in previous chapters of this
book, it has been simultaneously re-regulated as part of its “roll out” pro-
cesses. As mentioned in Chap. 2, this includes aggressive policing and
surveillance to manage “unruly populations.” While these populations are
invariably poor, they are racially articulated by neoliberal discourse as a
cover for its more general agenda of increased inequality (Gilens, 1996).
As Parenti (2015) summarizes, “among the important things criminal jus-
tice does is regulate, absorb, terrorize, and disorganize the poor. At the
same time it promulgates politically useful racism” (para. 59). One con-
sequence is the disproportional imprisonment of blacks I have just noted.
Another is the epidemic in the USA of killings of unarmed blacks by police
officers, which is currently being highlighted by the Black Lives Matter
movement.
In short, neoliberalism is a systemic re-institution of white supremacy. But
again, as is the case with sexism, this is not a type of white supremacy we have
seen before. Like sexism, racism has been both muted and mutated. In an
amazing reversal, it carries out a program of white privilege under the ban-
ner of “antiracism.” How has this happened? Goldberg (2009) contends
that this new form of antiracism is best referred to as “antiracialism,”

which is a denial that the term “race” denotes anything of significance. It
no longer even exists as a category to which one can appeal. He declares
this to be a “born again racism,” concluding: “Born again racism is racism
without race, racism gone private, racism without the categories to name
it as such” (p. 23). Incredibly, racism is now a term applied to people who
“play the race card,” or, in other words, attempt to give voice to those who
continue to suffer because of the color of their skin. Racism is reduced
simply to invoking race as a category of analysis or critique (p. 360). This,
then, is an extreme form of desymbolization. Advocates who attempt to
talk about race-based oppression are rendered mute. Worse than that, they
are derided as “the real racists.”
If such desymbolization mutes racism by eroding the discourse for
naming it, it mutates racism as well, yielding a new form referred to by
many as “colorblind racism.” Once again, we are back to how neoliberal-
ization both marginalizes and corrupts already existing forms of suffering.
Colorblind racism is a mutation, or corruption, of an already existing form
of racism. It is, in effect, a corruption of a corruption. To be more pre-
cise, it is a third-order form of suffering that now appears alongside, and
entangled with, second-order racism. Giroux (2008) observes that the
older forms of racist practices and ideologies, what I am calling second-
order racism, have not disappeared. Rather, “they have been transformed,
mutated, and recycled and have taken on new and in many instances more
covert modes of expression” (p. 60). Omi and Winant (2014) argue that
colorblindness is “racial neoliberalism,” and that not only does it obscure
the idea of race (desymbolization) but it also marginalizes the Black
Movement of the 1960s, with its focus on “demands for economic redis-
tribution and political inclusion” (p. 18). In other words, it works to dis-
solve (deinstitutionalize) the collectives and solidarities that were the heart
of that movement. Pastoral theologian Cedric Johnson (2016b) refers to
this attack upon the Black Movement as “dismantling a freedom move-
ment” (pp. 30–34).
But this points primarily to the conservative or right-wing form. There
is also a liberal or progressive version. While some feminist theorists have
explored how neoliberalism has co-opted feminism, a number of critical
race theorists have investigated neoliberalized varieties of the progressive
impetus toward racial equality. What these versions share is the aforemen-
tioned transformation of substantive equality into “equal opportunity.”
Thus, in his W.E.B. Dubois Lectures at Harvard, Paul Gilroy (2010)
laments how a stream of progressivism equates racial justice simply with

inclusion, or “pursuing the expansion of African American access to capi-
talism’s bounty” (p. 5). This type of progressivism is also susceptible to
reproducing Duggan’s (2003) economics/culture split, which I discussed
in Chap. 2. In the racialized variation, as narrated by Giroux (2008), “race
becomes a matter of taste, lifestyle, or heritage but has nothing to do
with politics, legal rights, educational access, or economic opportunities.”
He concludes: “color-blindness deletes the relationship between racial dif-
ferences and power” (p. 69). To paraphrase what Jaffe (2014) said with
regard to sexism, cited previously, neoliberal antiracism is an antiracism
that ignores class as a determining issue in black lives. In a statement
paraphrasing the work of Walter Benn Michaels (2006), political scientist
Adolph Reed, Jr. (2013), criticizes the neoliberal ideal of a just society that
ignores class:
society would be just if 1 percent of the population controlled 90 percent

of the resources, provided that blacks and other nonwhites, women, and
lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender (LGBT) people were represented
among the 1 percent in roughly similar proportion as their incidence in the
general population. (p. 54)
Neoliberal antiracism, and the form of identity politics that accompanies

it, Reed (2009, 2013) concludes, is a vision of racial equality that separates
race from class. The upshot of his view is that, although we can well imag-
ine a classless society in which racism persists, in actually existing societies,
it is impossible to address racism without also addressing class struggle.
Finally, the desymbolizing and deinstitutionalizing trajectories of third-
order racism coalesce in its characteristic desubjectivation. The desubjecti-
vation of blacks under neoliberal governance has been superbly described
by Cedric Johnson (2016b). He deftly explores how many African
Americans experience “racialized neoliberal society” as “a loss of hope
that results in a numbing detachment from others and a destructive dispo-
sition toward one’s self and the world” (p. 57). The various discourses and
power relationships of the neoliberal age, Johnson argues, “produce new
forms of black subjectivity even as older forms persist” (p. 58). Johnson
is pointing, I believe, to the co-existence and entanglements of what I
am calling second- and third-order suffering. On the one hand, the sub-
jectivation of second-order suffering persists. This appears, for example,
in Johnson’s investigation of Fanon’s notion of black subjects “turning
white,” which occurred under the pressures of traditional capitalism and

continues today (pp. 71–73). Here one form of subjectivity is supplanted
by another, alien and alienating one. On the other hand, in a chapter aptly
titled “Forgetting to Remember” (pp. 77–99), Johnson refers to neolib-
eral society as a “traumatogenic environment,” and uses trauma theory
to explore the particular effects of neoliberal culture upon black subjects.
After delineating specific neoliberal practices that traumatize black sub-
jects, he describes states of hyperarousal; intrusive thoughts, affects and
behaviors; and a general numbing and frozen animation that today typ-
ify many black individuals. In my estimation, Johnson, in this chapter, is
pointing to features of the desubjectivation of black lives in the neoliberal
age. Rather than one subjectivity being supplanted by another, such as
blackness by whiteness, subjectivity is reduced, fragmented or dispersed
altogether. This constitutes a racialized version of what Cazdyn (2012)
calls “the new chronic,” which I have previously discussed. Moreover,
Johnson also offers a preliminary exploration of how the new (third-order)
forms of black subjectivity become entangled with the old (second-order)
forms (pp. 93–95).
Silva (2013), as I noted in the preceding discussion of third-order sex-
ism, demonstrates that the shunning of solidarity and the acceptance of
the discourse of personal responsibility is just as relevant to the new rac-
ism. Her interviews with working-class millennials abundantly illustrate
their general elision of race as a category of domination and subjection.
Just as the women she interviews seem largely unaware that they live in a
man’s world, many of the black individuals seem strangely unaware that
they live in a white man’s world. To the degree they are aware, this appears
to bear little significance to their acceptance of responsibility for their own
struggles or failures. Silva characterizes the responses of young blacks as
conflicted: “they both recognize the systematic force of racism but also
resist seeing themselves as it victims” (p. 106). Wanda, a 25-year-old res-
taurant server who is black, criticizes her parents for their inability to beat
their addictions and improve their financial standing (pp. 10–12). She
concludes: “I feel like it’s their fault that they don’t have nothing.” She
believes, furthermore, that it is up to her to manage her own feelings and
behaviors in order not to end up like them: “If my mentality were differ-
ent, then most definitely I would just be stuck” (p. 12, emphases in origi-
nal). Many of the blacks Silva interviews mentioned experiences of racism,
and yet held themselves as individually responsible for overcoming such
challenges. Julian, a 27-year-old black man, admits race remains an issue,
but confesses: “at the end of the day looking in the mirror, I know where
all my shortcomings come from. From the things that I either did not do or
I did and I just happened to fail at them” (p. 106, emphasis in original).
Silva discovered a pervasive acceptance of the neoliberal ideology of meri-
tocracy among her respondents, regardless of how they identified racially:
“Thus, disdain for minorities who cannot pull themselves up by their
bootstraps prevails among both white and black respondents” (p. 107).
Finally, Silva observes that working-class young people have largely given
up on collective life and solidarity. She notes that “their everyday experi-
ences of humiliation and betrayal” teach them “that they can depend on
others only at great cost” (p. 109). Silva concludes:
Through this process, they become acquiescing neoliberal subjects, reject-

ing all kinds of government intervention, and affirmative action in particu-
lar, as antithetical, and thereby offensive, to their lived experiences. In this
way, potential communities of solidarity are broken apart by the strain of
insecurity and risk. (p. 109)
Taken altogether, Silva’s field work among working-class young people in

the USA provides ample evidence for the dissolution of collectives (dein-
stitutionalization), the loss of a credible way to narrate life with any depth
and durability (desymbolization), and a fragmentation of identity or sense
of self (desubjectivation) that is occurring in this population. As I have
already stated, this is important prognostically, given that this is the first
generation born subsequent to the neoliberal revolution. Her work also
documents how third-order suffering is transforming both sexism and rac-
ism in everyday life.
Another implication of Silva’s findings, one which she does not fully
explore, is that there is very little class consciousness among this popula-
tion. Indeed, the young people Silva interviews appear even less aware
of themselves as distinctively “working class” than they do of themselves
as gendered or raced. This is a crucial matter because, as noted in the
preceding discussions, otherwise progressive narratives concerning inclu-
sivity and diversity that separate gender and race from class are vulner-
able to being co-opted by neoliberal agendas. This indicates the critical
importance of what is usually referred to as intersectionality theory. Before
leaving considerations of how the neoliberal paradigm transforms the par-
ticular sufferings of sexism and racism, therefore, I must consider how
theorizing third-order suffering might influence how we understand both
class struggle and intersectionality.
THE NEOLIBERAL AVERSION TO INTERSECTIONALITY

The theories dubbed by the term “intersectionality” offer us a profound
wisdom we dare not distort or misunderstand. Neoliberal material interests
would seduce us away from this wisdom by substituting a bland “diver-
sity,” “inclusivity,” or “multiculturalism.” Such terms appear liberal and
progressive, but are not radical. They support rather than challenge a neo-
liberal status quo. It should give us pause to consider, for example, that
“diversity training” was first promoted within the cultures of very large
corporations. The goal here is to get workers to recognize and appreciate
those who are marked as different—by race, gender, religion, sexual orien-
tation, ethnicity, and so on—so that they “get along” and thus the mecha-
nisms of production run smoothly and efficiently. It also reduces costs
by minimizing the risk of expensive lawsuits. Typically, racism, sexism,
heterosexism, religious discrimination, and so forth are only nominally
treated as matters of social injustice. Finally, neoliberal-friendly diversity
serves capitalist agendas of consumption. “Martin Luther King’s vision of
a beloved community,” concludes bell hooks (2000), “gets translated into
a multicultural multiethnic shopping spree. Commitment to consumption
above all else unifies diverse races and classes” (p. 82).
Among many progressives within the academy, this stand-in for inter-
sectionality appears in what Wendy Brown (1995) calls “the multicultural-
ist mantra, ‘race, class, gender, sexuality’.” Regarding the invocation of
this mantra, Brown argues, “class is invariably named but rarely theorized
or developed” (p. 61). This is significant, for, as I stated in the conclusion
of the preceding section, progressive narratives concerning inclusivity and
diversity that separate gender and race from class are vulnerable to being
co-opted by neoliberal agendas.
Theorists committed to intersectionality must remain vigilant to avoid
being pulled into such prevailing understandings of diversity. Contrary to
both conservative and liberal forms of multiculturalism, intersectionality
theorists who attend to the historical roots of this type of analysis continue
to emphasize the importance of class. Among pastoral theologians, Nancy
Ramsay (2014) has recently been emphasizing the magnitude of intersec-
tionality theory for an adequate understanding of suffering and care. She
rightly observes that, from its emergence among black feminists in the
1970s, this sort of theorizing has argued that the oppressions circulating
around identities are not simply about the lack of respect for cultural dif-
ference but also about how power unevenly circulates through society. This
means that racism and sexism, for example, cannot be understood apart
from class. Thus bell hooks (2000) asserts: “It is impossible to talk mean-
ingfully about ending racism without talking about class” (p. 7). Likewise,
Joy James (1998), introducing a collection of works by Angela Davis,
summarizes: “Davis felt that black liberation was unobtainable apart from
an international workers’ movement against capitalism, imperialism, and
racism.” She concludes: “Her understanding [was] that a mass liberation
struggle needed to be class-based in order to confront the racist founda-
tions of capitalism” (p. 8). A detailed consideration of class persists in other
contemporary intersectionality theorists. Margaret Andersen and Patricia
Hill Collins (2007), in their introduction to Race, Gender, & Class: An
Anthology, carefully distinguish their “matrix of domination model,” with
its laser focus on power differentials, from the “difference model” that
tends to govern current discourse (pp. 5–12).
However, intersectionality theory does not always preserve the sus-
tained critique of capitalism that characterized the work of 1970s radical
feminists (a critique that does, in fact, persist in both hooks and Davis).
These women were almost invariably socialists, and relied on sophisti-
cated Marxist analyses of class, coupled with attention to how the power
dynamics around race, gender, and sexuality are imbricated in, and thus
alter and amend, Marx’s understanding of class struggle (see Eisenstein,
1979). This is nowhere more evident than in the statement issued by The
Combahee River Collective, a solidarity of black feminist lesbians, in 1977
(Eisenstein, pp. 362–372). These women insisted:
We realize that the liberation of all oppressed peoples necessitates the

destruction of the political-economic systems of capitalism and imperialism
as well as patriarchy. We are socialists because we believe the work must be
organized for the collective benefit of those who do the work and create the
products and not for the profit of the bosses…. We need to articulate the
real class situation of persons who are not merely raceless, sexless workers,
but for whom racial and sexual oppression are significant determinants in
their working/economic lives. Although we are in essential agreement with
Marx’s theory as it applied to the very specific economic relationships he
analyzed, we know that this analysis must be extended further in order for
us to understand our specific economic situation as black women. (p. 366)
Angela Davis (1983), however, finds traces of this approach in Marx him-
self. At the conclusion of an essay on “Class and Race in the Early Women’s
Rights Campaign,” she quotes Marx approvingly: “labor in a white skin
can never be free as long as labor in a black skin is branded” (p. 69).
CLASS STRUGGLE AND THIRD-ORDER SUFFERING

I am largely in agreement with the approach of these early black feminists,
although I remain undecided about whether an end to the suffering pro-
duced by advanced capitalism absolutely requires the complete extermina-
tion of capitalism in any form. Leaving that question aside, what I must
now ask is how third-order suffering transforms class struggle, and how
this in turn might inform our perspective on intersectionality theory.
In my view, even the most sophisticated contemporary analyses of
class remain generally tied to depictions of second-order suffering. These
explorations largely continue to see class as connected to established insti-
tutions, such as traditional production facilities and labor unions; look
to some type of shared narratives concerning work; and, at the level of
individual subjectivity as well as group identity, depend on a more-or-less
reliable consciousness of class. I am not opposed to these analyses, nor do
I regard them as outdated. As I have argued, the appearance of third-order
suffering does not entail the complete disappearance of second-order suf-
fering, with which it is now entangled. Furthermore, the rightward drift of
politics in the USA has yielded a situation in which even conventional class
analysis appears radical. In the words of theologian Joerg Rieger (2013),
“In the rare cases when class is addressed, especially in the United States,
it is connected to notions of poverty, social stratification, or income differ-
entials, which are insufficient at best and misleading at worse” (p. 1). Even
the work of social scientist Robert Putnum, with whose work I opened
this book, is limited to this unsatisfactory view of class.
Rieger (2013) asserts that class is a relational term. It only has meaning
as a description of the relationships between classes (pp. 3–5). This returns
us to Marx’s analysis of class struggle. It is not just that the rich are rich,
for example, and the poor are poor. Rather, the poor are poor because the
rich control the means of production and use their political clout to rig
the game in their own favor. As Michael Zweig (2012) insists, class is more
about power than it is cultural distinctions or even money. Moreover, class
is best understood as referring to one’s place and function in the capital-
ist system of production. To be in the working class means having little
power over the conditions and consequences of one’s labor. All this is
congruent with class as understood by the 1970s feminists. A recovery of
this second-order understanding of class oppression gets us much further
than we now stand.
So, how is class being transformed by neoliberalization? The reader

will not be surprised that I will now claim, in parallel to the discussion of
racism and sexism, that class is being profoundly altered by the three Ds—
deinstitutionalization, desymbolization, and desubjectivation (Dufour,
2003/2008). Thus, as in the cases of racism and sexism, we can now per-
ceive an emerging version of class oppression that accords with third-order
suffering. If the new sexism assumes the form of a gender-blind patriarchy,
and the new racism takes the form of an antiracist white supremacy, class
oppression now appears as the de-classification of capitalism. The work-
place collectives and labor narratives that once funded a durable sense
of self for workers have suffered marginalization and corruption. Class
consciousness is being steadily displaced by class unconsciousness. If we
compare the era of exaggerated inequality that existed in the USA early
in the twentieth century with the pronounced inequality of today, the
early twenty-first century, large-scale evidence for the difference between
second-order and third-order class-based suffering appears. Steve Fraser
(2015) calls these “the first Gilded Age” and “the second Gilded Age.”
The first Gilded Age was characterized by wide social unrest. Workers
went on strike en masse, often involving violent conflict with their bosses
and employers, as well as with police, mercenary soldiers, and even the US
military. The Communist Party and various socialist organizations were
gaining public acceptance. Theologians will remember this as the era of
the Social Gospel Movement (Carter, 2015). Many religious leaders were
growing critical of capitalism. By contrast, the incredible level of inequality
today is met by compliance and widespread silence. Fraser thus calls this
“the age of acquiescence.” This does not mean labor organizations and
voices are entirely absent. They have, however, been marginalized, almost
to the point of political insignificance. My own father, a devoted union
member during the 1970s and 1980s, is now a critic of unions and accuses
them of contributing to the problems of workers and society. This attitude
toward labor unions is now broadly apparent in US politics. Another sign
of decreasing awareness of class-based oppression is the growing lack of
protection for workers. Adolph Reed, Jr. (2013) observes:
Legal remedies can be sought for injustices understood as discrimination on

the basis of race, gender, or other familiar categories of invidious ascription;
no such recourse exists for injustices generated through capitalism’s logic
of production and reproduction without mediation through one of those
ascriptive categories. (p. 54)
A thorough discussion of third-order suffering in relation to class would

require a book of its own. Here I will simply point to a few features. Under
second-order class-based oppression, workers generally know from where
their suffering comes—demeaning supervisors, unfair company policies,
hazardous working conditions, depressed wages, and so on. Under neo-
liberal governance, this is less true for large segments of the population.
Increasing numbers of workers have become entrepreneurs out of neces-
sity, engaging in what has become widely known as the “gig economy,”
or “on-demand economy.”3 Who are these workers to hold liable for their
distress, except the abstract and faceless “economy,” when they experience
hardship? But traditional employees often fare no better. If they do not
make a living wage, or garner a wage that seems unfair, they may simply
be told they are being paid what “the market” dictates as the going rate.
Meanwhile, virtually all workers strive under the neoliberal ideology of
meritocracy. They are encouraged to see themselves as self-managers. If
they lose their jobs, suffer demotions, or are underemployed, they typi-
cally blame themselves for what is experienced as a personal failure. This
theme appears throughout Silva’s (2013) extensive interviews with 100
working-class young people. She initiates the conclusion of her study as
follows: “The power of the postwar working class who had battled big
business and won was decimated by the neoliberal turn of the 1970s, leav-
ing the militancy that once fueled their collective movement nowhere to
spread but inward” (p. 144, emphasis added).
Silva (2013) notes that her conclusions are inspired by Sennett’s and
Cobb’s The Hidden Injuries of Class (1972/1993), a book which basi-
cally argues that class conflict cannot be fully appreciated without detailed
attention to its psychological effects. Silva updates this argument by observ-
ing that, under neoliberalism, “risks are increasingly redistributed away
from the state and onto the individual” (p. 145). She therefore reorients
Sennett’s and Cobb’s line of reasoning to “the hidden injuries of risk”
(pp. 144–157), which brings to mind the plight of laborers Guy Standing
(2014) calls “the precariat,” a term he creates to describe the precari-
ous state of workers in an on-demand, entrepreneurial, project-oriented,
part-time economy. It is a mistake to assume the precariat refers only to the
poor or even simply the working class. Many professionals today fall into
this group. For example, I am a highly educated professional. However,
I do not hold a full-time job. Rather, I am self-employed in my part-time
psychotherapy practice, which does not offer a guaranteed income, ben-
efits, or paid time off. In addition, I hold another part-time job teaching
at a major university. While I am grateful to receive a number of benefits
from the university, including health insurance, this does not include paid
time off, the security of tenure, or eligibility for research grants or sab-
baticals. Finally, I work another part-time job—research and writing—for
which I am essentially unpaid. None of this is a complaint. I am gener-
ally well paid and have far more control over my work than the average
laborer. But this does serve to illustrate that, under neoliberalism, there are
far fewer differences between “middle-class” professionals and the “work-
ing class” than in former times. This leads Wysong, Perrucci, and Wright
(2014) to claim that, in the USA, neoliberal policies have yielded a “new
class system” in which prior distinctions between “middle class” and “work-
ing class” make little sense (p. 2, emphasis in original). These researchers
demonstrate that we now live in a polarized and rigid two-class system
in which the vast majority of residents, including most professionals and
most of the professoriate, form the “new working class” (pp. 31–42). This
new class structure is, moreover, tied to “the new economy,” character-
ized by “acute and chronic crises” (pp. 56–59). Life in the new working
class becomes precarious for everyone. We are all enshrouded by risk, even
when we earn living wages or better. This means that third-order suffer-
ing, what Cazdyn (2012) calls “the new chronic,” stealthily encroaches
upon our daily lives. It hangs like a specter over our existence. Falling
over the edge of the economic precipice is not the only potential cause of
trauma; we are chronically traumatized because we must constantly fear
that fall. We know that the next economic crisis, if not personal life crisis,
may put us over the brink.
Second-order class suffering, the naked oppression experienced within
the Weberian “iron cage” constructed by capitalist institutions, has metas-
tasized into an infinite variety of third-order isolated confinements that we
voluntarily inhabit. In this novel labor environment, according to Dardot
and Laval (2009/2013), “everyone is enjoined to construct their own
individual little ‘iron cage’” (p. 262). The sufferings of these isolated work-
ers—fragmentation, demoralization, depression, addiction, depersonaliza-
tion, hyperstimulation, and so on (pp. 288–298)—are indistinguishable
from the markers of chronic trauma. These are the symptoms not of sub-
jectivation but of desubjectivation. Marx’s famous dictum, “all that is solid
melts into air,” now applies to subjectivity. These symptoms of a vaporized
self, Dardot and Laval assert, have a common root: “they can all be related
to the erosion of the institutional frameworks and symbolic structures in
which subjects found their place and identity” (p. 288). What I have called
the “three Ds,” in other words, now occupy the space of labor. They are
the new faces of precarity.
The desubjectivation occurring in the neoliberal workplace has been

highlighted by Boltanski and Chiapello (1999/2007) in The New Spirit
of Capitalism. They note that in this sort of labor, one’s very self becomes
the means of production. The worker must behave such that the cus-
tomer or employer is convinced that she is really sincere in her carefully
performed demeanor. This has been extensively researched by Bunting
(2005) in her book, Willing Slaves. After interviewing hundreds of human
service workers, Bunting describes this unique psychological exploitation.
She calls this “emotional labor.” Where muscle strength is uppermost for
laborers in manual forms of work, “its modern-day equivalent is emo-
tional empathy and the ability to strike up a rapport with another human
being quickly” (p. 61, emphasis in original). Corporations, she observes,
have learned that “empathy has become big business” and that “empathy
makes money,” because customers are far more likely to return to stores
and service providers, and even pay a premium, for receiving “a certain
kind of interaction” (pp. 61, 66–67). Bunting cites one consultant firm
who was hired to conduct “empathy audits” for any company that “wants
its employees to sound warmer or more natural” (pp. 66–67). A human
resources manager for a retail giant boasts that his employees are exhorted
and trained to provide “miles of smiles” and adds: “It’s got to be a real
smile” (p. 103, emphasis in original). This practice not only oppresses
workers, who are denied the spontaneous response of self-expression
because they must follow a corporate script, but it commodifies human
relationships. Bunting concludes:
There is a world of difference between the waitress who chooses to smile,

quip with her customers and be good-natured, and the one whose behavior
has been minutely prescribed by a training manual. The former has some
autonomy over her own feelings; the latter has been forced to open up more
aspects of herself to commodification. (p. 71)
The end result for laborers can be disastrous: “Employees are left to man-
age the dilemmas of authenticity, integrity and their sense of their own
natural, spontaneous personality, which all spill into their private lives”
(p. 72). Our thoughts, interpersonal desires, and even our feelings belong
to the work rather than to ourselves. More importantly, the repetition of
pseudo-authenticity blurs the boundary between the “real self” and the
“virtual self.” We may, ultimately, lose our grip on what it means to even
be a self.
Finally, desubjectivation relative to class is not confined to what hap-

pens at the workplace. Third-order class-based suffering also arises from
the alteration of subjectivity by the debt economy. It has become quite
fashionable to draw a firm distinction between the “real economy,” the
market of material labor, consumption, and exchange; and the “virtual
economy,” or the finance industry, which creates profit through the specu-
lative trading of esoteric instruments based on debt. This suggests that
the debt economy is not quite real, or that it is ultimately reducible to
the more conventional terms of material labor and exchange. There are
problems with this nomenclature. First, how is the finance industry, which
now accounts for the vast majority of capital in global circulation, not in
any way a real economy? Second, while money as debt may, as Goodchild
(2009) argues, have a “spectral quality,” the oppression it governs is quite
real. Goodchild contends that in today’s economy, all money is essentially
debt and concludes: “The value of money is still paid for in flesh and
blood” (p. 236). However, the distinction between the material econ-
omy and the debt economy is helpful if, following Lazzarato (2012), we
reframe the difference as that between money as “revenue” and money as
“capital” (p. 74, emphases in original). As revenue, “money is a means
of payment” for already existing goods and services. It facilitates a system
of material exchange. As capital, however, “money functions as a financ-
ing structure” (p. 74). Here money serves as an extension of credit—the
investors’ term for debt-creation. As credit/debt, money “has the pos-
sibility of choosing and deciding on future production and commodities
and, therefore, on the relations of power and subjection underlying them”
(p. 74). Lazzarato concludes: “Money-revenue simply reproduces power
relations, the division of labor, and the established functions and roles.
Money as capital, on the other hand, has the ability to reconfigure those
relations” (p. 74).
This is critical, for it means that credit/debt has the potential for alter-
ing the class structure and dynamics of any society. And this is exactly
what has happened, Lazzarato (2012) asserts, under neoliberalism. While
debt has existed since the beginning of civilization, prior to neoliberalism
indebtedness amounted to a temporal crisis. It was assumed that a debt
would, at least potentially, be redeemed and the debtor/creditor power
imbalance dissolved. Lazzarato calls this “finite debt.” Neoliberalism, on
the other hand, made debt creation central to its program from the begin-
ning. A feature of its expansion of economic inequality is the creation
of “infinite debt,” debt that effectively is never repaid (pp. 77–88). This
holds true not only for individuals and households but sovereign states as
well. Even those too poor to afford credit are pulled into the repayment
of public debt through regressive taxation (p. 32). This condition of per-
petual indebtedness, in my view, is a way to understand “the new chronic”
(Cazdyn, 2012) in economic terms. Here debt is no longer occasional or
transitional, but normative. It is, in other words, another marker of third-
order suffering. And, under neoliberalism, debt now defines the global
economy. Its reach is universal. Debt, concludes Lazzarato, “is a universal
power relation, since everyone is included within it” (p. 32).
Moreover, according to Lazzarato (2012), debt as normative now
defines class structure: “Debt constitutes the most deterritorialized and
the most general power relation through which the neoliberal power bloc
institutes its class struggle” (p. 89). In a more recent work, Lazzarato
(2015) argues that, under neoliberalism, “class division no longer
depends on the opposition between capitalists and wage-earners but on
that between debtors and creditors” (p. 66). This may paint the matter
too starkly. As I have been arguing, third-order suffering has not replaced
second-order suffering, but exists alongside and is entangled with second-
order suffering. Nonetheless, I do believe Lazzarato is describing a trans-
formation of class struggle that is occurring. His argument that we now
have essentially two classes—creditors and debtors—may represent a way
to articulate the two-tiered class structure described by Wysong, Perrucci,
and Wright (2014) in strictly financial terms.
This transformation of class struggle subtly alters the nature of labor.
As debtors, we do not just create profit for the investor class—the new
“owners”—when we are in the workplace. We are creating surplus value
even in our sleep and with every breath we take. We are not simply
employed. We are owned. We do not simply access the means of produc-
tion; we have become the means of production. Debt, which by definition
is an asymmetrical power relation, is internalized. Thus labor, Lazzarato
observes, “becomes indistinguishable from ‘work on the self’” (2012,
p. 33). Lazzarato points to a prescient essay Marx wrote as a young man:
“Comments on James Mill” (pp. 54–61). Credit, Marx (1844/2005)
argues here, does not simply exploit material labor. It captures the indi-
vidual’s very existence:
Within the credit relationship, it is not the case that money is transcended
in man, but that man himself is turned into money, or money is incorporated
in him. Human individuality, human morality itself, has become both an
object of commerce and the material in which money exists. Instead of

money, or paper, it is my own personal existence, my flesh and blood, my
social virtue and importance, which constitutes the material, corporeal form
of the spirit of money. Credit no longer resolves the value of money into
money but into human flesh and the human heart. (p. 215, emphases in
original)
In this essay, Marx clearly states that credit focuses upon the morality of
the debtor. Her being is defined by solvency or insolvency, a judgment she
implicitly accepts. The permanence and universality of debt under neo-
liberalism makes this moral status virtually ontological, or at least experi-
enced as such. Lazzarato (2015) concludes: “Debtors interiorize power
relations instead of externalizing and combatting them. They feel ashamed
and guilty” (p. 70).
What this suggests is that we consider debt to be a form of moral
injury. As such, the creditor–debtor relationship epitomizes the entangle-
ment between second- and third-order suffering. Debt begins as a coloni-
zation of the psyche, reorienting the soul around solvency and repayment.
In this sense, it is a subjectivation, a re-forming of the subject, and thus an
instance of second-order suffering. Once planted into the soul, however,
it acts as a cancer, consuming its own host. Experts on moral injury, such
as Brock and Lettini (2012), describe their tormented subjects as souls
who have taken on an unpayable moral debt. Their sense of self begins to
dissolve, as they identify their very being as the source of injustice. Just
so, under the extreme conditions of contemporary capitalism, subjectiva-
tion as a debtor leads inexorably to desubjectivation, to third-order suffer-
ing. Common outcomes, as mentioned before, include increasing rates of
depression, addiction, and suicide.
INTERSECTIONALITY AS A POST-CAPITALIST THEORY:

THE INTER-RELATIONALITY OF SUFFERING
In light of the foregoing discussions of the neoliberal alterations of sexism,
racism, and class conflict, I propose that we understand intersectionality
theory as a post-capitalist project. This is not a stretch, given its origin
among 1970s feminists who were themselves quite critical of capitalism.
This requires, however, careful attention to the radical impulse within
intersectionality theory and a dedicated precision regarding terminology.
Otherwise, as I have already noted, it can quite easily be co-opted by
neoliberal versions of diversity and multiculturalism. I will make no effort

to be exhaustive in this concluding section. Rather, I draw upon prior
sections of this chapter to suggest, in summary fashion, five features of an
intersectionality theory that help to preserve its post-capitalist spirit. In
brief, a post-capitalist intersectionality theory: (a) is primarily concerned
with understanding the social generation of suffering rather than indi-
vidual identity formation; (b) emphasizes a material grounding in actual
human relationships rather than intersections between abstract catego-
ries of difference; (c) refuses to ontologize or prioritize the differences
that appear in relationships; (d) strives to establish solidarities rather than
dwelling solely upon the recognition of difference; and (e) works toward
an increase in consciousness that addresses both second- and third-order
suffering.
As for the first point, I have the impression that intersectionality the-
ory, despite its original countercultural impetus, is often read superficially
as first and foremost a discourse about identity formation and cultural
difference. The isolated individualism of neoliberal rationality, further-
more, tends to interpret identity as simply a matter of personal choice or
individual formation. The combination of these two moves robs inter-
sectionality theory of its radical critique. This can have unfortunate real-
life consequences. For example, psychologists Grzanka and Miles (2016),
after studying the literature and training videos for “LGBT Affirmative
Therapy,” conclude that this psychotherapy training program reconceives
intersectionality simply as a matter of “multiple identities.” They argue
that this is an instance of the “multicultural turn” in psychology, ele-
ments of which “are actually consonant with neoliberal transformations
of social and institutional life that foremost function to incorporate differ-
ence, rather than to redirect and reconfigure the ways power and material
resources are unfairly distributed” (emphasis in original).4 They conclude
that, while this form of therapy should not be seen as “fundamentally
neoliberal,” it is co-opted by a neoliberal agenda that ignores structural
inequalities and shifts responsibility onto individual agents. The result, as
we will see in the next chapter, is that individuals may blame themselves
and remain unaware of the social–material origins of their distress.
The overriding concern of intersectionality, however, is not identity
but the suffering arising from systemic oppression. It is a theory about
the social genesis of suffering more than it is an identity theory. In her
overview of intersectionality theory, pastoral theologian Nancy Ramsay
(2014) observes that social justice is “the normative goal in intersectionality”
(p. 456). This means that, while it may indeed shed light on questions
regarding identity, its main concern is social well-being. The statement
of the Combahee River Collective (1977/1979), for example, focuses on
social systems of oppression. The intersections the authors envision are
not between identities as such. In the initial paragraph, they note that their
analyses and practices are “based upon the fact that the major systems of
oppression are interlocking” (p. 362, my emphasis). The spirit of this docu-
ment is preserved in bell hooks’s (2004) recurrent description of con-
temporary oppressions as emanating from “imperialist white-supremacist
capitalist patriarchy” (p. 17).5 Unlike many of the lists common in the
intersectionality literature—race, class, gender, sexuality, and so on—the
culprits here are systems rather than identity categories. Furthermore, the
concern here is laser-focused on suffering.
Oppression is accomplished, however, by both configuring identities
and manipulating the power dynamics circulating around and through
them. The black feminists who wrote the Combahee River Collective
statement believed that, while racism, sexism, and heterosexism cannot
be reduced to class conflict, neither can the oppressions around these
identities be understood without comprehending their place in capitalist
systems of production. For our purposes here, it is critical to remember
that neoliberal rationality is perfectly capable of co-opting intersectional
discourse, primarily by reemploying the economics/culture divide I have
previously discussed in this book. This has become evident during the
2016 presidential campaigns in the USA, in which the problems of rac-
ism and sexism are often discussed without reference to class struggle. As
Denvir (2016) has observed, such injustices “cease to be intersectional the
moment they are abstracted from political economy” (para. 7).
Speaking of abstraction, those who espouse a post-capitalist intersec-
tionality, which is to say, a version of this theory that retains its historical
origins, will have reservations about this designation. This brings us to
the second feature of a post-capitalist intersectionality. The term “inter-
sectionality” is highly conceptual and immaterial. On its face, it appears
to conjure up a mental exercise in which abstract categories of difference,
rather than actual people, are interrelated. Worse yet, it could be taken
to imply—contrary to its original principles—that these are categories of
essential difference that are first separate, with the challenge being how
to theorize their points of contact. In addition to leaving aside consider-
ations of class, this is precisely what neoliberalized forms of intersectional-
ity tend to do. The neoliberal imagination conceives societies as aggregates
of distinctive and separate-but-equal individuals. The intellectual problem

is then how to explain the ways these individual building blocks intersect.
Perhaps, then, we need a better word for theorizing the sufferings
emerging around social differences. It is generally accepted that the term
intersectionality first appeared in a paper by the legal scholar Kimberle
Crenshaw (1989). Thus neither the term “intersectionality” nor any of
its derivatives appears in the statement of the Combahee River Collective
(1977/1979). Rather, the document consistently refers to human rela-
tionships. Markers of difference (identities) are understood as entangled in
the dynamics of everyday relationships, not only between individuals but
also between individuals and social systems, as well as between collectives.
Womanist theologian and ethicist emilie townes (personal communication,
January 19, 2016) suggests that a better term might be inter-relationality.
In my view, this means that the differences suffusing actual relationships,
and the sufferings that often originate in them, are embedded in the mate-
riality of relationships. They appear as we relate in concrete ways—eating
together, living together, working together—including the ways we col-
laborate within and among collectives, as well as how we construct the
economics and policies of social life. From this perspective, identities are
always formed in relationships. They may be healthy or unhealthy, just
or unjust, or combinations thereof. But they are never simply “personal
choices.” Thus Ramsay (2014) observes: “Intersectional approaches to
identity clearly link individual and social dimensions to any experience of
identity. Identity is socially and historically constructed” (p. 456). The
sociologist Zygmunt Bauman (2004) adds that identity “cannot be formed
unless in reference to the bonds connecting the self to other people and
the assumption that such bonds are reliable and stable over time” (p. 68).
In more just relationships and societies, individuals have enough liberty to
improvise upon what is given to them, and identities remain flexible. In
less just societies, identities are simply imposed and rigid.
I have been claiming that neoliberal transformations of sexism and
racism refer to identity categories that are shorn of class. This may be
a good place to comment on the connection, within an inter-relational
perspective, between class and other identities. In a previous publication,
I have argued that class is not an identity (Rogers-Vaughn, 2015). I must
now repent of that opinion. At the time, I was focused on the difference
between class and identity as this term is understood within neoliberal
identity politics. Inter-relationality, however, gives us a way to understand
identity, and even identity politics, from outside neoliberal discourse.
Class, of course, has to be amenable to identification. Otherwise there

could be no “class consciousness,” as well as forms of solidarity and social
movements founded upon it. I still claim, however, that class is “a differ-
ent kind of difference.” As theologian Joerg Rieger (2013) has noted, to
talk about inclusion or diversity with regard to class, as we might with gen-
der and race, makes little sense (p. 199). For instance, applying affirmative
action to gender and race leads to a more equitable society. If applied to
class differences, however, “it would mean the end of capitalism” (p. 202).
What I wish to add here is that the economic and political power differ-
entials indicated by the term class are not simply the basis for a potential
identity. More importantly, class power manifests the capacity to generate
and reconfigure identities, including those attributed to sex, gender, and
race. For example, the ability to have an identity, much less multiple iden-
tities, as well as the degree of agency to improvise upon identity varies with
class power. Bauman (2004) summarizes this capacity:
At one pole of the emergent global hierarchy are those who can compose
and decompose their identities more or less at will, drawing from the uncom-
monly large, planet-wide pool of offers. At the other pole are crowded those
whose access to identity choice has been barred, people who are given no
say in deciding their preferences and who in the end are burdened with
identities enforced and imposed by others; identities which they themselves
resent but are not allowed to shed and cannot manage to get rid of. (p. 38,
emphasis in original)
Although I reject the notion of identity as a personal choice, I am rein-

terpreting Bauman’s position with reference to the relative capacity to
improvise upon what is given. Most of us, says Bauman, “are suspended
uneasily between those two poles,” and must tolerate a level of anxiety
surrounding the precariousness of our identities (p. 38). Finally, Bauman
notes: “there is a lower space than low—a space underneath the bottom”
(p. 39). In this space dwell those whom he calls the “underclass,” those
whom Sassen (2014) calls “the expelled.” These inhabitants have no iden-
tities at all, even those that may be oppressive:
The meaning of the ‘underclass identity’ is an absence of identity; the efface-

ment or denial of individuality, of ‘face’—that object of ethical duty and
moral care. You are cast outside the social space in which identities are
sought, chosen, constructed, evaluated, confirmed or refuted. (Bauman,
2004, p. 39, emphasis in original)
Bauman is pointing here to desubjectivation in its most extreme form, and

thus to what I am calling third-order suffering. While desubjectivation
appears in other classes, in the underclass it is pervasive and near-absolute.
But what I wish to emphasize here is that class has a dual meaning. It is
both a potential identity and a power that generates and configures other
identities.
Thirdly, a post-capitalist intersectionality, or inter-relationality, refuses
to ontologize or prioritize the differences that appear in human relation-
ships. It is clear to most people, I think, that class is not ontological. It is
not, in other words, given or natural. The ideal of social mobility—shared
in the USA by political conservatives and liberals alike—assumes that one
may be born into one class but ascend (or descend) into another. This is
one thing that distinguishes capitalism, which divides society into classes,
from pre-capitalist feudal societies, which divided the populace into rigid
caste systems. What is often missed is that race and gender have no more
ontological status than class. Scientific efforts to identify essential differ-
ences according to race and gender, beyond somatic variations such as
sexual anatomy, skin pigmentation, eye color, body morphology, and hair
texture have either come up empty or confirmed cultural stereotypes (e.g.
Fields & Fields, 2014; Fine, 2010). Reed (2013) concludes that such
efforts are “nothing more than narrow upper-class prejudices parading
about as science” (p. 51). Theories emphasizing inter-relationality eschew
assertions of essential difference and seek instead to identify ways that
a hegemony utilizes asserted differences to serve its interests and agen-
das. The focus here is on how dominant powers create, configure, and
utilize identities to accomplish political and material agendas. Regarding
designations of race, Victor Anderson (1999) has been a pioneer in assert-
ing that “blackness” is not ontological. Similarly, Fields and Fields (2014)
argue that racism does not emerge because there are races. Rather, prac-
tices of racism create the notion of race through a process the authors call
“racecraft.” As Harry Chang (Liem & Montague, 1985) claimed dur-
ing the 1970s, racialization is a type of reification: “Money seeks gold to
objectify itself—gold does not cry out to be money” (p. 39). The upshot
of all this, according to Reed, is that race and gender are “ascriptive dif-
ferences” utilized by systems of domination: “Ideologies of ascriptive dif-
ference help to stabilize a social order by legitimizing its hierarchies of
wealth, power, and privilege, including its social division of labor, as the
natural order of things” (p. 49).
This is not an argument for a “class first” approach. While gender and
race, like class, are created and configured within matrices of domina-
tion, the consequent sexism and racism are quite real and take up lives of
their own. Moreover, gender, race and class are always already entangled. It
would be futile to attempt to prioritize them, even in concrete instances
of oppression. For this reason, the statement of the Combahee River
Collective (1977/1979) asserts that “race, sex, and class are simultane-
ous factors in oppression” (p. 371). It is tempting to think that each may
assume priority, depending on contextual circumstances. Even bell hooks
(Lowens, 2012), in a recent interview, observes that theories of intersec-
tionality “allow us to focus on what is most important at a given point in
time. …Like right now, for many Americans, class is being foregrounded
like never before because of the economic situation” (para. 19). I fear that
such declarations may be slippery slopes that function to maintain antago-
nistic divisions within the progressive left. Furthermore, such a position
does not attend to how, in everyday life, the oppressions circulating around
these identities are directly, rather than inversely, proportional. It just does
not seem to be the case that, with the increasing economic inequality
under neoliberalism, class concerns move to the foreground, while sexism
and racism recede. Rather, they all rise together and in tandem. It is true
that rampant inequality has intensified class conflict and made it more
visible. However, sexism has also increased under these conditions, with
disproportional numbers of women pressured into low-paid and unpaid
work, and with discrimination and violence against women accelerating
(Braedley & Luxton, 2010; Connell, 2010). Likewise, growing economic
inequality has been accompanied by suppressed income for blacks and by
more frequent and egregious acts of violence and exploitation toward peo-
ple of color (Giroux, 2010; Goldberg, 2009). It is surely no coincidence
that this period, in the USA, has been marked by massive incarceration of
blacks and an escalation in killings of unarmed blacks by law enforcement
officials. As a parent, I fear for the future of my two biracial sons, now
eight years of age, who will likely experience oppression at the hands of
dominant neoliberal powers unless substantial changes occur. The point
is that economic and social exclusion and exploitation go together. We
simply can no longer afford a “class first” or “race first” or “gender first”
approach to political action.
This brings us to a fourth dimension of a post-capitalist inter-relationality.
While the statement of the Combahee River Collective (1977/1979) may
be interpreted as laying out the significance of identity politics, it is not the

same identity politics that have become so familiar in neoliberal societies.
Neoliberal identity politics have effectively balkanized what was once “the
public.” Society breaks up into a multitude of identity groups, each more
or less insulated from the others and in competition with them. This sort of
fractiousness is absent in the statement of the Combahee River Collective.
While clear about their own identity and interests, these women look for
ways to collaborate with others, especially for political action. They stress,
for example: “Although we are feminists and lesbians, we feel solidarity
with progressive black men and do not advocate the fractionalization that
white women who are separatists demand” (p. 365). After noting a num-
ber of examples, they emphasize that they “continue to do political work
in coalition with other groups” (p. 371). This underscores that a post-
capitalist inter-relationality presses through the recognition of difference
in search of solidarity. If the problems of class exploitation, sexism, and
racism arise together, then they must be addressed together. Pastoral theo-
logian Cedric Johnson (2016a) observes:
Social exclusion and labor exploitation are different problems, but they
are never disconnected under capitalism. And both processes work to the
advantage of capital. Segmented labor markets, ethnic rivalry, racism, sex-
ism, xenophobia, and informalization all work against solidarity. (para. 77)
Any approach that gives primacy to a particular identity, much less attribut-
ing ontological status to it, necessarily undermines solidarity and political
action. Johnson singles out “liberal antiracist discourse,” which separates
race from class and prioritizes racism, as an example:
Liberal antiracist discourse further isolates the conditions of the most

excluded segments of workers, separating their experiences from those of
other workers, and their labor from the broader processes at work, instead
of emphasizing the empirical and potential unity of the laboring classes.
(para. 78)
This aids and abets the “divide and conquer” strategy that financial elites
have historically used to divide working people against each other.
Finally, a post-capitalist inter-relationality strives toward the increase of
consciousness, particularly with regard to the social origins of suffering.
Even with regard to second-order suffering, consciousness-raising is often
critical. This is because the complex machinations of institutions and social

systems tend to occur, as Marx often noted, “behind the backs” of the
people. With third-order suffering—which arises from the synergy of dein-
stitutionalization, desymbolization, and desubjectivation—the increase of
consciousness is even more important. As I discussed in previous sections,
neoliberal rationality denies and thus renders sexism, racism, and class
conflict invisible. Furthermore, by undertaking the “Three Ds,” neoliber-
alization erodes a sense of belonging, a common language for naming the
suffering, and any durable agency. This yields the most profound uncon-
sciousness imaginable, including, ultimately, a lack of awareness of going-
on-being. How is the language of inter-relationality to make any sense for
people in such a condition? Where are its referents now? We are reduced
here to a voiceless and nameless suffering. So that is where we must begin.
William Davies (2015) speaks, I believe, to this situation: “Rather than
seek to alter our feelings, now would be a good time to take what we’ve
turned inwards, and attempt to direct it back out again” (p. 11). Part of
the wisdom of inter-relationality is that nothing can “make sense” outside
of relationships. Especially when we no longer know who we are, and our
suffering has no name, we need others who will be present to bear wit-
ness. We can only direct our suffering back out when we can direct it to
others, even when this means, initially, sitting in silence together. There
is no hope unless we can begin with at least this seed of solidarity. This
does not mean “psychotherapy for everybody.” Rising from such a deep
unconsciousness occurs best in groups, and perhaps even in movements,
where “deep calls unto deep.” After many years of activism, Angela Davis
(2016) confesses:
I don’t know whether I would have survived had not movements survived,
had not communities of resistance, communities of struggle. So whatever
I’m doing I always feel myself directly connected to those communities and
I think that this is an era where we have to encourage that sense of com-
munity particularly at a time when neoliberalism attempts to force people
to think of themselves only in individual terms and not in collective terms.
It is in collectivities that we find reservoirs of hope and optimism. (p. 49)
So, to undo the spell of neoliberalism, we must “play the record in

reverse.” That means finding paths, however meager, back to solidarity.
And this brings us to the next chapter, in which I must respond to the
inevitable question: “Where do we go from here?”
NOTES
1. http://www.pewresearch.org/fact-tank/2014/12/12/racial-
wealth-gaps-great-recession/#comments (Accessed 05 January
2016).
2. All statistics on incarceration are from a September 2014 report by
the US Department of Justice, titled “Prisoners in 2013,” available
at http://www.bjs.gov/content/pub/pdf/p13.pdf (Accessed 05
January 2016).
3. Katy Steinmetz, “Exclusive: See How Big the Gig Economy Really
Is,” Time, January 6, 2016, available at http://time.com/4169532/
sharing-economy-poll/ (Accessed January 31, 2016).
4. At the time of this writing, this article was only available online and
had not been paginated, thus page numbers are not yet available for
citations within this article.
5. While I am using a particular citation here, variations of this phrase
appear throughout hooks’s writings and interviews.
REFERENCES
Alexander, M. (2012). The new Jim Crow: Mass incarceration in the age of color-
blindness (Rev. ed.). New York, NY: The New Press.
Andersen, M. L., & Collins, P. H. (Eds.). (2007). Race, class, & gender: An anthol-
ogy (6th ed.). Belmont, CA: Thomson Wadsworth.
Anderson, V. (1999). Beyond ontological blackness: An essay on African American
religious and cultural criticism. New York, NY: Continuum.
Baran, P. A., & Sweezy, P. M. (1966). Monopoly capital: An essay on the American
economic and social order. New York, NY: Modern Reader Paperbacks.
Bauman, Z. (2004). Identity: Conversations with Benedetto Vecchi. Cambridge:
Polity Press.
Braedley, S., & Luxton, M. (2010). Competing philosophies: Neoliberalism and
challenges of everyday life. In S. Braedley & M. Luxton (Eds.), Neoliberalism
and everyday life (pp. 3–21). Montreal, QC: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Brock, R. N., & Lettini, G. (2012). Soul repair: Recovering from moral injury after
war. Boston, MA: Beacon Press.
Bunting, M. (2005). Willing slaves: How the overwork culture is ruling our lives.
London: Harper Perennial.
Carter, H. W. (2015). Union made: Working people and the rise of social Christianity
in Chicago. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Combahee River Collective. (1977/1979). The Combahee River Collective: A
black feminist statement. In Z. R. Eisenstein (Ed.), Capitalist patriarchy and
the case for socialist feminism (pp. 362–372). New York, NY: Monthly Review
Press.
Connell, R. (2010). Understanding neoliberalism. In S. Braedley & M. Luxton
(Eds.), Neoliberalism and everyday life (pp. 22–36). Montreal, QC: McGill-
Queen’s University Press.
Connell, R. W. (2005). Masculinities (2nd ed.). Berkeley, CA: University of
California Press.
Crenshaw, K. (1989). Demarginalizing the intersection of race and sex: A black
feminist critique of antidiscrimination doctrine, feminist theory and antiracist
politics. The University of Chicago Legal Forum, 139–167.
sold us well-being. London, UK: Verso.
Davis, A. Y. (1983). Women, race & class. New York, NY: Vintage Books.
Davis, A. Y. (2016). In F. Barat (Ed.), Freedom is a constant struggle: Ferguson,
Palestine, and the foundations of a movement. Chicago, IL: Haymarket Books.
Davis, D.-A. (2007). Narrating the mute: Racializing and racism in a neoliberal
moment. Souls: A Critical Journal of Black Politics, Culture, and Society, 9(4),
346–360.
Denvir, D. (2016, February 19). Hillary Clinton’s cynical race appeals: The revenge
of neoliberal identity politics. Salon. Retrieved February 20, 2016, from http://
www.salon.com/2016/02/19/hillar y_clintons_cynical_raceappeals_
the_revenge_of_neoliberal_identity_politics/
Polity Press.
Eisenstein, Z. R. (Ed.). (1979). Capitalist patriarchy and the case for socialist femi-
nism. New York, NY: Monthly Review Press.
Fields, K. E., & Fields, B. J. (2014). Racecraft: The soul of inequality in American
life. London: Verso.
Fine, C. (2010). Delusions of gender: How our minds, society, and neurosexism cre-
ate difference. New York, NY: W. W. Norton & Company.
Fraser, N. (2013a). Fortunes of feminism: From state-managed capitalism to neolib-

eral crisis. London: Verso.
Fraser, N. (2013b, October 13). How feminism became capitalism’s hand-
maiden—And how to reclaim it. The Guardian. Retrieved February 28, 2016,
from http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/oct/14/
feminism-capitalist-handmaiden-neoliberal
Fraser, S. (2015). The age of acquiescence: The life and death of American resistance
to organized wealth and power. New York, NY: Little, Brown and Company.
Gilens, M. (1996). “Race coding” and white opposition to welfare. The American
Political Science Review, 90(3), 593–604.
Gilens, M. (2012). Affluence & influence: Economic inequality and political power
in America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press and the Russell Sage
Foundation.
Gilroy, P. (2010). Darker than blue: On the moral economies of Black Atlantic cul-
ture. Cambridge, MA: The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Giroux, H. A. (2005). The terror of neoliberalism: Rethinking the significance of
cultural politics. College Literature, 32(1), 1–19.
Giroux, H. A. (2008). Against the terror of neoliberalism: Politics beyond the age of
greed. Boulder, CO: Paradigm Publishers.
Giroux, S. S. (2010). Sade’s revenge: Racial neoliberalism and the sovereignty of
negation. Patterns of Prejudice, 44(1), 1–26.
Goldberg, D. T. (2009). The threat of race: Reflections on racial neoliberalism.
Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.
Goodchild, P. (2009). Theology of money. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Grzanka, P. R., & Miles, J. R. (2016). The problem with the phrase “intersecting
identities”: LGBT affirmative therapy, intersectionality, and neoliberalism.
Sexuality Research and Social Policy. doi:10.1007/s13178-016-0240-2.
hooks, b. (2000). Where we stand: Class matters. New York, NY: Routledge.
hooks, b. (2004). The will to change: Men, masculinity, and love. New York, NY:
Washington Square Press.
Hubbard, P. (2004). Revenge and injustice in the neoliberal city: Uncovering mas-
culinist agendas. Antipode, 36(4), 665–686.
Jaffe, S. (2013). Trickle-down feminism. Dissent. Retrieved February 27, 2016,
from https://www.dissentmagazine.org/article/trickle-down-feminism
Jaffe, S. (2014). Neoliberal feminists don’t want women to organize. The Public
Eye, 6–7. Retrieved February 28, 2016, from http://www.politicalresearch.
org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/2014/10/Public-Eye-Magazine-
Fall-2014.pdf
James, J. (Ed.). (1998). The Angela Y. Davis reader. Malden, MA: Blackwell
Publishing.
Johnson, C. C. (2016a, February 3). An open letter to Ta-Nehisi Coates and the
liberals who love him. Jacobin. Retrieved February 28, 2016, from https://
w w w. j a c o b i n m a g . c o m / 2 0 1 6 / 0 2 / t a - n e h i s i - c o a t e s - c a s e - f o r -
reparations-bernie-sanders-racism/
Johnson, C. C. (2016b). Race, religion, and resilience in the neoliberal age.
New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Lazzarato, M. (2015). Governing by debt (Joshua D. Jordan, Trans.). South
Pasadena, CA: Semiotext(e).
Liem, P., & Montague, E. (Eds.). (1985). Toward a Marxist theory of racism: Two
essays by Harry Chang. Review of Radical Political Economics, 17(3), 34–45.
Lowens, R. (2012). How do you practice intersectionalism? An interview with bell
hooks. Common Struggle. Retrieved February 28, 2016, from http://com-
monstruggle.org/bellhooks
Lynn, B. C. (2010). Cornered: The new monopoly capitalism and the economics of
destruction. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Marx, K. (1844/2005). Comments on James Mill, élémens d’économie politique.
In Karl Marx & Frederick Engels (Eds.), Karl Marx, Frederick Engels: Collected
Works, Volume 3: 1843-1844 (pp. 211–228) (Clemens Dutt, Trans.). New York,
NY: International Publishers.
Michaels, W. B. (2006). The trouble with diversity: How we learned to love identity
and ignore inequality. New York, NY: Holt Paperbacks.
Oliver, K. (2004). The colonization of psychic space: A psychoanalytic social theory of
oppression. Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press.
Omi, M., & Winant, H. (2014, Fall). How colorblindness co-evolved with free-
market thinking. The Public Eye, 16–18. Retrieved February 28, 2016, from
h t t p : / / w w w. p o l i t i c a l r e s e a r c h . o r g / w p - c o n t e n t / u p l o a d s / d o w n -
loads/2014/10/Public-Eye-Magazine-Fall-2014.pdf
Parenti, C. (2015, July 28). The making of the American police state. Jacobin.
Retrieved January 18, 2016, from https://www.jacobinmag.com/2015/07/
incarceration-capitalism-black-lives-matter/
Ramsay, N. J. (2014). Intersectionality: A model for addressing the complexity of
oppression and privilege. Pastoral Psychology, 63(4), 453–469.
Reed, A., Jr. (2009). The limits of anti-racism. Left Business Observer, 121.
Retrieved February 27, 2016, from http://www.leftbusinessobserver.com/
Antiracism.html
Reed, A., Jr. (2013). Marx, race, and neoliberalism. New Labor Forum, 22(1),
49–57.
Rieger, J. (2013). Instigating class struggle? The study of class in religion and
theology and some implications for gender, race, and ethnicity. In J. Rieger
(Ed.), Religion, theology, and class: Fresh engagements after long silence
(pp. 189–211). New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Roberts, D. J., & Mahtani, M. (2010). Neoliberalizing race, racing neoliberalism:
Placing “race” in neoliberal discourses. Antipode, 42(2), 248–257.
Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2015). Powers and principalities: Initial reflections toward a

post-capitalist pastoral theology. Journal of Pastoral Theology, 25(2), 71–92.
Sennett, R., & Cobb, J. (1972/1993). The hidden injuries of class. New York, NY:
W. W. Norton & Company.
Standing, G. (2014). The precariat: The new dangerous class (Rev. ed.). New York,
NY: Bloomsbury Academic.
Stephanopoulos, N. O. (2015). Political powerlessness. New York University Law
Review, 90, 1527–1608.
Wysong, E., Perrucci, R., & Wright, D. (2014). The new class society: Goodbye
American dream? (4th ed.). Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers.
Zweig, M. (2012). The working class majority: America’s best kept secret (2nd ed.).
Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
CHAPTER 6
Beyond Self-Management: Re-Membering

Soul
I concluded the previous chapter suggesting that any path forward from
where we are today would require both increased consciousness and soli-
darity. While I believe this to be true, undertaking the analysis of neoliber-
alism I have conveyed in this book leaves me wary. The ubiquity, severity,
and mystifying character of the suffering I have tried to describe in these
pages makes me worry that any effort to propose a response, no matter
how careful, may come across as blithe, naïve, or undeservedly optimistic.
Indeed, I must confess that I have often wondered, while conducting the
research for this project, how we can avoid, both individually and col-
lectively, simply resigning ourselves to despair. Personally, learning more
about the deep effects of global neoliberalization has done nothing to
relieve my tendencies toward melancholy. The first time I taught a course
titled “Pastoral Care and Global Capitalism,” I found that my students,
mostly individuals in their twenties, required little persuasion about the
corrosive effects of contemporary capitalism. Perhaps dwelling too long
on the analysis, we found ourselves skating along the edge of collective
despair. Finally, their forbearance wearing thin, the students pleaded: “Yes,
but what can we do?” Of course, there is no way around this question. My
students expect a response, as do the people who come to me for pastoral
psychotherapy, as do you, my persevering reader.

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_6
So, in this chapter I will respond. But I will not be proposing specific
“evidence-based” techniques for countering the effects of neoliberalism.
There is no Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Neoliberal Disorders,
coupled with sets of “best practices” for alleviating the particular dis-
tresses they produce. I will not be designing a manualized plan for Anti-
Neoliberal Therapy (ANT), selling glossy ANT promotional packets, or
offering weekend certification programs in ANT. We simply cannot beat
neoliberalism at its own game, or on its own terms. We would be cruel
to offer individuals, couples, and families, already impossibly burdened
with the expectation to manage their problems for themselves, new and
improved methods for self-management. Even if this “worked,” we will
have only succeeded in helping people cope with the system as it is. We
will have done nothing to change it. If anything, the system will have
become even more resilient than before.
Moreover, the belief that even the most intransigent problems can be
solved by better techniques and technologies is sheer optimism, which is
one of those things neoliberalism does best. As I will assert later, in the
postscripts, what we need instead is hope. Whereas optimism indicates
a belief that things will turn out okay, hope remains embedded in vis-
ceral suffering. In the words of Gabriel Marcel (1951/1978), “The truth
is that there can strictly speaking be no hope except when the tempta-
tion to despair exists” (p. 36). Equating optimism with belief in progress,
Christopher Lasch (1991) observes:
The worst is always what the hopeful are prepared for. Their trust in life
would not be worth much if it had not survived disappointments in the
past, while the knowledge that the future holds further disappointments
demonstrates the continuing need for hope. Believers in progress, on the
other hand, though they like to think of themselves as the party of hope,
actually have little need of hope, since they have history on their side. But
their lack of it incapacitates them for intelligent action. Improvidence, the
blind faith that things will somehow work out for the best, furnishes a poor
substitute for the disposition to see things through even when they don’t.
(p. 81, emphasis added)
With the accumulating failures of neoliberalism becoming ever more

apparent, I believe we can conclude that things are not turning out for the
best. If we are to respond intelligently and compassionately, we have to
begin where we find ourselves. A neoliberal world is a place of profound
despair. This is our point of departure.
BEYOND SELF-MANAGEMENT: RE-MEMBERING SOUL 169
The texture and depth of this despair becomes more evident when we
consider how third-order suffering characterizes the present age. While it
is true that a lack of consciousness is not new, unconsciousness has never
been as normative as it is today. Indeed, compared to third-order suffering,
first- and second-order suffering are remarkably conscious forms of human
misery. The advantage of these older forms of distress is that their enhanced
awareness can fund both personal and social transformation. I venture that,
historically, the capacity for change has been directly proportional to the
breadth and intensity of first- and second-order suffering. Not only are
people generally aware of such anguish, often excruciatingly so, they also
tend to recognize its origins. When these sorts of suffering reach a critical
level, personal and/or social transformation(s) are practically assured. The
opposite seems to be the case with third-order suffering. Here the degree
of distress is inversely proportional to the potential for change. Suffering
that has been privatized, that has lost its voice and its grounding in a
symbolic order, and has been dispersed by the fragmentation of self and
soul, is unlikely to produce transformation in any human system—social,
interpersonal, or psychological. Furthermore, the increasing entanglement
of third-order suffering with first- and second-order suffering, as I have
argued, alters these forms toward its own character. This further reduces
the opportunities for resistance and change. With a bit of artistic license, we
might portray this as zombie suffering. We are hollowed out and going to
pieces, but hardly awake. The horror of this age is that we are not horrified.
What is the character of this slumber? In Chap. 4 I discussed Zygmunt
Bauman’s theory regarding how neoliberalization enacts a dual strategy to
accomplish the denial and avoidance of death and suffering. If we associate
these strategies with the character of third-order suffering, we can identify
two levels of unconsciousness. At the first and most profound level, third-
order suffering is suffering that is not aware of itself as suffering. Catherine
Malabou (2012) identifies this as a feature of “destructive plasticity”:
What destructive plasticity invites us to consider is the suffering caused by

an absence of suffering, in the emergence of a new form of being, a stranger
to the one before. Pain that manifests as indifference to pain, impassivity,
forgetting, the loss of symbolic reference points. (p. 18)
At this level, third-order suffering is reminiscent of Kierkegaard’s

(1849/1980) “despair that is ignorant of being despair.” An individual
under the spell of such “… is altogether secure in the power of despair”
(p. 44). Nothing can be done with suffering that remains so deeply uncon-
scious. It cannot be addressed, resolved, repaired, or comforted. Nor can
it inspire change that would relieve any injustice or condition upon which
it might be founded. The first and necessary step to care for the weak-
ened souls under such a spell is, perhaps counterintuitively, to help them
become aware of their distress. This must remain part of the conundrum
to be taken up in this chapter.
In the second level of unconsciousness there can be extreme suffering,
misery that is quite conscious, but with little to no awareness of its origins.
Suffering and the larger web of powers funding it have been de-linked. As
I have observed throughout this book, under neoliberal existence such
suffering usually manifests psychologically as intractable mood disorders
(indefinable depressions and paralyzing anxieties) and polymorphous
addictions. Because such suffering has been unlinked from its sources,
it appears senseless. It is mystified. Thus it cannot be fully addressed. It
can only be managed. As Cazdyn (2012) says of “the new chronic,” a
feature of what I am calling third-order suffering: “Every level of society
is stabilized on an antiretroviral cocktail. Every person is safe, like a dia-
betic on insulin” (p. 13). Here the intent is no longer caring for souls,
but the administration of souls in a state of suspended animation. Cazdyn
summarizes:
The new chronic mode in medicine, in which the utopian desire to cure
is displaced by the practical need to manage and stabilize, if not preempt
the disease altogether (practiced in fields as varied as oncology, HIV, and
psychiatry), is also at work in politics and culture. I am highly skeptical of
this mode. (p. 6)
I am suggesting that de-linking sufferings from the interlocking sys-

tems within which they originate inevitably reduces care to management.
This unlinking is intrinsic to the entrepreneurial individualism of neolib-
eral cultures. As I have observed in previous chapters, this means that
suffering originates inside individuals—in their bodies, in their psyches,
and perhaps, by extension, from within the small circle of their inter-
personal intimates and associates. Within the current hegemony we lack
understanding of the ways in which these bodies, psyches, and proximal
circles are connected to systems outside themselves. Moreover, individuals
are responsible for their own distress, using whatever resources they can
access. This further reduces care to self-management.
In this chapter I am asserting that caring for souls requires us to escape

these small boxes in which we simply help people manage their suffering.
This is not just a logical conclusion, but also a moral imperative. Moving
beyond these confines, moreover, will entail breaking the spell of both
types of unconsciousness I have just mentioned. Simultaneously, as we
shall see, getting beyond self-management involves the refusal to merely
psychologize suffering. As Ian Parker (2007) has argued, modern psychol-
ogies have integrated capitalist notions of private property into their theo-
ries and practices (pp. 9–54). For example, we encourage people to “own”
their feelings, thus reproducing the individualism and social relations of
capitalism. This has become even more problematic living in the extreme
conditions of capitalism’s neoliberal manifestation. Caring for souls in the
neoliberal age will thus oblige us to discover ways to assist people in dis-
owning their feelings. In the words of William Davies (2015), which I have
cited before but are worth repeating here: “Rather than seek to alter our
feelings, now would be a good time to take what we’ve turned inwards,
and attempt to direct it back out again” (p. 11). This dis-owning does not
mean we no longer acknowledge our experience. Rather, we now recog-
nize our emotions and other psychological phenomena as emerging from
the entangled systems within which we exist. The spirit of this turning out
is expressed in the words of an anonymous group of French intellectu-
als and activists who identify themselves as “The Invisible Committee”
(2009): “We are not depressed; we’re on strike. For those who refuse to
manage themselves, ‘depression’ is not a state but a passage, a bowing out,
a sidestep towards a political disaffiliation” (p. 34, emphasis in original).
Depression, we might say, arises when we own as individuals what does
not rightly belong to us. Here moods, emotions, and other psychological
phenomena are no longer sui generis. They do not emerge spontaneously
from an isolated and mysterious interior world. Rather, they are symptoms
of the flow of power and interest through the social, political, and material
systems within which we all live.
Finally, earlier in this book I identified soul as that activity or capac-
ity that binds individuals with others, with society, with creation, and
with the Eternal. In a profound sense soul is this fabric of connection.
I will discuss soul in more detail in this chapter and in the postscripts.
For now, it is sufficient to recognize that third-order suffering, in a way
that distinguishes it from both first- and second-order suffering, entails
the erosion of soul. The ruthless individualism of neoliberalization nec-
essarily involves unprecedented fragmentation and isolation, as we have
observed in previous chapters. Whereas in first- and second-order suf-

fering the powers of soul may become misdirected, disoriented, or bur-
dened, third-order suffering means that soul has consequently become
weakened. Experientially, this appears in the twin unconsciousness I have
just mentioned—suffering that is not aware of itself as suffering and suf-
fering that is oblivious to its actual origins. Soul that has deteriorated to
this extent is soul that has become dis-membered. Caring for souls in the
neoliberal age, therefore, will require us to move beyond self-management to
the re-membering of soul.
How might this re-membering be accomplished? As I have stated ear-
lier, this cannot be reduced to flow charts or manualized techniques and
procedures. I must also add that I am continuing to explore potential
paths for moving forward, both in my theorizing and in pastoral psycho-
therapeutic practice. I do not have this all figured out. I request that the
reader accept this chapter, and this book in its entirety, as an invitation to
join in an ongoing conversation with me and others who are working in
a similar vein. That being said, the situation of our world and its inhabit-
ants is dire. We do not have the luxury to wait until we fully understand
what must be done before acting. In fact, we are not likely to reach any
adequate understandings without acting. I am therefore offering what
remains of this chapter as a contribution to this conversation, from some-
one who continues to work both in the academy and in clinical practice.
I proceed in four moves. First, I will discuss caring for soul in terms
of what some have called the new materialism, investigating an emerging
approach to care in psychology and psychotherapy as a project that is con-
gruent with this perspective. Second, I explore the dialectics of suffering,
how suffering itself is an embryonic form of resistance, and the ground
and motive for proliferating resistance and change. This will include a
summary of a reorientation within psychoanalytic theory and practice that
is currently underway as an example of this dialectic, particularly as it per-
tains to addressing the two types of unconsciousness I have mentioned.
The conjoined dialectical materialism of these first two moves, I believe,
serves as the critical reorientation and point of departure for soul-care in
the present age. Third, I will provide clinical material from pastoral psy-
chotherapy to illustrate this reorientation. Finally, I will summarize why
psychotherapy is inadequate to the current challenge. I do not believe
we can address neoliberalization and third-order suffering as a psycho-
therapy project. Far from it. I am simply beginning by looking for clues
from within my own practice context. I do believe, however, that the close
attention to suffering individuals afforded by this context can offer valu-
able insights that may prove useful in more encompassing forms of soul-
care, such as social justice movements, community activism, and certain
political efforts.
A VERY MATERIAL SOUL

Astute readers may have noticed certain affinities between the methods I
have used and the arguments I have advanced in this book and the history
of thought widely known as dialectical materialism. By materialism, of
course, I am not referring to ostentatious consumption or greed. Rather,
materialism here denotes a manner of thinking and practice that gives
priority to bodies, the corporeal conditions for survival and well-being,
actuality, and material relationships and processes. This tradition opposes
any form of reflection that assigns primacy to ideas themselves—to men-
tal constructs, pure thought, mind, rationality, discourses, disembodied
souls or essences, or assertions of a transcendent order detached from the
material world. Given that religion is often associated in the public imagi-
nation with spiritual or transcendent realities believed to lie beyond this
world, readers may wonder how a Christian minister could be so taken
with materiality. The answer may have something to do with my roots
in the working class of southern Appalachia. I spent my formative years
with my hands and feet in the soil. I earned my first wages at the age of
seven, picking cotton by hand under a hot August sun. I worked alongside
my maternal grandfather on his small farm near Dog Town, Alabama, as
he planted and harvested crops and tended to cows, chickens, and pigs.
Poverty, and the threat of poverty, was ever present. Many of the people
surrounding me were capable of deep reflection, but they rarely concerned
themselves with anything other than work, material sustenance, and the
care of family and neighbors. Even religion revolved around material life.
The rural Christian congregations of my youth, including Ruhama Baptist
Church, where my grandfather served as pastor, were full of preaching and
singing about heaven. Yet I am bemused when I hear people refer to their
faith as “otherworldly.” The images of this supposedly transcendent realm
were inevitably material—resurrected but very real bodies, the sharing of
celestial banquets, reunions with loved ones, joyful gatherings by flowing
streams, and the wiping of tears from the eyes. This was an earthly paradise
cast into the future. Eschatological visions were not immaterial. Rather,
they sought to address the sufferings and injustices of the present world.
These were people of the land. They often spoke proudly of themselves,
and their faith, as being “down to earth.” Indeed, they were.
And so, regardless of any hopes about what might lie on the other side
of death, I have always known, as Appalachian folk would say, “down
deep in my bones,” that religious faith has to do with how we live in rela-
tion to the land, to its creatures, with each other, and with the Eternal
we encounter always already there. This book is an extension and expan-
sion of this visceral sort of knowledge. Its original impulse emerges not
from Marx, Freud, or Feuerbach, but from these humble people of the
earth. Here faith encompasses not only such proximal relationships of my
upbringing, but also the more distal material relationships and processes
of economics, politics, and the continually evolving world. As may have
become obvious by now, I also understand soul as thoroughly material, as
the quite substantial fabric that weaves us all together and with all that is.
We are all entangled. This is the soul to which I refer whenever I speak of
caring for souls.
Referring to my previous work regarding depression (Rogers-Vaughn,
2014), theologian Joerg Rieger (2016) finds that it “… exemplifies some
of the implications of new materialist thinking even if it has not adopted
that name …” (p. 138). While I was not familiar with new materialist
theory at that time, the imprint of this sort of analysis on my thinking is
now clear. Indeed, the method I have used from Chap. 4 forward is heav-
ily influenced by William Connolly, professor of political science at Johns
Hopkins University, a leader in new materialist theorizing. In The Fragility
of Things (2013), Connolly explores human economic and political activi-
ties, such as neoliberalism, as systems embedded in the various self-regu-
lating open systems of the material cosmos. This entanglement—a term
I have shamelessly borrowed from Connolly and use liberally through-
out this book—makes all things more fragile and unpredictable than they
appear. Such thinking also appears in the work of Connolly’s colleague at
Johns Hopkins University, Jane Bennett, especially in her book, Vibrant
Matter: A Political Ecology of Things (2010). In theology new materialist
thought is evident not only in the reflections of Rieger (2009, 2016),
but also in the work of Catherine Keller (2003, 2015), particularly in
her latest book, Cloud of the Impossible: Negative Theology and Planetary
Entanglement, in which she converses with Connolly and, like him, is
quite critical of neoliberal capitalism.
What makes these materialisms “new,” as Rieger (2016) points out, is
their rejection not only of “crude idealism,” but also of a “crude mate-
rialism” that understands matter in a mechanical, deterministic, and
reductionist way (pp. 135–136). Instead, the natural world, including
inanimate matter, is understood as consisting of innumerable interlocking

systems, each manifesting its own agency, power, and creativity (pp. 143–
144). What I have done, in this book, is to consider some implications of
Connolly’s exposition of the new materialism for human systems. Connolly
is primarily concerned with the entanglements between large-scale human
systems—neoliberalism and democratic activism—and between these sys-
tems and those of the natural world. I have focused, instead, on the entan-
glements between neoliberalism and three self-regulating but open and
interlocking human systems—the social (institutions, collectives), inter-
personal, and psychological. I believe I have done this in a fashion congru-
ent with Connolly’s approach. These entanglements, in turn, shed light
on third-order suffering and its imbrications with first- and second-order
suffering. Indeed, my understanding of third-order suffering is informed
by descriptions offered by theorists who themselves manifest new mate-
rialist thought—Catherine Malabou’s (2012) “destructive plasticity” and
Eric Cazdyn’s (2012) “the new chronic.”
The new materialism not only helps describe the sufferings of the neo-
liberal age, but also simultaneously suggests a way to imagine respond-
ing to these sufferings. Unfortunately, the sources upon which pastoral
theological reflection has historically drawn tend to be steeped in idealism.
This is perhaps most apparent in a reliance on theological doctrines and
religio-spiritual narratives whose connection to materiality is tangential at
best. It also arises in the more recent dependence on some postmodern
theories that prioritize discourse to the point that claims about actual-
ity are regarded with suspicion. What I wish to focus upon now, how-
ever, is our utilization of modern psychology, which has arguably been
our primary cognate discipline. While current psychological theories usu-
ally acknowledge physiological contributions to distress, they avoid crude
materialism. After all, reducing mental or emotional conditions purely to
chemical, neurological, or genetic causes would be the end of psychology
as a discipline. On the other hand, psychology often has resorted to ide-
alistic explanations for such problems. Cognitive psychology, for instance,
which originated in the United States, locates the source of mental and
emotional anguish in how individuals think, imagine, or perceive. Positive
psychology is a type of cognitive psychology that attempts to adjust peo-
ple’s thought patterns toward optimism, confidence, and affirmation. Its
methods, we are told, can yield happiness and flourishing under even the
most challenging material circumstances (Greenberg, 2010). Even some
psychoanalytic theories, which manifest a more complex assessment of
mental states, portray a psyche filled with contents so reified that distress
seems to emerge spontaneously from a relatively insulated interior world.
Fortunately, many practicing psychotherapists do, to some degree, take
into account the material circumstances of their patients. However, this
is typically limited to factors that are immediately observable from the
standpoint of the therapist and patient—physical illness and disability,
employment status, interpersonal relationships, financial concerns, hous-
ing conditions, and so forth. What is missing is attention to the larger
social-material systems that play a powerful role in configuring these more
immediate circumstances, including the individual subjects themselves.
There have been, nonetheless, minority voices in psychology that have
taken account of the broader material forces that configure proximate
environments, individual subjects, and their sufferings. Jacoby (1983)
has noted that many of the early psychoanalysts, particularly those cir-
culating through the Berlin Institute, described themselves as socialists
or Marxists. These analysts generally believed that neurotic suffering was
shaped primarily by forces in the greater social and political environment.
Otto Fenichel (1945), a leader within this circle, concluded:
Neuroses do not occur out of biological necessity, like aging; nor are they
purely biologically determined, like leukemia …. Neither are neuroses
“influenced by social conditions” as tuberculosis is, where circumstances of
residence and diet may decide the course of the illness. Neuroses are social
diseases in a much stricter sense …. Neuroses are the outcome of unfavor-
able and socially determined educational measures, corresponding to a given
and historically developed social milieu and necessary in this milieu. They
cannot be changed without corresponding change in the milieu. (p. 586)
The precise content and dynamics of “the unconscious,” according

to these analysts, depended predominantly upon the historical and social
context of the individual subject. This orientation continued in the United
States among the so-called Neo-Freudians, including Erich Fromm, Karen
Horney, and H.S. Sullivan, all of whom were quite critical of capitalism
(Jacoby, 1983, pp. 105–111, 153–158). By the time of Fromm’s death in
1980, as neoliberalism was on the rise, this strain within North American
psychoanalysis had largely died out (Gold, 2002). Notable holdouts have
included Joel Kovel (1981) and Paul Wachtel (1983). Only recently, as
the problems with neoliberalism have become more apparent, have psy-
choanalysts in the United States been giving renewed attention to the
social-material origins of suffering, and to capitalism in particular (Altman,

2015; Layton, Hollander, & Gutwill, 2006). However, psychology text-
books used in educational institutions within the United States rarely, if
ever, mention such work.
Outside the United States, psychologies emphasizing the broader social
and material context for distress have enjoyed more purchase. The pat-
tern was set early by Frantz Fanon (1952/1967, 1963/2004), a psycho-
analytically informed psychiatrist born in Martinique, who explored the
impact of colonization on subject formation. In Latin America, Ignacio
Martín-Baró (1994), a Jesuit priest who was killed by a Salvadoran death
squad in 1989, founded a “liberation psychology” that not only grounded
psychological distress in the material conditions of life, but also criticized
the imbrications between modern psychology and political and economic
oppression. Liberation psychologies have made some inroads in North
American faculties (Watkins & Shulman, 2008). But, again, few psychol-
ogy students or practitioners in the United States have ever heard about
this movement.
Meanwhile, beyond the borders of the United States a rich dia-
logue between psychoanalysis and social theory has continued. Layton,
Hollander, and Gutwill (2006) observe:
Interestingly, the United States has been unique in its isolation from the
dialogue between critical social theory and psychoanalysis. Such interchange
fared better in the United Kingdom, Continental Europe and Latin America
…. In some countries, most notably France and Argentina, a left psycho-
analysis emerged that was identified with revolutionary struggles against
social as well as psychological repression. (p. 4)
Currently, the most generative instance of social materialism in psycho-

logical theory may be the critical psychology movement that has emerged
within the United Kingdom, a loose association that includes a number of
analysts but is not exclusively psychoanalytic. This psychology is “critical”
in that it represents “… an attempt to problematize the place of psycho-
logical explanations in patterns of power and ideology” (Parker, 2015b,
p. 6). Early contributions appeared in a collection of essays titled Critical
Psychiatry: The Politics of Mental Health, edited by David Ingleby (1980a).
Notable leaders in this movement have included Andrew Samuels (1993,
2001), David Smail (1997, 2001, 2005), Paul Moloney (2013), and
Ian Parker (2007, 2015a, 2015b). The richness of conversation within
this diverse movement is on display in a recent compilation edited by

Del Loewenthal (2015), which includes transdisciplinary perspectives.
Meanwhile, Jeremy Carrette (2007) has provocatively placed critical psy-
chology into conversation with the study of religious experience. The
impact of critical psychology in the United Kingdom has been consider-
able, even influencing the public position statements of the Division of
Clinical Psychology within the British Psychological Society.1
Critical psychology offers an invaluable resource for theorizing
responses to human suffering in the neoliberal age. Space does not permit
a comprehensive survey. Instead, I will synopsize the approach of clini-
cal psychologist David Smail, perhaps one of the most underappreciated
representatives of this movement. Smail’s argument is most lucid in his
final book, Power, Interest and Psychology: Elements of a Social Materialist
Understanding of Distress (2005). Smail contends that the everyday cul-
ture of contemporary capitalism is idealistic and is served by a prevailing
psychology that is likewise idealistic:
The modern consumer is in this way a pleasure-seeking idealist, dislocated

from a real world, a real body and a real society. We must believe, among
other things, that the earth’s resources are infinite, that mind will triumph
over matter and that there’s no limit to what you can achieve if you really
try. Psychology helps a lot in this enterprise. (p. iii)
Entire populations are absorbed in the spectral powers of imagery and

narrative enchantment. Meanwhile, global elites control the reins of mate-
rial interests: “Thieves sack the mansion undisturbed while its occupants
remain sunk in their dreams” (p. 56). This idealism is coupled, in modern
psychology, with individualism:
Margaret Thatcher’s much-cited view that ‘There’s no such thing as society,

only individuals and their families,’ finds an unacknowledged echo in almost
all approaches to therapy, including those that continued throughout the
second half of the twentieth century to wrap themselves in the mantle of
‘science.’ (p. 11)
This idealism-plus-individualism concoction, Smail maintains, serves

the interests of capital. It is most apparent, he observes, in cognitive-
behavioral therapies (CBT) and narrative therapies that privilege the
power of discourse. Smail calls these therapeutic methods “magical
voluntarism.” He concludes: “With many ‘postmodernist’ approaches
(e.g. ‘narrative therapy’) magical voluntarism reaches its apotheosis: the
world is made of words, and if the story you find yourself in causes you
distress, tell yourself another one” (p. 7). These types of therapy, Smail
contends, exert power not because they are true, but because they are
useful: “… it suits the interests both of those who assert it and those who
assent to it” (p. 7, emphasis in original).
Unsurprisingly, Smail is also critical of any psychology that posits an
“interior world” divorced from society and the material world. This leads
him also to oppose psychoanalysis, which he seems to deem incapable of
embracing his social-materialist viewpoint. Consider, however, the follow-
ing comments by the psychoanalyst Joel Kovel (1981):
It now struck me that what we study under the name of “psychology” … is

a kind of value extracted from a particular kind of labor. This labor includes
as an essential component a praxis that forces people out of the ground
of their participation in society, makes them, in other words, into discrete
individuals, standing there, shivering and alone—and then studies their shiv-
ers and their solitude, giving names like “self,” “personality,” and “mental
apparatus” to the outcome. (p. 33)
This passage is so close to Smail’s claims, he could have written it himself.

So much for the psychologies Smail rejects. What is his constructive
proposal? Despite the problems with psychology, he asserts, it must be
retained because: “Ultimately, our concern is with human subjectivity,
with the experience of being a person, and in particular with the types
of suffering and pain that being a person can engender” (Smail, 2005,
p. iv). The decisive issue is not to dispose of psychology altogether, but
to ask whose interest a particular psychological theory or therapy serves.
Neoliberal interests, Smail notes, divide the world into winners and los-
ers, “… the supermen versus the wimps.” Further, this “ruthless world,”
which denies common humanity with others, especially those less fortu-
nate, is not natural. It can be chosen or rejected. He flatly states: “This
book is founded on just such a rejection. I’m siding with the wimps” (p.
v). The test of any adequate psychology is not solely one of truth, but also
morality. Psychological theorizing and practice engages us in an ethical
choice. It “… rests on a compassionate solidarity with others” (p. v).
Further, an ethical psychology dispenses with idealism and embraces
materiality:
The avoidable pain and suffering that forms the focus of our attention is not
a ‘mental’ thing, but arises from our nature as embodied beings …. For we
are bodies in a world: of course (and very importantly) in a physical world,
but also a socially structured, material space-time in which what we do to

each other has enormous importance. (p. iv)
Inattention to material reality “… leads to an increasingly depleted

environment, unbalanced society and tortured subjectivity.” And an
anguished subjectivity, in turn, “… is a function very largely of the first
two …” (p. 16).
Smail (2005) thus proposes a therapeutic approach that turns tradi-
tional psychology “inside out.” Human motivation arises not from drives
emerging from within, but from social interests. Rather than being “…
pushed from within by various urges and desires … they are pulled from
without by the social manipulation of … inescapable biological features of
being human” (p. 35, emphases in original). Smail identifies this “social
manipulation” by the term power, which is divided into proximal pow-
ers—those in the immediate environment of the individual, such as work,
education, interpersonal relationships, and family—and distal powers, such
as economics, politics, ideology, and culture (pp. 26–39). Despite the fact
that individuals tend only to be aware of the proximal powers in their
lives, it is the distal powers, Smail asserts, that are most critical in shap-
ing subjectivity and individual suffering. Although proximal powers serve
to nuance and give specificity to subject formation, they are themselves
formed by the far more potent distal powers. This reverses the meaning of
“the unconscious”: “Unconsciousness ceases to be a property of individu-
als, and becomes an external, social phenomenon. We are unconscious
of what lies in the darkness beyond our power horizon—what we cannot
know or have been prevented from knowing” (p. 33). Thus the goal of
therapy is no longer an “insight” that leaves individuals solely respon-
sible for their feelings and conduct, but an “outsight” that illuminates the
external, material causes of distress. This helps individuals to put “… the
extent of their own responsibility for their condition … into its proper
perspective” (p. 32). “Free will” is limited to whatever the social mate-
rial environment allows to a particular individual in a specific place and
time (p. 43). All power, in other words, derives from the material social
surround.
Smail leaves us with a clinical practice that is modest in its claims to trans-
formation, at least relative to conventional psychology. Psychotherapy here
becomes “… a source of solidarity rather than a technology of ‘change’”
(p. 80). Its benefits are condensed to four: (a) it demystifies individual suf-
fering by linking it to its social material origins; (b) it rescues subjectivity
from the prison of ideality; (c) it rehabilitates character by restoring soli-

darity and compassion; and (d) it reinstates the environment, rather than
the individual or the therapeutic relationship, as the primary context for
justice and care (pp. 80–86).
Smail (2005) delivers a powerful and important corrective for both the
idealism and the individualism embedded in much of our pastoral theol-
ogy and care, as well as in psychotherapy and caring for souls generally.
He is especially useful for addressing the second type of unconsciousness
in third-order suffering—the lack of awareness of the linkage between
such suffering and the larger systems in which it originates. However, we
still need more than Smail has to offer. First, while Smail’s analysis is not
rigidly deterministic—he does, for example, allow a small bit of agency
to individuals—there is a risk here of collapsing the psychological into
the social. This is most discernable in his ambivalence about subjectivity.
While he insists psychology remains necessary because we must attend to
subjectivity, he flatly rejects any sort of “interior, ‘psychological’ world”
(p. 40). The problem seems to revolve around the meaning he attributes
to the term “world,” for otherwise he values an “inner” life. While deny-
ing it the status of “world,” Smail celebrates “… a wonderful confusion of
feeling and imagination, thinking, dreaming and memory that furnishes
our personal idea of what it is to be human and to be alive. It consti-
tutes our subjectivity” (p. 64). He then proceeds to refer to this as a “…
wildly idiosyncratic interior which is to be found within each one of us
…” (p. 64, my emphases). Moreover, Smail tends to get caught up in the
very interior/exterior binary he so firmly rejects, as when he insists that
unconsciousness is an “external, social phenomenon.” The problem, it
seems to me, is not whether there is an “interior” life (or even “world”),
but that subjectivity cannot be isolated from the surrounding milieu—
which is the value of Smail’s overall claim. A better way to think of this,
following Connolly’s new materialist theorizing, is that the psychological
subject is herself a self-regulating but open system that is entangled with
other systems, both larger and smaller. Unconsciousness, for example, is
now neither simply interior nor exterior, but exists within the entangle-
ments between psychological systems and other human (and perhaps non-
human) systems.
This relates to a second problem. While Smail (2005) values subjectiv-
ity, he has few means for describing its intricacies and idiosyncratic tex-
tures. His only resource, at least in this book, appears to be his training in
a cognitive psychology he otherwise harshly criticizes. Thus subjective life
is reduced largely to self-talk, or what he calls “commentary” (pp. 40–41).

He manages to rescue such cognitions for his purposes, however, by
understanding them as social constructions. Unfortunately, this renders
the social materialist shaping of subjectivity to be a matter of imposition,
portrayed in a series of schematics (pp. 27, 30–31, 33, 36, 38, 41). What
is missing is a theory of individuality. There is no way to understand how
a particular individual appropriates and improvises upon the social sur-
round, in such a way as to distinguish him from other individuals. There is
also no theory about human desire, even understood by way of entangle-
ments, for recognizing how such improvisation might occur. And, because
unconsciousness is posited only in relation to an exterior, we are left with
no way to conceive of the first aspect of the twin unconsciousness of third-
order suffering—the suffering that is not aware of itself as suffering—
much less how this might be addressed. For this we must look elsewhere.
Finally, Smail (2005) tends to view suffering as a thing-unto-itself.
Either it is existential, what I call first-order suffering, or it is the outcome
of social oppression, what I call second-order suffering. In either case,
there is no response except either stoic resignation or interpersonal com-
fort and empathy. For Smail, solidarity appears to be primarily a quality of
interpersonal relationships. While he alludes to the necessity for political
action, he seems suspicious of collective efforts to unite around a common
suffering. He is especially leery of religion (pp. 80, 85, 95). What is also
missing here, then, is an appreciation of the dialectical significance of suf-
fering—of suffering as a nascent form of resistance. I believe these lacunae
in Smail’s social materialist approach may be filled in by recent develop-
ments in psychoanalytic theory and practice, to which I now turn.
INDIVIDUALITY: A WINDOW INTO THE DIALECTICS

OF SOUL
One of my mentors, the pastoral theologian Liston Mills, was fond of say-
ing: “Human beings are fundamentally recalcitrant. They don’t change
until they’re miserable.” In one simple statement he was pointing to an
elemental human dialectic—the dynamic between the resistance to change
and the motivation to change. Importantly, he located the impetus for
change in human suffering. I am unwilling, however, to locate a clinging
to the status quo in some sort of essential stubbornness. Instead, I propose
that this dialectic is intrinsic to the life of soul. Up to this point it may
seem that I understand soul as simply designating the entanglement of all
things. As we shall see later on, this is not quite the case. Entanglement
as such is ontology, just the way things occur. As Connolly (2013) makes
clear, and as I have discussed in previous chapters, neoliberalism itself
manifests its own peculiar entanglements. Rather, soul is a way of exist-
ing within these entanglements—a way characterized by love, attachment,
appreciation, wonder, longing. Depending upon a particular material and
historical context, soul may strive either to maintain relative stability or to
resist. Soul may even endeavor to do both at once. Meanwhile, both the
ontology of entanglement and the dialectics of soul assume individuality.
Process thought, for example, contends that, without the individuality
of actual occasions, we would have only a uniform and static sameness.
Likewise, love depends on the presence “others,” on those who stand out
in all their particularity.
What I intend to accomplish in this section is to explore the individual
human subject as she is formed and as she strives to establish and maintain
her attachments in the context of a neoliberal society. The clinical situation
provides an opportunity for such an investigation, which then serves as a
window through which to view the dialectics of soul under these condi-
tions. As Layton (2007) notes, concerning the particular vulnerabilities of
neoliberal subjects, the clinic is now “… one of the few places left in the
US where one has permission to express them without shame” (p. 152).
Kovel (1981), summarizing the effects of capitalism upon human subjec-
tivity, concludes: “Analysts see the negative underside of these elements
of capitalist culture in the stillness of their offices” (p. 56). The point is
to understand how the suffering we come to know in this context—as
opposed simply to the therapeutic encounter itself—serves as a nascent
ground for resisting the deleterious effects of neoliberalization in general,
and third-order suffering in particular.
I know of no adequate substitute for conducting this assessment than
psychoanalysis. This set of theories and practices, now over a century old,
is the study of human subjectivity par excellence. For much of its history,
psychoanalysis has been an aid to social conformity or adaptation, using
reified ideas of psychic structure and content believed to be applicable in
all times and places. It would be a mistake, however, to identify psycho-
analysis with its conservative forms. In 1980, summing up the contribu-
tions to Critical Psychiatry, Ingleby (1980b) observed:
Today … it seems less and less plausible to regard psychoanalysis purely as an

instrument of conformity … it is nowadays hard to see how any significant
understanding of the social meaning of ‘mental illness’ could be achieved

while turning a blind eye to psychoanalysis. (p. 10)
More recently, Parker (2015b) concludes: “It seems that there is some
radical potential within psychoanalysis, a potential that we should not
reject out of hand just because certain applications of psychoanalysis have
been politically conservative” (p. 26). The key to this radical potential, of
course, is that individual subjectivity must be historicized and contextual-
ized. Fromm (1962/2010), for instance, has gone so far as to say: “If we
could take an X ray of any individual in any given society, you would find
the social history of the last five-hundred years at least in that individual”
(p. 98). This includes not just conscious processes—affects, imaginations,
perceptions, ideas, and so on—but unconsciousness as well. This presents
two challenges. The first, as Kovel (1981, pp. 61–85) has argued, is to
distinguish transhistorical characteristics of human desire from their cir-
cumstantial appearances. The second, related issue, is to account for the
idiosyncratic ways people resist or adapt to their historical context such
that individuality is preserved.
This brings us to the focal questions for this section. What is basic to
human desire, and how does neoliberalization co-opt such desire in its
molding of the subject? What dynamics within this desire might remain
to resist such shaping? Finally, in light of the double unconsciousness of
third-order suffering, how might we side with this resistance to liberatory
effect? In response to these questions, I will draw here primarily upon
Lynne Layton’s explication of normative unconscious processes, supple-
mented with Christopher Bollas’s description of normotic illness.
Like other representatives of what has come to be called the relational
school of psychoanalysis, Layton does not locate what is transhistorical
about human desire in innate, organically rooted drives, such as hunger,
sex, or aggression. Rather, desire is first and foremost for human contact—
love, approval, and recognition. Subject formation revolves around two
types of relational experience: “… one in which we are treated as objects
by the significant figures in our lives and one in which we are treated as
subjects” (2008, p. 65). Relational events in which we are acknowledged
as subjects accumulate as the ground for ongoing mutuality and a rela-
tively stable yet flexible identity. This does not culminate in a conflict-free
existence, however. The existential universals of death, loss, grief, pain,
and anxiety regarding separation, dependency, coping with difference,
and limits to control remain—what Freud called “common unhappiness”
(Layton, 2004, p. 38). This is what I have referred to as first-order suffer-

ing. Experiences of being treated simply as objects, which Layton equates
with Jessica Benjamin’s “doer-done to” enactments, amount to relational
trauma. Examples include “… shaming, humiliation, gross relational
unpredictability, and empathic ruptures that are consistently met with
retaliation and withdrawal rather than with attempts at repair” (2008,
p. 64). The accumulation of such experiences results in a division within
subjectivity: “The other’s consistent or intermittent abuse of our vulner-
ability, mild or major, the other’s consistent or intermittent misrecogni-
tion—these are the events that fragment the subject and divide the subject
tragically against itself” (p. 65). Layton asserts that “anxiety about the
loss of love” leads the subject to repress historically contingent features
of experience, producing unconscious conflicts. These split-off elements
are then re-enacted as repetition compulsions, the essence of “neurotic
misery” (2004, pp. 36–40, 47–48). Although neurotic misery in other
historical contexts might simply appear as what I am calling second-order
suffering, I will now show that the neuroses Layton describes as typifying
neoliberal subjectivity are hybrids of second- and third-order suffering.
What distinguishes Layton’s theory and practice from most of her psy-
choanalytic contemporaries is that she locates herself in the stream of radi-
cal psychoanalysis that began with the Berlin Free Clinic in the 1920s and
then flowed through the heirs of the Frankfurt School, such as Fromm.
Thus she refuses to limit subject formation to a process occurring in fami-
lies treated as if devoid of social context. If psychoanalysis subjects itself to
“amoral familism,” she argues, then it colludes with the individualism and
privatism of today’s capitalism (2009, pp. 117–118). Central to her theory
is the idea of “normative unconscious processes”:
I call “normative” that aspect of unconscious process that works to uphold

dominant ideologies, and I assume that the motive for doing so, even at the
cost of much psychic pain, is to secure the love of intimates and the approval
of one’s social world. (2006a, p. 107)
The function of normative unconscious processes is to maintain the splits

that accord with the dominant ideologies of one’s social context. Major
forces include the power hierarchies oriented around class, race, gender,
and sexuality: “Thus, social processes such as gendering, racing, classing,
and sexing are at the very heart of subjectivity and subjective trauma, not
accidental add-ons (as they are conceived to be in most psychoanalytic
theories)” (2008, p. 67). These hierarchies, in other words, constitute “…

the power structures that establish norms of recognition” (p. 66). Layton
is critical of theorists such as Žižek, however, for suggesting that these
powers are imposed in some unmediated fashion. The family, she argues,
is only one of the cultural institutions that “… mediate between desire
and the rules of capital” (2004, p. 37). Others include schools, the various
media, and religion. This mediation is a significant source of individuality.
The family, for instance, communicates “culturally inflected projections”
to children, which vary in emphasis, style, and intensity depending upon
the particular family and its precise social placement (2004, p. 38). (This
leaves aside, for the moment, ways a family might also introduce coun-
ternormative elements.) Another source of individuality, however small it
may be compared to the powers of cultural hierarchies and institutions,
is individual agency. In Layton’s words, this has to do with “… the very
ways the psyche operates on what is given socially” (p. 43). This ability is
sturdier, she emphasizes, for individuals who have enjoyed a greater sup-
ply of experiences in which they have been treated as subjects rather than
objects. I prefer to call this ability improvisation. It is suggested by the
psychoanalytic term identification, which refers to the idiosyncratic ways
we “internalize” our experiences of others and the world.
Nevertheless, Layton argues that subjects forming under a particular
social paradigm will display shared characterological patterns. She is there-
fore able to describe a “neoliberal subjectivity” (2009, 2010). If this sub-
jectivity had to do only with misrecognitions rooted in race, gender, class,
and sex, we could assume that a rather straightforward social injustice is at
work, simply producing contemporary variations on second-order suffer-
ing. However, Layton cogently argues that there are other forces at work
in the dominant ideology of today’s capitalism, forces that drastically alter
the distress circulating around these misrecognitions. One is what she calls
“attacks on linking,” or “the unconscious pull to dissociate individuals
from their social context” (2006a). Layton is directly discussing here the
second type of unconsciousness that exemplifies third-order suffering—
the lack of awareness of the social origins of one’s distress. This necessarily
highlights the presence of another aspect of this genre of misery—the
privatization of suffering. Layton concludes: “Dominant ideology works
very diligently on a number of fronts to hide the systemic nature of
inequalities of all kinds, to make sure that an individual’s problems seem
just that—individual” (2006a, p. 108). She objects to liberal suspicious-
ness of the value of belonging to social movements and collectives, and
summarizes the effects of neoliberal subjectivity in a way that resonates

with what I have called the erosion of soul: “All of these processes unlink
individuals from each other, from themselves, and from their social and
natural world” (p. 109). Layton is an exceptional analyst, so throughout
her work she uses case material to carefully lay out symptoms associated
with this unlinking: the denial of dependency and vulnerability, lack of
empathy, disavowal of complicity in the suffering of others, irrational exu-
berance, and retaliation toward and/or withdrawal from those who are
marginalized by neoliberal rationality, including the working class and the
poor (2006b, 2007, 2009, 2010). Most of these symptoms betray their
origin in the entanglement between second- and third-order suffering.
Before moving to what a clinical reply might look like, and the clues
it may hold for responding to third-order suffering, I should note that
Layton does not, as far as I know, address the other sort of unconscious-
ness I have mentioned—suffering that is not aware of itself as suffering.
Even a cursory treatment of how to respond to neoliberal subjectivity
must include this admittedly confounding problem. Whereas the con-
cerns Layton discusses are rooted in various identifications, the distress
at issue here relies on what psychoanalysts have generally considered a
more “primitive” defense—incorporation. Identification involves com-
plex, nuanced internalizations upon which the individual has improvised.
Incorporation, on the other hand, refers to the inclusion of something
into subjectivity without it being metabolized or improvised upon. The
entity in question is, as it were, “swallowed whole.” The consequence is
a reduction or, in the worst cases, a near erasure of subjectivity. For this I
turn to Bollas’s articulation of what he calls normotic illness.
Bollas (1987/2011) describes normotic illness as “… a particular drive
to be normal, one that is typified by the numbing and eventual erasure of
subjectivity in favour of a self that is conceived as a material object among
other man-made products in the object world” (p. 22). He concedes that
such an erasure may run from only partial to almost complete. In limited
instances, the person may be “… aware of feeling empty or without a
sense of self …” and might speak of “… a pain that may only be expe-
rienced as a void or an ache” (p. 22). In full-blown cases the individual
“… is fundamentally disinterested in subjective life and he is inclined to
reflect on the thingness of objects, on their material reality, or on ‘data’
that relates to material phenomena” (p. 23). Such a person fills her life
with agendas and acquaintances with whom to do things. But if you
asked her what personal meaning a particular activity or associate held
for her, she would be genuinely puzzled by the question. Bollas offers
the example of a man who emphasizes he is going to a play for which he
possesses season tickets, but is incapable of discussing the import of the
play itself. Likewise, the normotic personality forms relationships and may
even fall in love, “… without this ever making a claim on his subjectivity”
(p. 24). She may display a keen wit, enjoy a laugh, or seem fun-loving,
but is incapable of deeper emotions such as sadness or grief (pp. 24–25).
Normotic individuals do not emerge from families who abuse them in
the conventional sense of that term. Rather, the family “deflects the self”
of the child (pp. 33–35). The parents do not mirror the child’s affective
states, engage the child’s imagination, or make personal comments to the
child. Ritual activities replace intersubjective encounters: “… the parents
direct the child’s psychological life outward into physical activity or into
some structured and ritualized container, such as a television set or video
game” (p. 29). In Layton’s terms, this is a particular variant of treating the
child as an object rather than a subject.
Bollas (1987/2011) does not historicize normotic illness or place it
in a particular social context. However, his description of this condition
clearly resonates with the rationality and practices of advanced capitalism.
The normotic individual, by Bollas’s own portrayal, is quite content in the
fact-based world of production:
It is truly reassuring to become part of the machinery of production. He

likes being part of an institution because it enables him to be identified with
the life or the existence of the impersonal; the workings of an institution
or the products of a corporation. He is part of the team, he is at home in
a committee, he is secure in social groups that offer in pseudo-intimacy an
alternative to getting to know someone. (p. 24)
Furthermore, the normotic person’s sense of isolation is softened by

the presence of the familiar objects she consumes. These objects define
her world, to the extent that she may become stressed while traveling until
she comes upon a well-known commodity: “… the simple discovery of a
familiar object, such as a Coca-Cola, can be greeted with an affection and
celebration that other people reserve only for human beings” (p. 36).
I cannot think of a purer exhibit of neoliberal subjectivity and third-
order suffering than Bollas’s normotic personality. Not only does Bollas
(1987/2011) describe the poignant isolation of such a person while
immersed in a world of objects; he also notes that this condition “…
results in the de-symbolization of … mental content” (p. 23). This indi-

vidual uses language in such a repetitive and stereotyped way that it is
evacuated of meaning (p. 35). Thus she is left unable to narrate her expe-
riences and life. Consequently, she does not experience herself as suffer-
ing. What right then, we might ask, do we have to insist she is suffering
nonetheless? Bollas makes clear that normotic persons do not feel their
pain. Instead, they enact it. They do things that are starkly incongruous
with what otherwise appears to be a busy, contented life. Bollas refers to
this as “normotic breakdown” (pp. 29–31). Symptoms include substance
and process addictions, psychosomatic disorders, eating disorders, and
suicide attempts. If confronted with such incongruity, however, the indi-
vidual appears sincerely clueless. Bollas points to his encounter with Tom,
a young man who had made two serious suicide attempts:
After five minutes of chat, I said to him that obviously he must be in great
pain or else he would not have attempted to kill himself. He handled this
comment as if I had not meant what I said. He politely rebuffed me with
an ‘OK’. (p. 32)
I find Bollas’s descriptions of normotic illness persuasive, because I

have come upon this in my own practice with growing regularity. Usually
such persons do not bring themselves into therapy. Rather, they end up
sitting with me because their family members are disturbed by their enig-
matic, self-destructive behaviors. Not long ago, for example, I sat with
a man whose spouse demanded he get counseling after she discovered
he was in an affair. Before me was a successful professional who was gre-
garious and reported satisfaction with his marriage and his life. He was
also a committed Christian and church attender. When I invited him to
be curious about the incongruity between his affair and his stated beliefs
and values, he stared at me as if I had just spoken in a language he had
never heard. For me it was a profound experience of the uncanny, as I
seemed to be containing the distress he was not feeling himself. I propose
that normotic symptoms appear quite regularly in the normative uncon-
scious processes of individuals living in neoliberal cultures, and represent
an increasingly common type of the repetition compulsions otherwise
described by Layton.
If normative unconscious processes push us to conform to the domi-
nant culture—in this case neoliberal rationality and practice—how is it
that we resist? The secret, Layton argues, lies within the sort of neurotic
misery that arises in this sociohistorical context. As I have articulated in

the preceding paragraphs, this misery appears as neuroses that either are
entangled in third-order suffering or, in the case of normotic illness, col-
lapse completely into third-order suffering. In the former instance, uncon-
sciousness as unlinking predominates. In the latter, we see the double
unconsciousness I mentioned at the outset of this chapter. In either case,
“… subjectivity is marked by unceasing conflict between those uncon-
scious processes that seek to maintain the splits and those that refuse them”
(Layton, 2008, p. 67, emphasis added). And these conflicts, to repeat,
manifest as repetition compulsions: “For what one finds in repetition
compulsions is precisely unconscious conflict between the pressure to
internalize the norm and a resistance to internalization. This is certainly
what one sees clinically, a constant dialectical push-pull” (Layton, 2004a,
p. 42, emphases added). Layton identifies this refusal as “counternorma-
tive unconscious processes” (2008, p. 67).
From where might such counternormative forces emerge? Layton does
not dwell on this question, except to suggest it may have two aspects.
First, she postulates an innate sort of autonomy “… that consciously and
unconsciously resists being bent to the will of the other” (2004a, p. 42).
I prefer to think of this, along the lines of the new materialism, as a char-
acteristic of the sort of agency resident within psychological systems. It is
the ontological refusal of a subject to being totally transformed into an
object. It appears, so to speak, as the natural immune system of soul. To
this is coupled, Layton proposes, a persisting longing: “… that part of
the subject that seeks mutuality in attachments” (2004, p. 42). I also see
this as a dimension of psychological agency that is a given, the life-force
of soul. Agency within psychological systems thus displays both a refusal
and a desire. And this desire is buttressed, according to Layton and other
relational psychoanalysts, by past and present encounters in which we are
treated as subjects.
It is critical for us to notice that, without these counternormative
forces, no second- or third-order suffering could arise. Rather, we would
have only a harmonious existence with hegemonic powers. Given powers
that are as overwhelmingly oppressive as they are under neoliberalism,
this would entail the total erasure of subjectivity. This highlights that such
suffering necessarily constitutes a dialectical resistance to oppression, even
when it is nebulous or inchoate. In instances where dominant powers are
internalized, this agony may be both experienced and enacted. Where they
are primarily incorporated, as occurs in normotic conditions, the suffering

is physically or behaviorally enacted, but not subjectively experienced.
Recognizing the dialectical significance of this type of suffering brings
us to a critical juncture toward the practice of caring for soul. If we fol-
low Layton’s analysis, in which neurotic misery (as opposed to “common
unhappiness”) consists of a clash between normative and counternor-
mative unconscious processes, then practitioners of care do not have the
luxury of refusing to take sides in psychological conflict. Layton, like many
other relational psychoanalysts, implicitly rejects the classical psychoana-
lytic insistence on “therapeutic neutrality,” which demands that the ana-
lyst maintain an “evenly hovering attention” that involves observing and
interpreting psychological conflicts without weighing in on them. Because
normative unconscious processes are rooted in whatever is culturally
dominant, adopting a neutral stance means these forces will retain their
supremacy for the individual subject. In this case the therapy relationship
itself re-enacts repetition compulsions, which includes a consent to powers
of cultural hierarchy:
Often enough, enactments in treatment involve an unconscious collusion

in which patient and analyst, as members of the same culture subject to the
same ideologically mandated splits, together shore up the very social norms
that have brought about pain in the first place. (Layton, 2004, p. 46)
Such collusions, as noted before, will necessarily include the ways these
splits are raced, gendered, sexed, and classed, as well as how neoliber-
alism mystifies their entanglements. It is the therapist’s responsibility to
be watchful for these enactments and to invite the patient to join her in
vigilantly looking for how they may reproduce oppressive social norms
within their relationship. Put another way, therapists must be commit-
ted to catching the ways they are implicated in their patients’ suffering
(Layton, 2009). The upshot of all this is that psychotherapy is inherently
political, whether the therapist is aware of this or not. And, under the
conditions of neoliberal culture, caring relationships will give preferential
treatment to counternormative psychological processes.
Importantly, this means that psychotherapy and other forms of self-care
are not inevitably self-indulgent or individualistic. Layton (2013) contends
that neoliberal culture traumatizes individuals, whose defenses against
this trauma typically yield narcissistic disorders of either a grandiose or
self-deprecating sort. Unfortunately, if psychotherapy fails to connect

suffering with its social context, it modifies but does not relieve these nar-
cissistic conditions:
Indeed, a psychoanalysis that separates the psychic from the social is likely to
collude with individualist trends and to produce healthier versions of narcis-
sism, thereby failing to produce subjects who can see themselves in others
outside the intimate circle of family and friends. (Layton, 2008, p. 69)
On the other hand, any psychotherapy that restores the linkages

between distress and the cultural conditions of neoliberalism re-establishes
interdependency, increases awareness of complicity with the sufferings
of others, and lays the ground for solidarity. In my judgment this aligns
Layton with Sara Ahmed, a cultural critic in the United Kingdom. In a
recent blog post, Ahmed (2014), while herself critical of neoliberalism,
observes that some critics of neoliberalism representing the “white male
left” have portrayed feminists as participating in an identity politics that is
self-promotional and individualistic. Ostensibly, then, feminists are them-
selves co-opted by neoliberalism. Ahmed replies: “Neoliberalism sweeps
up too much when all forms of self-care become symptoms of neoliberal-
ism.” She continues:
Those who do not have to struggle for their own survival can very easily and
rather quickly dismiss those who have to struggle for survival as “indulging
themselves.” As feminism teaches us: talking about personal feelings is not
necessarily about deflecting attention from structures. If anything, I would
argue the opposite: not addressing certain histories that hurt, histories that
get to the bone, how we are affected by what we come up against, is one
way of deflecting attention from structures …. Not the only way, but one
way. (para. 25)
Self-care that is about survival, Ahmed contends, “… is not about

one’s own happiness. It is about finding ways to exist in a world that is
diminishing” (para. 23). The link between this struggle for survival and
oppressive social structures “… is why in queer, feminist and anti-racist
work self-care is about the creation of community, fragile communities,
assembled out of the experiences of being shattered” (para. 39). Ahmed
sums all this up in a citation of Audre Lorde: “Caring for myself is not
self-indulgence, it is self-preservation, and that is an act of political war-
fare” (para. 1). Might psychotherapy of the type Layton proposes, one
that links individual suffering with social power structures, also constitute
an act of political warfare? The people who arrive at my office today,
though they may suffer narcissistic disturbances, do not seem fundamen-
tally to be self-indulgent individuals. Rather, they come to me as nomads,
wandering across a vast neoliberal desert in search of an oasis where they
may experience a few minutes of communion with another human being
who recognizes them as subjects in a world of objects.
Caring for souls in a neoliberal age, then, requires practices that recon-
nect the sufferings of individuals with the larger social, cultural, and politi-
cal context. This does not mean, in psychotherapy, that we no longer
address the precise ways that family dynamics, discrete instances of trauma,
or relationship patterns alter psychological systems. Layton’s case studies
are filled with situations where she does exactly that. However, she also
sees such events as existing in and shaped by a larger social reality, and she
freely comments on the linkages between her patients’ pain and specific
features of the social context whenever this seems indicated. For example,
Layton (2010) writes of her work with Sally, a professional woman in her
forties who decided to work part time to care for her children. Sally feels
marginalized by this decision. Whenever her husband’s business seems
threatened, “Sally spirals downward into a familiar despair about the pos-
sibility of ever getting what she wants: a bigger house” (p. 313). Working
in the details of Sally’s personal history, she and Sally come to regard this
desire “… as a fetish object, a stand-in for a traumatic failure of social
and individual caretaking” (p. 313). Despite their repeated joint efforts
to explore the nuances of this meaning, Sally only becomes more desper-
ate and depressed. Layton confesses: “Sitting with Sally’s despair is quite
difficult. Like so many of my patients, she can be brutal toward herself
with scathing self-recriminations” (p. 314). As I noted at the beginning of
this book, this has become a familiar scene in my own work. But, as with
myself in similar circumstances, Layton continues listening to Sally as:
… she measures herself against those of her friends who have the big house
and wonders what the hell is wrong with her, why is she so weak and stupid.
A good subject of bourgeois ideology in its neoliberal incarnation, no con-
text, no history enters into Sally’s thinking. Indeed, when she is in despair
and railing against herself, there is little evidence of thinking. (p. 314)
Sally is clearly stuck, so Layton decides on a different approach: “And

that tack was to supply the missing context, which, unanalytic as it may
seem at first glance, I have come to regard as an important part of holding,

containment and metabolization” (p. 314). Layton points out that Sally’s
inability to work full time while caring for her children is not a weak-
ness. She tells Sally that one aspect of second-wave feminism “was a com-
promise with neoliberalism and patriarchy” that had “… merely placed
middle-class women into the same psychic condition that had prevailed
for men, one which demands a repudiation of capacities for nurture, emo-
tionality and dependence and fosters an omnipotent kind of autonomy:
the dominant version of neoliberal subjectivity …” (p. 314). She informs
Sally about the “care drain” that often occurs as women from developing
countries are drawn away from their own families to care for the children
of middle-class families in the United States whose work commitments
leave them unable to provide such care themselves. This, she observes,
is what allows many of her associates to have “the big house.” This leads
Sally to recall the number of times her friends have expressed regret at not
having enough time with their kids. As it turns out, supplying this context
allows Sally finally to begin mourning the care she had not received as a
child. In addition, it “… gives Sally’s unbearable despair new meaning,
psychosocial meaning.” Layton concludes that supplying the social con-
text “… seemed to enable her to begin to internalize my voice as a sooth-
ing presence in a way she had not been able to do before” (p. 316). I must
add here, and I believe Layton would agree, that the patriarchy embedded
in neoliberal culture results in far more women than men staying home to
care for children or aging parents. Nonetheless, the burdens now placed
on middle-class families with dependents during an era of stagnant or fall-
ing wages lead us to recognize the difficult decisions faced by families
dealing with the particularities of their own circumstances.
Given my own training in a rather classical psychodynamic attitude, I
resonate with Layton’s residual anxiety that some will regard her meth-
ods as “unanalytic.” In its classical versions, providing the social or polit-
ical context would be considered an “intrusion” into the therapy or,
worse, an “enactment” of the therapist’s countertransference. In con-
temporary relational psychoanalysis, however, everything that happens
between the therapist and patient—indeed, in all human encounters—is
understood as enactments (Wachtel, 2008, pp. 220–244). The empha-
sis here shifts from the cognitive knowledge yielded by the therapist’s
interpretations to the procedural knowledge that emerges from mutually
experiencing and observing what is intersubjectively created within the
therapeutic relationship (Natterson & Friedman, 1995). In this view,
even therapist self-disclosures may move the process forward, as long as

they are intended for the benefit of the patient and do no harm. Clearly,
we are a long way here from the classical psychoanalytic insistence on
“therapeutic neutrality.” Layton (2010) suggests that relational psy-
choanalysis should be historicized. This school emerged in the United
States during the 1990s, she observes, most likely to counter the neo-
liberal devaluing of dependency, love, and attachment (p. 318). At any
rate, relational psychoanalysis has created an opening for recognizing
the social and political context of both the therapeutic relationship and
individual suffering. This leads to a revaluation of the classical injunction
to always “follow the patient’s lead.” Responding to renowned analyst
Jessica Benjamin’s comments during a roundtable discussion, Muriel
Dimen (2006) concludes:
When, as Jessica pointed out, we follow the patient’s lead, we are not likely
to be led to politics. But even if a patient doesn’t consciously want to talk
about dependency or sexual desire, aggression or mourning, we are always
listening for those leads to take us to these very important matters, aren’t
we? Might we do the same for civil life? (pp. 199–200)
This represents nothing less than a revolution in psychoanalysis.

Suddenly everything explored in the clinical encounter, at least potentially,
holds sociopolitical significance. As Layton (2006a) demonstrates, this is
even true of dreams, once considered the most private and idiosyncratic of
phenomena. Once we understand the parameters of neoliberal subjectiv-
ity, it is not that difficult to notice the social elements within many dreams,
and even to entertain the probability that some dreams will provide com-
mentary on the cultural surround.
So far Layton has helped us imagine how we might address one of the
types of unconsciousness of third-order suffering—the lack of awareness
of the link between individual suffering and social context. What about
the other type, suffering that is unaware of itself as suffering, the distress
evident in normotic conditions? Here we are, admittedly, on a more chal-
lenging terrain. How do we care for souls unaware of their pain? The more
obvious path, considering that this suffering is enacted but not felt, is
simply to point to the enactments and express our own curiosity about the
behavior that is obviously so contrary to the person’s life or well-being. I
once worked with a successful businessman who denied feeling depressed
or particularly distressed. In neoliberal terms he was a “winner,” and he
was quite disparaging toward addicts, depressives, and other “whiners.”

This man was referred by his physician because he was compulsively exer-
cising several hours per day, to such a degree that he recurrently suffered
stress-related injuries. He ultimately incurred an injury that sidelined his
exercise regimen for several months. His only motive for following up on
the referral, he said, was his inability to exercise, which had made him feel
“down.” I maintained a steady attitude of curiousness toward his behavior
and, after developing a secure relationship based largely on intrigue and
exchanges of wit, I suggested to him one day, in a jovial manner, that I
did not see much difference between his self-injurious behavior and that
of drug addicts. This somehow inspired his own curiosity, enough to keep
him in relationship with me for some time after his injury had healed.
Eventually his affect began to surface, followed by a personal narrative that
included childhood trauma. Interestingly, this man ultimately brought
politics into our conversations and began to question his hardened atti-
tude toward “losers” and people who “lived off the government.” He
even tolerated my care for him after I confessed to being a “bleeding-
heart liberal,” and he built upon this tolerance to entertain the thought of
befriending people who were not quite like himself.
However, I would consider this man to be an example of what Bollas
would see as a “partial” case of normotic illness. Other cases, such as Tom,
whom Bollas interviewed, seem incapable of curiosity about their enact-
ments. Bollas (1987/2011) finally responds to Tom by talking about his
own experience of adolescence. He muses: “When I started to talk about
myself, he seemed more interested, but also more anxious and uncertain,
as no doubt he was unaccustomed to hearing an adult talk to him about
the ordinary fears and uncertainties of adolescence” (p. 33). Like Bollas,
the only success I have had with such individuals, and that has been quite
limited, is to disclose my own subjectivity. I might, for example, talk about
an instance in my own life similar to one shared by the patient, noting
what I experienced in that event. Lacking an analogous experience, I
might suggest what I imagine I would feel if I were in the circumstance
she just described. I sometimes report directly on what I am feeling, or
what associations come to me through my own reverie, as the patient is
speaking. Sometimes such self-disclosure appears to evoke some resonance
from the patient, if only limited or for a fleeting moment. At other times,
in desperation, I might simply guess out loud what the patient would be
feeling if he were to have a feeling about whatever he is discussing. One
does the best one can in the hopes of gaining something. Third-order
suffering, in its purest forms, is a daunting and uncanny (non-)presence.
DREAMS OF THE DEPLETED SOUL

While fully developed normotic conditions are not rare in my practice,
incomplete versions, almost invariably coupled with combined personal
and cultural trauma, have become more the rule than the exception. Most
of my work these days, in other words, requires me to immerse myself
in the complex entanglements between second- and third-order suffer-
ing that manifest in the particularities of individual lives. I have been
impressed with how often patients report dreams that ingeniously portray
these entanglements, dreams that also suggest an incipient resistance to
both the personal (familial and/or interpersonal) and cultural trauma they
have experienced. Moreover, patterns of neoliberal subjectivity frequently
emerge in these dreams with astounding clarity. Mutual work toward elu-
cidating both the personal and cultural contexts of these dreams usually
helps the patient move forward by strengthening the counternormative
elements of their suffering. I will now present two such dreams, noting
how work around the dreams buttressed the patients’ capacity for agency
and resistance. In the first instance I will provide clinical details of the
case. Circumstances surrounding the second case preclude offering spe-
cifics about the individual’s life or the therapeutic work, yet the dream
alone still allows some understanding of how the social surround appears
in something as supposedly private and idiosyncratic as a dream.
The first dream appeared late in the work with Joan, a European-
American female in her mid-fifties, who engaged me weekly for pasto-
ral psychotherapy for a period of five years.2 Joan initially presented with
panic attacks, which in due course she recalled usually occurred after driv-
ing past a street that led to a location where she had been date-raped while
in her mid-teens. She had never told anyone of the rape, and had since for-
gotten the location where it had occurred. Upon making this connection,
however, the panic attacks subsided. What then remained was a vague
listlessness and emptiness that eluded description or interpretation. Joan
soon began to describe a tragic history that seemed to explain why she had
never told anyone of the rape. From about the age of nine until around
puberty she had been treated for recurrent vaginal infections, which, as
she became aware, were related to having suffered repeated sexual abuse
from a close male relative. She had also never revealed this history of
abuse. In addition, she described a childhood spent playing in her room
alone. Both parents were markedly emotionally detached. The family lived
in an affluent neighborhood and seemed to care only about maintain-
ing an active social life and appearing happy and well-adjusted to other
members of the community. Joan had been well-schooled on how to act,

speak, and dress to fit into this environment. As an adult she discontinued
her own professional life after marrying a man who was moving up in the
corporate world. They had several children and settled in the same neigh-
borhood in which she had grown up. Though chronically anxiety-ridden,
Joan reported finding satisfaction in being a mother and indicated that
her husband was a good man with whom she had a reasonably acceptable
marriage. She carefully maintained a well-groomed appearance and cheer-
ful demeanor, as well as a busy social life, but admitted that she felt bored,
empty, and superficial. The two people with whom she felt most con-
nected were one of her children, a very depressed young man who by his
late teens had already attempted suicide twice, and a former fiancé from
her college days with whom she had re-established a long-distance, non-
sexual, but emotionally intense relationship. Joan found her feelings for
this man, an intelligent and reflective individual who was also a depressed
alcoholic, quite puzzling. But she agreed her intense identification with
these two people revealed her own chronic loneliness and a depression
that was well-concealed, including usually from herself. Eventually her
spouse was transferred to a lucrative corporate position in another state,
and this terminated the therapy. Several weeks prior to termination she
shared a dream:
In the dream I am in my home and there is a spinning something—like a

tornado—inside my house. I am watching as it sucks everything into it—all
my furniture and belongings—and I see it all spinning around in the twist-
ing column. Then I notice my husband is also in the thing, turning round
and round with everything else. And he says to me as he spins around:
“Honey, I increased the business 75 % last year.” Then the dream ends.
When I inquired as to what feelings she was having within the dream
Joan paused, nonplussed, and finally said: “Nothing. I felt nothing.”
As is the case with dreams this one held several useful insights, and we
discussed as many as we could in the final weeks of the therapy. It seemed
to comment, for example, on her history of trauma—most of which had
occurred within her home. It also appeared to be triggered by the impend-
ing move to an opulent home they were in the process of building, as well
as in some way anticipating the termination of therapy. It rather inge-
niously portrayed both her family life in her childhood and her present
household life. Ostensibly everything looked great on the outside, but
inside a storm was raging and chaos reigned. And as often seems the case
with dreams, the dream-house in some way revealed the state of Joan’s
very self, her soul. On the outside all appears well, but inside she is being
evacuated. Even her affect, metaphorically speaking, is sucked into the vor-
tex. Despite the horrifying circumstances, in the end she can feel nothing.
The crucial import for our focus here, however, lies in the way this
dream displays Joan’s sociopolitical location. More to the point, it displays
how self, personal relationships, and society are seamlessly and inevitably
interwoven. In Fromm’s words the dream illustrates the social charac-
ter of these neoliberal times (1976/1997, pp. 109). Fromm also argued
that what is unconscious is not simply personal but social, and therefore,
even the dreams of individuals are penetrated by the society in which they
live. Joan’s dream reveals self, relationships, and society in the same vein.
They are all consumed, stripped of any meaning beyond production and
consumption, and deprived of affect. Indeed, some aspects of the dream
seem to require a social construal. The consumerism implied in the dream
is fairly evident. But most striking is the words spoken by the husband:
“Honey, I increased the business 75 % last year.” He does not say, “Honey,
I love you,” or “What are we going to do about this mess?” or even
“Please help me!” This is not the language of dialogue or intimate per-
sonal relationships, but of the market. He essentially gives her a business
report. The husband’s importance is limited to his role as a producer, and
this is implicitly accepted by the dreamer as well. (This interpretation was
later confirmed by the response of Joan’s husband when she told him
about the dream: “Oh, I did much better than that!”) All this is rendered
more striking, within the dream, by the obliviousness of both the husband
and the dreamer to the devastation in which they are literally enveloped. It
seems unremarkable to them. In effect the world as they know it is ending,
but they feel fine.
Finally, the social dimensions of the dream may legitimately be
regarded as an unconscious commentary on the neoliberal society that is
entangled in the dreamer’s existence. From this standpoint the house in
the dream signifies the greater “household” of contemporary life in the
United States. (It is suggestive here to recall that the ancient Greek word
for house, oikos, is also the root for the English word “economy.”) The
dream in this sense refers to a neoliberal culture in which relationships
are reduced to the economy of the market, with their utility subject to
cost-benefit analysis. It comments, moreover, on a society in which the
most devastating effects for personal relationships are considered nor-

mal, and in which meaning outside the discourse of the market has been
evacuated. The dream suggests a society devoid of deeper emotions, in
keeping with Meštrović’s provocative thesis concerning postemotional
society (1997). Again, the house looks great and even opulent on the
outside, but on the inside is hollow. Furthermore, the dream alludes to
the gender hierarchy to which Joan has been subjected her entire life,
sometimes violently so. She is reduced to the role of a helpless observer.
Her husband, by contrast, exists contentedly within the source of power,
though it proves to be a dominating force that consumes everything,
including himself.
This dream, then, represents the normotic character of Joan’s person-
ality, her personal relationships, and her society as well. The emptiness
it portrays points to the depression hidden within, a depression that has
lost its mood and its self-awareness as well as its voice. It raises the appall-
ing prospect that there are many depressed individuals today who would
escape even the enormously expanded definitions of depression that cur-
rently hold sway. In effect, these people would be depressed if they were
more aware, if they experienced feelings beyond those required by super-
ficial living within contemporary social networks.
At the same time, the dream, by oddly juxtaposing a horrible threat
and an absence of feeling, indicates a path forward. Rieger (2009)
observes: “Resistance depends on the creation of alternative desires,” but
“… desires cannot easily be controlled and redirected at the conscious
level” (p. 115), indicating that they are not subject to cognitive-behav-
ioral interventions. However, he cites McFague’s notion of “wild spaces”
that do not conform to what a society accepts as “natural,” such as occurs
“when confronting clinical depression” (p. 115), as places where resistant
desires may emerge or be revealed. Indeed, by simply noting the peculiar
lack of feeling in the dream, Joan was able to recognize both who she had
become and a desire to be otherwise. She experienced the dream as a por-
trayal of her empty depression and began to understand her depression
as a desire for something different, a resistance to her abnormally normal
life. The dream pointed to a desire within her that opposed the “natu-
ral” desire, also within her, shaped by living in a society that valued only
production and consumption. Moreover, conversation about the social
context arose organically as we discussed the dream. In Joan’s words this
helped her feel “less crazy” and made the formerly enigmatic features of
her suffering seem “more meaningful,” even though it raised troubling

questions about her conformity to a society that had gone quite insane.
Finally, the dream aided a process in which Joan moved from a nameless
boredom to awareness of depression to an inauguration of giving voice
to her depression—a process that appears to have continued beyond the
termination of therapy.
The second dream appeared in the initial stages of my work with
Robert, a male in his early adolescence.3 Robert also presented with panic
attacks and depression, as well as recurrent suicidal thoughts. I have sug-
gested elsewhere in this book that individuals born after the neoliberal
transformation tend to be more susceptible to its characteristic maladies,
including third-order suffering. Robert’s dream represents an instructive
and poignant symptom of such vulnerability:
I am walking toward my school, and I see several people huddled around

a car in the parking lot. They are like giants, maybe nine feet tall. As I get
closer I can see that they are rolling joints on the hood of the car. I walk
past them and enter the building. Inside there are no students, only teachers
wandering the halls. I head toward my English classroom. Teachers walk
past me whispering to each other. I see they are holding wooden replicas of
hand guns, and I realize they are discussing how they will kill themselves. I
get to my classroom and sit down. I am the only person in the room. As I
begin doing my assignment my English teacher walks in. Without saying a
word, she puts the barrel of a real pistol into her mouth and pulls the trigger.
The very tall people, Robert said, reminded him of how small he feels
in the world. Although he is rather tall himself, he experiences everyone
else as somehow much bigger. Another association to this was to the
actual “big people” in the world—adults. That these people were rolling
joints, though he noted he has no particular opposition to marijuana use,
made him think about how “big people” can be irresponsible and “messed
up.” When I asked whether this could also suggest something about the
adult world, he nodded and observed: “Yeah, that makes sense. I think the
whole world is really messed up.” Noting the absence of other students
in the dream, Robert flatly stated that is just how he feels—alone and iso-
lated. He remarked: “It’s weird. I have some friends and we do things, but
it feels like there is some sort of membrane between me and other people.
I can see them and hear them, but yet I’m not really connected to them.”
“What about the school?” I inquired. Robert replied that school is where
his panic attacks are worse and more frequent. It is also the place where
he is around the most people and, ironically, where he feels the loneli-
est and most detached. I observed, in the dream, there are only adults
at the school, and wondered if that means it is part of the adult world.
He remarked: “Yes. Well, it is a public institution. And it’s where you go
to learn to fit into the adult world.” Discussing the teachers walking the
halls in the dream, Robert described them as if they had a spectral qual-
ity—real, but at the same time ethereal. Their murmuring presence was
tantamount to non-presence. Noting the terrible ending of the dream, I
asked whether his English teacher seemed distressed. “No,” he responded.
“She just calmly walked in and did it.” I probed to determine if the dream
suicide was graphic. “Oh yes,” Robert noted, “It was very realistic.” As is
my custom, I queried concerning affects within the dream. He confirmed
that the dream contained no feelings at any point, but that he did awaken
from the dream in a panic attack.
This dream may be shocking, but unfortunately is not that remarkable.
I have heard similar dream reports from others, especially from young
people. Our mutual collaboration on the dream, scattered over several ses-
sions, led Robert and me to several insights. Robert’s perceived smallness,
compared to the “big people” in the dream and in the world, reflects,
among other things, his diminished sense of self. The ghostly quality of
the dream, together with a complete absence of emotion, depicts not only
the emptiness he experiences daily, but also the hollowness of the social
world he inhabits. Perhaps the most striking feature of the dream, and
Robert’s life, is the pervasive loneliness and detachment. The dream is
virtually a cinematic depiction of normotic existence, a video clip of third-
order suffering. And yet there is a sign of protest—Robert awakens from
this horror flick in a panic attack. By working this dream and the manner
of his awakening from it, Robert and I began to understand his panic
attacks as symptoms of an irresolvable conflict between the pull to comply
with the zombie existence around him, and his fervent but inchoate resis-
tance to this pull. Panic looks and feels like emotion, but lacks the discern-
able texture or meaning of deep emotion. It is a stand-in for emotions one
does not experience, a one-size-fits-all response to tragedy. I cannot say
that this dream or its working-through brought Robert immediate relief
from his panic attacks and ensuing depression, but it did give him some
hope that his experience might hold some meaning, and enough courage
to continue his work.
THE FRAGILITY OF PSYCHOTHERAPY

I have raised the question earlier in this chapter, reflecting on Sara Ahmed’s
(2014) position on “self-care as warfare,” whether psychotherapy may,
under some circumstances, constitute a form of “political warfare.” This
may be particularly applicable when the patient is trying simply to survive
in the face of power hierarchies that marginalize and oppress them accord-
ing to certain sexual, gender, racial, ethnic, class, ability, or age designa-
tions. This relates to Joan in the preceding section. It also pertains to
Robert. As Henry Giroux (2008) has argued, the young are among those
who have been demonized and placed under surveillance in neoliberal cul-
tures (pp. 84–111). What I must now assert is that, if psychotherapy can
be a form of self-care that amounts to political warfare, it is nevertheless a
fragile, transient, and limited form of political struggle. Broad-based and
durable campaigns to contain or repeal neoliberal rationality and prac-
tice cannot be mounted from the beachhead of psychotherapy and other
types of individual care of souls. As this book makes clear, this is the case
primarily because the power of the cultural and social surround is immea-
surably greater than that of isolated individuals and their caregivers. An
additional reason is that, with reduced collective funding for counseling
services, at least in the United States, psychotherapy has become increas-
ingly complicit with and dependent upon the neoliberal status quo. It
is more entrepreneurial than ever, and more reliant upon patients who
are able to pay for such services themselves. Very few therapists, myself
included, are immune to these pressures. Given the still-expanding degree
of economic inequality, I suspect this will mean that progressively more
counselors will, in effect, be chasing a diminishing pool of people who can
afford their fees. Working for fees scaled to income level will likely do little
to ameliorate this situation. The probable outcome will be that psycho-
therapy becomes an increasingly class-based service, able to attract mostly
professionals and financial elites. I fear this is already the case.
Nevertheless, as I have attempted to show in this chapter, the focused
attention to suffering individuals afforded by the clinical context can
inform a caring for souls that exceeds such limited boundaries. This con-
text reveals that more encompassing acts of care must be able to address
the double unconsciousness of third-order suffering, as well as attend to
the growing isolation, narrative incapacitation, and fragmented subjectiv-
ity that this suffering entails. While such an effort may seem ambitious
to the point of audaciousness, clinical practice also discloses impulses of
resistance within even the most unconscious, sequestered, and shattered

individuals. This offers encouragement for a far-reaching care of souls that
can only occur in collectives and social movements, which can hope to
discern and amplify a resonance within the hearts of distressed individuals.
In the final movement of this book, I will turn now to these larger efforts
to care for souls in a neoliberal age, summarizing features of the care
required during these times.
NOTES
1. The comparable organization in the United States is the American
Psychological Association. A report published by the British
Psychological Society (BPS) in 2014, titled Understanding Psychosis
and Schizophrenia, while acknowledging possible biological factors,
insisted that psychotic disorders were also shaped by material condi-
tions, such as economic inequality, and that these disorders held mean-
ing for the sufferer. Such a position stands in sharp contrast to the
dominant opinion in the United States, which regards these types of
distress as the epitome of biologically determined mental illness. The
BPS report may be downloaded free of charge at http://www.bps.org.
uk/system/files/Public%20files/aa%20Standard%20Docs/under-
standing_psychosis.pdf
2. This case first appeared in Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2014). Blessed are those
who mourn: Depression as political resistance. Pastoral Psychology, 63
(4), 503–522. It is reprinted here with the permission of Springer, the
original publisher. Joan—a pseudonym—has given full consent to use
this material. Although I have withheld some information to preserve
her anonymity, all the information presented here is accurate to the
best of my knowledge.
3. This is also a pseudonym. Robert and his legal guardian have given full
consent to use the dream here, as well as his associations to the dream
that are relevant to understanding its cultural dimensions.
REFERENCES
Ahmed, S. (2014, August 25). Selfcare as warfare [Web log post]. Retrieved May 7,
2016, from https://feministkilljoys.com/2014/08/25/selfcare-as-warfare/
Altman, N. (2015). Psychoanalysis in an age of accelerating cultural change:
Spiritual globalization. London: Routledge.
Bennett, J. (2010). Vibrant matter: A political ecology of things. Durham, NC:

Duke University Press.
Bollas, C. (1987/2011). Normotic illness. In C. Bollas & A. Jemstedt (Eds.), The
Christopher Bollas Reader (pp. 22–36). London: Routledge.
Carrette, J. (2007). Religion and critical psychology: Religious experience in the
knowledge economy. London: Routledge.
Connolly, W. E. (2010). Materialities of experience. In D. Coole & S. Frost (Eds.),
New materialisms: Ontology, agency, and politics (pp. 178–200). Durham, NC:
sold us well-being. London: Verso.
Dimen, M. (2006). Response to roundtable: Something’s gone missing. In
L. Layton, N. C. Hollander, & S. Gutwill (Eds.), Psychoanalysis, class and poli-
tics: Encounters in the clinical setting (pp. 195–201). London: Routledge.
Fanon, F. (1952/1967). Black skin white masks: The experiences of a black man in
a white world (Charles L. Markmann, Trans.). New York, NY: Grove Press.
Fanon, F. (1963/2004). The wretched of the earth (Richard Philcox, Trans.).
New York, NY: Grove Press.
Fenichel, O. (1945). The psychoanalytic theory of neurosis. New York, NY: W. W.
Norton & Company.
Fromm, E. (1962/2010). The concept of mental health. In Rainer Funk (Ed.),
The pathology of normalcy (pp. 81-99). Riverdale, NY: American Mental Health
Foundation.
Fromm, E. (1976/1997). To have or to be? New York, NY: Continuum.
Giroux, H. A. (2008). Against the terror of neoliberalism: Politics beyond the age of
greed. Boulder, CO: Paradigm Publishers.
Gold, J. (2002). The failed social legacy of interpersonal psychoanalysis. Race,
Gender & Class, 9(4), 147–157.
Greenberg, G. (2010, September). The war on unhappiness. Harper’s Magazine,
27–35.
Ingleby, D. (Ed.). (1980a). Critical psychiatry: The politics of mental health.
New York, NY: Pantheon Books.
Ingleby, D. (1980b). Introduction. In D. Ingleby (Ed.), Critical psychiatry: The
politics of mental health (pp. 7–19). New York, NY: Pantheon Books.
The Invisible Committee. (2009). The coming insurrection. Los Angeles, CA:
Semiotext(e).
Jacoby, R. (1983). The repression of psychoanalysis: Otto Fenichel and the political
Freudians. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Keller, C. (2003). Face of the deep: A theology of becoming. London: Routledge.

Keller, C. (2015). Cloud of the impossible: Negative theology and planetary
entanglement. New York, NY: Columbia University Press.
Kierkegaard, S. (1849/1980). The sickness unto death: A Christian psychological
exposition for upbuilding and awakening (Howard V. Hong & Edna H. Hong,
Eds. and Trans.). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Kovel, J. (1981). The age of desire: Reflections of a radical psychoanalyst. New York,
NY: Pantheon Books.
Lasch, C. (1991). The true and only heaven: Progress and its critics. New York, NY:
W. W. Norton & Company.
Layton, L. (2004). A fork in the royal road: On “defining” the unconscious and
its stakes for social theory. Psychoanalysis, Culture & Society, 9, 33–51.
Layton, L. (2006a). Attacks on linking: The unconscious pull to dissociate indi-
viduals from their social context. In L. Layton, N. C. Hollander, & S. Gutwill
Layton, L. (2006b). Retaliatory discourse: The politics of attack and withdrawal.
International Journal of Applied Psychoanalytic Studies, 3(2), 143–155.
Layton, L. (2007). What psychoanalysis, culture and society mean to me. Mens
Sana Monographs, 5(1), 146–157. Retrieved May 17, 2016, from http://www.
msmonographs.org/article.asp?issn=0973-1229;year=2007;volume=5;issue=1
;spage=146;epage=157;aulast=Layton
Layton, L. (2008). What divides the subject? Psychoanalytic reflections on subjec-
tivity, subjection and resistance. Subjectivity, 22(1), 60–72.
Layton, L. (2009). Who’s responsible? Our mutual implication in each other’s
suffering. Psychoanalytic Dialogues, 19(2), 105–120.
Layton, L. (2010). Irrational exuberance: Neoliberal subjectivity and the perver-
sion of truth. Subjectivity, 3(3), 303–322.
Layton, L. (2013). Psychoanalysis and politics: Historicising subjectivity. Mens
Sana Monographs, 11(1), 68-81. Retrieved May 18, 2016, from http://www.
ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3653236/
Loewenthal, D. (Ed.). (2015). Critical psychotherapy, psychoanalysis and counsel-
ing: Implications for practice. New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Malabou, C. (2012). Ontology of the accident: An essay on destructive plasticity
(Carolyn Shread, Trans.). Cambridge: Polity Press.
Marcel, G. (1951/1978). Homo viator: Introduction to a metaphysic of hope (Emma
Craufurd, Trans.). Gloucester, MA: Peter Smith.
Martín-Baró, I. (1994). In A. Aron & S. Corne (Eds.), Writings for a liberation
psychology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Meštrović, S. G. (1997). Postemotional society. London: SAGE Publications.

Moloney, P. (2013). The therapy industry: The irresistible rise of the talking cure,
and why it doesn’t work. London: Pluto Press.
Natterson, J. M., & Friedman, R. J. (1995). A primer of clinical intersubjectivity.
Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson.
Pluto Press.
Parker, I. (2015a). Psychology after the crisis: Scientific paradigms and political
debate. London: Routledge.
Parker, I. (2015b). Psychology after psychoanalysis: Psychosocial studies and beyond.
London: Routledge.
MN: Fortress Press.
Rieger, J. (2016). Rethinking the new materialism for religion and theology: Why
movements matter most. In J. Rieger & E. Waggoner (Eds.), Religious experi-
ence and new materialism: Movement matters (pp. 135–156). New York, NY:
Palgrave Macmillan.
Samuels, A. (1993). The political psyche. London: Routledge.
Samuels, A. (2001). Politics on the couch: Citizenship and the internal life.
New York, NY: Karnac Books.
Smail, D. (1997). Illusion & reality: The meaning of anxiety. London: Constable.
Smail, D. (2001). The nature of unhappiness. London: Robinson.
Smail, D. (2005). Power, interest and psychology: Elements of a social materialist
understanding of distress. Ross-on-Wye: PCCS Books.
Wachtel, P. L. (1983). The poverty of affluence: A psychological portrait of the
American way of life. New York, NY: The Free Press.
Wachtel, P. L. (2008). Relational theory and the practice of psychotherapy. New York,
NY: Guilford Press.
Watkins, M., & Shulman, H. (2008). Toward psychologies of liberation. New York,
NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
CHAPTER 7
Concluding Theological Postscripts
I may be misleading you by referring to the following reflections as post-

scripts. Often this term designates musings that amount to mere after-
thoughts. In some letters, however, the postscript reveals the author’s
most candid or personal thoughts or feelings, or perhaps anticipates some
decisive future occurrence or follow-up activity. The latter is the better
description for what I have to say in concluding this book. For some of my
readers, this book will not have seemed sufficiently religious or theologi-
cal, while others may have patiently tolerated the frequency of religious or
theological content. As I have indicated all along, however, I see no clear
boundary between the sacred and the secular, the spiritual and the mate-
rial. So, for me, even when I have been writing about economic, politi-
cal, interpersonal, or psychological matters without using overtly religious
language, the issues with which theology is preoccupied were always
shimmering in the background. If, as the theologian Paul Tillich (1957)
famously claimed, faith has to do with that for which we are ultimately
concerned, then it is an orientation from which we relate to all that exists,
a disposition that moves us to action in the material world. For many peo-
ple, this does not take the form of theism or conventional affirmations of
transcendence. For example, commenting on the work of Gilles Deleuze,
new materialist thinker William Connolly (2010) observes:

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3_7
It may be surprising to some to hear an immanent naturalist embrace the

spiritual dimension of life. But it is not surprising to those of us who at
once contest faith in transcendence in the strongest sense of that word and
appreciate the profound role that the quality of spirituality plays in public
life. (p. 196)
Connolly proceeds to criticize those on “the democratic left” who

presume “that to drop theism in favor of any version of materialism
means to forfeit or go beyond spirituality.” He concludes: “Those are the
judgments I seek to contest” (p. 197, emphasis in original). Connolly
argues, on the contrary, that any effort for constructive change in our
time requires “ontological affirmation,” his word for faith: “Ontological
affirmation, the democratic left, and political militancy belong together
in the late-modern era. It takes all three in tandem—in their theistic and
nontheistic forms—to press for pluralism, equality, and ecological sen-
sitivity” (p. 197). In basic agreement with Connolly, I will be asserting,
in these concluding reflections, that caring for souls in a neoliberal age
requires a combination of social solidarity, political activity, and faith.
This remains true even if faith does not assume established religious
forms.
Having acknowledged this, I offer the following postscripts in a more
personal, even confessional, vein. For me this will often mean referring
to actual religious practices and explicit theological deliberations. Many
of these, congruent with my own religious home, will be particular to
Christian faith and practice. Some of my comments will be specific to
pastoral theology. In each case, these postscripts are intended to be sug-
gestive rather than exhaustive. Indeed, each deserves its own book. For
my readers who prefer not to think in frankly religious terms, or who hold
religious commitments other than Christian, I welcome you to translate
these themes into your own context, wherever such translation seems pos-
sible. Although these final reflections range over a number of issues, they
cluster into three general postscripts. Each of these denote a dimension
of care that will prove critical to both survival and moving forward in
this neoliberal era. As we will see, these dimensions are inseparable and
interpenetrate. True to what we have seen throughout this book, they are
entangled. If we removed one of them, the remaining two would neces-
sarily diminish. I address them in the following order: the cultivation and
strengthening of collectives, the nurture and increase of soul, and the sup-
port and amplification of hope.
CONCLUDING THEOLOGICAL POSTSCRIPTS 211
CULTIVATING COLLECTIVES BEYOND THE MARKET

As I have observed throughout this book, neoliberalization is a process
that is rapidly and effectively dismantling human collectives, particularly
those cherishing values that may threaten the hegemony of the market.
The consequent isolation of human beings is a central marker for third-
order suffering. Challenging the effects of this sort of suffering, as well as
the continuing forms of second-order suffering imposed by the practices
of advanced capitalism, will require us to find ways to cultivate and sus-
tain such communities. This will not be easy. The ethos of the academic
and political left, the offspring of the emancipatory movements of the
1960s, tends to see all manifestations of conviction as dogmatism or rigid-
ity, and obligations to groups or institutions as unwelcome limitations
on personal choice and freedom. The passions that typify group loyalty,
evident as assertions of dearly held beliefs and values, evoke suspicion.
Thus Connolly (2010), commenting on “the democratic left,” observes:
“They fear that the nerve of critique will be severed if ontological affir-
mation is pursued” (p. 197). Jodi Dean (2009), likewise, states that “the
academic and typing left” reacts to the vehemence of many conservatives
and neoliberal ideologues “by rejecting dogmatism and conviction, advo-
cating instead micropolitical and ethical practices that work on the self in
its immediate reactions and relations” (p. 123). Not only does she believe
this to be “politically suicidal” (p. 123), she contends it also means “we
have been unable to give voice to values of collectivity, cooperation, soli-
darity, and equity strong enough to counter neoliberalism’s free-trade fan-
tasy” (p. 73).
Moreover, as the psychoanalyst Ian Parker (2007) notes, (post)modern
psychology pathologizes dissent, largely by pathologizing collective activ-
ity (pp. 74–93). Psychology regards the “normal” individual as one who
“engages in rational decision-making and is not unduly influenced by oth-
ers” (p. 75). The pattern, notes Parker, was set in the late nineteenth cen-
tury in Gustave Le Bon’s classic The Crowd, and was continued in Freud’s
treatments of “mass psychology.” Here crowds are viewed as inherently
subject to being controlled by passions that are difficult to tame, urges
that are unreasonable at best and dangerous at worst: “Collective activity
is equated with irrationality, as if it were ‘deindividuation’” (p. 82). The
result, says Parker, is an inversion of Marx’s concern. Marx worried that
it was the isolation of individuals that lay at the root of social compliance
and a herd mentality. The dominant view in psychology, on the contrary,
“is that ‘false consciousness’ is something that kicks in when people work
together” (pp. 83–84). As Phillip Rieff (1966/2006) has shown, psychol-
ogy has played a critical role in the shaping of contemporary culture. One
consequence is that anxiety about collective action has become pervasive.
In the United States, for example, news media outlets commonly portray
organized protests and labor strikes, if they are covered at all, as mobs
inclined to violent behavior.
To make matters even more difficult, Meštrović (1997) discusses how
the “postemotional society” of advanced capitalism has become adept
at creating artificially constructed “communities,” as well as carefully
manufactured “authenticity.” He calls this the “Disneyfication of com-
munity” (p. 76). Observing that the erosion of traditions and collectives
has become a cause of alarm among present-day communitarians, such as
Amitai Etzioni and Anthony Giddens, he argues that their response has
been to call for “properly constructed” communities and intentional plan-
ning to build new traditions upon the ruins of the old. Meštrović sees
such proposals as bureaucratic efforts to “derive a sense of community
from individualism” (p. 96). He asserts that this amounts to “postemo-
tional magical thinking,” and concludes: “One could no more construct
a community than one could construct a forest” (p. 96). Instead, as in
traditional societies, genuine communities must spring up spontaneously.
They emerge organically, or not at all.
So, if today’s neoliberal cultures erode collectives, evoking suspicion
toward collective activity even among those on the radical left who oth-
erwise wish to oppose neoliberal agendas, and if we cannot intentionally
build communities, how can we hope? I suggested in the sixth chapter
that we cannot develop strategic anti-neoliberal psychotherapies to replace
those that serve the interests of present-day capitalism. What we can do is
pay attention to the individual sufferings and longings for connection that
are already there, even when this pain has been de-linked from its social
context, even in the most severe third-order conditions where people are
not aware of their suffering. At an abstract level, new materialist thinking
maintains that no systems are static. All systems are movements, entangled
with the movements of all other systems. The very openness of all things
leaves an opening for change, for hope. At a concrete level, the practices
of relational psychoanalysis, as we witnessed in the sixth chapter, reveal the
irrepressible desire of individuals for relationships in which they exist as
subjects rather than objects, and implacable resistances to powers—social,
interpersonal, and psychological—that would return them to the status of
objects. Neoliberalism makes us into objects existing in a world of objects.

However, as William Davies (2015) has noted, neoliberal rationality “gets
stuck when it comes to love” (p. 90). And love, as we will see in the next
section, points to soul. Thus attending to the movements of soul can lead
us to be more hopeful than many of the totalizing critiques of neoliberal-
ism might suggest.
In the sixth chapter, I avowed that individuality offers a window into
the dialectics—the movements—of soul. I must now recall that soul is not
contained within individual subjectivity. Soul inhabits a collective home.
Indeed, individuality, because it is dependent upon soul, arises only in a
communal context. Even so, not just any collective may house soul or
give birth to individuality. The requisite community is one that recognizes
suffering, both the pain that is shared and anguish that is as idiosyncratic
as the individual sufferer. It is also a community where complicity in one
another’s suffering is acknowledged. Moreover, this means that moving
from individuality in the sixth chapter to community in this postscript
does not entail bridging a chasm between one type of thing and another.
To support these observations, I will turn briefly to the important work
of Sara Ahmed, particularly her book The Cultural Politics of Emotion
(2015).
Ahmed (2015) argues that emotions do not arise from inside, nor are
they constructed by society and then placed into individuals, nor are they
contagions occupying the spaces between individuals, nor are they some-
thing we “have.” Rather, they are circulations or movements that orient us
to the objects in our world. To be even more exact, Ahmed affirms:
I suggest that it is the objects of emotion that circulate, rather than emotion
as such. My argument still explores how emotions can move through the
movement or circulation of objects. Such objects become sticky, or satu-
rated with affect, as sites of personal and social tension. (p. 11)
As such, “they are also about attachments or about what connects us to

this or that.” Because they concern attachments, they also concern “that
which holds us in place, or gives us a dwelling place” (p. 11). In concur-
rence with Marx, Ahmed contends that emotions “accumulate over time,
as a form of affective value” (p. 11). This, she says, is what can make social
change so difficult, even in the face of collective resistance: “Attention
to emotions allows us to address the question of how subjects become
invested in particular structures such that their demise is felt as a kind of
living death” (p. 12, emphasis in original). This affective stickiness may
cause us to continue clinging, even when the attachment causes consider-
able pain. Such an understanding of emotional conflict and suffering is
reminiscent of Layton’s view of psychic conflict and repetition compul-
sion, which I explored in the sixth chapter.
While emotions in general are not the same thing as suffering, they are
what make us both aware of our suffering and what orient our suffering in
particular ways. This leads Ahmed (2015) to discuss “the sociality of pain”
(pp. 28–31) as well as “the politics of pain” (pp. 31–39). Suffering does
not achieve “the status of an event, a happening in the world” unless it is
witnessed or recognized (pp. 29–30). She concludes: “Even in instances
of pain that is lived without an external injury (such as psychic pain), pain
‘surfaces’ in relationship to others, who bear witness to pain, and authenti-
cate its existence” (p. 31). This offers another way, I believe, to understand
third-order suffering. This is a sort of suffering that has not surfaced. No
one has borne witness to it. It has not been recognized or authenticated,
even by the sufferer. Furthermore, Ahmed contends, politics come into
play, as uneven flows of power determine whose pain is recognized and
whose is not, to what extent, and in what way. For my purposes, I take this
to indicate that third-order suffering and its entanglements are unevenly
distributed according to complex interrelationships of sex, gender, race,
class, and so on. Finally, and importantly for this postscript, Ahmed alleges
that the surfacing of pain is critical to the formation and sustenance of
genuine community. As suffering is recognized and authenticated by oth-
ers, the sufferer and the witnesses are bound together. This reminds me of
an unforgettable passage by the Spanish philosopher Miguel de Unamuno:
For men (sic) love one another with a spiritual love only when they have
suffered the same sorrow together, when through long days they have
ploughed the stony ground bowed beneath the common yoke of a common
grief. It is then that they know one another and feel one another, and feel
with one another in their common anguish, they pity one another and love
one another. For to love is to pity; and if bodies are united by pleasure, souls
are united by pain. (1921/1954, p. 135)
To this, Ahmed would add significant qualifiers and clarifications. The

sorrow to which Unamuno attests should not be sentimentalized as literally
“the same,” as a shared and uniform “fellow feeling.” The suffering of indi-
viduals, if individuality is to have any meaning, is non-identical. In Ahmed’s
words: “Pain is evoked as that which even our most intimate others cannot
feel” (p. 39). And yet suffering that surfaces as an event, that is authenti-
cated, produces an ethical demand: “Our task … is to learn how to hear what
is impossible. Such an impossible hearing is only possible if we respond to a
pain that we cannot claim as our own” (p. 35, emphasis in original). This
ethic yields
a demand for collective politics, as a politics based not on the possibility that
we might be reconciled, but on learning to live with the impossibility of
reconciliation, or learning that we live with and beside each other, and yet
are not as one. (p. 39)
This is a peculiar sort of solidarity, a common life rooted not in same-

ness, but on a deep respect, obligation to, and thus love for, the infinite and
unique value of every individual. This is the solidarity that sustains soul.
Theologians Joerg Rieger and Kwok Pui-lan (2012) refer to this as
“deep solidarity.” They assert: “Solidarity in this context is not the sup-
port of people who are exactly like oneself but rather what we are calling
deep solidarity. Solidarity is the support of others who are different yet
experience similar predicaments” (p. 28). Drawing upon the Occupy
movement’s metaphor of “the 99 percent,” Rieger and Pui-lan note that
their unity “becomes stronger when they respect the diversities in their
midst, in terms of race, ethnicity, gender, sexuality, and other markers of
differences” (p. 30). In my judgment, this affirmation implicitly assumes
Ahmed’s concern that sufferings of individuals must be respected and
not be made identical. We cannot blithely say “I know just how you feel”
without doing violence to the other’s unique pain. On the other hand,
Rieger and Pui-lan seem to allow for much more commonality than does
Ahmed’s text. For example, they repeatedly contend that “solidarity now
begins with an understanding that we are all in the same boat: we are
the 99 percent, and we challenge the 1 percent to stop building their
power and wealth at our expense and invite them to join us” (p. 79, my
emphasis). What these theologians add to Ahmed’s analysis is an empha-
sis on class. In a neoliberal era, when material inequality has become so
extreme that millions more are suffering and dying every year, and when
the environment of the planet is under siege, we are all in the same boat
more than we might be aware. Thus our predicament is indeed shared—
as the foregoing passage by Unamuno indicates—even though the ways
we suffer these conditions will differ.
The collectives necessary for caring for soul during this neoliberal age,
therefore, are those that are not only brought together by the communal
recognition and authentication of suffering, but also take sides in class
struggle. As I discussed with regard to intersectionality in Chap. 5, this
does not mean the importance of class should be elevated above other
markers of difference. As I stated there, however, oppressions circulat-
ing around race, gender, sexuality, and ethnicity cannot be understood,
much less resisted, without appreciating how they are entangled with class
conflict. Any form of identity politics that ignores class, therefore, will
be fated to support the ongoing domination of neoliberal interests. As
Cedric Johnson (2016) has maintained: “Respect for difference is valued
in today’s multicultural milieu, but the mobilization of different sub-strata
of the working class against one another has long been a cherished strat-
egy of capital” (para. 46). Communities that strive to redress the current
neglect of class issues will likely face strong opposition, as many on the left
may fear that this will come at the expense of diversity, while those on the
right decry all efforts to put class on the cultural map. This represents an
additional challenge for cultivating collectives beyond the market.
Rieger and Pui-lan’s work (2012) highlights yet another feature that
will prove essential to forming collectives that can resist neoliberal power
hierarchies—the importance of the symbolic function. In this book, I have
discussed the ways third-order suffering arises from the inability to identify
and articulate pain within a symbolic framework. For Christian congrega-
tions, addressing this suffering and its entanglements will require a critical
retrieval of tradition. According to theologian Edward Farley (1975), these
congregations embody what he calls ecclesia: “Theologically expressed,
ecclesia is that form of corporate historical existence whose origin and
continuation is made possible by Jesus Christ” (p. 127). Likewise, Rieger
and Pui-lan cite Rita Nakashima Brock, who “affirms that the Christian
community is an incarnated body to continue the movement that Jesus
started” (pp. 122–123). Drawing upon Hardt and Negri’s metaphor of
“the multitude,” Rieger and Pui-lan repeatedly delve into biblical texts,
and especially the gospels, for narratives to describe what a “church of the
multitude” might look like. For example, they observe:
At the heart of the Jesus movement was not what has often been referred to
as the demos of the Greeks, the assembly of privileged citizens from which
the word “democracy” comes. At the heart of this movement were the laos
and the ochlos, both of which describe the common people in contrast with
the privileged citizens of the empire or of the religious elites. (p. 60)
Thus, whereas Wendy Brown (2015) is concerned about how neolib-

eralism is “undoing the demos,” Rieger and Pui-lan, relying upon the
founding texts of Christianity, are far more troubled about how it is undo-
ing those who are not privileged by class power. Not surprisingly, they
repeatedly appeal to passages in the gospels that demonstrate Jesus’s lower-
class status and emphasize his overriding concern for “the least of these.”
Elsewhere, Rieger (2007) has written at length about how Christianity,
even in its imperialist forms, never quite eradicated the anti-imperial image
and message of Jesus as it articulated its Christological dogmas and claims.
Meanwhile, I must confess to my bemusement at what I perceive to
be a relative disinterest in Jesus by some within Christian theological
schools these days. Such indifference, where it exists, stands in marked
contrast to the ongoing ardor for Jesus in congregations, particularly
those of the working class. Might this contrast be a symptom of class dif-
ferences? The last time I heard a sermon that took seriously the text of
Matthew 19:24—“Again I tell you, it is easier for a camel to go through
the eye of a needle than for someone who is rich to enter the kingdom of
God”—was at Welcome Hill Baptist Church, a rural congregation near
Fort Payne, Alabama (USA). I had to have been less than 12 years of
age, and the preacher had no more than a secondary school education.
I suspect research dedicated to the class differences between theological
schools and the majority of Christian congregations would yield some
fascinating results.
I have said that forming Christian communities of resistance will
require a “critical retrieval” of this tradition. Like Edward Farley (1998), I
am deeply suspicious of recent calls for “traditioning” or “retraditioning”
in Christian faith and practice. Such efforts are often conservative reac-
tions to the erosion of religious collectives I have discussed in this book,
and frequently amount to no more than uncritical knee-jerk obsessions
with doctrinal formulas and prescribed liturgical practices. Sometimes this
takes on sophisticated forms in the theological academy, as in the “Radical
Orthodoxy” movement that emerged recently in the United Kingdom.
“On the other hand,” Farley remarks, “it’s clear that there can be no
religious faith without a sense of tradition. Without tradition, religion
would disappear in a generation” (1998, p. 113). The issue here is that
we must take a critical posture toward tradition, on the lookout for how
it serves hierarchies of power while retaining its potential for disruption
of the social and political status quo. As a student of Farley during the
1980s, I frequently heard him ask, as we reviewed some theological text,
“What is retrievable here?” This question, of course, assumes a lively and
fluid exchange between the texts and practices of a tradition and the social
context of a particular time and place. Traditions, at their best, are not
stale repetitions of the past, but living engagements with the entangled
and fragile movements of all things.
One reason that the retrieval of Christian tradition must remain critical
is that, in many of its contemporary forms, it is decidedly complicit with
present-day capitalism. William Connolly (2008) has carefully documented
this complicity in his book, Capitalism and Christianity, American Style.
It is also rigorously examined by Rieger and Pui-lan (2012), who contend
that the “top-down theism” assumed in most Christian collectives and in
the public imagination, especially in the United States, serves the interests
of capital (pp. 83–109). They declare, for example: “The all-controlling
God who acts from the top down, alone and without inviting the partici-
pation of the people and without the need to listen to anyone, is not the
God of Jesus Christ or the people of Israel” (p. 58). In keeping with this
popular theology, Rieger and Pui-lan note that Christian denominations
and churches in North America and Europe have been patterned upon
“the capitalist ruling class” (pp. 112–117). The average Christian in the
United States attends a church that is propertied, contained inside walls,
functions generally like an exclusive club, and operates according to pre-
vailing business models.1
What if we were to re-imagine religious congregations, following Saskia
Sassen’s (2014) argument that neoliberalism constitutes a global system
of expulsion, as communities of the expelled? In the final paragraph of
her book, Sassen states: “I want to conclude with a question: what are
the spaces of the expelled? These are invisible to the standard measures of
our modern states and economies. But they should be made conceptually
visible” (p. 222). Though largely unnoticed, she contends they neverthe-
less exist: “They are many, they are growing, and they are diversifying.
They are conceptually subterranean conditions that need to be brought
aboveground. They are, potentially, the new spaces for making—making
local economies, new histories, and new modes of membership” (p. 222).
From a theological perspective, I believe this is precisely what Rieger and
Pui-lan (2012) put forward as “the church of the multitude” (pp. 111–
132). These theologians ask us to envision church as “beyond walls,” and
to focus on “doing” or “forming” church rather than “going” to church
(pp. 118–119). Such a church, they assert, would look more like the
Occupy movement, or the base Christian communities of Latin America.

I want to suggest that much religious life, even in the United States, is
closer to this vision than we might think. In the rural congregations of
my youth, all attended by fewer than 100 people—all working class and
mostly without education beyond secondary school—I was consistently
told that the people were the church. So this is not a new or radical idea,
nor is it confined to the early movements that circulated around Jesus.
Even today, the average religious congregation in the United States is
about the size of those in my childhood.2 And this leaves out the growing
number of people participating in house churches. In 2009, a Pew Forum
survey estimated that close to 10 % of Protestants in the United States
only attend home services.3 If we add to this Michael Zweig’s (2012)
conclusion that the working class makes up 63 % of the labor force in the
United States, and that this group is disproportionally female, black, and
Hispanic (pp. 32–36), we can assume that the typical congregation looks
quite different “on the ground” than it might from the hallways of the
theological academy. With the dramatic increases in material inequality
under neoliberalism, it is quite likely that more and more of these gath-
erings are coming to resemble Sassen’s “spaces of the expelled.” On the
other hand, some studies are indicating that religious participation has
been declining among the working class faster than the middle and upper
classes.4 This portends a worrisome possibility that religion is fast becom-
ing a rather bourgeois activity.
Nonetheless, it is clear that religious collectives and the traditions that
support them are far from dead. My former colleague at Vanderbilt, theo-
logian John Thatamanil, has asserted that religious congregations may
be one of the last remainders of face-to-face communities that can serve
as intermediaries between individuals and families, on the one hand, and
corporations and governments on the other (personal communication;
spring, 2011). In a recent interview, Noam Chomsky (2015), a social
critic not known for his optimism, was asked whether he thought the
Occupy movement had made a lasting impact. He replied:
It’s a very atomized society. There are very few continuing organizations
which have institutional memory, that know how to move to the next step
and so on.
This is partly due to the destruction of the labor movement, which used
to offer a kind of fixed basis for many activities; by now, practically the only
persistent institutions are the churches. So many things are church-based.
(para. 7–8)
Comments such as these call upon those of us who are theologians

and religious leaders not to lose heart. We have neither the time nor the
luxury to despair. If Thatamanil and Chomsky are correct, the erosion
of collectives by neoliberalization leaves us standing upon one of the few
places from which to mount a resistance. However, as Rieger and Pui-lan
(2012) have shown, we have some serious work to do. We will need to
retrieve from our religious heritage the elements of faith and practice that
run counter to the faith and practice of the market. We have the resources,
and congregations have taken on similar missions before. During the first
Gilded Age, in the early twentieth century, churches combined forces with
labor groups to struggle against material inequality and economic oppres-
sion (Carter, 2015). This kind of collaboration extended throughout the
era of the New Deal (Cantwell, Carter, & Drake, 2016). There are some
signs that a retrieval of the Social Gospel is underway, such as the 100th
anniversary release (1907/2007), including responses by contemporary
religious leaders, of the Walter Rauschenbusch classic, Christianity and the
Social Crisis. Several contemporary thinkers and activists are working to re-
connect theology and religious studies with class-based analyses (Rieger,
2013), as well as to revive collaborative efforts between congregations
and labor (Rieger & Henkel-Rieger, 2016). There are also a number of
scholars who are revising liberation theology toward the repudiation of
neoliberal culture (Míguez, Rieger, & Sung, 2009; Sung, 2007, 2011).
I must also add to this the many voices of today’s feminist, mujerista,
womanist, black, queer, and postcolonial theologians—whose works are
far too abundant to document here—who are speaking from the margins
and thus offer valuable tools for examining and opposing global neoliberal
imperialism. Using the resources at our disposal, we are left now to fashion
alternatives to what Johann Baptist Metz (1977/2013) has identified as
bourgeois religion and bourgeois theology. Metz calls us to a religion and
theology that forms “solidarity with the dead and the vanquished” (p. 67),
precisely those who neoliberal powers have forgotten and expelled.
This brings me full circle back to Ahmed’s work, which reminds us that
much of the work before us does not fall comfortably into either intel-
lectual or activist categories. Rather, collectives are critical to the affective
work that will be required to adequately address third-order suffering.
It is not enough for us to be convinced, taught, or guided into proper
action. We must also be moved or touched. Because third-order suffering
is invisible and often not even felt, it is highly resistant to cognitive or
behavioral interventions. And because it relies on isolation, it requires a
subject-to-subject relationship to break its hold. In the sixth chapter, we

saw how the clinical context of psychotherapy offers clues about how this
can occur. The problem, as I noted at the end of that chapter, is that psy-
chotherapy is far too limited and fragile to achieve a broader antidote to
third-order suffering. Ahmed (2015), however, offers a way to understand
how particular types of human collectives might be able to reverse the
double unconsciousness of this form of suffering. Collectives that embody
the care of soul, that bear witness to individual as well as corporate pain,
involve a circulation of affect that is capable of calling third-order suffer-
ing out of its seclusion and unconsciousness. In the poetic words of the
Hebrew Bible, “deep calls unto deep” (Psalms 42:7). The power of col-
lectives to circulate affect means that they have more potential to address
such suffering—including bringing it to consciousness—than all the psy-
chotherapy in the world. This, then, is the solidarity needed in the neo-
liberal age, a solidarity that can do the deep emotional work necessary to
reach the recesses of today’s normative suffering.
For pastoral and practical theologians, this means that cultivating and
strengthening religious collectives is the single most important thing we
can do to offer pastoral care in our time. I have said, however, that this
holds true only if a community embodies the care of soul. With this in
mind, I turn now to the second postscript.
CARING FOR SOUL
What I have asserted in the foregoing postscript should not be taken as
a blanket endorsement of all human collectives, or a reification of the
notion of community, or a general sentimentalizing of religious congre-
gations. As I noted earlier in this book, neoliberalism itself depends on
giant, international collectives to accomplish its economic and political
agendas. The banking and finance industries, large corporations, and
the governments now largely controlled by them are prime examples.
Moreover, the cultural processes of neoliberalization, as we have seen, co-
opt even the most traditional collectives, such as schools, religious bodies,
labor unions, and civic organizations. These mainstays of societies are
increasingly adapted to conform to neoliberal practices, and even its gov-
erning rationality. Not even the most intimate communities are immune.
These tend to succumb over time to the individualistic and highly com-
petitive ethos of neoliberalism, which assumes there will be winners and
losers. This increases an us-versus-them mentality that fears those who
are marked as different. Thus, despite the formal promotion of diversity

and multiculturalism by neoliberal interests, we are now seeing a broad
increase of oppressions based on the intersections of race, gender, class,
sexuality, religion, ethnicity, and so on. If we combine these developments
with Ahmed’s (2015) analysis of how emotions circulate among groups
and entire cultures, we can appreciate why Le Bon’s and Freud’s concerns
about the crowd mentality and mass hysteria were not entirely misplaced.
Clearly, not just any collective will do. This is why Rieger and Pui-lan
(2012) have emphasized “deep solidarity” as the character of the requisite
communities and religious congregations. Their use of this term gener-
ally points to the inclusivity of a “church of the multitude.” This sort of
church makes diversity not simply a policy, but a calling: “The fact that
we live in the complex intersections of race, class, gender, and sexuality
should not be a cause of frustration, but a call to develop less oppres-
sive and more productive relations.” They conclude: “There is no going
back to some primordial unity without diversity (p. 66).” Later on, Rieger
and Pui-lan extend this inclusivity to religious differences. The type of
church they envision leaves behind the triumphalism of Christendom and
embraces conversation with other religions. Truth is not seen as something
any religious tradition possesses, but “is to be discovered in dialogues with
one another and in working together in deep solidarity” (p. 128). These
theologians envision a “polydoxy” that appreciates the diversity within the
Christian tradition, as well as between the religious traditions. The result
is not a uniform or universal religion, but an ongoing dialogue and col-
laboration that allow people to be simultaneously more faithful and more
critical toward their own religious heritage (pp. 128–129).
I am in agreement with what Rieger and Pui-lan have envisioned. What
I wish to add is a line of thought that I suspect these theologians might
accept as congruent with their proposals. Linking back to the insights of
Ahmed (2015) and the warnings of Meštrović (1997) in the preced-
ing postscript, deep solidarity does not arise from intentional planning
or by being “properly constructed.” It cannot be manufactured. Rather,
this solidarity emerges, if at all, from a recognition that is simultaneously
both cognitive and affective, or perhaps even affective prior to arising into
cognition—an appreciation that we are all profoundly entangled with one
another. In other words, it is rooted in an experiential comprehension of soul.
This is not a comprehension that simply occurs within individuals, who
then come together based on their shared insight. Rather, as Ahmed’s
work would suggest, it emerges organically from a circulation of affect as
bodies come into contact with each other, and as these bodies together
encounter objects that “become sticky, or saturated with affect, as sites of
personal and social tension” (2015, p. 11). In other words, comprehen-
sion of soul does not first originate within individuals. It grows out of
social–material movements. However, as I observed in passing in the sixth
chapter, soul is not simply the ontology of entanglement. Rather, soul is
a posture, an activity, a way of existing within this entanglement. And it
is evoked, called out, by the particular sufferings circulating within this
entanglement. Wherever the response to this pain is care, there is soul. Soul,
then, exists in the form of this call-and-response. This assertion beckons
for a critical retrieval of this quite traditional term, “soul.” I will say more.
In historical Christianity, pastoral care has been understood within the
tradition of the care of souls.5 Lately, the term “soul” has appeared to fall
into disregard, leading pastoral theologian Herbert Anderson (2001) to
ask: “Whatever happened to Seelsorge (the care of souls)?” (p. 32, empha-
sis in original). While Anderson attributes the disappearance of the term
from contemporary theology to its association with dualistic (body versus
soul) thinking, I suspect it also involves the current aversion to essentialist
thought. For many, as I mentioned in the introduction to this book, soul
connotes a substance or essence of the human that is eternal, universal,
and beyond history. I share the opinion that dualistic and essentialist views
of soul are no longer helpful. However, throughout this book, as indicated
even in its title, my conviction that the idea of soul warrants retrieval has
been quite apparent. First, in a very practical vein, the term remains in
broad use in cultural literature, both in popular (Moore, 1992) and aca-
demic (Rose, 1999) settings. This presents an opportunity for theology to
improve its standing as a public discourse. Second, salvaging the notion of
soul, as I have been arguing, may help counter the radical individualism
within the neoliberal paradigm, including the individualistic assumptions
that currently appear to swirl around alternative terms such as “spirit” and
“spirituality.” Third, this reframing might oppose neoliberalism’s com-
plete suppression of the category of transcendence, the conviction that
there may be a value more ultimate than the agendas and rationality of the
market. Finally, the critical retrieval of the notion of soul that I am propos-
ing does not simply make suffering an object of care. It restores voice to
the suffering that, under neoliberalism, has been silenced and privatized.
Throughout most of this book, I have focused on soul, using the sin-
gular of this term, as a material sociality. But, as in the sixth chapter where
I discussed individuality as a window into the dialectics of soul, I do not
understand individuality apart from soul. Thus I sometimes use the plural,
souls, when referring to the appearance of soul from the perspective of
subjectivity. Self, or subjectivity, may be considered generally as individual
self-consciousness and agency. Observed from the perspective of individu-
ality rather than sociality, soul appears as a dimension of self, namely the
capacity or, better, the activity or movement, of self-transcendence. But
what sort of transcendence is this? Theunissen (1977/1984) identifies
two strands within Western philosophy that attempt to account for rela-
tionship between self and other. Each implies, in my judgment, a quite
different idea regarding self-transcendence. The first, which Theunissen
calls “the transcendental project” (pp. 13–163), originates in Descartes
and finds articulation in Husserl’s philosophy. Here, self-transcendence is
both rational and individual. It is a movement in which the individual, in
an imaginative act of reason, exits herself and observes her own thoughts,
feelings, and processes. It is thus objective and objectifying. Relation to the
other is then mediated through an idea or image of the other constructed
within this act of reason. My belief is that this project is congruent with
understandings of knowledge as dependent on vision or “insight,” which
Ihde (2007) refers to as the “visualism” that has dominated Western phi-
losophy since the ancient Greeks (pp. 6–13). In this instance, self-transcen-
dence appears as an activity of solitary individuals and is fully compatible
with the neoliberal paradigm.
An alternative understanding of self-transcendence is suggested in
what Theunissen (1977/1984) calls “the philosophy of dialogue,” most
completely developed in the thought of Buber (pp. 257–344). Here, self-
transcendence is dialogical and intersubjective. It arises within what Buber
(1947/2002) identifies as “the between.” Self-transcendence occurs not
from some neutral standpoint within an individual’s rational act, but from
the standpoint of the other(s). It appears as a form of knowledge or experi-
ence that is intrinsically relational or social and, according to Ihde’s (2007)
typology, is auditory rather than visual, depending on listening and speak-
ing. This self-transcendence is an intersubjective, social act and cannot be
achieved by isolated individuals. It lies outside cost–benefit calculations
and concerns for efficiency and thus is fundamentally incompatible with
neoliberal culture.
This is apparent in what theologian Robert Johann (1966) calls “dis-
interested love.” “When love is interested,” observes Johann, “when the
attraction is based on a motive of profit or need, it has no difficulty in
finding words to justify itself” (p. 19). Disinterested love, however, cannot
explain itself: “Why do I love you? Because you are—you. That is the best
it can do. It is indefensible” (p. 19, emphasis in original). It is this sort of
love, not the “interested” attachment of romantic love, mere affection,
or desire for benefit, that forms the heart of authentic soul. Rieger and
Pui-lan (2012) have been careful to not describe the relationality of the
multitude solely in terms of love, fearing this can easily dissolve into bour-
geois forms of self-serving attraction or affection. They therefore propose:
“the notion of love needs to be tempered with the notion of justice”
(p. 80). In Johann’s understanding of love as disinterested, however, the
ethical dimension—justice—is already present. I believe this to be congru-
ent with Ahmed’s assertion that such a sociality involves “learning that we
live with and beside each other, and yet are not as one” (2012, p. 39). In
my terms, soul is always-already-there whenever the response to the call of
non-identical, particular sufferings is care. The activity of soul is intrinsi-
cally an ethical activity.
This sense of soul as ethical activity is steadily worn away by neoliberal
interests. Attributing the erosion of dialogue to “the totalizing capacity
of modernity-cum-capitalism,” Walter Brueggemann (2012) concludes:
The loss of dialogic articulation, rendered impossible in modernist rational-

ity, has led to complete abdication of dialogic capacity …. Either cold abso-
luteness or totalizing subjectivity leaves no possibility of mutual engagement
of the kind that belongs to dialogic speech and life. (pp. 26, 29, emphases
in original)
Similarly, Dufour (2003/2008) argues that life under a neoliberal

regime seeks to eliminate transcendence and non-utilitarian relationships
(pp. 64–70). He contends that it is so efficient in this reduction that it has
created a “historic mutation” of human life (p. 13), a mutation that I have
called third-order suffering.
This suggests that soul is endangered, perhaps as never before. This
should be of grave concern to any who are inheritors of the care of souls
tradition. The human values, capacities, and experiences that were once
the foci of care, pastoral or otherwise, have become dispersed, diffuse,
and at times even absent. Are we now increasingly caring for souls that
are threatened with extinction? Have we not now become T.S. Eliot’s
“hollow men” (1925/1930–1970), zombies of our former selves?
Indeed, whereas Haraway (1985) once celebrated the cyborg as a ver-
sion of liberated humanity, it seems now to have become the mindless,
machine-like fate of vacuous servitude to capitalist consumption and flex

worker production. Thus Turkle (2011) laments: “We are all cyborgs
now” (p. 152). Both self and other are commodified and reduced to an
object, an “it.” As Bollas (1987/2011) said of normotic personalities,
they are objects in a world of objects. What remains is a relationship
Buber might not have imagined: not an “I-Thou” or even an “I-it” rela-
tionship, but an “it-it” relationship.
If we combine the first postscript with this one, the necessary response
to neoliberal hegemony comes into clearer focus. There will be no path
forward that does not involve the strengthening of collectives that nur-
ture and maintain soul. Such collectives must be welcomed wherever they
appear. Not all of them will identify themselves as religious. Nor will all
forms of the care of souls be identified as pastoral. At the same time, if the
observations by Thatamanil and Chomsky cited in the previous postscript
are credible, then religious institutions and congregations will play a criti-
cal role in this journey. But this can only be the case if religious bodies can
critically reclaim the radical elements of their ancient origins. The theo-
logian Nicholas Lash (1996) claims that what have been called religions
are best regarded as schools, “whose pedagogy has the twofold purpose—
however differently conceived and executed in the different traditions—of
weaning us from our idolatry and purifying our desire” (p. 21). Today the
historical communities embodying such a pedagogy will strive to expose
the ways that contemporary capitalism has redirected our hearts onto idols
that demand our souls as sacrifice, and to replace the cravings of the mar-
ket with the desires of soul.
There is an additional emphasis within these schools that will prove
necessary to resisting the soul-killing effects of neoliberal hegemony. All
of them endeavor to remember, honor, and grieve the dead. As Goss and
Klass (2005) have documented, this is a dimension of religious traditions
that established powers often find most threatening to their control, and
thus work to either co-opt or eradicate. As we saw in Chap. 4, Bauman
(1997) establishes that neoliberal interests operate to either hide death
and grief or render them banal. Likewise, Goss and Klass (2005) observe
that, in the culture of advanced capitalism, grief is simply psychologized.
It therefore holds no power to relativize or oppose the desires of the mar-
ket, or reveal anything that might lead us to question the status quo:
“When grief is conceptualized as a psychological process, it is painful,
but ultimately not meaningful. Grief is a part of life but has no special
truth-value” (p. 256). There is no room in a world ruled by competition,
entrepreneurship, exchange, and debt for communities and traditions that

cherish the dead. Commenting upon the erosion of tradition in this age,
Metz (1977/2013) asserts:
Perhaps this substantive loss of tradition shows itself most clearly in the rela-
tion to the dead. When it comes to the dead there is no exchange relation-
ship, no do ut des. The love that mourns for the dead is that form of love …
that cannot be taken up into a consumer society’s exploitation structures. In
line with this, the community of feeling with the dead dwindles away … it is
blocked, trivialized, and inevitably privatized. (p. 51, emphasis in original)
Metz concludes: “A symptom of this is the fact that … men and women
are forbidden any mourning or melancholy” (p. 51).
If soul is coterminous with a love that permeates our entanglement
with all others and all things, then it is continually marked by grief and
mourning. For, as I have said elsewhere (Vaughn, 2003), grief is nothing
but love under the condition of absence. Moreover, because it lives within
this entanglement in the mode of love, soul suffers the loss or anguish of
even one individual. It is in this spirit, I believe, that Derrida, in his final
lecture, could claim that the death of the individual was the death of the
world (2003/2011, pp. 259–260). Finally, soul manifests a temporality
as well as materiality. It is not confined to the present. It is historical. It
extends not simply through entangled spaces, but times. Soul is lived as
memory, both individually and socially. Putting all this together, I must
agree with Metz (1977/2013) that Christian praxis is not only social but
pathic in structure. Collectives that nurture and sustain soul, in other
words, are communities of memory characterized by a peculiar solidarity:
“a solidarity that is an openness to past suffering; a solidarity, thus, that
‘looks backward’: a solidarity with the dead and the vanquished” (p. 67,
my emphasis). In an age of “radical interiorization and privatization,” in a
culture of “a growing sense of apathy,” Metz argues that such a solidarity
represents a powerful form of resistance.
In my judgment, the “deep solidarity” advocated by Rieger and Pui-
lan (2012) entails this “solidarity with the dead and the vanquished.” It
encompasses, as well, those who are no longer useful to neoliberal sys-
tems, those who Sassen (2014) calls “the expelled” and Bauman (2004)
designates “human waste,” in addition to the vast populations that con-
tinue to be materially exploited and subjugated. This solidarity must also
embrace the many people Cazdyn (2012) has termed “the already dead.”
Among these are individuals who may not appear afflicted, yet have
undergone a kind of spiritual death. They are enduring what I am calling
third-order suffering. Their misery has been so privatized, silenced, and
fragmented that it may no longer look like suffering. We do not yet fully
understand how to establish deep solidarity with the already dead. This
is a new challenge for our time, one toward which this book makes only
tentative first steps.
I have suggested that collectives that sustain soul are deep solidarities
that are historical. They thus live by memory, in continuity with the past.
But historical communities also anticipate the future; they live in hope.
And this brings us to the third and final postscript.
AMPLIFYING HOPE
The rhetoric of neoliberalism is incorrigibly optimistic. It heralds and cele-
brates creativity, industriousness, efficiency, best practices, infinite growth,
technological triumph, globalization, human flourishing, multicultural
harmony, equal opportunity, positive psychology, and authentic happiness.
Many have therefore latched onto Fukuyama’s (1992/2006) assertion
that, following the apparent demise of all the world’s socialist experi-
ments, today’s capitalism represents the fulfillment of the Enlightenment
project and the “end of history.” If this were only true, we would have
little need for hope. Derrida’s (1994) response to Fukuyama’s declaration,
however, is devastating:
For it must be cried out, at a time when some have the audacity to neo-evan-
gelize in the name of the ideal of a liberal democracy that has finally realized
itself as the ideal of human history: never have violence, inequality, exclu-
sion, famine, and thus economic oppression affected as many human beings
in the history of the earth and humanity. Instead of singing the advent of the
ideal of liberal democracy and of the capitalist market in the euphoria of the
end of history, instead of celebrating the “end of ideologies” and the end of
the great emancipatory discourses, let us never neglect this obvious macro-
scopic fact, made up of innumerable singular sites of suffering: no degree of
progress allows one to ignore that never before, in absolute figures, never
have so many men, women, and children been subjugated, starved, or exter-
minated on the earth. (p. 106)
In keeping with Derrida’s reminder, we have seen, throughout this

book, that the age of neoliberal capitalist expansion is an age of unimag-
inable anguish. Thus for those suffering under the current regime of
capitalism to be told, in the infamous words of Margaret Thatcher,

“there is no alternative,” is to receive a fate of unmitigated despair.
Consequently, we have never needed hope more than we do today.
Accompanying the macroscopic suffering to which Derrida points, I
have argued throughout this project that neoliberalization also produces
unprecedented microscopic suffering, evident in interpersonal relation-
ships and within the individual subject. The most obvious signifier of this
is not depression, which still holds some residue of resistance (Rogers-
Vaughn, 2014). At the depth of contemporary despair lies a profound apa-
thy. I have witnessed this repeatedly in my clinical practice. It appears not
as a wish to die, but as a relative lack of concern whether one lives or dies.
It is evident as an absence of feeling other than the ephemeral emotions
manufactured and served up for consumption by the market (Meštrović,
1997). Metz (1977/2013) claims that we are living in “a golden age of
apathy” (p. 81). He associates this with the steady erosion of a sense of
self: “With this experience of a more fragile identity a new culture is in the
offing; its first name is apathy, the absence of feeling” (p. 26). This loss of
self appears to be accelerating, and is virtually invisible. Many years ago,
conducting his own analysis of despair, Kierkegaard (1849/1980) antici-
pates how stealthily this demise transpires:
The greatest hazard of all, losing the self, can occur very quietly in the
world, as if it were nothing at all. No other loss can occur so quietly; any
other loss—an arm, a leg, five dollars, a wife, etc.—is sure to be noticed.
(pp. 32–33)
And he notes that the despair of this lost soul is likewise imperceptible:
Now this form of despair goes practically unnoticed in the world. Just by
losing himself this way, such a man has gained an increasing capacity for
going along superbly in business and social life, indeed, for making a great
success in the world … He is so far from being regarded as a person in
despair that he is just what a human being is supposed to be. (p. 34)
Kierkegaard is describing here a form of despair that is now becoming

normative. It is the despair of the neoliberal subject, the normotic person-
ality, the individual afflicted by third-order suffering.
This returns us once again to the dialectics of suffering, in this case to
Marcel’s (1951/1978) observation “that there can strictly speaking be
no hope except when the temptation to despair exists” (p. 36). Similarly,
Kierkegaard (1849/1980) stresses: “Precisely because the sickness of

despair is totally dialectical, it is the worst misfortune never to have had
that sickness” (p. 26). He continues:
Compared with the person who is conscious of his despair, the despairing
individual who is ignorant of his despair is simply a negativity further away
from the truth and deliverance. Despair itself is a negativity; ignorance of it,
a new negativity. However, to reach the truth, one must go through every
negativity, for the old legend about breaking a certain magic spell is true: the
piece has to be played through backwards or the spell is not broken. (p. 44)
For the necessary change to come about, insists Kierkegaard, “there

must first be effective despair, radical despair, so that the life of the spirit
can break through from the ground upward” (p. 59). Playing things
through backwards, he suggests, will first mean returning despair to con-
sciousness. In my terms, it requires a reversal of the double unconscious-
ness of third-order suffering. First, we must become aware of suffering,
then reconnect it to its social origins. Under the conditions of neoliberal-
ism, the consequence of this renewed awareness produces what Cazdyn
(2012) calls “the already dead.” This sort of consciousness, in turn, is
the seed for the emergence of a new, spontaneous community: “Since
one is already dead, the fear of death … works differently and opens up a
relationship to death and dying that is not wholly contained by personal
struggle” (p. 200). I will return to this presently.
First, I must highlight something implicit in this dialectic, an important
matter that could easily be overlooked. And that essential truth is this:
wherever there is despair, there is hope. In the radical despair of third-
order suffering, hope may be reduced to a virtual silence. Yet it is there,
even though as a still, small voice—or perhaps an inchoate resonance. This
holds true whether we regard despair individually or collectively. Many
times, when sitting with psychotherapy patients who appeared completely
hopeless, I have pointed out to them that they would not be talking with
me, nor would I be listening to them, unless we both were entertaining
some sort of hope, however minuscule it might seem to be. Our very pres-
ence to one another indicated an embryonic hope that only appeared to
be absent. On a number of occasions, these individuals would later report
to me, sometimes after months or even years, that hearing those simple
words had helped them imagine the possibility of a better life. I must now
add to this the likelihood that this hope could only emerge in the context
of a communion that began to take shape during those initial conversa-

tions. As I noted in the foregoing postscript, soul is a self-transcendence
that occurs within dialogue, in the form of the call-and-response of rela-
tionship. Whenever we speak, whether through words or through gestures
of our bodies, we must wait for the other’s response. We cannot know
in advance what this will be. In that precise moment, the future is open,
undetermined. This waiting, as Marcel affirms, is a marker of hoping. We
might say that this pause, this space, between speaking and responding is
the birthplace of hope. And, as the relational psychoanalysis I discussed in
the sixth chapter demonstrates, if the response is then directed to a sub-
ject rather than an object, this hope is nurtured and grows. This happens,
in other words, if the dialogue embodies something of the ethic Johann
(1966) calls “disinterested love.” Marcel (1951/1978) concurs: “Now it
is precisely where such love exists, and only where it exists, that we can
speak of hope, this love taking shape in a reality which without it would
not be what it is” (pp. 57–58). This leads Marcel, in the same essay, to this
final statement about the meaning of hope:
we might say that hope is essentially the availability of a soul which has
entered intimately enough into the experience of communion to accomplish
in the teeth of will and knowledge the transcendent act—the act establishing
the vital regeneration of which this experience affords both the pledge and
the first-fruits. (p. 67)
If we place this alongside the understanding of soul I outlined in the

second postscript, we can now see that soul exists within the entanglement
of all things in the mode of hope. If the body of soul is love, then hope is
its breath.
The outcome of all this is that we are not in the position of having
to create hope ex nihilo. Instead, our task is to amplify the hope that
is already there, even in the depths of third-order despair. This ampli-
fication takes place, as we have just seen, whenever we respond to each
other as subjects rather than objects. However, if this is limited to dyadic
relationships or to intimate circles, what remains will continue to be a
small voice. As I noted in the conclusion of the sixth chapter, the benefits
of psychotherapy, for instance, are tenuous and fragile in the face of the
global challenges of neoliberalization. This holds true for all interpersonal
relationships. This does not mean that hope at this level is without value.
As Sara Ahmed (2014) has asserted, even these microscopic forms of care
are nevertheless acts of resistance: “It is about finding ways to exist in a

world that is diminishing” (para. 23). Still, the macroscopic portrait of
suffering painted by Derrida at the beginning of this postscript begs for
hope on a much larger scale. The macroscopic and the microscopic are
indelibly entangled. Fortunately, hope is not entirely eradicated in this
dimension either. As feminist theorists such as Lauren Berlant (2011) and
J.K. Gibson-Graham (1996/2006, 2006) have argued, no hegemony is
total. There are always cracks in any hegemony, spaces where resistant
longings seep up, creating alternative movements and communities. This
is just as true of neoliberalism, they observe, as any former hegemony. And
these marginal factions, though scattered and local, portend the possibility
of large-scale political activity.
Similarly, Cazdyn’s (2012) notion of “the already dead,” as I am appro-
priating it, consists of those who have been expelled by neoliberal systems,
as well as those afflicted with third-order suffering, who have subsequently
become both conscious of their suffering and also aware of “the larger
structure of power” (p. 200) that has excluded or subjugated them.
Cazdyn then asks: “But what does one do with this awareness? Make a
revolution, since awareness changes nothing.” The critical question, he
declares, can be posed succinctly: “How will the already dead transform
into a collective political subject?” Cazdyn concludes:
The already dead, however, do not constitute a political movement in the

traditional sense. They, rather, evince a political consciousness that can
inspire and inform political movements. The already dead already inhabit
revolution—that is, a revolutionary consciousness informed by a certain way
of living in time and with the future. (p. 200)
But, how are the already dead to make the turn from political con-
sciousness to activity? Cazdyn addresses this only obliquely, especially in
his allusions to the work of Ernst Bloch (pp. 185–186), but I believe this
will require a critical retrieval of the utopian imagination. Without inspira-
tion from visions of a better world, social and political movements rarely,
if ever, gain traction.
In the neoliberal age, openly utopian discourse has fallen upon hard
times. A confluence of streams has made it almost impossible to embrace
dreams of “the Good Society” anymore. One such stream is the post-
modern suspicion that any sort of grand narrative will prove to be inher-
ently exclusive and oppressive. But postmodern skepticism merges with
earlier currents in twentieth-century thought. Historian Russell Jacoby

(2005) observes that for the “liberal anti-utopians,” such as Karl Popper,
Isaiah Berlin, and Hannah Arendt: “Totalitarianism became the catchall
for utopianism as well as Marxism, Nazism, and nationalism.” He con-
cludes: “Today the liberal anti-utopians are almost universally honored;
their ideas have become the conventional wisdom of our day” (p. xiii).
Finally, the freedom movements that sprang up globally during the 1960s
shared a general distrust of institutions and obligations to collectives. We
have seen, in the second chapter of this book, how neoliberalism co-opted
these libertarian sentiments. Most of today’s political powers, both con-
servative and liberal, at least in the United States and Europe, are heirs to
these currents of anti-utopianism.
There are two problems with contemporary anti-utopianism, and they
are related. First, the utopian impulse appears to spring up spontaneously,
even where it is most maligned. Hayek’s post-World War II best seller,
The Road to Serfdom (1944/2007), a major contribution to what was
to become neoliberal ideology, decried utopian thinking as much as the
writings of Popper, Berlin, and Arendt, and was far more popular. Like
these thinkers, as Jacoby (1999) has noted, Hayek equated all utopian
ideals with totalitarianism (p. 43). And yet, in ways Hayek could not have
possibly imagined, neoliberalism has evolved into a utopian movement. In
the neoliberal utopia, the unencumbered functioning of markets, which
is avowedly both natural and scientific, will (eventually) solve all human
problems that are capable of being solved. This utopian impulse hid-
den within neoliberalism is becoming widely recognized. Kunkel (2014)
observes: “neoliberal ‘post-ideology’ resembled nothing so much as a
caricature of Marxist historical determinism. It merely substituted liberal
capitalism for communism in claiming that here we beheld the final form
of human society” (p. 137). Similarly, Žižek (2009) contends: “the very
notion of capitalism as a neutral social mechanism is ideology (even uto-
pian ideology) at its purest” (p. 25). Later on, he concludes:
Far from proving that the era of ideological utopias is behind us, this uncon-
tested hegemony of capitalism is sustained by the properly utopian core of
capitalist ideology. Utopias of alternative worlds have been exorcized by the
utopia in power, masking itself as pragmatic realism. (p. 77)
What we now have, in other words, is one utopian project eradicating its
competitors. An implicit recognition of the utopian character of neoliberal
capitalism, complete with its own secular theology, is also evident in the
recent work of several theologians, including Cobb (2010), Rieger (2009),
and Thistlethwaite (2010). The issue before us, then, as the preceding
quote from Žižek suggests, is not whether to pursue a utopian spirit, but
rather which sorts of visions are truly just and warrant our support. This
will require serious ongoing theological analysis and critique, in order to
counter the inevitable idolatrous tendencies of utopian dreams.
The second problem with anti-utopianism is the evisceration of any
political effort that might actually alter the existing system in a mean-
ingful way. In his book The End of Utopia: Politics and Culture in an
Age of Apathy, Jacoby (1999) agrees with Fukuyama that utopianism has
become obsolete. Unlike Fukuyama, however, Jacoby believes this has had
devastating consequences. We are now deprived of large-scale visions of
alternatives to the existing capitalist order, dreams of the possible that are
necessary to fund genuine social and political change. “Instead of champi-
oning a radical idea of a new society,” remarks Jacoby, “the left ineluctably
retreats to smaller ideas, seeking to expand the options within the existing
society” (p. 13). This has occurred, he observes, even among socialist par-
ties the world over, as well as among the remaining theorists who still dare
to wear the Marxist label: “At the fin de siècle, Marxism seeks an afterlife
as a more perfect capitalism” (p. 23, emphasis in original). Jacoby con-
cludes: “Can liberalism with a backbone exist if its left turns mushy? Does
radicalism persist if reduced to means and methods? Does a left survive if
it abandons a utopian hope or plan?” (p. 25).
As I have noted in Chaps. 2 and 5, part of the success of neoliberalism
consists in how effectively it has co-opted the spirit of the 1960s. As I
have documented, it accomplished this by driving a wedge between social
justice efforts focused on economic fairness and those emphasizing cul-
tural identities. Henceforth, social justice, even among most progressives,
has been identified with the elimination of discrimination and oppression
based on sex, gender, race, ethnicity, and so forth. Meanwhile, the insis-
tence on economic justice has been virtually abandoned. However, as I
have argued, removing an awareness of the entanglement between class
conflict and oppressions rooted in race, gender, and other markers of dif-
ference has only made the daily lives of the vast majority of women, minor-
ities, and other marginalized people immensely worse. It has also had the
untoward effect of making the struggles of working-class whites invisible.
One consequence of this, in the United States, is the backlash evident in
the support of the racist-inflected presidential campaign of Donald Trump

by the white working class. Similar reactions are now evident in the sup-
port of conservative political parties and politicians all over Europe.
Jacoby sees this problem as well, and thus is highly critical of neoliberal
multiculturalism, which emphasizes diversity while leaving out the realities
of class struggle (1999, pp. 29–66). The resulting emphasis on inclusion
means simply gaining access to the rewards of capitalism. Ironically, this
produces an actual decline in diversity, as cultural differences are flattened
out, reduced to stylistic variations of living in a consumer society. As I
mentioned in Chap. 5, this is also a theme in Paul Gilroy’s W.E.B. Dubois
Lectures at Harvard (2010). Gilroy bemoans the African-American
embrace of equal opportunity, while leaving behind the revolutionary
dreams of leaders such as Martin Luther King, Jr., Angela Davis, Malcolm
X, Frantz Fanon, and Bob Marley. Referring to this type of inclusion as
cultural conformity, Jacoby concludes: “Multiculturalism spells the demise
of utopia” (1999, p. 40).
This brings us back to the main points of these postscripts. If caring for
souls in a neoliberal age requires collectives that nurture soul, it is now
apparent that these collectives must also amplify hope in a time of perva-
sive conformity and despair. And amplifying hope in the social dimension
will entail a critical retrieval of the utopian spirit. But what sort of utopian
spirit is required? Jacoby (2005) discerns two streams of utopian thought:
“the blue print tradition and the iconoclastic tradition” (p. xiv). “The
blueprint utopians,” he notes, “map out the future in inches and minutes”
(p. xiv). These are the utopians of the planned economies and controlling
states, and they are in the majority. This utopianism, Jacoby claims, was
the variety so rightly reviled by Popper, Berlin, and Arendt (pp. 37–82).
Ironically, neoliberal utopianism generally falls into this vein. The icono-
clastic utopians, on the other hand, are an overlooked minority. These
are “those who dreamt of a superior society but who declined to give its
precise measurements” (p. xv). Jacoby summarizes:
Rather than elaborate the future in precise detail, they longed, waited, or
worked for utopia but did not visualize it. The iconoclastic utopians tapped
ideas traditionally associated with utopia—harmony, leisure, peace, and
pleasure—but rather than spelling out what could be, they kept, as it were,
their ears open toward it. Ears and eyes are apposite, for insofar as they did
not visualize the future, they listened for it. They did not privilege the eye,
but the ear. (p. 33)
I cannot read these words without recalling, as in the second postscript,

that soul consists in hearing, in dialogue, rather than in seeing. Jacoby,
a historian, traces the iconoclastic current of utopianism to the Jewish
tradition, and specifically to the Hebrew Bible, with its refusal to make
graven images depicting the Divine (pp. 113–144). The contemporary
expressions of this utopian spirit are found in the writings of “the Weimar
utopian Jews—intellectuals such as Ernst Bloch, Gershom Scholem, T. W.
Adorno, and Walter Benjamin” (p. 127). I must also remind those of us
who are Christians that Jesus of Nazareth—a faithful Jew—stood firmly
within this tradition. In the Gospels, he is recorded as preaching “the
Kingdom of God,” a reversal of earthly kingdoms, a realm of peace, love,
and justice. In keeping with this utopia, the prayer that bears his name
asks: “And forgive us our debts, as we also have forgiven our debtors”
(Matt. 6:12). This is clearly a different place from the one we now inhabit.
The deep longing of the iconoclastic utopians for a world they refuse
to portray is in keeping with Marcel’s description of hope. Hope, insists
Marcel, “tends inevitably to transcend the particular objects to which it at
first seems to be attached” (1951/1978, p. 32). Optimism depends upon
calculation, and is narcissistic, the object being desired for oneself. Hope,
by contrast, is open to a future it cannot control, and what is longed for
is “for us” (pp. 32–34, 60). By these measures, Marcel would no doubt
claim that blueprint utopians are optimists. They have no need of hope,
for they are busy designing the future. The interests behind neoliberal sys-
tems are eternally optimistic. Any who attempt to turn the neoliberal tide
will have to rely instead upon hope.
The hope needed today is not a dreamy-eyed longing locked within
the individual subject. If the analyses in this book are anything close to
accurate, this will not do, even for individual subjects. Soul inhabits a col-
lective body, a body that exhales hope. This hope, once exhaled, expands
to enfold our precious, entangled world, only to take it back in again.
It has economic and political aspirations and inspirations. Just because
it is expansive, however, does not make it abstract. It exists in material
form, the form of love and justice. The utopian spirit of soul must exceed
neoliberal blueprints for multiculturalism and diversity. Without economic
justice, there will be no inclusivity that makes a great difference in human
lives. The mere appreciation of racial, gender, and sexual diversity will
not relieve the oppression that is fueling destruction and genocide on a
global scale. At the same time, economic justice will not matter unless all
are included. While workers seizing control of the means of production

would not in itself end sexism, racism, or heterosexism, neither can an end
be brought to any of these without addressing class struggle.
These postscripts finally converge. Collectives that nurture soul will be
spiritually utopian and politically active, working toward economic and
social justice. A pastoral care that is not rooted in such communities will,
however unintentionally, serve the interests of a global system that pro-
duces the suffering it seeks to assuage. Caring for souls while giving up on
striving toward a better world is, at best, a betrayal of our best traditions
and, at worst, a hypocritical and cynical activity. I have said that, in inter-
personal relationships such as psychotherapy, hope emerges in the pause
between speaking and responding. This is surely no less true in the social
world. If human collectives give voice to the suffering within them and
listen intently to the suffering in the world—including that of the dead
and the vanquished—a large-scale hope may yet be born anew. Deep calls
unto deep.
NOTES
1. See the 2015 report by the National Congregations Study (NCS),
available at http://www.soc.duke.edu/natcong/Docs/NCSIII_
report_final.pdf. The study found that while the average religious con-
gregation in the United States is very small, the average participant
attends a large, propertied, and relatively well-funded church.
2. The previously cited study by the NCS confirms that the average reli-
gious congregation in the United States in 2012 had 70 active partici-
pants (p. 5).
3. As reported in a USA Today article titled “‘House churches’ keep
worship small, simple, friendly” (July, 2010). Available at http://
usatoday30.usatoday.com/news/religion/2010-07-22-house-
church21_ST_N.htm
4. See W. Bradford Wilcox, “Why so many empty church pews? Here’s
what money, sex, divorce and TV are doing to American religion,” The
Washington Post (March 26, 2015). Available at https://www.wash-
ingtonpost.com/news/acts-of-faith/wp/2015/03/26/
why-so-many-empty-church-pews-heres-what-money-sex-divorce-
and-tv-are-doing-to-american-religion/
5. This paragraph and the succeeding five paragraphs first appeared, with
minor differences, in Rogers-Vaughn, B. (2014). Blessed are those
who mourn: Depression as political resistance. Pastoral Psychology, 63

(4), 503–522. This material is repeated here with the express permis-
sion of Springer, the original publisher.
REFERENCES
Ahmed, S. (2014, August 25). Selfcare as warfare [Web log post]. Retrieved May 7,
2016, from https://feministkilljoys.com/2014/08/25/selfcare-as-warfare/
Ahmed, S. (2015). The cultural politics of emotion (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Routledge.
Anderson, H. (2001). Whatever happened to Seelsorge? Word & World, 21(1),
32–41.
Bauman, Z. (1997). Postmodernity and its discontents. Cambridge: Polity Press.
Bauman, Z. (2004). Wasted lives: Modernity and its outcasts. Cambridge: Polity
Press.
Berlant, L. (2011). Cruel optimism. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Bollas, C. (1987/2011). Normotic illness. In C. Bollas & A. Jemstedt (Eds.), The
Christopher Bollas Reader (pp. 22–36). London: Routledge.
NY: Zone Books.
Brueggemann, W. (2012). In the “Thou” business. Journal for Preachers, 35(4),
21–30.
Buber, M. (1947/2002). Between man and man (Ronald Gregor-Smith, Trans.).
London: Routledge.
Cantwell, C. D., Carter, H. W., & Drake, J. G. (Eds.). (2016). The pew and the
picket line: Christianity and the American working class. Urbana, IL: University
of Illinois Press.
Carter, H. W. (2015). Union made: Working people and the rise of social Christianity
in Chicago. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Chomsky, N. (2015, September 22). History doesn’t go in a straight line. Jacobin.
Retrieved May 24, 2016, from https://www.jacobinmag.com/2015/09/
noam-chomsky-bernie-sanders-greece-tsipras-grexit-austerity-neoliberalism-
protest/
Cobb Jr., J. B. (2010). Spiritual bankruptcy: A prophetic call to action. Nashville,
TN: Abingdon Press.
Connolly, W. E. (2008). Capitalism and Christianity, American style. Durham,
NC: Duke University Press.
Connolly, W. E. (2010). Materialities of experience. In D. Coole & S. Frost (Eds.),
New materialisms: Ontology, agency, and politics (pp. 178–200). Durham, NC:
Davies, W. (2015). The democratic critique of neo-liberalism. Renewal 23(3),

86-92. Retrieved May 22, 2016, from http://www.renewal.org.uk/articles/
the-democratic-critique-of-neo-liberalism
Derrida, J. (1994). Specters of Marx: The state of the debt, the work of mourning and
the new international (Peggy Kamuf, Trans.). New York, NY: Routledge.
Derrida, J. (2003/2011). The beast & the sovereign (Vol. 2) (Geoffrey Bennington,
Trans.). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
De Unamuno, M. (1921/1954). Tragic sense of life (John Ernest Crawford Flitch,
Trans.). New York, NY: Dover Publications.
Polity Press.
Eliot, T. S. (1925/1930–1970). The hollow men. In T. S. Eliot (Ed.), Collected
poems, 1909-1962 (pp. 77–82). New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace & World.
Farley, E. (1975). Ecclesial man: A social phenomenology of faith and reality.
Philadelphia, PA: Fortress Press.
Farley, E. (1998). Toward theological understanding: An interview with Edward
Farley. The Christian Century, 115(4), 113–115 149.
Fukuyama, F. (1992/2006). The end of history and the last man. New York, NY:
Free Press.
Gibson-Graham, J. K. (1996/2006). The end of capitalism (as we knew it): A
feminist critique of political economy. Minneapolis, MN: University of
Minnesota Press.
Gibson-Graham, J. K. (2006). A postcapitalist politics. Minneapolis, MN:
University of Minnesota Press.
Gilroy, P. (2010). Darker than blue: On the moral economies of Black Atlantic cul-
ture. Cambridge, MA: The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Goss, R. E., & Klass, D. (2005). Dead but not lost: Grief narratives in religious
traditions. Walnut Creek, CA: AltaMira Press.
Haraway, D. (1985). A manifesto for cyborgs: Science, technology, and socialist
feminism in the 1980s. Socialist Review, 80, 65–107.
Hayek, F. A. (1944/2007). In B. Caldwell (Ed.), The road to serfdom: Text and
documents, the definitive edition. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Ihde, D. (2007). Listening and voice: Phenomenologies of sound. Albany, NY: State
University of New York Press.
Jacoby, R. (1999). The end of utopia: Politics and culture in an age of apathy.
New York, NY: Basic Books.
Jacoby, R. (2005). Picture imperfect: Utopian thought for an anti-utopian age.
New York, NY: Columbia University Press.
Johann, R. O. (1966). The meaning of love: An essay towards a metaphysics of inter-
subjectivity. Glen Rock, NJ: Paulist Press.
Johnson, C. C. (2016, February 3). An open letter to Ta-Nehisi Coates and the
liberals who love him. Jacobin. Retrieved February 28, 2016, from https://
www.jacobinmag.com/2016/02/ta-nehisi-coates-case-for-reparations-bernie-
sanders-racism/
Kierkegaard, S. (1849/1980). The sickness unto death: A Christian psychological
exposition for upbuilding and awakening (Howard V. Hong & Edna H. Hong,
Eds. and Trans.). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Kunkel, B. (2014). Utopia or bust: A guide to the present crisis. London: Verso.
Lash, N. (1996). The beginning and the end of ‘religion’. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Marcel, G. (1951/1978). Homo viator: Introduction to a metaphysic of hope (Emma
Craufurd, Trans.). Gloucester, MA: Peter Smith.
Meštrović, S. G. (1997). Postemotional society. London: SAGE Publications.
Metz, J. B. (1977/2013). Faith in history and society: Toward a practical funda-
mental theology (J. Matthew Ashley, Ed. & Trans.). New York, NY: The
Crossroad Publishing Company.
Míguez, N., Rieger, J., & Sung, J. M. (2009). Beyond the spirit of empire: Theology
and politics in a new key. London: SCM Press.
Moore, T. (1992). Care of the soul: A guide for cultivating depth and sacredness in
everyday life. New York, NY: HarperCollins Publishers.
Pluto Press.
Rauschenbusch, W. (1907/2007). Christianity and the social crisis in the 21st cen-
tury: The classic that woke up the church. New York, NY: HarperOne.
Rieff, P. (1966/2006). The triumph of the therapeutic: Uses of faith after Freud
(40th anniversary ed.). Wilmington, DE: ISI Books.
Rieger, J. (2007). Christ & empire: From Paul to postcolonial times. Minneapolis,
MN: Fortress Press.
MN: Fortress Press.
Rieger, J. (Ed.). (2013). Religion, theology, and class: Fresh engagements after long
silence. New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Rieger, J., & Henkel-Rieger, R. (2016). Unified we are a force: How faith and labor
can overcome America’s inequalities. St. Louis, MO: Chalice Press.
Rieger, J., & Pui-lan, K. (2012). Occupy religion: Theology of the multitude.
Rose, N. (1999). Governing the soul: The shaping of the private self (2nd ed.).
London: Free Association Books.
Sung, J. M. (2007). Desire, market and religion. London: SCM Press.
Theunissen, M. (1977/1984). The other: Studies in the social ontology of Husserl,
Heidegger, Sartre, and Buber (Christopher Macann, Trans.). Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press.
Thistlethwaite, S. B. (2010). Dreaming of Eden: American religion and politics in
a wired world. New York, NY: Palgrave Macmillan.
Tillich, P. (1957). Dynamics of faith. New York, NY: Harper & Row.
Turkle, S. (2011). Alone together: Why we expect more from technology and less from
each other. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Vaughn, B. (2003). Recovering grief in the age of grief recovery. The Journal of
Pastoral Theology, 13(1), 36–45.
Žižek, S. (2009). First as tragedy, then as farce. London: Verso.
Zweig, M. (2012). The working class majority: America’s best kept secret (2nd ed.).
Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
INDEX1
A Appalachia, 4, 12, 173, 174

addiction, 2, 15, 59, 99, 103, 127, austerity, 26, 39
142, 149, 153, 170, 189
African Americans, 14, 21, 23, 141
age of acquiescence. See Fraser, Steve B
Ahmed, Sara, 192, 203, 213, 232 Bageant, Joe, 114
Aid to Families with Dependent Baptist, Edward E., 110
Children (AFDC), 117 Bass, Diana Butler, 73, 80
Alexander, Bruce K., 103, 122 Bauman, Zygmunt, 69, 70, 90, 114,
Alexander, Michelle, 138 156, 169
Altman, Neil, 177 Beaudoin, Tom, 22
American Enterprise Institute (AEI), Beckert, Sven, 110
38 Beck, Ulrich, 102
Amin, Samir, 119 Benjamin, Jessica, 185, 195
Ammerman, Nancy T., 76, 80 Benjamin, Walter, 85, 236
Andersen, Margaret L., 145 Bennett, Jane, 174
Anderson, Herbert, 223 Berger, Peter L., 79–81, 84
Anderson, Victor, 158 Berlant, Lauren, 232
antiracist white supremacy, 137–43, Berlin Free Clinic, 185
147 Bernays, Edward, 37
anxiety, 2, 46, 127, 157, 185, 194, best practices, 6, 168, 228
198, 212 Bhabha, Homi, 51
1
Note: Page numbers with “n” denote notes.

DOI 10.1057/978-1-137-55339-3
244 INDEX
black feminism, 136, 138, 144–6, 155 of self, 191, 192

Black Lives Matter movement, 139 of soul, 126, 172, 173
Bloch, Ernst, 233, 236 technologies of, 100
Bollas, Christopher, 2, 184, 187–9, Carrette, Jeremy, 77, 178
196, 226 Cazdyn, Eric, 123, 125, 142, 149,
Boltanski, Luc, 41, 43, 47, 97, 150 152, 170, 175, 228, 230, 232,
Bourdieu, Pierre, 72 233
bourgeois religion, 220 Centeno, Miguel A., 17, 42, 69
bourgeois theology, 220 Chiapello, Eve, 41, 43, 47, 97, 150
Braedley, Susan, 72, 132, 133, 159 Chicago School, 37
British Psychological Society, 178, Chomsky, Noam, 219–20, 226
204n1 christianity
Brock, Rita Nakashima, 153, 216 agonistic, 51, 76, 159
Brown, Wendy, 17, 19, 20, 36, 42–5, as anti-imperialist, 133
49, 52, 54, 71, 82, 86, 89, 100, and capitalism, 218
102, 104, 144, 217 critical retrieval of, 216–17, 223,
Brueggemann, Walter, 225 224, 233, 235
Buber, Martin, 224, 226 fundamentalist, 48
Bunting, Madeleine, 150 and labor movements, 220
and Social Gospel Movement, 147
civil rights movement, 43, 137
C class
Cahn, Naomi, 92 conflict/struggle, 28, 48, 49, 53,
capitalism. See also neoliberalism 84, 92, 101, 112, 120, 128,
contemporary, 28, 54, 60, 82, 83, 131–61, 132, 148, 153, 155,
86, 89, 97, 99, 109, 112, 119, 159, 161, 216, 235, 237
123, 132, 153, 167, 178, 226 consciousness, 143, 147, 157
disembedded, 70, 82, 99 and debt, 102, 112, 116, 120, 128,
embedded, 70 151–3
as naturalized, 18–20 and gender, 20, 144, 155,
neoliberal, 7, 16, 20, 22, 26, 28, 186, 222
51, 69, 70, 77, 96, 109, and intersectionality, 28, 132, 136,
119, 121, 122, 132, 174, 143–5, 153–61, 216
229, 234 and labor/work, 4, 13, 39–41, 67,
New Deal, 38, 55, 56, 220 70, 72, 86, 90, 110–12, 116,
new spirit of, 41, 47, 97, 150 119, 135, 145–7, 149–52, 160,
as normative, 20, 28, 99, 152, 154, 179, 212, 219–21
169 as marker of suffering, 20
Carbone, June, 92 as power to (re)configure identities,
care/caring 157
capitalist opposition to, 54, 55, 152 and race, 20, 144, 155, 214, 222
deregulation of, 16, 39, 70, 100, and relationality, 153–61
109, 139 as social stratification, 146
INDEX 245
struggle/conflict, 28, 48, 49, 53, Corbyn, Jeremy, 26

84, 92, 101, 112, 120, 128, Couldry, Nick, 97, 124, 125
131–61, 132, 148, 153, 155, counter-normative unconscious
159, 161, 216, 235, 237 processes. See Layton, Lynne
and third order suffering, 28–9, Couture, Pamela, 21, 22
109–28, 132, 136, 141, 143, Cox, Harvey, 87
146–54, 158, 161, 169–72, credit default swaps (CDSs), 40
175, 181–8, 190, 195–7, Crenshaw, Kimberle, 156
201–3, 211, 214, 216, 221, critical psychology, 18, 29, 177, 178
225, 228, 230, 232 Crossley, James G., 54
class-based segregation. See economic Cushman, Philip, 99, 103
segregation Cvetkovich, Ann, 102
clinical practice, 19, 29, 172, 180,
203, 229
Clinton, Hillary, 26 D
Cobb, John B., 24, 148, 234 Dardot, Pierre, 17, 36, 43, 44, 46, 54,
cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT), 70, 71, 83, 100–3, 149
178 Davies, William, 17, 42–4, 58, 71, 73,
Cohen, Joseph N., 17, 42, 69 91, 113, 161, 171, 213
collectives Davis, Angela Y., 136, 137, 145, 161,
cultivating, 211–21 235
erosion of, 136, 220 de Sade, Marquis, 45
pathologizing of, 211 De Vogli, Roberto, 25, 27
Collins, Patricia Hill, 145 Dean, Jodi, 48–9, 53, 89, 211
Colloque Walter Lippman, 36 death
colorblind racism, 140 the already dead (see Cazdyn, Eric)
Combahee River Collective, 145, banalization of, 114
155–6, 159–60 denial of, 82, 115, 127, 134, 140,
common good. See public good 157, 169, 187
community/communities, 2, 4, global genocide, 119, 120, 237
8–10, 12, 15, 27, 30n2, 54, privatization of, 16, 17, 39, 70, 71,
68, 72, 77, 83, 90, 100, 103, 93, 100, 102–3, 109, 113, 134,
125, 135, 143, 144, 161, 173, 135, 139, 186, 227
192, 198, 211–14, 216–19, debt
221, 222, 226–8, 227, 230, and configuration of class struggle,
232, 237 120
competition, 3, 17, 25, 43–5, 55, 69, as eschatological value, 86, 173
71, 73, 101, 160, 227 financialization and, 17, 111, 116
Connell, Raewyn, 69, 132–4, 159 increase under neoliberalism, 71,
Connolly, William E., 28, 49, 53, 68, 126, 148, 149, 151–3, 159,
69, 75, 76, 174, 175, 183, 190, 219, 224
209–11, 218 money as, 48, 151
Cooper-White, Pamela, 30 as moral injury, 153
246 INDEX
debt (cont.) Duggan, Lisa, 48, 49, 51, 52, 69, 70,
as servitude, 86, 226 131, 132, 134, 136, 141
deflation of human systems Duménil, Gérard, 43, 54, 56
corruption of, 28, 69, 72–8,
90–104, 119, 127, 147
of human collectives/institutions, 2, E
15, 29, 68, 72, 73, 78, 211, Eagleton, Terry, 48–50, 81
221, 237 ecclesia, 90, 216
of interpersonal systems, 68, 90 Economic Policy Institute, 56
marginalization of, 28, 69, 72–8, economics/culture split. See Duggan,
90–104, 119, 127, 136, 147 Lisa
of psychological systems, 23, 53, 71, economic segregation, 113
119, 122, 123, 181, 190, 193 economization (of human life), 70, 71
deinstitutionalization. See Dufour, emotion(s)
Dany-Robert; third order and attachment, 74, 90, 93, 100,
suffering 183, 190, 195, 213, 214
Deleuze, Gilles, 209 commodification of, 77, 94, 97, 150
depression communication as exchange of, 17,
as illness of responsibility, 102 84, 94, 124, 156, 219
major depression (modern diagnosis dis-owning of, 171
of), 103 emotional capitalism (see Illouz,
and ownership of emotion, 94, 202, Eva)
213 emotional ontology (see Illouz,
deregulation, 16, 39, 70, 100, 109, Eva)
139 as personal property, 128
Derrida, Jacques, 46, 48, 53, 227–9, as social/cultural circulations (see
232 Ahmed, Sara)
desubjectivation. See Dufour, Dany- subject to rational control, 94
Robert; third order suffering emotional capitalism. See Illouz, Eva
desymbolization. See Dufour, Dany- empirically supported treatments
Robert; third order suffering (ESTs), 6
dialectical materialism, 172, 173 the “end of history”. See Fukuyama,
Disneyfication of community. See Francis
Meštrović, Stjepan G. entrepreneurship, 71, 227
distal powers, 180 exchange (market), 70
diversity, 16, 20, 28, 80, 131, 134,
143, 144, 154, 157, 216, 222,
235, 237 F
D-L-P formula, 16, 17, 36, 39 Facebook, 11, 44
dreams (as symptoms of culture), 29, Fanon, Frantz, 122, 137, 141, 177,
178, 195, 197–202, 233–5 235
Dufour, Dany-Robert, 28, 43, 47, 77, Farley, Edward, 88, 124, 125, 216–18
78, 97, 101, 102, 121–5, 127, feminism
147, 225 black, 136, 138, 144–6, 155
INDEX 247
neoliberal, 135 Goodchild, Philip, 86, 87, 89, 151

radical, 136, 145 Gramsci, Antonio, 6, 53
second wave, 43, 135, 194 Gray, John, 40
Fenichel, Otto, 176 Greenspan, Alan, 41
financialization, 17, 111, 116 grief/mourning, 113, 227
Fischer, Claude S., 73, 75, 76, 78
Florida, Richard. See The Rise of the
Creative Class H
Fort Payne, Alabama (USA), 12–15, Hall, Stuart, 55
217 happiness, 72, 93, 113, 114, 175,
Foucault, Michel, 42–4, 46, 52, 53, 192, 228
71, 77, 79, 81, 113, 121, 126 Haraway, Donna, 226
Fox News, 48 Häring, Norbert, 17, 58
Frankfurt School, 185 Harvey, David, 40, 43, 47, 49, 54, 56,
Fraser, Nancy, 51, 89, 135 70, 75, 82, 87
Fraser, Steve, 147 Hayek, F. A., 37, 38, 42, 69, 233
free market, 16, 20, 38, 40, 52, 58, Hedges, Chris, 8, 45, 46
72, 87, 90, 111, 122, 123 hegemony/hegemonic, 6, 7, 21–3,
free trade agreements, 38 25, 26, 42, 50, 53, 55, 68, 69,
Freud, Sigmund, 174, 185, 211, 222 75, 89, 97, 120, 158, 170, 190,
Friedman, Milton, 37, 55, 194 211, 226, 232, 234
Fromm, Erich, 176, 184, 185, 199 Helsel, Philip, 23
Fukuyama, Francis, 111, 228, 234 heterosexism, 19, 101, 126, 132, 144,
155, 237
homo oeconomicus, 45, 71, 90
G hooks, bell, 136, 144, 145, 159
gender-blind patriarchy, 132–7, 147 hope, 6, 7, 29, 97, 100, 141, 161,
gender theory, 107 168, 202, 204, 210, 212, 228–37
General Social Survey (GSS), 73–4, Horney, Karen, 176
104n1 Hout, Michael, 73, 75, 76, 78
Gerkin, Charles V., 22 Hubbard, Phil, 133
Gibson-Graham, J. K., 232
gig economy (on-demand economy),
148, 162n3 I
Gilens, Martin, 58, 133, 139 identification, 157, 186, 187, 198
Gilroy, Paul, 140, 235 identity politics, 7, 19, 20, 47–9, 151,
Giroux, Henry A., 131, 138, 140–1, 156, 159, 160, 192, 216
203 Ihde, Don, 224
Giroux, Susan Searls, 45, 46, 159 Illouz, Eva, 93–6, 98, 99, 126
globalization, 17, 57, 58, 102, 103, incorporation, 75, 112, 187
112, 228 individualism
Gnosticism, 40, 49 disembedded, 70, 82, 99
Goldberg, David Theo, 137–9, 159 embedded, 70, 82, 99
248 INDEX
individualism (cont.) K
as feature of neoliberal rationality, Keller, Catherine, 174
53, 54, 69, 71, 72, 75, 78, 82, Keynes, John Maynard, 37
83, 118, 138, 154, 155, 161, Kierkegaard, Søren, 169, 229, 230
187, 190, 203, 213 King, Martin Luther, Jr., 85,
the new individualism, 70, 72, 75, 144, 235
93 Klein, Naomi, 40, 120
individuality, 29, 83, 121, 152, 157, Kovel, Joel, 176, 179, 183, 184
182–96, 213, 214, 224 Kuhn, T.S., 120, 122, 127
inequality
global, 26, 118
and mental health, 6 L
multiple inequalities, 44, 71, 73, 91 labor unions, 39, 67, 72, 146, 147,
and neoliberalism, 35–61, 71 221
and social well-being, 58–61 LaMothe, Ryan, 23
United States, 8 Lane, Robert E., 72
Institute of Economic Affairs (IEA), Lartey, Emmanuel, 22, 23
38 Lasch, Christopher, 168
interior life/world, 181 Lash, Nicholas, 87–8, 99, 226
International Monetary Fund (IMF), Laval, Christian, 17, 36, 43, 44, 46,
26, 38, 116 54, 70, 71, 83, 100–3, 149
intersectionality Layton, Lynne, 2, 98, 123, 177,
aversion to, 144–5 183–7, 189, 190, 195
as inter-relationality, 153–61 Lazarus, Neil, 51
and multiculturalism, 20, 28, 47, Lazzarato, Maurizio, 102, 112, 151–3
131, 132, 144, 154, 222, 235, Leech, Garry, 116, 118, 119
237 Lettini, Gabriella, 153
neoliberal versions of, 7, 154 Lévy, Dominique, 43, 54, 56
of 1970s radical feminists, 145 LGBT Affirmative Therapy, 154
post-capitalist, 154, 155, 158 liberalization, 16, 17, 26
liberation psychology, 177
liberation theology, 24, 220
J LinkedIn, 44
Jacoby, Russell, 176, 233–6 living human web, 5, 67–104
Jaffe, Sarah, 133, 135, 141 Loewenthal, Del, 178
Jameson, Fredric, 23, 49 love
Johann, Robert O., 92, 220, disinterested, 92, 95, 187, 225, 231
225, 231 and emotional capitalism, 93–6, 98
Johnson, Cedric, 23, 140–2, as gift, 92, 95
160, 216 interested, 92, 196, 225
Jones, Daniel Stedman, 16, 17, 36–8, romantic, 95, 225
43, 55, 69, 72, 83 and self-sacrifice, 45, 95
INDEX 249
Loy, David R., 78, 79, 84 spectral quality of, 151, 202
Luxton, Meg, 72, 132, 133, 159 monopoly capitalism, 137
Lynn, Barry C., 137 Mont Pelerin Society (MPS), 37
multiculturalism, 20, 28, 47, 131,
132, 144, 154, 222, 235, 237
M
Malabou, Catherine, 123, 169
Mann, Geoff, 17, 40 N
Marcel, Gabriel, 168, 231, 236 narcissism, 192
Marmot, Michael, 60 narrative therapy, 179
marriage National Center for Family &
corruption of, 28, 69, 72–8, 90–6, Marriage Research (NCFMR), 91
98, 119, 127, 135, 140, 147 necropolitics. See Mbembe, Achille
inequality and, 58–61, 90–3, 228 Nelson, Robert H., 85, 86
marginalization of, 28, 69, 72–8, neoliberal antiracism, 141
90–104, 119, 127, 136, 147 neoliberalism. See also capitalism
Martín-Baró, Ignacio, 177 and class conflict, 48, 49, 53, 84,
Marxism, 51–4, 233, 234 92, 120, 132, 148, 153, 155,
Marx, Karl, 52, 81, 137, 145, 152, 159, 161, 216, 235
153, 161, 174, 211, 213 and competition, 3, 17, 25, 43–5,
mass incarceration, 138 55, 69, 71, 73, 101, 160, 227
materiality, 81, 156, 173, 175, 179, complexity of, 36
227 conceptual imprecision of, 36, 139,
Mbembe, Achille, 114–15 155, 218, 227
McClure, Barbara J., 22 as cultural project, 17, 27, 42–6,
McGuigan, Jim, 41, 43 134
Meštrović, Stjepan G.. See definition, 16–17, 36
postemotional society as economic project, 35
Metz, Johann B., 220, 227, 229 and entrepreneurship, 71, 227
Michaels, Walter Benn, 132, 141 as governmentality, 43, 46, 52–4,
Míguez, Néstor, 24, 220 95
Miller-McLemore, Bonnie, 5, 67 as hegemony, 6, 7, 21, 25, 26, 42,
Mirowski, Philip, 39 50, 53, 55, 75, 89, 97, 120,
Mitchell, Stephen A., 41 158, 170, 211, 226, 232, 234
Moloney, Paul, 178 history of, 35, 42, 173, 184, 197,
money 228
as capital, 86, 90, 111, 146, 150, as ideology, 37, 69, 72, 133, 143,
151, 158 148, 233
as debt, 151 and individualism, 17, 22, 43, 45,
as demanding human sacrifice, 86 70, 72, 75, 82, 93, 99, 134,
as eschatological, 86, 173 154, 170, 171, 178, 181, 185,
as revenue, 17, 56, 151 212, 223
250 INDEX
neoliberalism (cont.) 146–54, 158, 161, 169–72,

and intersectionality, 28, 132, 136, 175, 181–8, 190, 195–7,
143–6, 153–61, 216 201–3, 211, 214, 216, 221,
as normative, 19, 20, 28, 52, 53, 225, 228, 230, 232
71, 99, 152, 154, 169, 184–6, normotic breakdown. See normotic
189–91, 221, 230 North American Free Trade
as paradigm for suffering, 120–5 Agreement (NAFTA), 38, 116
as political project, 42
practices of, 16
and racism, 19, 28, 54, 101, 120, O
126, 128, 131–61, 237 Occupy movement, 215, 219
as rationality, 53, 54, 69, 71, 72, 75, Offer, Avner, 8
78, 82, 83, 118, 138, 154, Oliver, Kelly, 137
155, 161, 187, 190, 203, 213 ontological affirmation, 210, 211
as reflexive process, 36 ontologizing identities, 154, 158
“roll back” processes of, 39, 139 optimism, 161, 168, 175, 219, 236
“roll out” processes of, 99, 139 Ordoliberals, 37
and sexism, 19, 28, 54, 101, 120, Organization for Economic
126, 128, 131–61, 237 Co-operation and Development
as silent revolution, 8 (OECD), 58
three historical phases of, 37–9, 41, Orr, Judith L., 22
72, 134
and U. S. imperialism, 40
neoliberalization P
complexity, 16, 36 paradigm, 6, 7, 20, 25–8, 46, 55, 76,
fluid/fluctuating, 36, 41, 97, 127, 109–28, 136, 143, 186, 223, 224
218 Parker, Ian, 18, 171, 177, 178, 184,
hybridization, 36, 41 211
processes of, 46, 128, 139, 221 pastoral care, 7, 8, 15, 18–22, 27, 60,
uneven, 35, 53, 72, 144, 214 88, 126, 128, 167, 221, 223, 237
Neuger, Christie Cozad, 20 pastoral psychotherapy/counseling,
neuroses/neurotic misery, 160, 176, 29, 167, 172, 197
185 pastoral theology, 1–30, 53, 69,
new materialism, 172, 175, 190 87–90, 128, 181, 210
the new spirit of capitalism. See patriarchy, 12, 53, 131–7, 145, 147,
Boltanski, Luc; Chiapello, Eve 155, 194
normative unconscious processes. See Peck, Jamie, 36–40, 83
Layton, Lynne Perrucci, Robert, 57, 149, 152
normotic personal responsibility, 5, 70, 93, 134,
breakdown, 189 135, 142
illness, 184, 187–90, 196 The Personal Responsibility and Work
personality, 2, 188, 230 Opportunity Reconciliation Act
and third order suffering, 28–9, (PRWORA), 135
109–28, 132, 136, 141, 143, Peters, Michael A., 53
INDEX 251
philosophy of dialogue, 224 and capitalism, 18–20, 29, 172,

Pickett, Kate, 58–60 175–82, 211, 212
Piketty, Thomas, 56 critical, 18, 29, 177, 178
policing, 39, 72, 113, 114, 139 and neoliberalism, 5, 7, 15, 16, 19,
Poling, James N., 21 23, 28, 35, 42, 54, 60, 70–1,
political powerlessness. See also 94, 96–104, 148, 150, 169–71,
Stephanopoulos, Nicholas O. 177–9, 181, 188, 190, 209,
and gender, 133 212, 227
and race, 135, 139 social-materialist, 179
polydoxy, 222 psychosocial dislocation. See Alexander,
Pope Francis, 25 Bruce K.
Port Clinton, Ohio (USA), 8–15, 17, psychotherapy
18 as class-based, 15, 145, 147, 148,
post-capitalism, 1–30, 78, 89, 90, 151, 220
153–62 as fragile, 96, 126, 127, 174, 192,
postcolonial theory, 51 203, 218, 221, 229, 232
postemotional society. See Meštrović, as window into dialectics of soul,
Stjepan G. 29, 182–202, 224
postmodern critical theory, 27, 35, 49 public good, 7, 17, 37, 49, 50, 56, 89
postmodernity Pui-lan, Kwok, 24, 215–18, 220, 222,
as culture of late capitalism, 92, 93, 225, 228
96 Putnam, Robert D., 8–14, 17, 18, 72
as diversion, 46–54
poststructuralism, 53, 97
poverty Q
child, 10, 13, 14, 22 queer theory, 192, 220
and debt, 102, 112, 116, 120, 128,
151–3
global, 117 R
United States, 14, 117–18, 133, racism
146, 173 and class, 20, 144, 155, 214, 222
Povinelli, Elizabeth A., 113 deregulation of, 16, 39, 70, 109,
precariat, 148 139
privatization, 16, 17, 39, 70, 71, 93, privatization of, 139
100, 102, 103, 109, 134, 135, re-regulation of, 39
139, 186, 227 and third order suffering, 28–9,
Prosperity Gospel, 76 109–28, 132, 136, 141, 143,
proximal powers, 180 146–54, 158, 161, 169–72,
psychoanalysis 175, 181–8, 190, 195–7,
object relations theory, 68 201–3, 211, 214, 216, 221,
relational, 194, 195, 212, 231 225, 228, 230, 232
psychological conflict, 191 Radical Orthodoxy, 217
psychology Ramsay, Nancy J., 20, 144, 154, 156
252 INDEX
Rauschenbusch, Walter, 220 S

Reagan, Ronald, 8, 37, 72, 117 Saez, Emmanuel, 56–7
Reed, Adolph, Jr., 132, 141, 147, 158 Samuels, Andrew, 2, 177
Reich, Robert B., 112 Sanders, Bernie, 26
Reid-Henry, Simon, 58, 119 Sassen, Saskia, 111–12, 157, 218, 228
religion(s) scarcity (as mystifying discourse), 118,
and capitalism, 67, 73–81, 85–8, 119
124, 126, 131, 144, 173, 182, secular/secularization
186, 217, 219, 222, 226 as class-based ideology, 14–15, 20,
corruption of, 28 54, 145, 147, 148, 151, 203,
decline of religious collectives, 80 220
and desire, 27, 47, 180 contemporary capitalism as the
economics as, 85 material body of, 28, 54, 60,
and idolatry, 88, 226 82, 83, 86, 89, 97, 99, 109,
marginalization of, 73 112, 119, 123, 132, 153, 167,
the market as, 211–21 178, 226
as pedagogies/schools, 67, 88, 120, as dangerous idea, 37, 52, 88, 211
226 as diversion from neoliberal effects,
and spirituality, 75–7, 210, 223 78–90
and symbolization, 189 and erosion of collectives, 136, 220
Religious Right, 75 and idolatry, 88, 226
repetition compulsion, 185, 189–91, as illusory (see Berger, Peter)
214 as immanent frame (see Taylor,
Rieff, Phillip, 99, 212 Charles)
Rieger, Joerg, 24, 75, 76, 87, 146, self. See also subject
157, 174, 200, 215–18, 220, authentic, 96
222, 225, 228, 234 cohesive, 96, 97, 125
The Rise of the Creative Class, 41 core, 98
Ritzer, George, 243 corruption of, 72–8, 119
Road to Serfdom. See Hayek, F. A. and Enlightenment project, 40, 228
Rogers-Vaughn, Bruce, 23, 76, 97, erosion of, 97
100, 102, 103, 113, 156, 174, fluid/discontinuous, 41, 90, 96–7
204n2, 229, 238n5 fragmentation of, 169
Rose, Nikolas, 97, 223 as improvisation, 182, 186
Rove, Karl, 48 interest, 9, 16, 45, 83, 92, 93, 98
Roy, Ravi K., 16, 36, 39 marginalization/reduction of, 96
Rubin, Robert, 41 as means of production, 146, 150,
Ruether, Rosemary Radford, 24 152, 237
Rumscheidt, Barbara, 21 sacrifice, 45, 95
Rushkoff, Douglas, 40 self-blame, 1, 2, 6, 18
Rustin, Michael, 68 self-care, 191–2
INDEX 253
self-esteem, 83, 101 and third order suffering, 28–9,

self-management, 71, 167–204 109–28, 132, 136, 141, 143,
self-transcendence, 5, 224, 231 146–54, 158, 161, 169–72,
and soul, 169 175, 181–8, 190, 195–7,
therapeutic self, 98–101 201–3, 211, 214, 216, 221,
self-transcendence 225, 228, 230, 232
as dialogical/relational, 21, 23, 224 soul(s)
as rational and individual, 224 care/caring of, 126, 172, 173
sexism definition, 26, 36, 84, 152, 200
deregulation of, 101, 139 and dialogue, 177, 199, 222, 224,
privatization of, 100, 102–3, 113, 225, 231, 236
135, 139, 186 and entanglement, 69, 121, 128,
re-regulation of, 39 136, 139, 141, 153, 169, 174,
and third order suffering, 28–9, 175, 181–3, 191, 197, 214,
109–28, 132, 136, 141, 143, 216, 223, 227, 235
146–54, 158, 161, 169–72, and self-transcendence, 5, 224, 231
175, 181–8, 190, 195–7, and voice, 5, 21, 49, 89, 125, 134,
201–3, 211, 214, 216, 221, 140, 147, 161, 176, 194, 200,
225, 228, 230, 232 201, 211, 220, 224, 230, 232,
shame, 2, 18, 60, 126, 153, 237
174, 183 spirituality
Sheppard, Phillis I., 22 as commodification of religion, 77
Silva, Jennifer M., 91–3, 96, 98, 126, and individualism, 75–7, 210, 223
136, 142, 143, 148 as neoliberal acquisition, 114
slavery spiritual but not religious, 76, 77,
and capitalism, 110–12, 115 80
as debt servitude, 86, 226 Springer, Simon, 36, 39, 49, 53, 55,
and U. S. economic growth, 110 204n2, 238n5
Smail, David, 18, 178–82 Standing, Guy, 148
Smith, Archie, Jr., 21, 23 Steger, Manfred B., 16, 36, 39
Smith, James K. A., 80, 82, 83 Stephanopoulos, Nicholas O., 133
sociality of pain. See Ahmed, Sara The Structure of Scientific Revolutions.
1960s social protest movements, 38, See Kuhn, T. S.
47, 48, 75, 82, 90, 112, 121, subject. See also self
137, 140, 211, 233, 234 desubjectivation, 28, 121, 123, 125,
solidarity 136, 141–3, 147, 149–51, 153,
with the dead and the vanquished 158, 161
(see Metz, Johann B.) entrepreneurial subject, 101
deep solidarity, 215, 222, 228 neoliberal subject (neo-subject), 83,
and socially authenticated suffering, 86, 93, 143, 183, 185–8, 194,
214–15 195, 197, 230
254 INDEX
suffering Thatamanil, John, 219, 220, 226

and class, 60, 149 Thatcher, Margaret, 8, 26, 37, 40, 42,
and deinstitutionalization, 28, 74, 70, 72, 229
77, 121, 123, 125, 136, 143, theism, 209–10, 218
147, 161 theology
demystification of, 181 economics as, 85–6
deregulation of, 16, 39, 70, 100, and evaluation of values, 195
109, 139 market as god, 243
and desubjectivation, 28, 121, 123, of money, 86
125, 136, 141–3, 147, 149–51, as necessary for assessing capitalism,
153, 158, 161 18–20
and desymbolization, 28, 121–5, therapeutic neutrality, 191, 195
136, 140, 143, 147, 161 therapist self-disclosure, 176, 191,
disembodied, 100, 122, 173 194, 196
dysregulated, 100 Theunissen, Michael, 224
first order, 125, 182, 185 third order suffering
and individualism, 2, 180, 181, 192, and class struggle, 28, 101, 112,
195, 212, 213 120, 128, 131–62, 216, 235,
and intersectionality, 28, 132, 136, 237
143–5, 153–61, 216 as deinstitutionalization, 28, 74, 77,
privatization of, 100, 102, 103, 186 121, 123, 125, 136, 143, 147,
second order, 28, 126–8, 141, 146, 161
152, 153, 160, 169, 171, 172, as destructive plasticity (see
175, 182, 185–6, 211 Malabou, Catherine)
as socially authenticated, 214–15 as desubjectivation, 123, 125, 136,
social-material understanding of, 29, 141–3, 147, 149–51, 153, 158,
154, 176, 177, 179, 223 161
third order, 28–9, 109–28, 132, as desymbolization, 28, 121–5, 136,
136, 141, 143, 146–54, 158, 140, 143, 147, 161
161, 169–72, 175, 181–8, 190, as double unconsciousness, 29, 184,
195–7, 201–3, 211, 214, 216, 190, 203, 221, 230
221, 225, 228, 230, 232 and intersectionality, 28, 132, 136,
suicide, 116, 153, 189, 198, 202 143–5, 153–61, 216
Sullivan, H. S., 176 as the new chronic (see Cazdyn,
Summers, Lawrence, 41 Eric)
Sung, Jung Mo, 24, 97, 220 as the new normal, 28, 109–28
surveillance, 39, 72, 139, 203 and racism, 19, 28, 54, 101, 120,
survival of the fittest, 3, 27, 45 126, 128, 131–61, 237
and sexism, 19, 28, 54, 101, 120,
126, 128, 131–61, 237
T as solitary confinement, 224
Taylor, Charles, 80–6 and transformation of first and
Temporary Assistance for Needy second order suffering, 28, 52,
Families (TANF), 117 126–8, 141, 146, 152, 153,
INDEX 255
160, 169, 171, 172, 175, 182, unemployment/underemployment,

185–6, 211 13, 56, 118
Thistlethwaite, Susan Brooks, 24, 234 United States
Tillich, Paul, 88, 128n3, 209 imperialism, 24, 40, 51, 145, 220
Townes, Emilie, 156 and inequality, 8, 56, 57, 60, 92,
tradition(ing), 217 125
critical retrieval of, 216, 217, 223, and neoliberalism, 40, 58, 70–1, 96,
224, 233, 235 135, 151
retraditioning, 217 and poverty, 14, 117–18, 133, 146,
Transatlantic Free Trade Agreement 173
(TAFTA), 39 utopian imagination
Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP), 39 blueprint utopianism, 235–7
traumatogenic environment, 2, 123, iconoclastic utopianism, 235–6
142
Trump, Donald, 235
Turkle, Sherry, 226 V
violence, 15, 19, 21, 45, 101, 113,
115, 116, 126–8, 132, 159, 215,
U 228
Unamuno, Miguel de, 214–15 Voting Rights Act (Shelby County vs.
unconscious(ness) Holder; U. S. Supreme Court,
counter-normative, 186, 190, 191, 2013), 139
197
double unconsciousness, 29, 184,
190, 203, 221, 230 W
individual/private, 19, 68, 72, 150, Wachtel, Paul L., 176, 194
195 Wacquant, Loïc, 118
normative, 184, 185, 189–91 wage reduction, 4, 9, 17, 39, 56, 86,
and normotic illness, 184, 187–90, 92, 116, 119, 133, 135, 148,
196 149, 152, 173, 194
political, 19, 147, 170–1, 182, war capitalism
184–6, 190, 191, 195, 203, neoliberalism as extension of, 111,
221 114, 151, 170, 174
social, 147, 161, 169–72, 180–2, and suffering, 110–11, 114
184, 190, 195, 221, 230 Washington Consensus, 22, 38
and third order suffering, 28–9, well-being
109–28, 132, 136, 141, 143, interpersonal, 6, 7, 15, 23, 28, 35,
146–54, 158, 161, 169–72, 42, 45, 47, 53, 54, 68, 70–1,
175, 181–8, 190, 195–7, 90–6, 99, 119, 123, 124, 150,
201–3, 211, 214, 216, 221, 169–70, 175, 176, 180, 182,
225, 228, 230, 232 197, 209, 212, 229, 232, 237
underclass. See Sassen, Saskia psychological, 6
undoing the demos. See Brown, Wendy social, 15, 35–61, 155
256 INDEX
white supremacy, 131, 137–44, 147 Wright, David, 57, 149, 152
Wilkinson, Richard, 58–60 Wysong, Earl, 57, 149, 152
womanist theory/theology, 22, 156,
220
working class, 4, 5, 8, 11, 22, 56, 84, Y
95, 101, 114, 136, 142, 143, Yip, Francis Ching-Wah, 88, 90,
146, 148, 149, 173, 187, 216, 128n3
217, 219, 235
World Bank, 38, 116
World Economic Forum, 58 Z
World Food Summit, 119 Žižek, Slavoj, 19
World Trade Organization (WTO), zombie suffering, 169
38, 116 Zon, Hans van, 50

Caring For Souls in A Neoliberal Age - Bruce Rogers-Vaughn

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Caring For Souls in A Neoliberal Age - Bruce Rogers-Vaughn

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Caring For Souls in A Neoliberal Age - Bruce Rogers-Vaughn

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Approaches to Religion and Power

CARING FOR SOULS

More information about this series at

Caring for Souls

New Approaches to Religion and Power

Library of Congress Control Number: 2016956960

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s) 2016

Cover image © cryingjune / Getty Images

Printed on acid-free paper

This Palgrave Macmillan imprint is published by Springer Nature

regular conversation partners or have played pivotal roles in stimulating

1 Introduction: Preface to a Post-Capitalist Pastoral

2 Neoliberalism, Inequality, and the Erosion of Social

3 Going Viral: The Neoliberal Infiltration of the Living

4 Neoliberalism as a Paradigm for Human Affliction:

5 Muting and Mutating Suffering: Sexism, Racism,

6 Beyond Self-Management: Re-Membering Soul 167

7 Concluding Theological Postscripts 209

Introduction: Preface to a Post-Capitalist

© The Author(s) 2016 1

or gay, or black, or white, or adopted, or an immigrant, or Catholic, and

However, I was unsuccessful. I could not leave it alone. Through the

LIVING IN THE UNITED STATES AFTER THE SILENT

As my classmates and I marched down the steps after graduation in 1959,

Putnam then surveys the devastation: a decline in manufacturing

and Columbus, who settled in mansions and gated communities along

cost of labor in Fort Payne, with a non-unionized workforce already cheap

AT THE HEART OF THE REVOLUTION: CAPITALISM

including our understanding of what it means to be a “self,” as well as our

WE ARE ALL NEOLIBERALS NOW: PASTORAL THEOLOGY,

to be achieved in part through a certain renaturalization of capitalism that

PRECURSORS FOR THE CRITIQUE OF CAPITALISM

of poverty (1991, 2007), Judith Orr’s consideration of pastoral care

several articles authored by Ryan LaMothe (2016a, 2016b) and myself

IS A POST-CAPITALIST PASTORAL THEOLOGY POSSIBLE?

generally, several scholars have begun to argue that advanced capitalism

Fig. 1.2 Annual number of publications on neoliberalism, 1980–2014:

which displays the number of publications on neoliberalism in each cat-

De Vogli concludes that “the market greed doctrine,” which he identifies

There are even some indications that resistance is emerging in current

discrete form of suffering we are exploring and attempting to alleviate. It

THE STRUCTURE OF THE BOOK

to pause to consider this problem, and to address the methodological

In the sixth chapter, I draw upon my clinical experience with pastoral

model. However, “clients” is associated with consumerism, business

Hedges, C. (2015). Wages of rebellion: The moral imperative of revolt. New York:

Ruether, R. R. (2005). Integrating ecofeminism, globalization, and world religions.

Neoliberalism, Inequality, and the Erosion

In this chapter, I will identify key features of neoliberalism that provide

© The Author(s) 2016 35

of such agreements are currently being negotiated, largely in secret. One

Often prosecuted in the name of deregulation, devolution, and even democ-

This is followed by a “roll-out” phase, typically in response to push-

failures and contradictions. Peck (2010) calls this a “failing forward,” in

cover featured a photo of Federal Reserve director Alan Greenspan,

Thus the paradox of neoliberalism as a global phenomenon, ubiquitous and

NEOLIBERALISM AS A CULTURAL PROJECT

art of government” (p. 131). Extending Foucault’s spirit to the present,

Neoliberalization is generally more termitelike than lionlike … its mode of